12 Physics EM

GOVERNMENT OF TAMIL NADU
HIGHER SECONDARY SECOND YEAR
PHYSICS
VOLUME - I
A publication under Free Textbook Programme of Government of Tamil Nadu
Department of School Education

Untouchability is Inhuman and a Crime
XII_Physics_First 8 pages Higher.indd 1 04-03-2019 11:04:38

Government of Tamil Nadu
First Edition - 2019
(Published Under New Syllabus)
NOT FOR SALE
Content Creation
The wise
possess all
State Council of Educational

Research and Training
© SCERT 2019
Printing & Publishing
Tamil NaduTextbook and Educational

Services Corporation
www.textbooksonline.tn.nic.in
II

CONTENTS
PHYSICS
UNIT I Electrostatics 01
UNIT II Current Electricity 82
UNIT III Magnetism and magnetic effects of electric current 128
UNIT IV Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current 206
UNIT V Electromagnetic waves 283
Practical 303
Glossary 336
E-book Assessment DIGI links
Let’s use the QR code in the text books ! How ?

• Download the QR code scanner from the Google PlayStore/ Apple App Store into your smartphone
• Open the QR code scanner application
• Once the scanner button in the application is clicked, camera opens and then bring it closer to the QR code in the text book.
• Once the camera detects the QR code, a url appears in the screen.Click the url and goto the content page.
III

HOW TO USE THE BOOK
• Awareness on higher learning - courses, institutions and required
Scope of Physics competitive exams
• Financial assistance possible to help students to climb academic ladder
Learning Objectives:
• Overview of the unit
• Gives clarity on the goals and objective of the topics
• Additional facts related to the topics covered to facilitate

curiosity driven learning
• To ensure understanding, problems/illustrations are given at every stage

Example problems before advancing to next level
• Visual representation of concepts with illustrations

• Videos, animations, and tutorials
ICT • To harness the digital skills to class room learning and experimenting
Summary • Recap of salient points of the lesson
Concept Map • Schematic outline of salient learning of the unit
• Evaluate students’ understanding and get them acquainted with the

Evaluation application of physical concepts to numerical and conceptual questions
Books for Reference • List of relevant books for further reading
• Solutions to exercise problems are accessible here. In addition, a few solved

Solved examples examples are given to facilitate students to apply the concepts learnt.
Competitive • Model Questions - To motivate students aspiring to take up competitive
Exam corner examinations such as NEET, JEE, Physics Olympiad, JIPMER etc
Practical • List of practical and the description of each is appended for easy access.
Glossary • Scientific terms frequently used with their Tamil equivalents
• Sequential understanding of the stationary charges, moving charges, electric

Content Focus current, magnetism and the interlink between electric and magnetic phenomena.
Back Wrapper: NIKOLA TESLA a Serbian-American Engineer

(10 July 1856 – 7 January 1943)
Nikola Tesla made breakthroughs in the production, transmission and application of electric power. He
invented the first alternating current (AC) motor and developed AC generation and transmission technology.
In 1884, he was hired by Edison (discoverer of DC dynamos) later on Tesla became his competitor in this field.
Tesla conducted a range of experiments with mechanical oscillators/generators, electrical discharge
tubes, and early X – ray imaging. Tesla in 1890 itself conducted research for wireless lighting and worldwide
wireless electric power distribution in his high – voltage, high-frequency power experiments in New York.
Unfortunately Tesla could not put his ideas in practical use due to lack of funds.

Scope of Physics - Higher Education
XII_Physics_First 8 pages Higher.indd 5

Entrance Examinations
After +2
Physics Olympiad Exam Education Career

NEET-National Eligibility cum Entrance Test
IIT JEE-Joint Entrance Examination(Mains & Advanced)
NEST- National Entrance Screening Test
KVPY-Kishore Vaigyanik Protsahan Yojana
After Completing +2 After B.Sc Physics
JEE Mains Paper II for B.Arch
AIIMS - All Indian Institute of Medical Science’s Examination
V
Chennai Mathematical Institute Entrance Examination Integrated Msc. Physics
BITSAT- Birla Institute of Science And Technology Admission Test Central Uiversities through CUCET
AIEEE – All India Engineering Entrance Exam Central Research Institutes like IISER using KVPY, JEE
CUCET – Central Universities Common Entrance Test Advanced , IISER M.Sc Physics in IIT’s and NIT’s through JAM
JIPMER - Jawaharlal Institute of Postgraduate Medical Education & Aptitude Test Integrated Phd in IISER’s and IISc through JAM and JEST
Research
Top 1% students in State board are eligible for IISER Aptitude M.Sc Physics in Central Universities throught CUCET
CLAT – Common Law Admission Test Test
HSEE- Humanities and Social Sciences Entrance Examination Admission in NISER through NEST M.Sc in Energy Physics, Applied Physics in IIT’s through JAM
AIPVT -All India Pre-Veterinary Test B.Sc Photonics Integrated Phd in IMSc, TIFR, JNCASR through JEST score
NDA – National Defence Academy Examination B.Sc Hons in Mathematics and Physics in CMI Integrated Phd in TIFR through JEST and TIFR exam
B.Sc Hons in Mathematics and Computer Science in CMI M.Sc Photonics, Reactor physics, Nuclear Engineering ,
After Graduation Five-Year Dual degree In IIST ( B.Tech + Master of Science) M.Sc Medical Physics
Master of Science (Astronomy and Astrophysics, Solid State M.Sc Biophyiscs
JAM- Joint Admission Test Physics) Research Institutes in abroad like CERN, NASA, LIGO offer
JEST – Joint Entrance Screening Test Summer internship programmes for motivated Indian students
GATE- Graduate Aptitude Test in Engineering Note
pursuing Undergraduate course in physics
CAT – Common Admission Test(for MBA) Students admitted to IISc, IIT’s, NIT’s Indian Academy of Science & various other research institutes
Exams conducted by Respective Universities IISER’s, IIST, will get a Scholorship equivalent to INSPIRE offer paid Summer Internship for science students to get an
Assured placement in ISRO and other divisions for hands on experience in research.
the students of IIST
After Post Graduation
Institutes and their ranking can be found in www.nirfindia.org
CSIR - National Eligibility Test for JRF and Lectureship
04-03-2019 11:04:43
Opportunities after B.Sc. Physics

Scholarships
Jobs in Government Sector
• INSPIRE Scholarship - Scholarship for Higher Education(SHE) - 80000 per
annum, for B.Sc/B.S/Int M.Sc/Int M.S
• Scientific Officer and Scientific Assistant Jobs Eligibility Criteria:- Top 1% students in their plus 2 board exam
Top 10000 rank holders in JEE or NEET
• CSIR Labs • Students studying at NIISER, IISER, Department of Atomic Energy Centre for Basic Science Gen
NTSE, KVPY, JBNSTS Scholars Astr
VI
• DRDO – Defence Research and Development Organisation • International Olympiad Medalists Qua
• Indira Gandhi Scholarship for single girl child for full time regular Master's Degree Plas
• DAE -Department of Atomic Energy • Post Graduate Merit Scholarship for University rank holders in UG level Mete
• Women Scientist Scheme (WOS -A) Strin
• DoS - Department of Science Eligibility Criteria:- Women who are pursuing M.Sc or Ph.D Opti
• Mathematics Training and Talent Search(MTTS) Programme Con
• IMD- Indian Meteorological Department Eligibility Criteria:- Students who studied Maths at UG or PG level Cryp
• Dr. K S Krishnan Research Associateship (KSKRA) Math
• ONGC -Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Eligibility Criteria:- Students who posses Master's Degree or Ph.D in science or engineering Crys
• IGCAR JRF Ato
• ATC – Air Traffic Controller Eligibility Criteria:- Passing JEST, GATE, NET Exams Biop
• Promotion of Science Education (POSE) Scholarship Scheme Nucl
• Teaching faculty in schools and colleges through SET, NET,TET • Dhirubhai Ambani Scholarship Programme Ener
• Foundation for Academic Excellence and Access Scholarship(FAEA) Geo
• Scientist post in various research institutes in India • Central Sector Scheme of National Fellowship and Scholarship for Higher Education of ST Qua
students
• Pre - Matric and Post - Matric Scholarship for students belonging to
minority communities to pursue their School and Collegiate education by
the Ministry of Minority affairs, Government of India.
• Pre Matric and Post Matric Scholarship for students with Disabilities to
pursue their School and Collegiate Education by the Department of
Empowerment of Persons with Disabilities, Government of India.
04-03-2019 11:04:44
Institutes in india to pursue research in physics

Famous Research Institutes for Physics in India
Name of the Institution Website
Institute of Mathematical Sciences,Chennai(IMSc) www.imsc.res.in
Saha Institute of Nuclear Physics, Kolkata www.saha.ac.in
International Centre for Theoretical Sciences, Bangalore www.icts.res.in
Harish chandra Research Institute,Allahabad www.hri.res.in
Aryabhatta Research Institute of Observational Sciences, Nainital www.aries.res.in
Jawaharlal Nehru Centre for Advanced Scientific Research (JNCASR) www.jncasr.ac.in
Institute of Physics (IOP), Bhubaneshwar www.iopb.res.in
Indian Association for the Cultivation of Sciences (IACS), Kolkata www.iacs.res.in
Research Areas Vikram Sarabhai Space Centre (VSSC), Thiruvananthapuram www.vssc.gov.in
National Physical Laboratory (NPL),Delhi www.nplindia.in
National Institute of Science Education and Research (NISER), Bhubaneshwar www.niser.ac.in
General Relativity and Cosmology
Indian Institute of Science(IISc),Bangalore www.iisc.ac.in
Astronomy and Astrophysics
Quantum Optics and Information theory Raman Research Institute(RRI),Bangalore www.rri.res.in
VII
Plasma physics Tata Institute of Fundamental Research (TIFR) www.tifr.res.in
Meteorology and Atmospheric science Bhaba Atomic Research Centre(BARC) www.barc.gov.in
String Theory, Quantum Gravity www.igcar.gov.in
Indira Gandhi Centre for Atomic Research(IGCAR)
Optics and Photonics
Inter University Centre for Astronomy and Astrophysics(IUCAA),Pune www.iucaa.in
Condensed Matter Theory, Material Science and Spintronics
Indian Institute of Space Science and Technology(IIST), Trivandrum www.iist.ac.in
Cryptography
Mathematical Physics,Statistical Physics Institute of Plasma Research(IPR),Gujarat www.ipr.res.in
Crystal Growth and Crystallography Physical Research Laboratory(PRL),Ahmedabad www.prl.res.in
Atomic and Molecular Physics Inter-University Accelerator Center (IUAC) www.iuac.res.in
Biophysics, Medical Physics
Indian Institute of Astrophysics(IIA),Bangalore www.iiap.res.in
Nuclear and High energy Particle Physics
Chennai Mathematical Institute(CMI),Chennai www.cmi.ac.in
Energy and Environmental Studies
Geophysics Liquid Propulsion Systems Centre www.lpsc.gov.in
Quantum Biology and Quantum Thermodynamics and Cymatics S.N.Bose Centre for Basic Sciences www.bose.res.in
CSIR National laboratories
Indian Institute of Technology(IIT) in various places
IISER’s in various places
National Institute of Technology(NIT) in various places
Indian Institute of Information Technology (IIITs) at various places
Central and State Universities
04-03-2019 11:04:45
UNIT
1 ELECTROSTATICS
Electricity is really just organized lightning

– George Carlin
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
In this unit, student is exposed to

• Historical background of electricity and magnetism
• The role of electrostatic force in day – to-day life
• Coulomb’s law and superposition principle
• The concept of electric field
• Calculation of electric field for various charge configurations
• Electrostatic potential and electrostatic potential energy
• Electric dipole and dipole moment
• Electric field and electrostatic potential for a dipole
• Electric flux
• Gauss law and its various applications
• Electrostatic properties of conductors and dielectrics
• Polarisation
• Capacitors in series and parallel combinations
• Effect of a dielectric in a capacitor
• Distribution of charges in conductors, corona discharge
• Working of a Van de Graaff generator
1.1 In standard XI, we studied about the

gravitational force, tension, friction, normal
INTRODUCTION force etc. Newton treated them to be
independent of each other with each force
Electromagnetism is one of the most being a separate natural force. But what is the
important branches of physics. The origin of all these forces? It is now understood
technological developments of the modern that except gravity, all forces which we
21st century are primarily due to our experience in every day life (tension in the
understanding of electromagnetism. The string, normal force from the surface, friction
forces we experience in everyday life are etc.) arise from electromagnetic forces within
electromagnetic in nature except gravity. the atoms. Some examples are
1
UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 1 04-03-2019 10:24:32

(i) When an object is pushed, the atoms in after rubbing with animal fur attracted
our hand interact with the atoms in the small pieces of leaves and dust. The amber
object and this interaction is basically possessing this property is said to be
electromagnetic in nature. ‘charged’. It was initially thought that amber
(ii) When we stand on Earth's surface, the has this special property. Later people found
gravitational force on us acts downwards that not only amber but even a glass rod
and the normal force acts upward to rubbed with silk cloth, attracts pieces of
counter balance the gravitational force. papers. So glass rod also becomes ‘charged’
What is the origin of this normal force? when rubbed with a suitable material.
Consider a charged rubber rod hanging from
It arises due to the electromagnetic a thread as shown in Figure 1.1. Suppose
interaction of atoms on the surface of another charged rubber rod is brought near
the Earth with the atoms present in the first rubber rod; the rods repel each
the feet of the person. Though, we are other. Now if we bring a charged glass rod
attracted by the gravitational force of the close to the charged rubber rod, they attract
Earth, we stand on Earth only because each other. At the same time, if a charged
of electromagnetic force of atoms. glass rod is brought near another charged
(iii) When an object is moved on a surface, glass rod, both the rods repel each other.
static friction resists the motion of the From these observations, the following
object. This static friction arises due to inferences are made
electromagnetic interaction between (i) The charging of rubber rod and that of
the atoms present in the object and glass rod are different from one another.
atoms on the surface. Kinetic friction (ii) The charged rubber rod repels another
also has similar origin. charged rubber rod, which implies
From these examples, it is clear that that ‘like charges repel each other’. We
understanding electromagnetism can also arrive at the same inference
is very essential to understand the by observing that a charged glass rod
universe in a holistic manner. The repels another charged glass rod.
basic principles of electromagnetism (iii) The charged amber rod attracts the
are dealt in XII physics volume 1. charged glass rod, implying that the
This unit deals with the behaviour and other charge in the glass rod is not the same
related phenomena of charges at rest. This kind of charge present in the rubber.
branch of electricity which deals with Thus unlike charges attract each other.
stationary charges is called Electrostatics. Therefore, two kinds of charges exist
in the universe. In the 18th century, Benjamin
Franklin called one type of charge as
positive (+) and another type of charge as
1.1.1 Historical background
negative (-). Based on Franklin’s convention,
of electric charges
rubber and amber rods are negatively
Two millenniums ago, Greeks noticed charged while the glass rod is positively
that amber (a solid, translucent material charged. If the net charge is zero in the
formed from the resin of a fossilized tree) object, it is said to be electrically neutral.
2 Unit 1 E lectrostatics

A negatively charged rubber A negatively charged rubber
rod is attracted to a positively rod is repelled by another
charged glass rod negatively charged
rubber rod
Rubber Rubber

F
__ ___ __ ___

F F
(a)
+ ++ +
(b) __ ___ Rubber
Glass
F
Figure 1.1 (a) Unlike charges attract each other (b) Like charges repel each other
Following the pioneering work of is another intrinsic and fundamental

J. J. Thomson and E. Rutherford, in the late property of particles. The nature of charges
19th century and in the beginning of 20th is understood through various experiments
century, we now understand that the atom performed in the 19th and 20th century. The
is electrically neutral and is made up of SI unit of charge is coulomb.
the negatively charged electrons, positively (ii) Conservation of charges
charged protons, and neutrons which have
Benjamin Franklin argued that when one
zero charge. The material objects made
object is rubbed with another object, charges
up of atoms are neutral in general. When
get transferred from one to the other. Before
an object is rubbed with another object
rubbing, both objects are electrically neutral
(for example rubber with silk cloth), some
and rubbing simply transfers the charges
amount of charge is transferred from
from one object to the other. (For example,
one object to another due to the friction
when a glass rod is rubbed against silk
between them and the object is then
cloth, some negative charge are transferred
said to be electrically charged. Charging
from glass to silk. As a result, the glass
the objects through rubbing is called
rod is positively charged and silk cloth
triboelectric charging.
becomes negatively charged). From these
observations, he concluded that charges are
1.1.2 Basic properties of neither created or nor destroyed but can
charges only be transferred from one object to other.
This is called conservation of total charges
(i) Electric charge and is one of the fundamental conservation
Most objects in the universe are made up laws in physics. It is stated more generally in
of atoms, which in turn are made up of the following way.
protons, neutrons and electrons. These ‘The total electric charge in the universe
particles have mass, an inherent property is constant and charge can neither be
of particles. Similarly, the electric charge created nor be destroyed. In any physical
Unit 1 E lectrostatics 3

process, the net change in charge will 1.2
always be zero.
COULOMB’S LAW
(iii) Quantisation of charges
What is the smallest amount of charge that
can be found in nature? Experiments show In the year 1786, Coulomb deduced the
that the charge on an electron is −e and the expression for the force between two
charge on the proton is +e. Here, e denotes stationary point charges in vacuum or free
the fundamental unit of charge. The charge q space. Consider two point charges q1 and q2
on any object is equal to an integral multiple at rest in vacuum, and separated by a distance
of this fundamental unit of charge e. of r, as shown in Figure 1.2. According to
q = ne(1.1) Coulomb, the force on the point charge q2
exerted by another point charge q1 is
Here n is any integer (0, ±1, ±2, ±3,
±4………..). This is called quantisation of  qq
r12 (1.2)
F21 = k 1 2 2 
electric charge. r
Robert Millikan in his famous experiment
found that the value of e = 1.6 × 10-19C. The where  r12 is the unit vector directed
charge of an electron is −1.6 × 10-19 C and from charge q1 to charge q2 and k is the
the charge of the proton is +1.6 × 10-19C. proportionality constant.
When a glass rod is rubbed with silk cloth,
the number of charges transferred is usually
very large, typically of the order of 1010. So
r
the charge quantisation is not appreciable
+
F21
at the macroscopic level. Hence the charges
are treated to be continuous (not discrete). q2
But at the microscopic level, quantisation of
charge plays a vital role. + r12
q1
E X A M P L E 1. 1
Calculate the number of electrons in one Figure 1.2 Coulomb force between two
coulomb of negative charge. point charges
Solution Important aspects of Coulomb’s law

According to the quantisation of charge (i) Coulomb's law states that the electrostatic
force is directly proportional to the
q = ne product of the magnitude of the two point
charges and is inversely proportional to
Here q = 1C. So the number of electrons in
the square of the distance between the
1 coulomb of charge is
two point charges.
(ii) The force on the charge q2 exerted by
q 1C
n= = = 6.25 × 1018 electrons the charge q1 always lies along the line
e 1.6 × 10 −19
joining the two charges.  r12 is the unit

vector pointing from charge q1 to q2 .It of the magnitude of two point charges
is shown in the Figure 1.2. Likewise, the and gravitational force is directly
force on the charge q1 exerted by q2 is proportional to the product of two
along -r12 (i.e., in the direction opposite masses. But there are some important
to r12 ). differences between these two laws.
1 • The gravitational force between two
(iii) In SI units, k = and its value is
4πε o masses is always attractive but Coulomb
9 × 109 N m2 C-2. Here εo is the permittivity force between two charges can be
of free space or vacuum and the value attractive or repulsive, depending on
1
of ε o = = 8.85×10−12 C 2 N −1m−2 . the nature of charges.
4 πk
(iv) The magnitude of the electrostatic • The value of the gravitational constant
force between two charges each of one G = 6.626 × 10-11 N m2 kg-2. The value
coulomb and separated by a distance of of the constant k in Coulomb law is
1 m is calculated as follows: k = 9 × 109 N m2 C-2. Since k is much
more greater than G, the electrostatic
9×109 ×1×1 force is always greater in magnitude
F = = 9×109 N . This is a huge
12 than gravitational force for smaller size
quantity, almost equivalent to the weight objects.
of one million ton. We never come across • The gravitational force between two
1 coulomb of charge in practice. Most of masses is independent of the medium.
the electrical phenomena in day-to-day life
For example, if 1 kg of two masses
involve electrical charges of the order of µC
are kept in air or inside water, the
(micro coulomb) or nC (nano coulomb).
gravitational force between two masses
(v) In SI units, Coulomb’s law in vacuum remains the same. But the electrostatic
1 q1q2 force between the two charges depends
takes the form F21 = r12 . In

4 πε r 2 on nature of the medium in which the
a medium of permittivity ε, the force two charges are kept at rest.
between two point charges is given by • The gravitational force between two
 1 q1q2
F21 = r12 . Since ε>εo, the force
 point masses is the same whether two
4 πε r 2
between two point charges in a medium masses are at rest or in motion. If the
other than vacuum is always less than charges are in motion, yet another
that in vacuum. We define the relative force (Lorentz force) comes into play in
permittivity for a given medium as addition to coulomb force.
ε (vii) The force on a charge q1 exerted by a
εr = . For vacuum or air, εr = 1 and
ε point charge q2 is given by
for all other media εr> 1.
(vi) Coulomb’s law has same structure 1 q1q2
F12 = 
r21
as Newton’s law of gravitation. Both 4 πε r 2
are inversely proportional to the Here  r21 is the unit vector from charge
square of the distance between the q2 to q1.
particles. The electrostatic force is
directly proportional to the product But 
r21 = −
r12 ,

1 q1q2 1 q1q2 Solution
F12 = 2 (
r 12 ) = −
− ( r12 )
4 πε r 4 πε r 2

(or) F 12 = −F 21 y
Therefore, the electrostatic force obeys Case (a)
Newton’s third law.
(viii) The expression for Coulomb force
F12 F21
is true only for point charges. But x
the point charge is an ideal concept. q1 q2
However we can apply Coulomb’s law y
for two charged objects whose sizes are Case (b)
very much smaller than the distance
between them. In fact, Coulomb

discovered his law by considering the F12 F21
charged spheres in the torsion balance + _ x
q1 q2
as point charges. The distance between
the two charged spheres is much greater y
than the radii of the spheres. Case (c)
E X A M P L E 1. 2
F12 F21
Consider two point charges q1 and q2 at + _ x
rest as shown in the figure. q1 q2
y
(a) q1 = +2 μC, q2 = +3 μC, and r = 1m.
Both are positive charges. so the force will
be repulsive
Force experienced by the charge q2 due to
x q1 is given by
q1 q2
1 q1q2
1m F21 = 
r 12
4 πε r 2
They are separated by a distance of 1m. Here r12 is the unit vector from q1 to q2.
Calculate the force experienced by the two Since q2 is located on the right of q1, we
charges for the following cases: have
(a) q1 = +2μC and q2 = +3μC r12 = 

 i , so that
(b) q1 = +2μC and q2 = -3μC  1 

9×109 ×2×10−6 ×3×10−6 
F21 = i  = 9×109 
12  4 πε 
(c)
q1= +2μC and q2 = -3μC kept in water  
(εr = 80) = 54 ×10−3 N 
i

According to Newton’s third law, the force Therefore,
experienced by the charge q1 due to q2 is
   54 ×10−3 N 
F12 = −F21 F21W = − i = −0.675×10−3 N 
i
80

So that F12 = −54 ×10−3 N i .
  Note that the strength of the
The directions of F21 and F12 are shown in Note force between the two charges
the above figure in case (a) in water is reduced by 80 times
compared to the force between the same
(b) q1 = +2 μC, q2 = -3 μC, and r = 1m.
two charges in vacuum.
They are unlike charges. So the force will
be attractive. When common salt (NaCl) is taken in
water, the electrostatic force between Na
Force experienced by the charge q2 due to and Cl ions is reduced due to the high
q1 is given by relative permittivity of water (εr = 80).
This is the reason water acts as a good
 9×109 ×(2×10−6 )×(−3×10−6 ) solvent.
F21 =
r12
12
= −54 ×10−3 N r12 =
i (Using i)
E X A M P L E 1. 3
The charge q2 will experience an attractive
force towards q1 which is in the negative x Two small-sized identical equally charged
direction. spheres, each having mass 1 mg are hanging
in equilibrium as shown in the figure. The
According to Newton’s third law, the force length of each string is 10 cm and the
experienced by the charge q1 due to q2 is angle θ is 7° with the vertical. Calculate the
magnitude of the charge in each sphere.
 
F12 = −F21 (Take g = 10 ms−2)

so that F12 = 54 ×10−3 N i
 
The directions of F21 and F12 are shown in
the figure (case (b)).
L L
(c) If these two charges are kept inside
the water, then the force experienced by q2
due to q1
q + + q
 1 q1q2
a
F21W = 
r12
4 πε r 2
since ε = εr εo, Solution

W 1 q1q2 F21 If the two spheres are neutral, the angle
we have F21 = 
r12 =
4 πε r ε r 2 εr between them will be 0o when hanged

vertically. Since they are positively Fe
tanθ= (3)
charged spheres, there will be a repulsive mg
force between them and they will be at
equilibrium with each other at an angle Since they are equally charged, the
of 7° with the vertical. At equilibrium, magnitude of the electrostatic force is
each charge experiences zero net force in
each direction. We can draw a free body q2 1
Fe = k 2 where k =
diagram for one of the charged spheres and r 4 πε 0
apply Newton’s second law for both vertical Here r = 2a = 2Lsinθ. By substituting these
and horizontal directions. values in equation (3),
The free body diagram is shown below. q2
tan θ = k 2 (4)
mg (2 L sin θ)
y
Rearranging the equation (4) to get q
θ
T cosθ
x mg tan θ
q = 2 L sin θ
θ k

Fe
+ T sinθ 10−3 ×10× tan 7
= 2×0.1×sin 7 × 
9×109
q = 8.9 x 10-9 C = 8.9 nC

mg
E X A M P L E 1. 4
In the x-direction, the acceleration of the
charged sphere is zero. Calculate the electrostatic force and
gravitational force between the proton and
 
Using Newton’s second law (Ftot = ma ), we the electron in a hydrogen atom. They are
have separated by a distance of 5.3 × 10-11 m.
The magnitude of charges on the electron
T sinθ
i −Fe
i =0
and proton are 1.6 × 10-19 C. Mass of the
T sinθ= Fe (1) electron is me = 9.1 × 10-31 kg and mass of
proton is mp = 1.6 × 10-27 kg.
Here T is the tension acting on the charge
due to the string and Fe is the electrostatic Solution
force between the two charges. The proton and the electron attract each
other. The magnitude of the electrostatic
In the y-direction also, the net acceleration
force between these two particles is given by
experienced by the charge is zero.
2
T cosθ 
j −mg 
j =0 2
ke 9×109 ×(1.6×10−19 )
Fe = = 2
Therefore, T cosθ= mg .(2) r2 (5.3×10 )−11
9×2.56
By dividing equation (1) by equation (2), = ×10−7 = 8.2 × 10-8 N
28.09

The gravitational force between the
1.2.1 Superposition principle
proton and the electron is attractive.
The magnitude of the gravitational force Coulomb’s law explains the interaction
between these particles is between two point charges. If there are
more than two charges, the force on one
Gme mp charge due to all the other charges needs
FG =
r2 to be calculated. Coulomb’s law alone does
6.67 ×10−11 ×9.1×10−31 ×1.6×10−27 not give the answer. The superposition
=
(5.3×10 )−11
2
principle explains the interaction between
97.11
multiple charges.
= ×10−47 = 3.4 x 10-47 N
28.09 According to this superposition principle,
Fe
the total force acting on a given charge is
8.2×10−8
The ratio of the two forces = equal to the vector sum of forces exerted
FG 3.4 ×10−47
on it by all the other charges.
= 2.41 × 1039
Consider a system of n charges, namely q1,
Note that Fe » 1039 FG
q2, q3 ….qn. The force on q1 exerted by the
charge q2
The electrostatic force between a proton
and an electron is enormously greater than  qq
the gravitational force between them. Thus F12 = k 1 2 2 
r21
r21
the gravitational force is negligible when
compared with the electrostatic force in Here  r21 is the unit vector from q2 to q1 along
many situations such as for small size the line joining the two charges and r21 is the
objects and in the atomic domain. This is distance between the charges q1 and q2. The
the reason why a charged comb attracts an electrostatic force between two charges is
uncharged piece of paper with greater force not affected by the presence of other charges
even though the piece of in the neighbourhood.
paper is attracted downward
The force on q1 exerted by the charge q3 is
by the Earth. This is shown
in Figure 1.3  qq
F13 = k 1 2 3 
r31
r31
By continuing this, the total force acting
on the charge q1 due to all other charges is
given by
    

Fe F1tot = F12 + F13 + F14 +..........F1n

FG
  q q qq qq
F1tot = k  1 2 2  r21 + 1 2 3  r31 + 1 2 4 
r41 +...
 r21 r31 r41
Figure 1.3 Electrostatic attraction qq 
rn1 
..... + 1 2 2 
between a comb and pieces of papers rn1 
(1.3)

Without the superposition y
Note principle, Coulomb’s law will q2
+
be incomplete when applied F14
to more than two charges. Both the r21
superposition principle and Coulomb’s q3
F13
law form fundamental principles + x
r31 q1 +
of electrostatics and explain all the r41
phenomena in electrostatics. But they
are not derivable from each other. F12
+
q4
E X A M P L E 1. 5
F14 sin F14
Consider four equal charges q1,q2, q3 and q4
= q = +1μC located at four different points
on a circle of radius 1m, as shown in the F14 cos
figure. Calculate the total force acting on q1 + F13
the charge q1 due to all the other charges. F12cos
y
q2 F12 sin F12
+
The charges q2 and q4 are equi-distant from
q3 q1 q1. As a result the strengths (magnitude)
 
+ + of the forces F12 and F14 are the same
x
even though their directions are different.
Therefore the vectors representing these
two forces are drawn with equal lengths.
+ But the charge q3 is located farther
q4
compared to q2 and q4. Since the strength
of the electrostatic force decreases as
Solution distance increases, the strength of the force
  
F13 is lesser than that of forces F12 and F14 .
According to the superposition principle, 
Hence the vector representing the force F13
the total electrostatic force on charge q1 is drawn with smaller length compared to
is the vector sum of the forces due to the  
that for forces F12 and F14 .
other charges,
   
From the figure, r21 = 2 m = r41 and r31 = 2 m
F1tot = F12 + F13 + F14
The magnitudes of the forces are given by
The following diagram shows the direction kq 2 9×109 ×10−12
F13 = 2 =
of each force on the charge q1. r31 4

F13 = 2.25 × 10-3 N 1.3
ELECTRIC FIELD AND
kq 2 9×109 ×10−12
F12 = 2 = F14 = ELECTRIC FIELD LINES
r21 2
= 4.5 × 10-3 N
1.3.1 Electric Field
From the figure, the angle θ = 45o. In terms
of the components, we have The interaction between two charges is

determined by Coulomb’s law. How does the
F12 = F12 cos θ
i −F12 sin θ 
j interaction itself occur? Consider a point
charge kept at a point in space. If another
1  1  point charge is placed at some distance from
= 4.5×10−3 × i −4.5×10−3 × j
2 2 the first point charge, it experiences either
 an attractive force or repulsive force. This
F13 = F13 
i = 2.25×10−3 N 
i
 is called ‘action at a distance’. But how does
F14 = F14 cos θ
i +F14 sin θ 
j the second charge know about existence of
the first charge which is located at some
1  1 
= 4.5×10−3 × i +4.5×10−3 × j distance away from it? To answer this
2 2
question, Michael Faraday introduced the
Then the total force on q1 is, concept of field.
 According to Faraday, every charge in the
F1tot = (F12 cos θ j ) + F13
i −F12 sin θ  i universe creates an electric field in the
+(F14 cos θ j )
i +F14 sin θ  surrounding space, and if another charge
 is brought into its field, it will interact
F1tot = (F12 cos θ + F13 + F14 cos θ )
i with the electric field at that point and will
+(−F12 sin θ + F14 sin θ) 
j experience a force. It may be recalled that
the interaction of two masses is similarly
Since F12 = F14, the jth component is zero. explained using the concept of gravitational
Hence we have field (Refer unit 6, volume 2, XI physics).
 Both the electric and gravitational forces are
F1tot = (F12 cos θ + F13 + F14 cos θ)
i
non-contact forces, hence the field concept
is required to explain action at a distance.
substituting the values in the above
equation, Consider a source point charge q located at
a point in space. Another point charge qo
 4.5 4.5  (test charge) is placed at some point P which
= 
 2
+ 2.25 + 
2
(
i = 4.5 2 + 2.25 
i ) is at a distance r from the charge q. The
electrostatic force experienced by the charge

F1tot = 8.61×10−3 N 
i qo due to q is given by Coulomb’s law.
 kqq0  1 qq0  1
The resultant force is along the positive x F= 2
r = 2
r where k =
r 4 πε 0 r 4 πε 0
axis.

The charge q creates an electric field in the  
surrounding space. The electric field at the F = q0 E (1.5)
point P at a distance r from the point charge
This is Coulomb’s law in terms of electric
q is the force experienced by a unit charge
field. This is shown in Figure 1.5
and is given by

 F kq 1 q If q is positive,
E= = 2 
r= r (1.4) the force on →
q0 r 4 πε 0 r 2 E
the test charge q0
Here r is the unit vector pointing from q to
q0 is directed + F = q0 E
away from q. P
the point of interest P. The electric field is a
vector quantity and its SI unit is Newton per q
Coulomb (NC-1). r
+
Important aspects of Electric field
If q is negative ,
(i) If the charge q is positive then the electric the force on
field points away from the source charge the test charge q0
q0 is directed
and if q is negative, the electric field toward q.
→
E
+
P
points towards the source charge q. This
is shown in the Figure 1.4. –q
F = q0 E
_ r
For a positive
source charge,
the electric Figure 1.5 Coulomb’s law in terms of
field at P points → electric field
radially outward E
P
from q.
q
(iii) The equation (1.4) implies that the
r electric field is independent of the test
+ charge qo and it depends only on the
source charge q.
For a negative
source charge, (iv) Since the electric field is a vector
the electric quantity, at every point in space,
field at P points
radially inward → this field has unique direction and
E P
toward q. magnitude as shown in Figures 1.6(a)
and (b). From equation (1.4), we can
q
infer that as distance increases, the
_ r
electric field decreases in magnitude.
Note that in Figures 1.6 (a) and (b)
Figure 1.4 Electric field of positive and the length of the electric field vector is
negative charges shown for three different points. The
 strength or magnitude of the electric
(ii) If the electric field at a point P is E, then field at point P is stronger than at the
the force experienced by the test charge points Q and R because the point P is
qo placed at the point P is closer to the source charge.

(vii) There are two kinds of the electric field:
ER EQ uniform (constant) electric field and
R non-uniform electric field. Uniform
Q electric field will have the same direction
and constant magnitude at all points in
space. Non-uniform electric field will
+ EP
P have different directions or different
(a) q magnitudes or both at different points
in space. The electric field created by a
EQ point charge is basically a non uniform
R Q electric field. This non-uniformity

ER arises, both in direction and magnitude,

EP with the direction being radially
– outward (or inward) and the magnitude
P changes as distance increases. These are
(b) q
shown in Figure 1.7.
Figure 1.6 (a) Electric field due to
positive charge (b) Electric field due to
negative charge
(v) In the definition of electric field, it is

assumed that the test charge q0 is taken
sufficiently small, so that bringing this
test charge will not move the source Uniform Electric field Non uniform electric
field
charge. In other words, the test charge
is made sufficiently small such that it
will not modify the electric field of the
source charge.
(vi) The expression (1.4) is valid only for
point charges. For continuous and finite
size charge distributions, integration
techniques must be used These will Non uniform Non uniform electric
electric field field
be explained later in the same section.
However, this expression can be used Figure 1.7 Uniform and non-uniform
as an approximation for a finite-sized electric field
charge if the test point is very far away
from the finite sized source charge.
Note that we similarly treat the Earth E X A M P L E 1. 6
as a point mass when we calculate
the gravitational field of the Sun on Calculate the electric field at points P, Q
the Earth (refer unit 6, volume 2, XI for the following two cases, as shown in the
physics). figure.

(a)
A positive point charge +1 µC is Case (b)
placed at the origin The magnitude of the electric field at point
(b)
A negative point charge -2 µC is P
 kq 1 q 9×109 ×2×10−6
placed at the origin EP = 2 = =
r 4 πε 0 r 2 4
y
= 4.5 × 103 N C-1
Q Since the source charge is negative, the
electric field points towards the charge. So
4m
the electric field at the point P is given by
2m 
+1C
+ P x
EP = −4.5×103 
i NC −1
Ep
 9×109 ×2×10−6
For the point Q, EQ =
36
= 0.5 × 103 N C-1
y 
ER = 0.56×103
i NC −1
At the point Q the electric field is directed

along the positive x-axis.
6m 2m
Q –2C
– P x y
EQ
Q
4m
Solution
2m
Case (a) +1C
+ P x
Ep
The magnitude of the electric field at point
P is
1 q 9×109 ×1×10−6
EP = =
4 πε 0 r 2 4
y
= 2.25×103 NC −1
Since the source charge is positive, the
electric field points away from the charge. So
the electric field at the point P is given by

 EQ
EP = 2.25×103N C −1 
i 6m 2m
Q –2C
– P x
For the point Q Ep
 9×109 ×1×10−6
EQ = = 0.56×103 NC −1
16

Hence EQ = 0.56×103 
j

1.3.2 Electric field due to the

E2P
system of point charges E1P E3P
Suppose a number of point charges are
+
q3 r3P
P
distributed in space. To find the electric Etot
+ r2P E2P
field at some point P due to this collection q2 r1P
+
of point charges, superposition principle is q1 E3P
used. The electric field at an arbitrary point

due to a collection of point charges is simply Etot= E1P+ E2P+ E3P
equal to the vector sum of the electric fields
created by the individual point charges. This Figure 1.8 Superposition of Electric field
is called superposition of electric fields.
Consider a collection of point charges
E X A M P L E 1. 7
q1 , q2 , q3 ..........qn located at various points in
space. The total electric field at some point Consider the charge configuration as shown
P due to all these n charges is given by in the figure. Calculate the electric field at
point A. If an electron is placed at points
    
Etot = E1 + E2 + E3 + ....... + En (1.6) A, what is the acceleration experienced by
this electron? (mass of the electron = 9.1
 1  q
 1  q q × 10-31 kg and charge of electron = −1.6 ×
Etot = r + 22  r2 P + 23 r3 P +...
4 πε 0 2 1P
 r1P r2 P r3 P 10-19 C)
q 
rnP
.... + 2n  y
rnP 
q2 = +1µC A
(1.7) +
Here r1P , r2 P , r3 P ..........rnP are the distance of the 2mm

the charges q1 , q2 , q3 ..........qn from the point 2mm +
x
P respectively. Also  r1P ,
r2 P , rnP are the
r3 P .......... q1 = +1µC
corresponding unit vectors directed from
q1 , q2 , q3 ..........qn to P.
Equation (1.7) can be re-written as, Solution
1 n  qi  By using superposition principle, the net
Etot = ∑  2 riP  (1.8) electric field at point A is
4 πε i=1  riP 
1 q1 1 q2
For example in Figure 1.8, the resultant EA = 
r +
2 1A

r2 A ,
4 πε r1A 4 πε r22A
electric field due to three point charges
q1 , q2 , q3 at point P is shown. where r1A and r2A are the distances of point
A from the two charges respectively.
Note that the relative lengths of the electric
field vectors for the charges depend  9×109 ×1×10−6  9×109 ×1×10−6 
on relative distances of the charges to the EA = 2 ( j )+ 2 (i )
point P.
(2×10−3 ) (2×10−3 )

= 2.25×109 
j +2.25×109
i = 2.25×109 ( 
i +
j) etc., it is very difficult to look at individual
charges in these charged bodies. Therefore,
The magnitude of electric field it is assumed that charge is distributed
 2 2
EA = (2.25×10 ) + (2.25×10 )
9 9
continuously on the charged bodies and the
discrete nature of charges is not considered
= 2.25× 2 ×109 N C −1
here. The electric field due to such

The direction of E A is given by continuous charge distributions is found by
 invoking the method of calculus.
EA 2.25×109 ( 
i +
j ) (
i +j)
 = = , which
EA 2.25× 2 ×109 2 Consider the following charged object
of irregular shape as shown in Figure
is the unit vector along OA as shown in the
1.9. The entire charged object is divided
figure.
into a large number of charge elements
∆q1 , ∆q2 , ∆q3 ......∆qn and each charge element
y Eq 1 EA
∆q is taken as a point charge.
q1 = +1µC
+ A

Eq2
2mm aA
q1
2mm
+ x
q2 r1
O q1 = +1µC q3
r2
r3
r2 r1
The acceleration experienced by an
electron placed at point A is r3
 
 F qE A
aA = = p
m m

(−1.6×10−19 )×(2.25×109 )(i + j ) E3
= E2
9.1×10−31 E1
= −3.95×1020 ( 
i +
j )N
Figure 1.9 Continuous charge
The electron is accelerated in a direction distributions

exactly opposite to E A .
The electric field at a point P due to a
charged object is approximately given by the
1.3.3 Electric field due
sum of the fields at P due to all such charge
to continuous charge
elements.
distribution
The electric charge is quantized  1  ∆q1 ∆q ∆q 
E≈  2  r1P + 2 2  r2 P +.......... + 2 n 
r nP 
4 πε 0  r1P r2 P rnP 
microscopically. The expressions (1.2),
(1.3), (1.4) are applicable to only point 1 n ∆qi
≈ ∑ riP
4 πε 0 i=1 riP2
charges. While dealing with the electric field
due to a charged sphere or a charged wire (1.9)

Here ∆qi is the ith charge element, riP is  1 λdl  λ dl 
the distance of the point P from the ith charge
E=
4 πε 0 ∫ r 2
r=
4 πε 0 ∫r2
r
element and  riP is the unit vector from ith

(b) If the charge Q is uniformly distributed
charge element to the point P.
on a surface of area A, then surface
However the equation (1.9) is only
charge density (charge per unit area)
an approximation. To incorporate the Q
continuous distribution of charge, we take is σ = . Its unit is coulomb per square
A
the limit ∆q → 0(= dq). In this limit, the meter (C m-2).
summation in the equation (1.9) becomes
The charge present in the infinitesimal
an integration and takes the following form
area dA is dq = σ dA. This is shown in
 1 dq the figure 1.10 (b).
E=
4 πε 0 ∫ r2
r (1.10)

The electric field due to a of total charge
Here r is the distance of the point P from Q is given by
the infinitesimal charge dq and r is the
1 σda 1 da
unit vector from dq to point P. Even though σ∫ 2 
E=
4 πε ∫ r 2
r =
4 πε r
r
the electric field for a continuous charge
distribution is difficult to evaluate, the force This is shown in Figure 1.10(b).
experienced by some test charge q in this
  (c) If the charge Q is uniformly distributed
electric field is still given by F = qE .
(a) If the charge Q is uniformly distributed in a volume V, then volume charge
along the wire of length L, then linear density (charge per unit volume) is
Q
charge density (charge per unit length) given by ρ = . Its unit is coulomb per
Q V
is λ = . Its unit is coulomb per meter cubic meter (C m-3).
L
(Cm-1). The charge present in the infinitesimal
The charge present in the infinitesimal volume element dV is dq = ρdV. This is
length dl is dq = λdl. This is shown in shown in Figure 1.10(c).
Figure 1.10 (a). The electric field due to a volume of
total charge Q is given by
P dq=qdV 1 ρdV  1 dV
dq=λdl
r r E= ∫ 2
r= ρ∫ 2 r .
r r r 4 πε r 4 πε r
dq=dA
dq=σda P r
E X A M P L E 1. 8
P
(a) (b) (c) A block of mass m and positive charge

q is placed on an insulated frictionless
Figure 1.10 Line, surface and volume inclined plane as shown in the figure. A
charge distribution
uniform electric field E is applied parallel
to the inclined surface such that the block
The electric field due to the line of total is at rest. Calculate the magnitude of the
charge Q is given by electric field E.

A convenient inertial coordinate system
q
is located in the inclined surface as shown
m

E in the figure. The mass m has zero net
h L acceleration both in x and y-direction.
Along x-direction, applying Newton’s

second law, we have
Solution
mg sinθ
i − qEi = 0
Note: A similar problem is solved in XIth
Physics volume I, unit 3 section 3.3.2. mg sinθ− qE = 0
There are three forces that acts on the mass m:
mg sinθ
(i) The downward gravitational force or, E=
q
exerted by the Earth (mg)
(ii) The normal force exerted by the Note that the magnitude of the electric
inclined surface (N) field is directly proportional to the mass m
(iii)
The Coulomb force given by uniform and inversely proportional to the charge q.
electric field (qE) It implies that, if the mass is increased by
keeping the charge constant, then a strong
The free body diagram for the mass m is
electric field is required to stop the object
drawn below.
from sliding. If the charge is increased by
keeping the mass constant, then a weak
y
electric field is sufficient to stop the mass
from sliding down the plane.
x
qE N
The electric field also can be expressed
m in terms of height and the length of the
inclined surface of the plane.
θ
mg cosθ mg sin θ mg h
E=
mg qL
mg
θ
Forces acting on the mass m 1.3.4 Electric field lines
qE Electric field vectors are visualized by the
N
concept of electric field lines. They form a
set of continuous lines which are the visual
m,q representation of the electric field in some
region of space. The following rules are
followed while drawing electric field lines
for charges.
mg • The electric field lines start from a
positive charge and end at negative
Free body diagram
charges or at infinity. For a positive

point charge the electric field lines point line at that point. This is shown in
radially outward and for a negative Figure 1.12
point charge, the electric field lines
point radially inward. These are shown E
in Figure 1.11 (a) and (b). P
For a positive point charge, + _

the field lines are directed
radially outward.
Figure 1.12 Electric field at a point P

q
+
• The electric field lines are denser (more
closer) in a region where the electric
field has larger magnitude and less
dense in a region where the electric field
(a)
is of smaller magnitude. In other words,
For a negative point charge, the number of lines passing through a
the field lines are directed given surface area perpendicular to the
radially inward.
lines is proportional to the magnitude
of the electric field in that region. This
is shown in Figure1.13
-
_ -q
(b)
Figure 1.11 Electric field lines for A B

isolated positive and negative charges
Note that for an isolated positive point

charge the electric field line starts from
the charge and ends only at infinity. For an Figure 1.13 Electric field has larger
isolated negative point charge the electric magnitude at surface A than B
field lines start at infinity and end at the
negative charge. Figure 1.13 shows electric field lines from
• The electric field vector at a point in a positive point charge. The magnitude of
space is tangential to the electric field the electric field for a point charge decreases

 1
as the distance increases  E ∝ 2 . So the Electric field lines
 r 
electric field has greater magnitude at the
surface A than at B. Therefore, the number
of lines crossing the surface A is greater than
the number of lines crossing the surface B.
+
Note that at surface B the electric field lines
are farther apart compared to the electric +q
field lines at the surface A.
• No two electric field lines intersect each
other. If two lines cross at a point, then (a)
there will be two different electric field Electric field lines
vectors at the same point, as shown in
Figure 1.14.
_
P
-2q
= Electric field
= Electric field lines
(b)
Figure 1.14 Two electric field lines never
intersect each other Figure 1.15 Electric field lines and
magnitude of the charge
As a consequence, if some charge is placed
in the intersection point, then it has of the first charge, the number of field lines
to move in two different directions drawn for -2q is twice in number than that
at the same time, which is physically for charge +q.
impossible. Hence, electric field lines
do not intersect. E X A M P L E 1. 9
• The number of electric field lines that
The following pictures depict electric field
emanate from the positive charge or
lines for various charge configurations.
end at a negative charge is directly
proportional to the magnitude of the
charges.
For example in the Figure 1.15, the electric
field lines are drawn for charges +q and q2
-2q. Note that the number of field lines q1
emanating from +q is 8 and the number
of field lines ending at -2q is 16. Since the
(a)
magnitude of the second charge is twice that
B
A + C +

q2
q1
(a)
B charges are equal (N=18). So the
charges are equal. At point A,
C the electric field lines are denser
A + +
compared to the lines at point B. So
the electric field at point A is greater
in magnitude compared to the field
(b) at point B. Further, no electric field
line passes through C, which implies
that the resultant electric field at C
due to these two charges is zero.
q1 _ q2 q3 (iii)
In the figure (c), the electric field
lines start at q1 and q3 and end at q2.
This implies that q1 and q3 are positive
charges. The ratio of the number
(c) q1 8 q 1
of field lines is = = 3 = ,
q2 16 q2 2
(i)
In figure (a) identify the signs of two
implying that q1and q3are half of the
q1 magnitude of q2. So q1 = q3 = +10 nC.
charges and find the ratio
q2
(ii)
In figure (b), calculate the ratio of 1.4
two positive charges and identify the
strength of the electric field at three ELECTRIC DIPOLE AND
points A, B, and C ITS PROPERTIES
(iii)
Figure (c) represents the electric field
lines for three charges. If q2 = -20 nC, 1.4.1 Electric dipole
then calculate the values of q1 and q3 Two equal and opposite charges separated
Solution by a small distance constitute an electric
dipole. In many molecules, the centers of
(i)
The electric field lines start at q2 and positive and negative charge do not coincide.
end at q1. In figure (a), q2 is positive Such molecules behave as permanent
and q1 is negative. The number dipoles. Examples: CO, water, ammonia,
of lines starting from q2 is 18 and HCl etc.
number of the lines ending at q1 is Consider two equal and opposite point
6. So q2 has greater magnitude. The charges (+q, -q) that are separated by a
q1 N 6 1 distance 2a as shown in Figure 1.16(a).
ratio of = 1 = = . It implies
q2 N 2 18 3 The electric dipole moment is defined as
  
that q2 = 3 q1 p = qr+ − qr− .

Here r+ is the position vector of +q from
(ii)
In figure (b), the number of field 
the origin and r- is the position vector of -q
lines emanating from both positive from the origin. Then, from Figure 1.16 (a),

y  n

p = ∑ qi ri (1.12)
i =1

p 
_
where ri is the position vector of charge qi
+
-q
a a x from the origin.
+q
(a) E X A M P L E 1. 10
Calculate the electric dipole moment for

the following charge configurations.
_ +
y y
a a x a x
(b)
+ + + +
+q +q +q +q
Figure 1.16 (a) Electric dipole (b)

Electric field lines for the electric dipole (a) (b)
y y
_
-2q +
+q

p = qai −qa ( −
i ) = 2qai (1.11) a -2q a
x _
a x
The electric dipole moment vector lies along a
2a
the line joining two charges and is directed +
+q
from –q to +q. The SI unit of dipole moment is (c) +q (d)
+
coulomb meter (Cm). The electric field lines for

an electric dipole are shown in Figure 1.16 (b). Solution
• For simplicity, the two charges are Case (a) The position vector for the +q on
placed on the x-axis. Even if the two the positive x-axis is ai and position vector
charges are placed on y or z-axies, for the +q charge the negative x axis is -ai .
dipole moment will point from –q to So the dipole moment is,
+q. The magnitude of the electric dipole 
p = (+q)( ai ) + (+q)( −ai ) = 0
moment is equal to the product of the
magnitude of one of the charges and the Case (b) In this case one charge is placed

distance between them, p = 2qa at the origin, so its position vector is zero.
• Though the electric dipole moment Hence only the second charge +q with
for two equal and opposite charges is position vector ai contributes to the dipole

defined, it is very general. It is possible moment, which is p = qai .
to define and calculate the electric From both cases (a) and (b), we can infer
dipole moment for a single charge, two that in general the electric dipole moment
positive charges, two negative charges depends on the choice of the origin
and also for more than two charges. and charge configuration. But for one
For a collection of n point charges, the special case, the electric dipole moment
electric dipole moment is defined as is independent of the origin. If the total
follows:

charge is zero, then the electric dipole 1.4.2 Electric field due to a
moment will be the same irrespective of dipole
the choice of the origin. It is because of this Case (i) Electric field due to an electric
reason that the electric dipole moment of dipole at points on the axial line
an electric dipole (total charge is zero) is Consider an electric dipole placed on the
always directed from –q to +q, independent x-axis as shown in Figure 1.17. A point C is
of the choice of the origin. located at a distance of r from the midpoint

Case (c) p =( −2q)aj+q(2a)( −j ) = −4qaj. O of the dipole along the axial line.

Note that in this case p is directed from Axial line
→
p → →
-2q to +q. A B E– E+

_ +
a O a
Case (d) p = −2qa(−
i ) + qaj +qa( −
j) -q +q C
= 2qa 
i r
The water molecule (H2O) has this charge
configuration. The water molecule has Figure 1.17 Electric field of the dipole
three atoms (two H atom and one O along the axial line
atom). The centers of positive (H) and
negative (O) charges of a water molecule The electric field at a point C due to +q is
 1 q
lie at different points, hence it possess E+ = along BC
4 πε 0 (r − a)2
permanent dipole moment. The O-H bond

length is 0.958 × 10-10 m due to which the Since the electric dipole moment vector p
electric dipole moment of water molecule is from –q to +q and is directed along BC,
has the magnitude p = 6.1 x 10-30 Cm. The the above equation is rewritten as

electric dipole moment p is directed from  1 q
E+ = 
p (1.13)
center of negative charge to the center of 4 πε 0 (r − a)2
positive charge, as shown in the figure.
where  p is the electric dipole moment unit
H vector from –q to +q.
+ The electric field at a point C due to –q is

Center of
p1 positive charge  1 q
O

p E− = − 
p (1.14)
–p
+ 4 πε 0 (r + a)2
2 Since +q is located closer to the point C than
Center of  
negative + –q, E+ is stronger than E- . Therefore, the

H
charge length of the E+ vector is drawn larger than

0.958Å H that of E- vector.
+ +q The total electric field at point C is calculated
using the superposition principle of the
O
-2q – 104 electric field.
  
Etot = E+ + E−
+q
1 q 1 q
+
H = 2
p − 
p
4 πε 0 (r − a) 4 πε 0 (r + a)2

  If the point C is chosen on the left side of
 q  1 1  
Etot =  − p the dipole, the total electric field is still in
4 πε 0 (r − a)2 (r + a)2  
(1.15) the direction of p . We infer this result by
  examining the electric field lines of the
 1  4ra  
Etot = q  p (1.16) dipole shown in Figure 1.16(b).
4 πε 0 (r 2 − a 2 )2 
 
 Case (ii) Electric field due to an electric
Note that the total electric field is along E+ ,
dipole at a point on the equatorial plane
since +q is closer to C than –q.
 Consider a point C at a distance r from the
The direction of Etot is shown in Figure 1.18.
midpoint O of the dipole on the equatorial
plane as shown in Figure 1.19.
A a a B Etot
_ + Since the point C is equi-distant from +q
-q O +q C
and –q, the magnitude of the electric fields
r of +q and –q are the same. The direction of
 
E+ is along BC and the direction of E- is
Figure 1.18 Total electric field of the  
along CA. E+ and E- are resolved into two
dipole on the axial line
components; one component parallel to the
dipole axis and the other perpendicular to
If the point C is very far away from the 
it. The perpendicular components E+ sinθ
dipole then (r >> a). Under this limit the 
and E- sinθ are oppositely directed and
term (r 2 − a 2 ) ≈ r 4 . Substituting this into
2
cancel each other. The magnitude of the
equation (1.16), we get total electric field at point C is the sum of
 
the parallel components of E+ and E- and
 1  4aq  
Etot =   p (r >> a) its direction is along -p as shown in the
4 πε 0  r 3  Figure 1.19.

since 2aq p = p   
  Etot = − E+ cos θ 
p − E− cos θ 
p (1.18)
1 2p
Etot = (r >> a) (1.17)
4 πε 0 r 3
→ Equatorial plane
E+
→
→ E+sinθ
C E+
→
Etot
→ →
E– r E+cosθ θ
→ →
A θ –p θ B E–cosθ θ
– +
-q a O a +q
→ →
E– E–sinθ
Figure 1.19 Electric field due to a dipole at a point on the equatorial plane

 
The magnitudes E+ and E- are the same and electric field due to a point charge. The
are given by reason for this behavior is that at very
  large distance, the two charges appear
1 q
E+ = E− = (1.19) to be close to each other and neutralize
4 πε 0 (r + a 2 )
2
each other.
By substituting equation (1.19) into equation (iii) The equations (1.17) and (1.21) are
(1.18), we get valid only at very large distances
 1 2q cos θ  (r>>a). Suppose the distance
Etot = − p
4 πε 0 (r 2 + a 2 ) 2a approaches zero and q approaches
infinity such that the product of
1 2qa 
=− 3
p 2aq = p is finite, then the dipole is
4 πε 0
(r 2
+a 2 2
) called a point dipole. For such point
a dipoles, equations (1.17) and (1.21)
since cosθ =
r + a2
2 are exact and hold true for any r.
 
1 p
Etot = − 3
4 πε 0 1.4.3 Torque experienced
(r 2 + a2 )2

since p = 2qap (1.20) by an electric dipole in the
At very large distances (r>>a), the equation uniform electric field
(1.20) becomes Consider an electric dipole of dipole

moment p placed in a uniform electric field
1 p 
Etot = − (r >> a) (1.21) E whose field lines are equally spaced and
4 πε r 3
point in the same direction. The charge +q

Important inferences will experience a force q E in the direction
(i) From equations (1.17) and (1.21), it is of the field and charge –q will experience

inferred that for very large distances, a force -q E in a direction opposite to the

the magnitude of the electric field at field. Since the external field E is uniform,
points on the dipole axis is twice the the total force acting on the dipole is zero.
magnitude of the electric field at points These two forces acting at different points
on the equatorial plane. The direction of will constitute a couple and the dipole
the electric field at points on the dipole experience a torque as shown in Figure 1.20.
axis is directed along the direction of This torque tends to rotate the dipole. (Note
 that electric field lines of a uniform field
dipole moment vector p but at points
on the equatorial plane it is directed are equally spaced and point in the same
opposite to the dipole moment vector, direction).
 The total torque on the dipole about the
that is along - p .
(ii) At very large distances, the electric point O
1
field due to a dipole varies as 3 . Note
r
that for a point charge, the electric τ = OA×(−qE ) + OB ×qE (1.22)
1
field varies as 2 . This implies that the
r Using right-hand corkscrew rule (Refer
electric field due to a dipole at very large
distances goes to zero faster than the XI, volume 1, unit 2), it is found that total

→
E that experienced by –q. In addition to the
+q + B qE
→
torque, there will be net force acting on the
a
dipole. This is shown in Figure 1.21.
2a sinθ
θ
O → →
Non uniform E qE1
a
+
+q
-qE
→
– θ
A -q
Torque is into the paper
O
Figure 1.20 Torque on dipole
→
qE2
– -q
torque is perpendicular to the plane of the
paper and is directed into it. Net torque, Net force
The magnitude of the total torque

Figure 1.21 The dipole in a non-uniform
τ = OA (−qE ) sin θ + OB qE sin θ
electric field
τ = qE ⋅ 2a sin θ (1.23)
 E X A M P L E 1. 11

where θ is the angle made by p with E .
A sample of HCl gas is placed in a uniform
Since p = 2aq, the torque is written in terms
electric field of magnitude 3 × 104 N C-1.
of the vector product as
The dipole moment of each HCl molecule
   is 3.4 × 10-30 Cm. Calculate the maximum
τ = p× E (1.24)
torque experienced by each HCl molecule.
The magnitude of this torque is τ = pE sin θ
Solution
and is maximum when θ = 90 .
The maximum torque experienced by the
This torque tends to rotate the dipole and
  dipole is when it is aligned perpendicular
align it with the electric field E . Once p
 to the applied field.
is aligned with E , the total torque on the
dipole becomes zero. τ max = pE sin 90 = 3.4 ×10−30 ×3×104 N m
If the electric field is not uniform, then the τ max = 10.2×10−26 N m
force experienced by +q is different from
Microwave oven works on the principle of torque

acting on an electric dipole. The food we consume
has water molecules which are permanent electric
dipoles. Oven produces microwaves that are
oscillating electromagnetic fields and produce torque on the
water molecules. Due to this torque on each water molecule,
the molecules rotate very fast and produce thermal energy.
Thus, heat generated is used to heat the food.

 
1.5 to the coulomb force (Fext = −Fcoloumb ). The
ELECTROSTATIC work done is
POTENTIAL AND  P

POTENTIAL ENERGY W = ∫ Fext ⋅ dr (1.25)
R
Since coulomb force is conservative,

Introduction work done is independent of the path and
In mechanics, potential energy is defined it depends only on the initial and final
for conservative forces. Since gravitational positions of the test charge. If potential
force is a conservative force, its gravitational energy associated with q′ at P is UP and that
potential energy is defined in XI standard at R is UR, then difference in potential energy
physics (Unit 6). Since Coulomb force is defined as the work done to bring a test
is an inverse-square-law force, its also a charge q′ from point R to P and is given as
conservative force like gravitational force. UP – UR = W = ΔU
Therefore, we can define potential energy
P
for charge configurations.  
∆U = ∫ Fext ⋅ dr (1.26)
R
  
1.5.1 Electrostatic Potential Since Fext = −Fcoloumb = −q ′E (1.27)
energy and Electrostatic
P P
potential    
∆U = ∫ −(q ′E )⋅ dr = q ′ ∫ (−E )⋅ dr
Consider a positive charge q kept fixed (1.28)
R R
at the origin which produces an electric

 The potential energy difference per unit
field E around it. A positive test charge q′
charge is given by
is brought from point R to point P against
the repulsive force between q and q′ as P
 
shown in Figure 1.22. Work must be done to q ′ ∫ (−E )⋅ dr P
 
overcome this repulsion. This work done is ∆U = R
= −∫ E ⋅ dr (1.29)
q′ q′
stored as potential energy. R
q´ The above equation (1.29) is independent

+
P

of q′. The quantity ∆U = − E ⋅ dr is called
R
P ∫ q′ R
+
q electric potential difference between P and
R and is denoted as VP – VR = ∆V.
Figure 1.22 Work done is equal to
In otherwords, the electric potential
potential energy
difference is defined as the work done by an
external force to bring unit positive charge
The test charge q′ is brought from R to P from point R to point P.
with constant velocity which means that
P
external force used to bring the test charge  
VP − VR = ∆V = ∫ −E ⋅ dr (1.30)
q′ from R to P must be equal and opposite R

The electric potential energy difference
can be written as ∆U = q′ ∆V. Physically
potential difference between two points P
r
is a meaningful quantity. The value of +
q
the potential itself at one point is not
meaningful. Therefore the point R is taken Figure 1.23 Electrostatic potential at a
at infinity and its potential is considered point P
as zero (V∞ = 0) .
Then the electric potential at a point P is The electric potential at the point P is
equal to the work done by an external force r r
   
to bring a unit positive charge with constant V = ∫ (−E )⋅ dr = −∫ E ⋅ dr (1.32)
velocity from infinity to the point P in ∞ ∞

the region of the external electric field E . Electric field due to positive point charge q
Mathematically this is written as is
 1 q
P
  E= 
r
VP = −∫ E ⋅ dr (1.31) 4 πε 0 r 2

∞ r
−1 q 
Important points
V=
4 πε 0 ∫r 2

r .dr
∞
1. Electric potential at point P depends The infinitesimal displacement vector,


only on the electric field which is due dr = drr and using  r = 1, we have
r.
to the source charge q and not on the r r
test charge q′. Unit positive charge is 1 q 1 q
V =− ∫
4 πε  ∞ r 2

r ⋅ drr = − ∫
4 πε  ∞ r 2
dr
brought from infinity to the point P
with constant velocity because external After the integration,
agency should not impart any kinetic 1  1  1 q
r
energy to the test charge. V =− q −  =

4 πε   r ∞ 4 πε  r
2. From equation (1.29), the unit of Hence the electric potential due to a point
electric potential is Joule per coulomb. charge q at a distance r is
The practical unit is volt (V) named
after Alessandro Volta (1745-1827) 1 q
V= (1.33)
who invented the electrical battery. The 4 πε 0 r
potential difference between two points Important points
is expressed in terms of voltage.
(i) If the source charge q is positive, V > 0.
If q is negative, then V is negative and
1.5.2 Electric potential due 1 q
equal to V = −
to a point charge 4 πε 0 r
(ii) The description of motion of objects
Consider a positive charge q kept fixed at using the concept of potential or
the origin. Let P be a point at distance r from potential energy is simpler than that
the charge q. This is shown in Figure 1.23. using the concept of field.

(iii) From expression (1.33), it is clear that
kq1 kq2 kq3
the potential due to positive charge Vtot = + + + ...
r1 r2 r3
decreases as the distance increases,
kq 1 n qi
but for a negative charge the potential .... + n = ∑ (1.34)
rn 4 πε 0 i =1
ri
increases as the distance is increased. At
infinity (r = ∞) electrostatic potential where r1,r2,r3…….rn are the distances
is zero (V = 0). of q1, q2, q3 ….. qn respectively from P
In the case of gravitational force, (Figure 1.25).
mass moves from a point of higher
gravitational potential to a point of P
r1
lower gravitational potential. Similarly
q1
a positive charge moves from a point
of higher electrostatic potential to r2
lower electrostatic potential. However rn
a negative charge moves from lower r3
electrostatic potential to higher q2
electrostatic potential. This comparison qn
is shown in Figure 1.24.
(iv) The electric potential at a point P due
q3
to a collection of charges q1,q2,q3…..qn
is equal to sum of the electric potentials Figure 1.25 Electrostatic potential due to
due to individual charges. collection of charges
Higher gravitational
potential
E X A M P L E 1. 12
Lower gravitational
potential
(a)
Calculate the electric potential at
Earth
points P and Q as shown in the figure
O below.
(b)
Suppose the charge +9µC is replaced
Mass moves from higher
gravitational potentail to lower by -9µC find the electrostatic
gravitational potentail
potentials at points P and Q
VP > VQ > VR VP < VQ < VR
+ + – +
+q P +q´ Q R
(a) Positive charge +q´ moves from
-q P Q +q´ R
(c) Positive charge +q´ moves from
+ 10m P
6m Q
higher electric potential to
lower electric potential
higher electric potential to +9µC
lower electric potential
+
VP > VQ
–
> VR
–
VP <
–
VQ < VR
(c)
Calculate the work done to bring a
+q P Q –q´ R –q P –q´ Q R test charge +2µC from infinity to the
point P. Assume the charge +9µC
(b) negative charge –q´moves from lower (d) negative charge –q´ moves from lower
electric potential to higher electric potential electric potential to higher electric potential
is held fixed at origin and +2µC is

Figure 1.24 Motion of charges in terms brought from infinity to P.
of electric potential

Solution E X A M P L E 1. 13
(a)
Electric potential at point P is given by Consider a point charge +q placed at
9 −6 the origin and another point charge -2q
VP = 1 q = 9×10 ×9×10 = 8.1×103 V placed at a distance of 9 m from the charge
4 πε  rP 10
+q. Determine the point between the two
Electric potential at point Q is given by
charges at which electric potential is zero.
9 −6
VQ = 1 q = 9×10 ×9×10 = 5.06×103 V Solution
4 πε  rQ 16
According to the superposition principle,
Note that the electric potential at point Q
the total electric potential at a point is
is less than the electric potential at point
equal to the sum of the potentials due to
P. If we put a positive charge at P, it moves
each charge at that point.
from P to Q. However if we place a negative
charge at P it will move towards the charge Consider the point at which the total
+9µC. potential zero is located at a distance x
from the charge +q as shown in the figure.
The potential difference between the points
P and Q is given by 9m
∆V = VP − VQ = +3.04 ×103 V + _
x P 9-x
+q -2q
(b)
Suppose we replace the charge +9 µC
by -9 µC, then the corresponding The total electric potential at P is zero.
potentials at the points P and Q are,
1  q 2q 
3
VP = −8.1×10 V , VQ = −5.06×10 V3 Vtot =  − = 0
4 πε   x (9 − x )
Note that in this case electric potential at
q 2q
the point Q is higher than at point P. which gives =
x (9 − x )
The potential difference or voltage between 1 2
or =
the points P and Q is given by x (9 − x )
∆V = VP − VQ = −3.04 ×103 V Hence, x=3m
(c)
The electric potential V at a point
P due to some charge is defined as 1.5.3 Electrostatic potential
the work done by an external force at a point due to an electric
to bring a unit positive charge from dipole
infinity to P. So to bring the q amount
of charge from infinity to the point P, Consider two equal and opposite charges
work done is given as follows. separated by a small distance 2a as shown
in Figure 1.26. The point P is located at a
W = qV distance r from the midpoint of the dipole.
Let θ be the angle between the line OP and
WQ = 2×10−6 ×5.06×103 J = 10.12×10−3 J .
dipole axis AB.

1
P 1 1  2a 
−
2
= 1 − cosθ

r1 r  r 
r2 Since
a
<<1 , we can use binomial theorem
r
r r1 and retain the terms up to first order
→ 1 1  a 
A 180-θ
θ
p B = 1 + cosθ (1.36)
_ + 
r1 r  r 
-q O +q
a a Similarly applying the cosine law for triangle
Figure 1.26 Potential due to electric dipole AOP,
r22 = r 2 + a 2 − 2ra cos (180 − θ)

Let r1 be the distance of point P from +q and
r2 be the distance of point P from –q. since cos (180− θ) = − cos θ we get
1 q
Potential at P due to charge +q = r22 = r 2 + a 2 + 2ra cosθ
4 πε  r1
1 q a2
Potential at P due to charge –q = − Neglecting the term (because r>>a)
4 πε  r2 r2
Total potential at the point P,
 2a cosθ 
r22 = r 2 1 + 
1  1 1   r 
V= q  −  (1.35)
4 πε   r1 r2  1
 2a cosθ 2
r2 = r 1 + 
Suppose if the point P is far away from the  r 
dipole, such that r>>a, then equation (1.35)
Using Binomial theorem, we get
can be expressed in terms of r.
By the cosine law for triangle BOP,
1 1  cosθ 
= 1 − a  (1.37)
r12 = r 2 + a 2 − 2ra cosθ r2 r  r 
 a 2 2a  Substituting equation (1.37) and (1.36) in

r12 = r 2 1 + 2 − cosθ
 r r  equation (1.35),
Since the point P is very far from dipole,
1  1  cos θ  1  cos θ 
a2 V= q  1 + a  − 1 − a 
then r>>a. As a result the term 2 is very 4 πε   r  r  r  r 
r
small and can be neglected. Therefore
q  1  cos θ cos θ 
V=  1 + a −1 + a 

r12 = r 2 1 − 2a
cosθ 
 4 πε   r  r r 
 r 
1
 2a 2 1 2aq
r1 = r 1 − cosθ
(or) V= cos θ
 r  4 πε  r 2

But the electric dipole moment p = 2qa and (ii) The potential due to a point charge is
we get, spherically symmetric since it depends
1  p cos θ  only on the distance r. But the potential
V=   due to a dipole is not spherically
4 πε 0  r 2 
 symmetric because the potential
Now we can write p cosθ = p ×r , where 
r is 
depends on the angle between p and
the unit vector from the point O to point P. 
position vector r of the point.
Hence the electric potential at a point P due However the dipole potential is axially
to an electric dipole is given by 
symmetric. If the position vector r

1 p ⋅ r is rotated about p by keeping θ fixed,
V= (r>>a)(1.38)
4 πε r 2
then all points on the cone at the same
Equation (1.38) is valid for distances very distance r will have the same potential
large compared to the size of the dipole. as shown in Figure 1.27. In this figure,
But for a point dipole, the equation (1.38) is all the points located on the blue curve
valid for any distance. will have the same potential.
Special cases
Case (i) If the point P lies on the axial line axial
r
of the dipole on the side of +q, then θ = 0. line
Then the electric potential becomes -q +q
_ +
A O
p
1 p
V= (1.39)
4 πε  r 2
Case (ii) If the point P lies on the axial line
of the dipole on the side of –q, then θ = 180o,
then Figure 1.27 Dipole potential is axially
symmetric
1 p
V =− (1.40)
4 πε  r 2
1.5.4 Equi-potential Surface
Case (iii) If the point P lies on the equatorial
line of the dipole, then θ = 90o. Hence Consider a point charge q located at some
point in space and an imaginary sphere of
V = 0 (1.41) radius r is chosen by keeping the charge q
at its center (Figure 1.28(a)). The electric
Important points
potential at all points on the surface of the
(i) The potential due to an electric dipole given sphere is the same. Such a surface is
1
falls as 2 and the potential due to a called an equipotential surface.
r 1
single point charge falls as . Thus the An equipotential surface is a surface on
r
potential due to the dipole falls faster which all the points are at the same potential.
than that due to a monopole (point For a point charge the equipotential surfaces
charge). As the distance increases from are concentric spherical surfaces as shown
electric dipole, the effects of positive in Figure 1.28(b). Each spherical surface is
and negative charges nullify each other. an equipotential surface but the value of the

potential is different for different spherical
All points in the surface of sphere
are at same potential
surfaces.
A For a uniform electric field, the equipotential
J B surfaces form a set of planes normal to

the electric field E . This is shown in the
r
I Figure 1.29.
C
Properties of equipotential surfaces
q
H (i) The work done to move a charge q
D
between any two points A and B,
G W = q (VB – VA). If the points A and
E
F B lie on the same equipotential surface,
(a) work done is zero because VA = VB.
3 (ii) The electric field is normal to an
2 equipotential surface. If it is not normal,
E E
1 then there is a component of the field
parallel to the surface. Then work must
be done to move a charge between
two points on the same surface. This
q is a contradiction. Therefore the
electric field must always be normal to
equipotential surface.

E E 1.5.5 Relation between
(b) electric field and potential
Consider a positive charge q kept fixed
Figure 1.28 Equipotential surface of at the origin. To move a unit positive charge
point Charge
by a small distance dx in the electric field E,
Equipotential surfaces

E E
Figure 1.29 Equipotential surface for uniform electric field

the work done is given by dW = −E dx. The From 0 to 1 cm, the slope is constant and
minus sign implies that work is done against dV 
= 25V cm−1 . So E = −25V cm 
−1
so i
the electric field. This work done is equal to dx
electric potential difference. Therefore, From 1 to 4 cm, the potential is constant,
dW = dV. dV 
V = 25 V. It implies that = 0. So E = 0
(or) dV = −E dx(1.42) dx
Hence
E =−
dV
(1.43) From 4 to 5 cm, the slope dV = −25V cm−1 .
dx  dx
So E = +25V cm i .
−1
The electric field is the negative gradient of

the electric potential. In general, The plot of electric field for the various
points along the x axis is given below.
  ∂V 
 (1.44)
∂V  ∂V 
E = −  i + j + k
 ∂x ∂y ∂k 
E(Vcm-1)
E X A M P L E 1. 14 37.5
25
The following figure represents the electric 12.5
potential as a function of x – coordinate. 0 1 2 3 4 5 x(cm)
Plot the corresponding electric field as a -12.5
function of x. -25
-37.5
V(volts)
30
25
20 1.5.6 Electrostatic potential
15 energy for collection of point
charges
10
The electric potential at a point at a distance r
5
from point charge q1 is given by
0 1 2 3 4 5 1 q1
x(cm) V=
4 πε  r
This potential V is the work done to bring
a unit positive charge from infinity to the
Solution
point. Now if the charge q2 is brought from
In the given problem, since the potential infinity to that point at a distance r from q1,
 dV  the work done is the product of q2 and the
depends only on x, we can use E = − i electric potential at that point. Thus we have
dx
¶V ¶V
(the other two terms and are zero) W = q2V
¶y ¶z

This work done is stored as the electrostatic electric field created by the charge q1.
potential energy U of a system of charges So the work done on the charge q2 is
q1 and q2 separated by a distance r. Thus we W = q2 V1B. Here V1B is the electrostatic
have potential due to the charge q1 at point B.
1 q1q2
U = q2V = (1.45) 1 q1q2
4πε  r U= (1.46)
4 πε  r12
The electrostatic potential energy depends
only on the distance between the two point Note that the expression is same
charges. In fact, the expression (1.45) is when q2 is brought first and then q1 later.
derived by assuming that q1 is fixed and (iii) Similarly to bring the charge q3 to the
q2 is brought from infinity. The equation point C, work has to be done against the
(1.45) holds true when q2 is fixed and q1 is total electric field due to both charges
brought from infinity or both q1 and q2 are q1 and q2. So the work done to bring
simultaneously brought from infinity to a the charge q3 is = q3 (V1C + V2C). Here
distance r between them. V1C is the electrostatic potential due
Three charges are arranged in the following to charge q1 at point C and V2C is the
configuration as shown in Figure 1.30. electrostatic potential due to charge q2
at point C.
q3
The electrostatic potential is
C
r13 1  q1q3 q2q3 
r23 U=  +  (1.47)
4 πε   r13 r23 
q1 q2
(iv) Adding equations (1.46) and (1.47), the
A r12 B total electrostatic potential energy for
the system of three charges q1, q2 and
Figure 1.30 Electrostatic potential q3 is
energy for Collection of point charges
1  q1q2 q1q3 q2q3 
U=  + +  (1.48)
To calculate the total electrostatic potential 4 πε   r12 r13 r23 
energy, we use the following procedure. We
bring all the charges one by one and arrange Note that this stored potential energy U
them according to the configuration as is equal to the total external work done to
shown in Figure 1.30. assemble the three charges at the given
locations. The expression (1.48) is same if
(i) Bringing a charge q1 from infinity to the the charges are brought to their positions
point A requires no work, because there in any other order. Since the Coulomb force
are no other charges already present in is a conservative force, the electrostatic
the vicinity of charge q1. potential energy is independent of the
(ii) To bring the second charge q2 to the manner in which the configuration of
point B, work must be done against the charges is arrived at.

E X A M P L E 1. 15 1  q q 
WR = q × − + 
Four charges are arranged at the corners 4 πε   a 2a 
of the square PQRS of side a as shown 1 q 2  1 
= −1 + 
in the figure.(a) Find the work required 4 πε  a  2
to assemble these charges in the given
(iv)
Work required to bring the
configuration. (b) Suppose a charge q′
fourth charge –q at the position
is brought to the center of the square,
S = q × potential at the point S
by keeping the four charges fixed at the
due the all the three charges at
corners, how much extra work is required
the point P, Q and R
for this?
+q -q 1  q q q 
a WS = −q ×  + − 
2a 
+ –
4 πε   a a
P Q
1 q  1 
WS = − 2 − 
O a 4 πε  a 2
a
q´ (b)
Work required to bring the charge
q′ to the center of the square = q′ ×
S R potential at the center point O due
– +
-q a to all the four charges in the four
+q
corners
Solution The potential created by the two +q charges
are canceled by the potential created by the
(a)
The work done to arrange the -q charges which are located in the opposite
charges in the corners of the square corners. Therefore the net electric potential
is independent of the way they are at the center O due to all the charges in the
arranged. We can follow any order. corners is zero.
(i)
First, the charge +q is brought Hence no work is required to bring any
to the corner P. This requires no charge to the point O. Physically this
work since no charge is already implies that if any charge q′ when brought
present, WP = 0 close to O, then it moves to the point O
(ii)
Work required to bring the without any external force.
charge –q to the corner Q = (-q)
× potential at a point Q due to
+q located at a point P. 1.5.7 Electrostatic potential
energy of a dipole in a
1 q 1 q2 uniform electric field
WQ = −q × =−
4 πε  a 4 πε  a
Consider a dipole placed in the uniform

(iii)
Work required to bring the electric field E as shown in the Figure 1.31.
charge +q to the corner R= q × A dipole experiences a torque when kept

potential at the point R due to in an uniform electric field E . This torque
charges at the point P and Q. rotates the dipole to align it with the

→
E The potential energy stored in the system of
+q + B dipole kept in the uniform electric field is
given by
a
 
θ U = − pE cosθ = − p ⋅ E (1.51)
O 2a sinθ
a
In addition to p and E, the potential energy
A – θ
also depends on the orientation θ of the
-q 2a cosθ
electric dipole with respect to the external
electric field.
Figure 1.31 The dipole in a uniform The potential energy is maximum when the
electric field dipole is aligned anti-parallel (θ = π) to the
external electric field and minimum when
direction of the electric field. To rotate the the dipole is aligned parallel (θ = 0) to the
dipole (at constant angular velocity) from external electric field.
its initial angle θ¢ to another angle θ against
the torque exerted by the electric field, an E X A M P L E 1. 16
equal and opposite external torque must be A water molecule has an electric dipole
applied on the dipole. moment of 6.3 × 10-30 Cm. A sample
The work done by the external torque contains 1022 water molecules, with all the
to rotate the dipole from angle θ¢ to θ at dipole moments aligned parallel to the
constant angular velocity is external electric field of magnitude 3 × 105
θ N C-1. How much work is required to rotate
W = ∫ τ ext dθ (1.49) all the water molecules from θ = 0o to 90o?
θ′
    Solution
Since τ ext is equal and opposite to τ E = p× E ,
we have When the water molecules are aligned in
    the direction of the electric field, it has
τ ext = τ E = p× E (1.50) minimum potential energy. The work
Substituting equation (1.50) in equation done to rotate the dipole from θ = 0o to 90o
(1.49), we get is equal to the potential energy difference
θ between these two configurations.
W = ∫ pE sinθ dθ
θ′ W = ∆U = U (90 ) −U (0 )
W = pE (cos θ′ − cos θ)
From the equation (1.51), we write
This work done is equal to the potential U = − pE cosθ, Next we calculate the work
energy difference between the angular done to rotate one water molecule from
positions θ and θ′. θ = 0o to 90o.
U (θ) −U (θ′) = ∆U = − pE cos θ + pE cos θ′ For one water molecule
If the initial angle is θ′ = 90 and is taken as W = − pE cos 90 + pE cos 0 = pE
reference point, then U (θ′) = pE cos90 = 0 .

W = 6.3×10−30 ×3×105 = 18.9×10−25 J these elements have the same area, the
number of electric field lines crossing
For 1022 water molecules, the total work the element in region A is more than that
done is crossing the element in region B. Therfore
the electric flux in region A is more than
Wtot = 18.9×10−25 ×1022 = 18.9×10−3 J
that in region B. The electric field strength
for a point charge decreases as the distance
1.6 increases, then for a point charge electric
GAUSS LAW AND ITS flux also decreases as the distance increases.
APPLICATIONS The above discussion gives a qualitative idea
of electric flux. However a precise definition
of electric flux is needed.
1.6.1 Electric Flux
Electric flux for uniform Electric field
The number of electric field lines crossing
a given area kept normal to the electric Consider a uniform electric field in a region
field lines is called electric flux. It is usually of space. Let us choose an area A normal to
denoted by the Greek letter Φ E and its unit the electric field lines as shown in Figure
is N m2 C-1. Electric flux is a scalar quantity 1.33 (a). The electric flux for this case is
and it can be positive or negative. For a
simpler understanding of electric flux, the Φ E = EA (1.52)
following Figure 1.32 is useful.
Suppose the same area A is kept parallel to
the uniform electric field, then no electric
field lines pierce through the area A , as
shown in Figure 1.33(b). The electric flux
for this case is zero.
B
Φ E = 0 (1.53)
A
+ If the area is inclined at an angle θ with the
+q field, then the component of the electric
field perpendicular to the area alone
contributes to the electric flux. The electric
field component parallel to the surface area
will not contribute to the electric flux. This
is shown in Figure 1.33 (c). For this case, the
electric flux
Figure 1.32 Electric flux
Φ E = (E cosθ) A (1.54)
The electric field of a point charge is Further, θ is also the angle between the
drawn in this figure. Consider two small electric field and the direction normal to the
rectangular area elements placed normal to area. Hence in general, for uniform electric
the field at regions A and B. Even though field, the electric flux is defined as

→
Here A = A n̂
→ → →
E E E
n̂
n̂ s
n̂ E co
→
E sin E
A A A
(a)Electric flux = EA (b)Electric flux = 0 (c)Electric flux = (E cos
Figure 1.33 The electric flux for Uniform electric field
 
Φ E = E ⋅ A = EA cosθ (1.55) Solution
 
Here, note that A is the area vector A = An . The electric flux
Its magnitude is simply the area A and
the direction is along the unit vector n Φ E = E ⋅ A = EA cos θ = 100×5×10×10−4 × cos 60
perpendicular to the area as shown in Figure  ⇒ Φ E = 0.25 N .m2C −1
1.33. Using this definition for flux, Φ E = E ⋅ A ,
equations (1.53) and (1.54) can be obtained For θ = 0o,
as special cases.    
In Figure 1.33 (a), θ = 0o so Φ E = E ⋅ A = EA Φ E = E ⋅ A = EA = 100×5×10×10−4 = 0.5 N .m2C −1
 
In Figure 1.33 (b), θ = 90o so Φ E = E ⋅ A = 0
Electric flux in a non uniform electric field
and an arbitrarily shaped area
E X A M P L E 1. 17 Suppose the electric field is not uniform
Calculate the electric flux through the and the area A is not flat (Figure 1.34),
rectangle of sides 5 cm and 10 cm kept in then the entire area is divided into n small
   
the region of a uniform electric field 100 area segments ∆A1 , ∆A2 , ∆A3 ......... ∆An such
NC-1. The angle θ is 60o. Suppose θ becomes that each area element is almost flat and
zero, what is the electric flux? the electric field over each area element is
considered to be uniform.
Area A The electric flux for the entire area A is
approximately written as
n̂ →
E        
Φ E = E1 ⋅ ∆A1 + E2 ⋅ ∆A2 + E3 ⋅ ∆A3 .......En ⋅ ∆An
n  
= ∑ Ei ⋅ ∆Ai
(1.56)
i =1

E Ei

i
(a)

dA

dA

Figure 1.34 Electric flux for non-
uniform electric Field

By taking the limit ∆Ai → 0 (for all i) the (b)
summation in equation (1.56) becomes
Figure 1.35 Electric flux over a closed
integration. The total electric flux for the
surface
entire area is given by
 
Φ E = ∫ E ⋅ dA (1.57) (1.58) is a closed surface integration and for
each areal element, the outward normal is
From Equation (1.57), it is clear that the 
the direction of dA as shown in the Figure
electric flux for a given surface depends on
1.35(b).
both the electric field pattern on the surface
The total electric flux over a closed surface
area and orientation of the surface with
can be negative, positive or zero. In the
respect to the electric field.
Figure 1.35(b), it is shown that in one area
 
element, the angle between dA and E is less
1.6.2 Electric flux for closed
than 90o, then the electric flux is positive
surfaces
and in another areal element, the angle
 
In the previous section, the electric flux for between dA and E is greater than 90o, then
any arbitrary curved surface is discussed. the electric flux is negative.
Suppose a closed surface is present in the In general, the electric flux is negative if the
region of the non-uniform electric field as electric field lines enter the closed surface
shown in Figure 1.35 (a). and positive if the electric field lines leave
The total electric flux over this closed the closed surface.
surface is written as
1.6.3 Gauss law
⋅ dA (1.58)
ΦE = ∫ E
A positive point charge Q is surrounded by
Note the difference between equations (1.57) an imaginary sphere of radius r as shown
and (1.58). The integration in equation in Figure 1.36. We can calculate the total

electric flux through the closed surface of The equation (1.61) is called as Gauss’s law.
the sphere using the equation (1.58). The remarkable point about this result is
that the equation (1.61) is equally true for
E ⋅ dA =∫ E dA cosθ
ΦE = ∫ any arbitrary shaped surface which encloses
the charge Q and as shown in the Figure
The electric field of the point charge is
1.37. It is seen that the total electric flux is
directed radially outward at all points on
the same for closed surfaces A1, A2 and A3 as
the surface of the sphere. Therefore, the
 shown in the Figure 1.37.
direction of the area element dA is along

the electric field E and θ = 0° .
The net electric flux is the

When the charge is at the center same through all surfaces.
of the sphere, the electric field is
everywhere normal to the surface
and constant in magnitude.
A3

A2
Spherical
gaussian
A1

surface d
r +
+
Q
Figure 1.36 Total electric flux of point

charge Figure 1.37 Gauss law for arbitrarily
shaped surface
Φ E = ∫ E dA since cos00 = 1 (1.59) Gauss’s law states that if a charge Q is

enclosed by an arbitrary closed surface,
E is uniform on the surface of the sphere, then the total electric flux ΦE through the
closed surface is
 dA (1.60)
ΦE = E∫
Qencl
Substituting for ∫ dA = 4πr 2 and E =
1 Q ⋅ dA = ε (1.62)
ΦE = ∫ E
4 πε 0 r 2
in equation 1.60, we get
Here Qencl denotes the charges inside the
closed surface.
1 Q 1
ΦE = 2
× 4 πr 2 = 4 π Q
4 πε  r 4 πε  Discussion of Gauss law
Q (i) The total electric flux through the
Φ E = (1.61)
ε closed surface depends only on the

charges enclosed by the surface and E X A M P L E 1. 18
the charges present outside the surface
will not contribute to the flux and the
A2
shape of the closed surface which can A1 -q
–
be chosen arbitrarily.
+
(ii) The total electric flux is independent +Q
of the location of the charges inside the
closed surface. +q
+
(iii) To arrive at equation (1.62), we have

(a)
chosen a spherical surface. This
imaginary surface is called a Gaussian
surface. The shape of the Gaussian
–
surface to be chosen depends on the + +5q -10q
type of charge configuration and the
kind of symmetry existing in that –
-2q
charge configuration. The electric field
is spherically symmetric for a point
charge, therefore spherical Gaussian
surface is chosen. Cylindrical and (b)
planar Gaussian surfaces can be
chosen for other kinds of charge (i)
In figure (a), calculate the electric flux
configurations. through the closed areas A1 and A2.
(iv) In the LHS of equation (1.62), the (ii)
In figure (b), calculate the electric

electric field E is due to charges present flux through the cube
inside and outside the Gaussian surface
Solution
but the charge Qencl denotes the charges
which lie only inside the Gaussian (i)
In figure (a), the area A1 encloses the
surface. charge Q. So electric flux through
Q
this closed surface A1 is . But the
(v) The Gaussian surface cannot pass ε
through any discrete charge but it closed surface A2 contains no charges
can pass through continuous charge inside, so electric flux through A2 is
distributions. It is because, very close to zero.
the discrete charges, the electric field is (ii)
In figure (b), the net charge inside
not well defined. the cube is 3q and the total electric
3q
(vi) Gauss law is another form of Coulomb’s flux in the cube is therefore Φ E = .
ε
law and it is also applicable to the Note that the charge -10 q lies outside
charges in motion. Because of this the cube and it will not contribute
reason, Gauss law is treated as much the total flux through the surface of
more general law than Coulomb’s law. the cube.

that the charged wire possesses a cylindrical
1.6.4 Applications of Gauss law
symmetry.
Electric field due to any arbitrary charge Let us choose a cylindrical Gaussian surface
configuration can be calculated using of radius r and length L as shown in the
Coulomb’s law or Gauss law. If the charge Figure 1.39.
configuration possesses some kind of The total electric flux in this closed surface
symmetry, then Gauss law is a very efficient is calculated as follows.
way to calculate the electric field. It is

illustrated in the following cases.
E ⋅ dA
ΦE = ∫
(i) Electric field due to an infinitely long
= ∫ E ⋅ dA + ∫ E ⋅ dA + ∫ E ⋅ dA (1.63)
charged wire Curved top bottom
surface surface surface
Consider an infinitely long straight wire
having uniform linear charge density λ. It is seen from Figure (1.39) that for the
 
Let P be a point located at a perpendicular curved surface, E is parallel to A and
 
distance r from the wire (Figure 1.38(a)). E ⋅ dA = E dA. For the top and bottom
 
The electric field at the point P can be surfaces, E is perpendicular to A and
 
found using Gauss law. We choose two E ⋅ dA = 0
small charge elements A1 and A2 on the wire Substituting these values in the equation
which are at equal distances from the point (1.63) and applying Gauss law to the
P. The resultant electric field due to these cylindrical surface, we have
two charge elements points radially away
from the charged wire and the magnitude Qencl
of electric field is same at all points on the
ΦE = ∫ E dA =
ε
(1.64)
Curved
surface
circle of radius r. This is shown in the Figure
1.38(b). From this property, we can infer
+ +
+ +
+ + A2
+ +
+ +
+ +
R
+ +
Q
+ r E + r P E
+ +
P
+ +
+ + S
+ +
+ +
+ + A1
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ (a) + (b)
Figure 1.38 Electric field due to infinite long charged wire

Equation (1.67) indicates that the electric
n̂ + field is always along the perpendicular
+
E r ) to wire. In fact, if λ > 0 then
direction ( 
+ 
E points perpendicular outward (  r)
+ 
+ from the wire and if λ < 0, then E points
+ perpendicular inward ( - r ) .
+ The equation (1.67) is true only for an
+ r infinitely long charged wire. For a charged
+ L wire of finite length, the electric field need
+
E not be radial at all points. However, equation
+
n̂ (1.67) for such a wire is taken approximately
+
true around the mid-point of the wire and
+
+ E far away from the both ends of the wire
+ (ii) Electric field due to charged infinite
+ plane sheet
+ n̂ Consider an infinite plane sheet of charges
with uniform surface charge density σ. Let P
Figure 1.39 Cylindrical Gaussian surface
be a point at a distance of r from the sheet as
shown in the Figure 1.40.
Since the magnitude of the electric field for
the entire curved surface is constant, E is + Gaussian
+ +
taken out of the integration and Qencl is given + + surface
+ +
by Qencl = λL . + +
+ + dA
+
E dA dA E
λL +
E P
E ∫ dA =
ε
(1.65)
P´
+
+ +
Curved + + r
surface + +
+ +
+ +
+
Here Φ E = ∫ dA = total area of the curved
+
+
Curved
surface
surface = 2πrL. Substituting this in equation Figure 1.40 Electric field due to charged
(1.65), we get infinite planar sheet
λL Since the plane is infinitely large, the electric

E ⋅ 2πrL =
ε field should be same at all points equidistant
1 λ from the plane and radially directed at
E= (1.66)
2πε  r all points. A cylindrical shaped Gaussian
1 λ surface of length 2r and area A of the flat
In vector form E = r (1.67)

2πε r surfaces is chosen such that the infinite
plane sheet passes perpendicularly through
The electric field due to the infinite charged
the middle part of the Gaussian surface.
1 1
wire depends on rather than 2 for a Applying Gauss law for this cylindrical
r r
point charge. surface,

σ
E ⋅ dA
ΦE = ∫ In vector form, E =
2ε
n (1.71)

Qencl
= ∫ E ⋅ dA + ∫ E ⋅ dA + ∫ ⋅ dA = ε0
E
Curved
surface
P P′ Here n is the outward unit vector normal
(1.68) to the plane. Note that the electric field
The electric field is perpendicular to the area due to an infinite plane sheet of charge
element at all points on the curved surface depends on the surface charge density and
and is parallel to the surface areas at P and is independent of the distance r.
P ′ (Figure 1.40). Then, The electric field will be the same at any
point farther away from the charged plane.
Qencl
Φ E = ∫ E dA + ∫ E dA = (1.69) Equation (1.71) implies that if σ > 0 the
ε0
P P′ electric field at any point P is outward
Since the magnitude of the electric field perpendicular  n to the plane and if σ < 0 the
at these two equal surfaces is uniform, E electric field points inward perpendicularly
is taken out of the integration and Qencl is  ) to the plane.
( -n
given by Qencl = σA , we get For a finite charged plane sheet, equation
σA (1.71) is approximately true only in the
2 E ∫ dA =
P
ε0 middle region of the plane and at points far
The total area of surface either at P or P′ away from both ends.
(iii)
Electric field due to two parallel
∫ dA = A
charged infinite sheets
P
σA σ Consider two infinitely large charged plane

Hence 2 EA = or E= sheets with equal and opposite charge
ε0 2ε 0
densities +σ and -σ which are placed parallel
(1.70)
to each other as shown in the Figure 1.41.
+σ –σ
+ –
+ –
+ + – –
+ –
+ + – –
+ –
+
+
+ – –
E+ E– + + E+ –
E– E+
– –
+
+
+ P1 –
P3 + –
–
–
P2
+
+
+ E– – –
+ + –
+ – –
+ + –
+ – –
+ + –
+ –
+
Figure 1.41 Electric field due to two parallel charged sheets

The electric field between the plates and (iv) Electric field due to a uniformly
outside the plates is found using Gauss law. charged spherical shell
The magnitude of the electric field due to Consider a uniformly charged spherical
σ shell of radius R and total charge Q as shown
an infinite charged plane sheet is and it
2ε  in Figure 1.42. The electric field at points
points perpendicularly outward if σ > 0 and
points inward if σ < 0. outside and inside the sphere is found using
Gauss law.
At the points P2 and P3, the electric field Case (a) At a point outside the shell (r > R)
due to both plates are equal in magnitude Let us choose a point P outside the shell
and opposite in direction (Figure 1.41). As at a distance r from the center as shown
a result, electric field at a point outside the in Figure 1.42 (a). The charge is uniformly
plates is zero. But inside the plate, electric distributed on the surface of the sphere
fields are in same direction i.e., towards the (spherical symmetry). Hence the electric
right, the total electric field at a point P1 field must point radially outward if Q > 0 and
point radially inward if Q < 0. So we choose
σ σ σ a spherical Gaussian surface of radius r is
Einside = + = (1.72)
2ε  2ε  ε  chosen and the total charge enclosed by this
Gaussian surface is Q. Applying Gauss law
The direction of the electric field inside the
plates is directed from positively charged Q
plate to negatively charged plate and is ∫ E ⋅ dA = (1.73)
ε
Gaussian
uniform everywhere inside the plate. surface
For points outside the sphere, For points inside the sphere,
a large, spherical gaussian a spherical gaussian surface
surface is drawn concentric smaller than the sphere is
with the sphere. drawn.
P
r
R P Gaussian
r sphere
R
Q
Gaussian
(a) sphere (b)
Figure 1.42 The electric field due to a charged spherical shell

 
The electric field E and d A point in the Q
same direction (outward normal) at all
∫ E ⋅ dA =
ε
Gaussian
surface
the points on the Gaussian surface. The Q
 E ⋅ 4 πr 2 = (1.77)
magnitude of E is also the same at all points ε
due to the spherical symmetry of the charge
Since Gaussian surface encloses no charge,
distribution.
So Q = 0. The equation (1.77) becomes
Q
Hence E ∫ dA =
ε
(1.74)
E=0 (r < R) (1.78)
Gaussian
surface
The electric field due to the uniformly

But ∫ dA = total area of Gaussian surface
charged spherical shell is zero at all points
Gaussian
surface inside the shell.
= 4πr2. Substituting this value in equation (1.74) A graph is plotted between the electric
Q field and radial distance. This is shown in
E ⋅ 4 πr 2 = Figure 1.43.
ε
Q 1 Q Er
E ⋅ 4 πr 2 = (or) E =
ε 4 πε  r 2
1 Q
In vector form E= 
r (1.75)
4 πε r 2
Er = 1 2
Q
4 r
The electric field is radially outward if Q > 0 Er = 0
and radially inward if Q < 0. From equation O
R r
(1.75), we infer that the electric field at a +
point outside the shell will be same as if the +
entire charge Q is concentrated at the center RR
+
of the spherical shell. (A similar result is
observed in gravitation, for gravitational
Figure 1.43 Electric field versus distance
force due to a spherical shell with mass M)
for a spherical shell of radius R
Case (b): At a point on the surface of the
spherical shell (r = R) Gauss law is a powerful
The electrical field at points on the spherical Note technique whenever a given
shell (r = R) is given by charge configuration possesses
spherical, cylindrical or planer symmetry,
Q
E= 
r (1.76) then the electric field due to such a charge
4 πε R 2 configuration can be easily found. If there
Case (c) At a point inside the spherical is no such symmetry, the direct method
shell (r < R) (Coulomb’s law and calculus) can be used.
For example, it is difficult to use Gauss law
Consider a point P inside the shell at a
to find the electric field for a dipole since
distance r from the center. A Gaussian
it has no spherical, cylindrical or planar
sphere of radius r is constructed as shown in symmetry.
the Figure 1.42 (b). Applying Gauss law

1.7
E E
ELECTROSTATICS OF - +
- +
CONDUCTORS AND - +
DIELECTRICS -
Eint +
- +
- +
- E
+
1.7.1 Conductors at - +
electrostatic equilibrium - +
An electrical conductor has a large number
Figure 1.44 Electric field of conductors
of mobile charges which are free to move in
the material. In a metallic conductor, these
mobile charges are free electrons which are Before applying the external electric
not bound to any atom and therefore are field, the free electrons in the conductor
free to move on the surface of the conductor. are uniformly distributed in the
When there is no external electric field, the conductor. When an electric field is
free electrons are in continuous random applied, the free electrons accelerate
motion in all directions. As a result, there to the left causing the left plate to be
is no net motion of electrons along any negatively charged and the right plate
particular direction which implies that the to be positively charged as shown in
conductor is in electrostatic equilibrium. Figure 1.44.
Thus at electrostatic equilibrium, there is no Due to this realignment of free electrons,
net current in the conductor. A conductor at there will be an internal electric field
electrostatic equilibrium has the following created inside the conductor which
properties. increases until it nullifies the external
electric field. Once the external electric
(i) The electric field is zero everywhere field is nullified the conductor is said
inside the conductor. This is true to be in electrostatic equilibrium. The
regardless of whether the conductor is time taken by a conductor to reach
solid or hollow. electrostatic equilibrium is in the order
This is an experimental fact. Suppose of 10-16s, which can be taken as almost
the electric field is not zero inside the instantaneous.
metal, then there will be a force on (ii) There is no net charge inside the
the mobile charge carriers due to this conductors. The charges must reside
electric field. As a result, there will be only on the surface of the conductors.
a net motion of the mobile charges, We can prove this property using Gauss
which contradicts the conductors being law. Consider an arbitrarily shaped
in electrostatic equilibrium. Thus the conductor as shown in Figure 1.45.
electric field is zero everywhere inside A Gaussian surface is drawn inside the
the conductor. We can also understand conductor such that it is very close to
this fact by applying an external uniform the surface of the conductor. Since the
electric field on the conductor. This is electric field is zero everywhere inside

Gaussian
E

E
surface

E
Conductor
Qnet=0
-
- E=0
-
-
- Conductor
Figure 1.46 (a) Electric field is along the

surface (b)Electric field is perpendicular
Figure 1.45 No net charge inside the to the surface of the conductor
conductor
We now prove that the electric field has
σ
magnitude just outside the conductor’s
the conductor, the net electric flux is ε
also zero over this Gaussian surface. surface. Consider a small cylindrical
From Gauss’s law, this implies that there Gaussian surface, as shown in the Figure
is no net charge inside the conductor. 1.47. One half of this cylinder is embedded
Even if some charge is introduced inside inside the conductor.
the conductor, it immediately reaches
the surface of the conductor. The flux through the
(iii) The electric field outside the conductor gaussian surface is EA.
is perpendicular to the surface of the
σ
conductor and has a magnitude of E
ε

where σ is the surface charge density
at that point.
If the electric field has components A
parallel to the surface of the conductor,
then free electrons on the surface
of the conductor would experience

acceleration (Figure 1.46(a)). This means

that the conductor is not in equilibrium.
Therefore at electrostatic equilibrium,
the electric field must be perpendicular Figure 1.47 The electric field on the
to the surface of the conductor. This is surface of the conductor
shown in Figure 1.46 (b).

Since electric field is normal to the surface inside both hollow and solid conductors is
of the conductor, the curved part of the zero. It is a very interesting property which
cylinder has zero electric flux. Also inside has an important consequence.
the conductor, the electric field is zero. Consider a cavity inside the conductor as
Hence the bottom flat part of the Gaussian shown in Figure 1.48 (a). Whatever the
surface has no electric flux. charges at the surfaces and whatever the
Therefore the top flat surface alone electrical disturbances outside, the electric
contributes to the electric flux. The electric field inside the cavity is zero. A sensitive
field is parallel to the area vector and the electrical instrument which is to be protected
total charge inside the surface is σA. By from external electrical disturbance is kept
applying Gaus’s law, inside this cavity. This is called electrostatic
σA
shielding.
EA = Faraday cage is an instrument used to
ε
σ demonstrate this effect. It is made up of metal
In vector form, E=  n (1.79)
ε bars configured as shown in Figure1.48 (b).
Here n represents the unit vector outward If an artificial lightning jolt is created
normal to the surface of the conductor. outside, the person inside is not affected.
Suppose σ < 0, then electric field points
inward perpendicular to the surface.
(iv) The electrostatic potential has the
same value on the surface and inside
of the conductor. Electric field line
We know that the conductor has no

parallel electric component on the
surface which means that charges can
be moved on the surface without doing E=0
any work. This is possible only if the
electrostatic potential is constant at all
points on the surface and there is no
potential difference between any two
points on the surface.
Since the electric field is zero inside the
conductor, the potential is the same as
the surface of the conductor. Thus at
electrostatic equilibrium, the conductor
is always at equipotential.
1.7.2 Electrostatic shielding

Using Gauss law, we proved that the electric
field inside the charged spherical shell is zero, Figure 1.48 (a) Electric field inside the
cavity (b) Faraday cage
Further, we showed that the electric field

During lightning accompanied by a The negative charge of the rod repels the
thunderstorm, it is always safer to sit inside a electrons in the conductor to the opposite
bus than in open ground or under a tree. The side. As a result, positive charges are induced
metal body of the bus provides electrostatic near the region of the charged rod while
shielding, since the electric field inside is negative charges on the farther side.
zero. During lightning, the charges flow Before introducing the charged rod, the free
through the body of the conductor to the electrons were distributed uniformly on the
ground with no effect on the person inside surface of the conductor and the net charge
that bus. is zero. Once the charged rod is brought near
the conductor, the distribution is no longer
uniform with more electrons located on the
1.7.3 Electrostatic induction
farther side of the rod and positive charges
In section 1.1, we have learnt that an are located closer to the rod. But the total
object can be charged by rubbing using an charge is zero.
appropriate material. Whenever a charged (ii) Now the conducting sphere is connected
rod is touched by another conductor, to the ground through a conducting
charges start to flow from charged rod to wire. This is called grounding. Since the
the conductor. Is it possible to charge a ground can always receive any amount
conductor without any contact? The answer of electrons, grounding removes the
is yes. This type of charging without actual electron from the conducting sphere.
contact is called electrostatic induction. Note that positive charges will not flow
(i) Consider an uncharged (neutral) to the ground because they are attracted
conducting sphere at rest on an insulating by the negative charges of the rod
stand. Suppose a negatively charged rod (Figure 1.49(b)).
(iii) When the grounding wire is removed
is brought near the conductor without
from the conductor, the positive charges
touching it, as shown in Figure 1.49(a).
remain near the charged rod (Figure
- - - - 1.49(c))
- - - -
- ++
+
- ++
+ (iv) Now the charged rod is taken away from
+ +
the conductor. As soon as the charged
–
–
– –
– –
–
–
rod is removed, the positive charge gets
distributed uniformly on the surface of
(a) - - (b) the conductor (Figure 1.49 (d)). By this
- -
-
process, the neutral conducting sphere
- -
- -
- ++
+
+ becomes positively charged.
+
+
+ For an arbitrary shaped conductor, the
+
intermediate steps and conclusion are the
same except the final step. The distribution
(c) (d) of positive charges is not uniform for
arbitrarily-shaped conductors. Why is it not
Figure 1.49 Various steps in electrostatic uniform? The reason for it is discussed in
induction
the section 1.9

E X A M P L E 1. 19 It is important here to note that the
acceleration depends on the mass of the
A small ball of conducting material having object. Galileo’s conclusion that all objects
a charge +q and mass m is thrown upward fall at the same rate towards the Earth is
at an angle θ to horizontal surface with true only in a uniform gravitational field.
an initial speed vo as shown in the figure. When a uniform electric field is included,
There exists an uniform electric field E the acceleration of a charged object depends
downward along with the gravitational on both mass and charge.
field g. Calculate the range, maximum  qE 
height and time of flight in the motion of But still the acceleration a =  g +  is
 m 
this charged ball. Neglect the effect of air constant throughout the motion. Hence
and treat the ball as a point mass. we use kinematic equations to calculate the
range, maximum height and time of flight.
E
y qE
In fact we can simply replace g by g +
m
in the usual expressions of range, maximum
height and time of flight of a projectile.
+
+ +
Without With the

v 0 charge charge +q
+ hmax +
2v sinθ 2v sinθ

x Time of flight T
 
R g  g + qE 
 m 
Solution Maximum height v 2 sin2 θ v 2 sin2 θ
If the conductor has no net charge, then hmax

2g  qE 
its motion is the same as usual projectile 2 g + 
 m
motion of a mass m which we studied in
Kinematics (unit 2, vol-1 XI physics). Range R v 2 sin 2θ v 2 sin 2θ
 
Here, in this problem, in addition to g  g + qE 
downward gravitational force, the charge  m 
also will experience a downward uniform
electrostatic force. Note that the time of flight, maximum
height, range are all inversely proportional
The acceleration of the charged ball due to to the acceleration of the object. Since
gravity = -g j  
 g + qE  > g for charge +q, the quantities T,
The acceleration of the charged ball due to  m 
qE  hmax, and R will decrease when compared to
uniform electric field = - j
m the motion of an object of mass m and zero
The total acceleration of charged ball in net charge. Suppose the charge is –q, then
  qE    
downward direction a = − g + j  g − qE  < g , and the quantities T, h and
 m   m  max

R will increase. Interestingly the trajectory Center of negative charge
is still parabolic as shown in the figure. coincides with center of
positive charge
→
E
E
y
+– – +
→
p
-q
_ (a) (b)
+
Figure 1.50 (a) Non polar molecules
→
v without external field (b) With the
0
_
+
_
external field
x
+
θ +
_
+q q=0 -q Polar molecules
In polar molecules, the centers of the positive
and negative charges are separated even
in the absence of an external electric field.
1.7.4 Dielectrics or They have a permanent dipole moment.
insulators Due to thermal motion, the direction of
A dielectric is a non-conducting material each dipole moment is oriented randomly
and has no free electrons. The electrons in (Figure 1.51(a)). Hence the net dipole
a dielectric are bound within the atoms. moment is zero in the absence of an external
Ebonite, glass and mica are some examples electric field. Examples of polar molecules
of dielectrics. When an external electric field are H2O, N2O, HCl, NH3.
is applied, the electrons are not free to move When an external electric field is applied,
anywhere but they are realigned in a specific the dipoles inside the polar molecule tend
way. A dielectric is made up of either polar to align in the direction of the electric field.
molecules or non-polar molecules. Hence a net dipole moment is induced in it.
Then the dielectric is said to be polarized by
Non-polar molecules an external electric field (Figure 1.51(b)).
A non-polar molecule is one in which
centers of positive and negative charges Polar molecules are
randomly oriented in
When an external
electric field is applied,
coincide. As a result, it has no permanent the absence of an
external electric field.
the molecules partially
align with the field.

dipole moment. Examples of non-polar +
Eext
_
+ _
molecules are hydrogen (H2), oxygen (O2),
–σb +σb
_
+
+
+
_
– – – + – +
+ –
+ _
–
and carbon dioxide (CO2) etc. + _

+
+ +
_
+ – + – – – +
– +
_
+
When an external electric field is applied,
+
–
+
Eext
+ _
+
–
Eint
–
+
_
+ –
+
+
– –
+ _
–
the centers of positive and negative charges –

+
+
– – +
+
+
– + – + – + _
_
_
are separated by a small distance which +
+
Eext
_
(a) (b)
induces dipole moment in the direction of
the external electric field. Then the dielectric Figure 1.51 (a) Randomly oriented polar
molecules (b) Align with the external
is said to be polarized by an external electric
electric field
field. This is shown in Figure 1.50.

Polarisation electric field is produced. The magnitude of
In the presence of an external electric the internal electric field is smaller than that
field, the dipole moment is induced in of external electric field. Therefore the net

the dielectric material. Polarisation P is electric field inside the dielectric is not zero
defined as the total dipole moment per but is parallel to an external electric field
unit volume of the dielectric. For most with magnitude less than that of the external
dielectrics (linear isotropic), the Polarisation electric field. For example, let us consider a
is directly proportional to the strength of rectangular dielectric slab placed between
the external electric field. This is written as two oppositely charged plates (capacitor) as
  shown in the Figure 1.52(b).
P = χe Eext (1.80)
The uniform electric field between the plates

where χe is a constant called the electric acts as an external electric field Eext which
susceptibility which is a characteristic of polarizes the dielectric placed between
each dielectric. plates. The positive charges are induced on
one side surface and negative charges are
1.7.5 Induced Electric field induced on the other side of surface.
inside the dielectric But inside the dielectric, the net charge is
When an external electric field is applied on zero even in a small volume. So the dielectric
a conductor, the charges are aligned in such in the external field is equivalent to two
a way that an internal electric field is created oppositely charged sheets with the surface
which cancels the external electric field. charge densities +σb and –σb. These charges
But in the case of a dielectric, which has are called bound charges. They are not free
no free electrons, the external electric field to move like free electrons in conductors.
only realigns the charges so that an internal This is shown in the Figure 1.52(b).
Polar molecules are When an external

randomly oriented in electric field is applied,
the absence of an the molecules partially
external electric field. align with the field.

Eext
+ _
+ –σb +σb
_
_
+
+
+
_
– – – + – +
+ –
+ _
–
+ _
+
+ +
_
+ – + – – – +
– +
_
+
–
+ _
Eext
+ +
+
–
Eint
–
+
_
+ –
+
+
– –
+ _
–
+ + – + – _
– _
+ – +
+
+
– – +
_
+ _
+
Eext
(a) (b)
Figure 1.52 Induced electric field lines inside the dielectric

For example, the charged balloon after 1.8
rubbing sticks onto a wall. The reason is that
CAPACITORS AND
the negatively charged balloon is brought near
CAPACITANCE
the wall, it polarizes opposite charges on the
surface of the wall, which attracts the balloon.
This is shown in Figure 1.53. 1.8.1 Capacitors
Wall
_
Capacitor is a device used to store electric
+
_
+ _
_
charge and electrical energy. It consists of two
+
_
_
+
+
_
_
conducting objects (usually plates or sheets)
_
_
+
+
_
_ separated by some distance. Capacitors are
_
+
+ _ widely used in many electronic circuits and
_
+
+ _ have applications in many areas of science
(a) (b) and technology.
A simple capacitor consists of two parallel
Figure 1.53 (a) Balloon sticks to the wall
metal plates separated by a small distance as
(b) Polarisation of wall due to the electric
field created by the balloon shown in Figure 1.54 (a).
1.7.6 Dielectric strength

Area = A
+Q -Q
C
+Q –Q
When the external electric field applied to
a dielectric is very large, it tears the atoms d
+ - + -
apart so that the bound charges become
V
free charges. Then the dielectric starts to
conduct electricity. This is called dielectric (a) (b) (c)
breakdown. The maximum electric field

Figure 1.54 (a) Parallel plate capacitor
the dielectric can withstand before it
(b) Capacitor connected with a battery
breakdowns is called dielectric strength. (c) Symbolic representation of capacitor.
For example, the dielectric strength of air
is 3 × 106 V m-1. If the applied electric field
increases beyond this, a spark is produced When a capacitor is connected to a battery
in the air. The dielectric strengths of some of potential difference V, the electrons are
dielectrics are given in the Table 1.1. transferred from one plate to the other
plate by battery so that one plate becomes
Table 1.1 Dielectric strength negatively charged with a charge of –Q and
the other plate positively charged with
Substance Dielectric strength (Vm-1)
+Q. The potential difference between the
Mica 100 × 106 plates is equivalent to the battery’s terminal
Teflon 60 × 106 voltage. This is shown in Figure 1.54(b). If
Paper 16 × 106 the battery voltage is increased, the amount
Air 3 × 106 of charges stored in the plates also increase.
Pyrex glass 14 × 106 In general, the charge stored in the capacitor

is proportional to the potential difference Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor
between the plates. Consider a capacitor with two parallel
plates each of cross-sectional area A and
Q µV separated by a distance d as shown in
Figure 1.56.
so that Q = CV
where the C is the proportionality constant
called capacitance. The capacitance C d
of a capacitor is defined as the ratio of +Q -Q
the magnitude of charge on either of the +
+
--
conductor plates to the potential difference +
+
--
existing between the conductors. +
+
--
Q
+
+
--
C=
V
(1.81)
Area +
+ -- Area
The SI unit of capacitance is coulomb per volt
A +
+
-- A
or farad (F) in honor of Michael Faraday.

+
+
--
Farad is a very large unit of capacitance. In +
+
--
practice, capacitors are available in the range +
+
--
of microfarad (1µF = 10-6 F) to picofarad +
+
--
(1pf = 10-12 F). A capacitor is represented by
the symbol . Note that the E
total charge stored in the capacitor is zero
Figure 1.56 Capacitance of a parallel
(Q - Q = 0). When we say the capacitor stores plate capacitor
charges, it means the amount of charge that
can be stored in any one of the plates.
The electric field between two infinite
Nowadays there are capacitors available
parallel plates is uniform and is given by
in various shapes (cylindrical, disk) and
σ
types (tantalum, ceramic and electrolytic), E= where σ is the surface charge density
ε 
as shown in Figure 1.55. These capacitors Q
on the plates σ =  . If the separation
are extensively used in various kinds of  A
distance d is very much smaller than the
electronic circuits. size of the plate (d2 << A), then the above
result is used even for finite–sized parallel
plate capacitor.
The electric field between the plates is
Q
E= (1.82)
Aε 
Since the electric field is uniform, the

electric potential between the plates having
separation d is given by
Figure 1.55 Various types of capacitors

Qd (i) If the area of cross-section of the
V = Ed = (1.83) capacitor plates is increased, more
Aε 0
Therefore the capacitance of the capacitor is charges can be distributed for the same
given by potential difference. As a result, the
capacitance is increased.
Q Q εA
C= = = 0 (1.84) (ii) If the distance d between the two plates

V  Qd   d
  is reduced, the potential difference
 Aε 0 
between the plates (V = Ed) decreases
with E constant. As a result, voltage
While deriving an expression difference between the terminals of the
Note for capacitance of the parallel battery increases which in turn leads
plate capacitor, the expression to an additional flow of charge to the
of the electric field for infinite plates plates from the battery, till the voltage
is used. But for finite sized plates, the on the capacitor equals to the battery’s
electric field is not strictly uniform terminal voltage. Suppose the distance
between the plates. At both edges, the is increased, the capacitor voltage
electric field is bent outwards as shown
increases and becomes greater than the
in the Figure.
battery voltage. Then, the charges flow
from capacitor plates to battery till both
+Q -Q voltages becomes equal.
+
+
--
+
+
--
+
+
-- E X A M P L E 1. 2 0
+
+
--
+
+
-- A parallel plate capacitor has square plates
+
+
-- of side 5 cm and separated by a distance of
+
+
-- 1 mm. (a) Calculate the capacitance of this
+
+
-- capacitor. (b) If a 10 V battery is connected
+
+
-- to the capacitor, what is the charge stored
+
+
--
in any one of the plates? (The value of
εo = 8.85 x 10-12 Nm2 C-2)
Fringing field
Solution
This is called “fringing field”. However
under the condition (d2 << A), this effect (a) The capacitance of the capacitor is
can be ignored. ε 0 A 8.85×10−12 ×25×10−4
C= =
d 1×10−3
= 221.2×10−13 F
From equation (1.84), it is evident that
C = 22.12×10−12 F = 22.12 pF
capacitance is directly proportional to
the area of cross section and is inversely (b) The charge stored in any one of the
proportional to the distance between the plates is Q = CV, Then
plates. This can be understood from the Q = 22.12×10−12 ×10 = 221.2×10−12 C = 221.2 pC
following.

This work done is stored as electrostatic
potential energy (UE) in the capacitor.
Q2 1
UE = = CV 2 (∴ Q = CV ) (1.87)
2C 2
where Q = CV is used. This stored energy is

thus directly proportional to the capacitance
of the capacitor and the square of the voltage
Sometimes we notice that the ceiling fan between the plates of the capacitor. But
does not start rotating as soon as it is where is this energy stored in the capacitor?
switched on. But when we rotate the blades, To understand this question, the equation
it starts to rotate as usual. Why it is so? We (1.87) is rewritten as follows using the
know that to rotate any object, there must ε0 A
results C = and V = Ed
be a torque applied on the object. For the d
ceiling fan, the initial torque is given by the
1 ε A 1
U E =  0 ( Ed ) = ε 0 ( Ad ) E 2 (1.88)
2
capacitor widely known as a condenser.
If the condenser is faulty, it will not give 2  d  2
sufficient initial torque to rotate the blades
when the fan is switched on. where Ad = volume of the space between
the capacitor plates. The energy stored per
unit volume of space is defined as energy
1.8.2 Energy stored in the density uE =
U
From equation (1.88),
capacitor we get
Volume
Capacitor not only stores the charge but 1

also it stores energy. When a battery is uE = ε  E 2 (1.89)
2
connected to the capacitor, electrons of total
charge -Q are transferred from one plate to From equation (1.89), we infer that the
the other plate. To transfer the charge, work energy is stored in the electric field existing
is done by the battery. This work done is between the plates of the capacitor. Once the
stored as electrostatic potential energy in capacitor is allowed to discharge, the energy
the capacitor. is retrieved.
It is important to note that the energy density
To transfer an infinitesimal charge dQ for
depends only on the electric field and not on
a potential difference V, the work done is
the size of the plates of the capacitor. In fact,
given by
expression (1.89) is true for the electric field
dW = V dQ (1.85) due to any type of charge configuration.
Q
where V =
C
1.8.3 Applications of
The total work done to charge a capacitor is
capacitors
Q
Q Q2 Capacitors are used in various electronics
W=∫ dQ = (1.86)
0
C 2C circuits. A few of the applications.

Figure 1.57 (a) Flash capacitor in camera (b) Heart defibrillator
(a) Most people are now familiar with 1.8.4 Effect of dielectrics in
the digital camera. The flash which capacitors
comes from the camera when we
take photographs is due to the energy In earlier discussions, we assumed that
released from the capacitor, called a the space between the parallel plates of a
flash capacitor (Figure 1.57 (a)) capacitor is either empty or filled with air.
Suppose dielectrics like mica, glass or paper
(b) During cardiac arrest, a device called are introduced between the plates, then the
heart defibrillator is used to give a capacitance of the capacitor is altered. The
sudden surge of a large amount of dielectric can be inserted into the plates in
electrical energy to the patient’s chest to two different ways. (i) when the capacitor is
retrieve the normal heart function. This disconnected from the battery. (ii) when the
defibrillator uses a capacitor of 175 μF capacitor is connected to the battery.
charged to a high voltage of around
2000 V. This is shown in Figure 1.57(b). (i)
when the capacitor is disconnected
(c) Capacitors are used in the ignition from the battery
system of automobile engines to Consider a capacitor with two parallel
eliminate sparking plates each of cross-sectional area A and are
(d) Capacitors are used to reduce power separated by a distance d. The capacitor is
fluctuations in power supplies and charged by a battery of voltage V0 and the
to increase the efficiency of power charge stored is Q0. The capacitance of the
transmission. capacitor without the dielectric is
However, capacitors have disadvantage
Q0
as well. Even after the battery or power C0 = (1.90)
V0
supply is removed, the capacitor stores
charges and energy for some time. For The battery is then disconnected from
example if the TV is switched off, it is the capacitor and the dielectric is inserted
always advisable to not touch the back between the plates. This is shown in
side of the TV panel. Figure 1.58.

Q0 Q
C= = ε r 0 = ε r C0 (1.93)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ - V V0
d
→
E0
– – – – – – – – – – Since εr > 1, we have C > Co. Thus insertion

(a) of the dielectric constant εr increases the
capacitance.
Using equation (1.84),
+
+
d
→ εr
E
ε r ε 0 A εA
– – – – – C= = (1.94)
d d
(b)
where ε = εr εo is the permittivity of the
Figure 1.58 (a) Capacitor is charged with dielectric medium.
a battery (b) Dielectric is inserted after The energy stored in the capacitor before
the battery is disconnected the insertion of a dielectric is given by
The introduction of dielectric between 1 Q02

U0 = (1.95)
the plates will decrease the electric field. 2 C0
Experimentally it is found that the modified After the dielectric is inserted, the charge
electric field is given by Q0 remains constant but the capacitance is
increased. As a result, the stored energy is
E0 decreased.
E= (1.91)
εr
1 Q02 1 Q02 U
Here Eo is the electric field inside the U= = = 0 (1.96)
2 C 2 ε r C0 εr
capacitors when there is no dielectric and εr
is the relative permeability of the dielectric Since εr > 1 we get U < Uo. There is a decrease
or simply known as the dielectric constant. in energy because,when the dielectric is
Since εr > 1, the electric field E < Eo. inserted, the capacitor spends some energy
As a result, the electrostatic potential in pulling the dielectric inside.
difference between the plates (V = Ed) is also (ii) When the battery remains connected
reduced. But at the same time, the charge to the capacitor
Qo will remain constant once the battery is
disconnected. Let us now consider what happens when
Hence the new potential difference is the battery of voltage V0 remains connected
to the capacitor when the dielectric is
E0 V inserted into the capacitor. This is shown in
V = Ed = d = 0 (1.92)
εr εr Figure1.59.
The potential difference V0 across the
We know that capacitance is inversely plates remains constant. But it is found
proportional to the potential difference. experimentally (first shown by Faraday) that
Therefore as V decreases, C increases. when dielectric is inserted, the charge stored
Thus new capacitance in the presence of a in the capacitor is increased by a factor εr.
dielectric is

After the dielectric is inserted, the
+
capacitance is increased; hence the stored
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ -
→
d E0 energy is also increased.
– – – – – – – – – –
1 1
(a) U = CV02 = ε r C0V02 = ε rU 0 (1.101)
2 2
Since εr > 1 we have U > Uo.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ -
d
→
E0 εr It may be noted here that since voltage
between the capacitor V0 is constant, the
––––––––––––––– ––––
electric field between the plates also remains
(b) constant.
The energy density is given by
Figure 1.59 (a) Capacitor is charged
through a battery (b) Dielectric is 1
inserted when the battery is connected. u = εE02 (1.102)
2
where ε is the permittivity of the given
Q = εr Qo(1.97) dielectric material.
The results of the above discussions are
Due to this increased charge, the capacitance summarised in the following Table 1.2
is also increased. The new capacitance is
Q Q Computer keyboard keys are

C= = ε r 0 = ε r C0 (1.98) constructed using capacitors
V0 V0
with a dielectric as shown in
However the reason for the increase in the figure.
capacitance in this case when the battery
remains connected is different from the case
when the battery is disconnected before
introducing the dielectric. A Key
ε0 A
Now,
C0 =
d
Movable plate
εA
and
C= (1.99) Insulator
d (dielectric)
The energy stored in the capacitor before Fixed plate
the insertion of a dielectric is given by
1
U 0 = C0V02 (1.100)
2 When the key is pressed, the separation
Note that here we have not used the between the plates decreases leading to
1 Q02 an increase in the capacitance. This in
expression U 0 = because here, both turn triggers the electronic circuits in
2 C0
charge and capacitance are changed, whereas the computer to identify which key is
in equation (1.100), Vo remains constant. pressed.

Table 1.2
Dielectric Charge Voltage Electric field Capacitance Energy
S. No
is inserted Q V E C U
When the battery
1 Constant decreases Decreases Increases Decreases
is disconnected
When the battery
2 Increases Constant Constant Increases Increases
is connected
E X A M P L E 1. 21 increases. As a result, the capacitance is

decreased.
A parallel plate capacitor filled with mica
having εr = 5 is connected to a 10 V battery. New capacitance is
The area of the parallel plate is 6 m2 and C 44.25×10−9
C0 = =
separation distance is 6 mm. (a) Find the εr 5

capacitance and stored charge. = 8.85×10−9 F = 8.85 nF
The stored charge remains same and
(b) After the capacitor is fully charged, the 442.5 nC. Hence newly stored energy is
battery is disconnected and the dielectric is
Q2 Q 2 εr
removed carefully. U0 = = = ε rU
2C0 2C

Calculate the new values of capacitance, = 5×2.21 µJ = 11.05 µJ
stored energy and charge. The increased energy is
Solution ∆U = 11.05µJ − 2.21µJ = 8.84µJ
(a)
The capacitance of the capacitor in
When the dielectric is removed, it
the presence of dielectric is
experiences an inward pulling force due
ε r ε 0 A 5×8.85×10−12 ×6 to the plates. To remove the dielectric,
C= =
d 6×10−3 an external agency has to do work on the
= 44.25×10−9 F = 44.25 nF dielectric which is stored as additional
energy. This is the source for the extra
The stored charge is
energy 8.84 µJ.
Q = CV = 44.25×10−9 ×10
= 442.5×10−9 C = 442.5nC
1.8.5 Capacitor in series and
The stored energy is parallel
1 1 (i) Capacitor in series
U = CV 2 = × 44.25C ×10−9 ×100
2 2 Consider three capacitors of capacitance
−6
= 2.21×10 J = 2.21 µJ
C1, C2 and C3 connected in series with a
(b) After the removal of the dielectric, since battery of voltage V as shown in the Figure
the battery is already disconnected the 1.60 (a).
total charge will not change. But the As soon as the battery is connected to the
potential difference between the plates capacitors in series, the electrons of charge

C1 C2 C3
+ – + – + –
+ – + – + –
+ – + – + –
+ – + – + – CS
V1 V2 V3
+ – + –
V V
(a) (b)
Figure 1.60 (a) Capacitors connected in series (b) Equivalence capacitors CS
–Q are transferred from negative terminal If three capacitors in series are considered
to the right plate of C3 which pushes the to form an equivalent single capacitor Cs
electrons of same amount -Q from left shown in Figure 1.60(b), then we have
plate of C3 to the right plate of C2 due to Q
V= . Substituting this expression into
electrostatic induction. Similarly, the left CS
plate of C2 pushes the charges of –Q to the equation (1.104), we get
right plate of C1 which induces the positive
charge +Q on the left plate of C1. At the same Q 1 1 1
= Q  + + 
time, electrons of charge –Q are transferred CS  C1 C2 C3 
from left plate of C1 to positive terminal of
the battery. 1 1 1 1
= + + (1.105)
By these processes, each capacitor stores the CS C1 C2 C3
same amount of charge Q. The capacitances
of the capacitors are in general different, so Thus, the inverse of the equivalent
that the voltage across each capacitor is also capacitance CS of three capacitors connected
different and are denoted as V1, V2 and V3 in series is equal to the sum of the inverses
respectively. of each capacitance. This equivalent
The total voltage across each capacitor must capacitance CS is always less than the
be equal to the voltage of the battery. smallest individual capacitance in the series.
(ii) Capacitance in parallel

V = V1 + V2 + V3(1.103)
Q Q Q Consider three capacitors of capacitance
Since, Q = CV, we have V = + +
C1 C2 C3 C1, C2 and C3 connected in parallel with
1 1 1 a battery of voltage V as shown in
= Q  + +  (1.104) Figure 1.61 (a).
 C1 C2 C3 

+ Q1 Q2 Q3
+ Q
- -
V C1 C2 C3 V CP
(a) (b)
Figure 1.61 (a) capacitors in parallel (b) equivalent capacitance with the same total charge
Since corresponding sides of the capacitors The equivalent capacitance CP in a parallel

are connected to the same positive and connection is always greater than the
negative terminals of the battery, the largest individual capacitance. In a parallel
voltage across each capacitor is equal to the connection, it is equivalent as area of each
battery’s voltage. Since capacitance of the capacitance adds to give more effective area
capacitors is different, the charge stored such that total capacitance increases.
in each capacitor is not the same. Let the
charge stored in the three capacitors be Q1, E X A M P L E 1. 22
Q2, and Q3 respectively. According to the law
Find the equivalent capacitance between P
of conservation of total charge, the sum of
and Q for the configuration shown below
these three charges is equal to the charge Q
in the figure (a).
transferred by the battery,
Q = Q1 +Q2 +Q3(1.106)
1µF 4µF
4 µF 4µF 2µF
Now, since Q=CV, we have 3µF
6µF
P Q P Q P Q P Q
Q = C1V + C2V + C3V(1.107) 6µF
8µF 8µF 4µF

2µF 8µF
If these three capacitors are considered
(a) (b) (c) (d)
to form a single capacitance CP which
stores the total charge Q as shown in the
Figure 1.61(b), then we can write Q = CPV. Solution
Substituting this in equation (1.107), we get
The capacitors 1 µF and 3µF are
CPV = C1V + C2V + C3V connected in parallel and 6µF and 2 µF
are also separately connected in parallel.
CP = C1 + C2 + C3(1.108) So these parallel combinations reduced
Thus, the equivalent capacitance of to equivalent single capacitances in their
capacitors connected in parallel is equal respective positions, as shown in the
to the sum of the individual capacitances. figure (b).

Ceq = 1µF + 3µF = 4µF q1
A q2
Ceq = 6µF + 2µF = 8µF r1 B
r2
From the figure (b), we infer that the two Thin conducting wire
4 µF capacitors are connected in series and
the two 8 µF capacitors are connected in
series. By using formula for the series, we Figure 1.62 Two conductors are
connected through conducting wire
can reduce to their equivalent capacitances
as shown in figure (c).
If a charge Q is introduced into any one of the
1 1 1 1 spheres, this charge Q is redistributed into
= + = ⇒ Ceq = 2 µF
Ceq 4 4 2 both the spheres such that the electrostatic
and potential is same in both the spheres. They
are now uniformly charged and attain
1 1 1 1
= + = ⇒ Ceq = 4 µF electrostatic equilibrium. Let q1 be the charge
Ceq 8 8 4
residing on the surface of sphere A and q2 is
From the figure (c), we infer that 2µF the charge residing on the surface of sphere
and 4µF are connected in parallel. So the B such that Q = q1 + q2. The charges are
equivalent capacitance is given in the distributed only on the surface and there is
figure (d). no net charge inside the conductor.
The electrostatic potential at the surface of
Ceq = 2µF + 4µF = 6µF the sphere A is given by
Thus the combination of capacitances 1 q1
VA = (1.110)
in figure (a) can be replaced by a single 4 πε  r1
capacitance 6 µF. The electrostatic potential at the surface of
the sphere B is given by
1.9 1 q2
VB = (1.111)
DISTRIBUTION 4 πε  r2
OF CHARGES IN A The surface of the conductor is an
CONDUCTOR AND ACTION equipotential. Since the spheres are
AT POINTS connected by the conducting wire, the
surfaces of both the spheres together form
an equipotential surface. This implies that
1.9.1 Distribution of charges
in a conductor VA = VB
Consider two conducting spheres A and B of q q2
or 1 = (1.112)
radii r1 and r2 respectively connected to each r1 r2
other by a thin conducting wire as shown in Let us take the charge density on the surface
the Figure 1.62. The distance between the of sphere A is σ1 and charge density on the
spheres is much greater than the radii of surface of sphere B is σ2. This implies that q1
either spheres. = 4πr12σ1 and

q2 = 4πr22σ2. Substituting these values into Since VA = VB. We have
equation (1.112), we get r 
q1 q2
= ⇒ q1 =  1 q2
σ1r1 = σ2r2(1.113) r1 r2  r2 
from which we conclude that But from the conservation of total charge, Q
= q1 + q2, we get q1 = Q – q2. By substituting
σr = constant (1.114) this in the above equation,
Thus the surface charge density σ is inversely r 

proportional to the radius of the sphere. For Q − q2 =  1 q2
 r2 
a smaller radius, the charge density will be
 r 
larger and vice versa. so that q2 = Q  2 
 r1 + r2 
Therefore,
E X A M P L E 1. 23
2
q2 = 100×10−9 ×  = 20 nC
Two conducting spheres of radius r1 10 
= 8 cm and r2 = 2 cm are separated by a and q1 = Q – q2 = 80nC
distance much larger than 8 cm and are
The electric charge density for sphere A is
connected by a thin conducting wire as
q1
shown in the figure. A total charge of Q = σ1 =
4 πr12
+100 nC is placed on one of the spheres.
The electric charge density for sphere B is
After a fraction of a second, the charge Q
q2
is redistributed and both the spheres attain σ2 =
4 πr22
electrostatic equilibrium. Therefore,
80×10−9
σ1 = −4
= 0.99×10−6 C m−2
4 ×64 ×10
A
r1 B
r2 and
Thin conducting wire
20×10−9
σ2 = −4
= 3.9×10−6 C m−2
4 π × 4 ×10
Note that the surface charge density is

(a)
Calculate the charge and surface
greater on the smaller sphere compared to
charge density on each sphere.
the larger sphere (σ2 ≈ 4σ1) which confirms
(b)
Calculate the potential at the surface
σ1 r2
of each sphere. the result = .
σ2 r1
Solution The potential on both spheres is the same.
(a)
The electrostatic potential on the So we can calculate the potential on any
1 q1 one of the spheres.
surface of the sphere A is VA =
4 πε  r1
The electrostatic potential on the surface 1 q1 9×109 ×80×10−9
1 q2 VA = = = 9 kV
of the sphere A is VB = 4 πε  r1 8×10−2
4 πε  r2

1.9.2 Action at points or 1.9.3 Lightning arrester or
Corona discharge lightning conductor
Consider a charged conductor of irregular This is a device used to protect tall buildings
shape as shown in Figure 1.63 (a). from lightning strikes. It works on the
principle of action at points or corona
discharge.
This device consists of a long thick copper
rod passing from top of the building to the
ground. The upper end of the rod has a
sharp spike or a sharp needle as shown in
Figure 1.64 (a) and (b).
Figure 1.63 Action at a points or corona

discharge
We know that smaller the radius of

curvature, the larger is the charge density.
The end of the conductor which has larger
curvature (smaller radius) has a large charge
accumulation as shown in Figure 1.63 (b).
As a result, the electric field near this edge Figure 1.64 (a) Schematic diagram of
is very high and it ionizes the surrounding a lightning arrestor. (b) A house with a
air. The positive ions are repelled at the lightning arrestor
sharp edge and negative ions are attracted
towards the sharper edge. This reduces The lower end of the rod is connected to the
the total charge of the conductor near the copper plate which is buried deep into the
sharp edge. This is called action at points or ground. When a negatively charged cloud
corona discharge. is passing above the building, it induces

a positive charge on the spike. Since the
+ + +
induced charge density on thin sharp spike + +
+
+ +
is large, it results in a corona discharge. This E

+ + + Corona
+ + +
+ ++ discharge
positive charge ionizes the surrounding air Aluminum B ++ + + + + +
+
roller ++ + +
+
++
which in turn neutralizes the negative charge + + +
++ +
+ +
+
++
in the cloud. The negative charge pushed to +
+ + ++
+ Rubber belt
+ + ++
the spikes passes through the copper rod and +
++
+
++
+
is safely diverted to the Earth. The lightning + ++
+ + ++
+ +
++
arrester does not stop the lightning; rather Plastic ––– + + + –
– + ++ Corona
–
it diverts the lightning to the ground safely. roller D discharge
C
–
+
1.9.4 Van de Graaff
+ + + +
Generator +
+ +
+
+ +
In the year 1929, Robert Van de Graaff + E B +
+
designed a machine which produces a large +
+ +
+
amount of electrostatic potential difference, +

+ Rubber belt
up to several million volts (107 V). This Van +
de Graff generator works on the principle of +

+
electrostatic induction and action at points. +
+
+ D +
A large hollow spherical conductor is fixed C Insulating
– stand
on the insulating stand as shown in Figure
1.65. A pulley B is mounted at the center
of the hollow sphere and another pulley C
is fixed at the bottom. A belt made up of Figure 1.65 Van de Graaff generator
insulating materials like silk or rubber runs
over both pulleys. The pulley C is driven comb E, a large amount of negative and
continuously by the electric motor. Two positive charges are induced on either side
comb shaped metallic conductors E and D of comb E due to electrostatic induction.
are fixed near the pulleys. As a result, the positive charges are pushed
The comb D is maintained at a positive away from the comb E and they reach the
potential of 104 V by a power supply. The outer surface of the sphere. Since the sphere
upper comb E is connected to the inner side is a conductor, the positive charges are
of the hollow metal sphere. distributed uniformly on the outer surface
of the hollow sphere. At the same time, the
Due to the high electric field near comb
negative charges nullify the positive charges
D, air between the belt and comb D gets
in the belt due to corona discharge before it
ionized. The positive charges are pushed
passes over the pulley.
towards the belt and negative charges
When the belt descends, it has almost no
are attracted towards the comb D. The
net charge. At the bottom, it again gains
positive charges stick to the belt and move
a large positive charge. The belt goes up
up. When the positive charges reach the
and delivers the positive charges to the

outer surface of the sphere. This process The electric field on the surface of the
continues until the outer surface produces sphere(by Gauss law) is given by
the potential difference of the order of 107
which is the limiting value. We cannot store 1 Q
E=
charges beyond this limit since the extra 4 πε  R 2
charge starts leaking to the surroundings The potential on the surface of the hollow
due to ionization of air. The leakage of metallic sphere is given by
charges can be reduced by enclosing the
machine in a gas filled steel chamber at very 1 Q
high pressure. V= = ER
4πε  R
The high voltage produced in this Van de
Graaff generator is used to accelerate positive with Vmax = EmaxR
ions (protons and deuterons) for nuclear
disintegrations and other applications. V
Here Emax = 3×106 . So the maximum
m
potential difference created is given by
E X A M P L E 1. 24
Dielectric strength of air is 3 × 106 V m-1. Vmax = 3 × 106 × 0.5
Suppose the radius of a hollow sphere in
the Van de Graff generator is R = 0.5 m, = 1.5 × 106 V (or) 1.5 million volt
calculate the maximum potential difference
created by this Van de Graaff generator.

SUMMARY
Like charges repel and unlike charges attract

The total charge in the universe is conserved
Charge is quantized. Total charge in an object q = ne where n = 0,1,2,3… and e is
electron charge.
1 q1q2
Coulomb’s law in vector form: F = r (
 r is unit vector along joining q1, q2)
4 πε r 2
For continuous charge distributions, integration methods can be used.
Electrostatic force obeys the superposition principle.
1 q
Electric field at a distance r from a point charge: E = 
r
4 πε r 2
Electric field lines starts at a positive charge and end at a negative charge or at infinity

1  2 p 
Electric field due to electric dipole at points on the axial line : Etot =  
4 πε  r 3 

1  p 
Electric field due to electric dipole at points on the equatorial line: Etot = −  
4 πε  r 3 
  
Torque experienced by a dipole in a uniform electric field: τ = p× E
1 q
Electrostatic potential at a distance r from the point charge: V =
4πε  r

1 p ⋅ r
Electrostatic potential due to an electric dipole: V = 2
4 πε r
The electrostatic potential is the same at all points on an equipotential surface.
The relation between electric field and electrostatic potential:
  ∂V ∂V  ∂V  
E = −  i + j + k 
 ∂x ∂y ∂z 
Electrostatic potential energy for system of charges is equal to the work done to
arrange the charges in the given configuration.
Electrostatic potential energy stored in a dipole system in a uniform electric field:
 
U = −p ⋅ E
Q
The total electric flux through a closed surface : Φ E = where Q is the net charge
ε
enclosed by the surface

1 λ
Electric field due to a charged infinite wire : E = 
r
2πε r
σ
Electric field due to a charged infinite plane : E =  n (n is normal to the plane)
ε
Q
Electric field inside a charged spherical shell is zero. For points outside: E = 
r
4 πε r 2

Electric field inside a conductor is zero. The electric field at the surface of the
σ
conductor is normal to the surface and has magnitude E = .
ε
The surface of the conductor has the same potential, at all points on the surface.
Conductor can be charged using the process of induction.
A dielectric or insulator has no free electrons. When an electric field is applied, the
dielectric is polarised.
Q
Capacitance is given by C = .
V
ε A
Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor: C =
d
1
Electrostatic energy stored in a capacitor: U = CV 2
2
The equivalent capacitance for parallel combination is equal to the sum of individual
capacitance of capacitors.
For a series combination: The inverse of equivalent capacitance is equal to sum of
inverse of individual capacitances of capacitors.
The distribution of charges in the conductors depends on the shape of conductor.
For sharper edge, the surface charge density is greater. This principle is used in the
lightning arrestor
To create a large potential difference, a Van de Graaff generator is used.

CONCEPT MAP
ELECTROSTATICS
Point charge Coloumb’s law Dipole
Electric field Electric potential
Electric flux Electric Potential

energy
Gauss law Conductors
Van de Graff
Generator
Series Capacitors Parallel
With dielectric Without dielectric

EVALUATION
I Multiple choice questions 1 25
(a) (b)
1. Two identical point charges of 5 11
magnitude –q are fixed as shown in the 11
(c) 5 (d)
figure below. A third charge +q is placed 25
midway between the two charges at 4. An electric dipole is placed at an
the point P. Suppose this charge +q is alignment angle of 30o with an electric
displaced a small distance from the field of 2 × 105 N C-1. It experiences a
point P in the directions indicated torque equal to 8 N m. The charge on
by the arrows, in which direction(s) the dipole if the dipole length is 1 cm is
will +q be stable with respect to the (a) 4 mC (b) 8 mC
displacement?
(c) 5 mC (d) 7 mC
B1
5. Four Gaussian surfaces are given below
+q
with charges inside each Gaussian
– +
surface. Rank the electric flux through
+
A1 P A2 +q
-q
B2 each Gaussian surface in increasing
order.
(a) A1 and A2 (b) B1 and B2

(c) both directions (d) No stable
2. Which charge configuration produces A
+2q
a uniform electric field? +
B
(a) point Charge –q
–
(b) infinite uniform line charge
+q
(c) uniformly charged infinite plane +
(d) uniformly charged spherical shell D

C
q1
3. What is the ratio of the charges for
q2
the following electric field line pattern?
(a) D < C < B < A
(b) A < B = C < D
(c) C < A = B < D
(d) D > C > B > A
q1 6. The total electric flux for the following

q2
closed surface which is kept inside
water

potential difference V = Vo – VA, where
Vo is the potential at the origin and VA
is the potential at x = 2 m is:
(a) 10 J (b) – 20 J
Water
–q +2q
q (c) +20 J (d) -10J
– +
+
+q
q 10. A thin conducting spherical shell
of radius R has a charge Q which is
uniformly distributed on its surface.
The correct plot for electrostatic
potential due to this spherical shell is
80q q
(a) (b)
ε 40ε 
V V V
q q
(c) (d)
80ε  160ε 
O r O r O
R R R
7. Two identical conducting balls having (a) (b) (c)
positive charges q1 and q2 are separated
by a center to center distance r. If they
V V V V
are made to touch each other and then
separated to the same distance, the
Oforce between them
r willO be r O r O r
R R R R
(NSEP(a)04-05) (b) (c) (d)
(a) less than before
11. Two points A and B are maintained at
(b) same as before
a potential of 7 V and -4 V respectively.
(c) more than before
The work done in moving 50 electrons
(d) zero from A to B is
8. Rank the electrostatic potential (a) 8.80 × 10-17 J
energies for the given system of charges
(b) -8.80 × 10-17 J
in increasing order.
(c) 4.40 × 10-17 J
(d) 5.80 × 10-17 J
Q
+
r
-Q
–
-Q
– r
-Q
–
-Q
–
r
-2Q
– +
Q
2r
-2Q
–
12. If voltage applied on a capacitor is

increased from V to 2V, choose the
(a) (b) (c) (d)
correct conclusion.
(a) Q remains the same, C is doubled
(a) 1 = 4 < 2 < 3 (b) 2 = 4 < 3 < 1
(b) Q is doubled, C doubled
(c) 2 = 3 < 1 < 4 (d) 3 < 1 < 2 < 4
 (c) C remains same, Q doubled
9. An electric field E = 10 xi exists in (d) Both Q and C remain same
a certain region of space. Then the

13. A parallel plate capacitor stores a Answers
charge Q at a voltage V. Suppose the 1) b 2) c 3) d 4) b 5) a
area of the parallel plate capacitor and
6) b 7) c 8) a 9) b 10) b
the distance between the plates are each
doubled then which is the quantity that 11) a 12) c 13) d 14) b 15) a
will change?
(a) Capacitance II Short Answer Questions
(b) Charge 1. What is meant by quantisation of
(c) Voltage charges?
(d) Energy density 2. Write down Coulomb’s law in vector
form and mention what each term
14. Three capacitors are connected in
represents.
triangle as shown in the figure. The
equivalent capacitance between the 3. What are the differences between
points A and C is Coulomb force and gravitational
force?
2µF 4. Write a short note on superposition
A B principle.
5. Define ‘Electric field’.
2µF
6. What is mean by ‘Electric field lines’?
1µF 7. The electric field lines never intersect.
Justify.
8. Define ‘Electric dipole’
C
9. What is the general definition of
electric dipole moment?
(a) 1µF (b) 2 µF
10. Define ‘electrostatic potential”.
1
(c) 3 µF (d) µF 11. What is an equipotential surface?
4
15. Two metallic spheres of radii 1 cm and 12. What are the properties of an
3 cm are given charges of -1 x 10-2 C equipotential surface?
and 5 x 10-2 C respectively. If these are 13. Give the relation between electric field
connected by a conducting wire, the and electric potential.
final charge on the bigger sphere is 14. Define ‘electrostatic potential energy’.
(AIIPMT -2012) 15. Define ‘electric flux’
(a) 3 × 10 C -2
16. What is meant by electrostatic energy
(b) 4 × 10 C -2
density?
(c) 1 × 10-2 C 17. Write a short note on ‘electrostatic
(d) 2 × 10-2 C shielding’.
18. What is Polarisation?

19. What is dielectric strength? 14. Obtain the expression for electric field
20. Define ‘capacitance’. Give its unit. due to an uniformly charged spherical
shell.
21. What is corona discharge?
15. Discuss the various properties of
conductors in electrostatic equilibrium.
III Long Answer questions 16. Explain the process of electrostatic
1. Discuss the basic properties of electric induction.
charges. 17. Explain dielectrics in detail and how
2. Explain in detail Coulomb’s law and its an electric field is induced inside a
various aspects. dielectric.
3. Define ‘Electric field’ and discuss its 18. Obtain the expression for capacitance
various aspects. for a parallel plate capacitor.
4. How do we determine the electric 19. Obtain the expression for energy stored
field due to a continuous charge in the parallel plate capacitor.
distribution? Explain. 20. Explain in detail the effect of a dielectric
5. Calculate the electric field due to a placed in a parallel plate capacitor.
dipole on its axial line and equatorial 21. Derive the expression for resultant
plane. capacitance, when capacitors are
connected in series and in parallel.
6. Derive an expression for the torque
experienced by a dipole due to a 22. Explain in detail how charges are
uniform electric field. distributed in a conductor, and
the principle behind the lightning
7. Derive an expression for electrostatic
conductor.
potential due to a point charge.
23. Explain in detail the construction and
working of a Van de Graaff generator.
potential due to an electric dipole.
9. Obtain an expression for potential
Exercises
energy due to a collection of three
point charges which are separated by 1. When two objects are rubbed with
finite distances. each other, approximately a charge of
50 nC can be produced in each object.
Calculate the number of electrons that
potential energy of the dipole in a
must be transferred to produce this
uniform electric field.
charge.
11. Obtain Gauss law from Coulomb’s law.
Ans: 31.25 × 1010 electrons
12. Obtain the expression for electric field 2. The total number of electrons in the
due to an infinitely long charged wire. human body is typically in the order of
13. Obtain the expression for electric field 1028. Suppose, due to some reason, you
due to an charged infinite plane sheet. and your friend lost 1% of this number

of electrons. Calculate the electrostatic + -
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ -
force between you and your friend +
+
-
-
+ -
separated at a distance of 1m. Compare k
m,Q
+
→
E
+
+
-
-
+ - - v→0
this with your weight. Assume mass -
+
+ +q -q
+
+
-
of each person is 60 kg and use point
x=0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
(a) (b) (c)
charge approximation.
Ans:
Ans: Fe = 9 × 1061 N, W = 588 N
3. Five identical charges Q are placed N T
qE
equidistant on a semicircle as shown
-kx qE
in the figure. Another point charge q is QE
kept at the center of the circle of radius

mg
R. Calculate the electrostatic force mg mg
experienced by the charge q. (a) (b) (c)
N T
qE
y
-kx qE
QE
mg
Q mg mg
Q
(a) (b) (c)
R
6. Consider an electron travelling with a
Q q x speed vo and entering into a uniform

electric field E which is perpendicular
Q
Q to v as shown in the Figure.
Ignoring gravity, obtain the electron’s
acceleration, velocity and position as
1 qQ functions of time.
Ans: F =
4 πε R 2
(
1+ 2 N 
i )
4. Suppose a charge +q on Earth’s surface y
and another +q charge is placed on x

the surface of the Moon. (a) Calculate _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
the value of q required to balance the →
v0 →
E
–
gravitational attraction between Earth e P
and Moon (b) Suppose the distance
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
between the Moon and Earth is halved,

would the charge q change?
Ans :
(Take mE = 5.9 × 1024 kg, mM = 7.9 × 1022 kg) eE eE 1 eE 2
Ans: (a) q ≈ +5.64 × 1013 C, a = − j , v = v
i − tj, r = vt 
i − t j
m m 2m
(b) no change
7. A closed triangular box is kept in an
5. Draw the free body diagram for the
electric field of magnitude E = 2 × 103
following charges as shown in the
N C-1 as shown in the figure.
figure (a), (b) and (c).

separated by a gap of around 0.6 mm
15cm
gap as shown in the figure.
→
E
5cm 60°
Calculate the electric flux through

the (a) vertical rectangular surface
(b) slanted surface and (c) entire surface.
Ans: (a) 15 Nm2 C-1 (b) 15 Nm2 C-1 (c) zero
8. The electrostatic potential is given as
To create the spark, an electric field of
a function of x in figure (a) and (b).
magnitude 3 × 106 Vm-1 is required.
Calculate the corresponding electric
(a) What potential difference must be
fields in regions A, B, C and D. Plot the
applied to produce the spark? (b) If
electric field as a function of x for the
the gap is increased, does the potential
figure (b).
difference increase, decrease or
V
V remains the same? (c) find the potential
30
A C
20 difference if the gap is 1 mm.
6
B
10
3
Ans: (a) 1800 V, (b) increases (c) 3000 V
4 5
D 0 x(cm)
1 2 4
-10
2
-20 10. A point charge of +10 µC is placed
0
at a distance of 20 cm from another
-30
0.2 0.4 0.6 x(m)
(a) (b)
identical point charge of +10 µC. A
point charge of -2 µC is moved from
Ans: (a) EX = 15 Vm-1 (region A), EX = -10
point a to b as shown in the figure.
Vm-1 (region C)
Calculate the change in potential
EX = 0 (region B), EX = 30 Vm-1
energy of the system? Interpret your
(region D)
result.
V
30
20
b – –2µC
10
0
1 2 3 4 5
x(cm) 5 cm
-10
-20 5 cm 15 cm
-30
10µC + – + 10µC
a
(b)
9. A spark plug in a bike or a car is used Ans: ∆U = -3.246 J, negative sign implies
to ignite the air-fuel mixture in the that to move the charge -2µC no external
engine. It consists of two electrodes work is required. System spends its stored

energy to move the charge from point a to (a) Calculate the time of flight for both
point b. electron and proton (b) Suppose if a
11. Calculate the resultant capacitances for neutron is allowed to fall, what is the
each of the following combinations of time of flight? (c) Among the three,
capacitors. which one will reach the bottom first?
(Take mp = 1.6 x 10-27 kg, me = 9.1 x 10-31
P kg and g = 10 m s-2)
C0 C0 C0 C1 Ans: C C C
2 0 0
C0 C0
C0 C0 C0 R 2Shme P Q
C0 C0
C
(a) t e =C4 ≈ 1.5 ns (ignoring the gravity),
3 eE C0
C 0
Q
(a) (b) (c) (d) 2hme (e)
tp = ≈ 63 ns (ignoring the gravity)
P eE
C0 C1 C2 C0 C0
2h
C0 C0 P (b) tn = ≈ 14.1ms
C0 C0 R S Q g
C3 C4 C0
C0
(c) electron will reach first
Q
) (c) (d) (e)
13. During a thunder storm, the movement
of water molecules within the clouds
2 creates friction, partially causing the
Ans: (a) C (b) C (c) 3 C
3 bottom part of the clouds to become
(d) across PQ:
negatively charged. This implies
C1C2C3 + C2C3C4 + C1C2C4 + C1C3C4 that the bottom of the cloud and the
(C1 + C2 )(C3 + C4 ) ground act as a parallel plate capacitor.
across RS: If the electric field between the cloud
and ground exceeds the dielectric
C1C2C3 + C2C3C4 + C1C2C4 + C1C3C4
breakdown of the air (3 × 106 Vm-1 ),
(C1 + C2 )(C3 + C4 ) lightning will occur.
(e) across PQ: 2 Co
12. An electron and a proton are allowed + + + + + + + + + + +
to fall through the separation between + + + + + + + + + + +
the plates of a parallel plate capacitor of + Positive charge
voltage 5 V and separation distance h =

1 mm as shown in the figure.
– – – – – – – – – –
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Electron Neutron y Proton

-
+
x
– Negative charge
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – –
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+

(a) If the bottom part of the cloud is 1000 Ans:
m above the ground, determine the Qa = 24 µC, Qb = 18 µC,
electric potential difference that exists Qc = 6 µC, Qd = 24 µC
between the cloud and ground. Va = 3V, Vb = 3V,
(b) In a typical lightning phenomenon, Vc = 3V, Vd = 3V,
around 25C of electrons are transferred Ua = 36 µJ, Ub = 27 µJ,
from cloud to ground. How much Uc = 9 µJ, Ud = 36 µJ
electrostatic potential energy is 15. Capacitors P and Q have identical cross
transferred to the ground? sectional areas A and separation d. The
Ans: (a) V = 3 × 109 V, (b) U = 75 × 109 J space between the capacitors is filled
14. For the given capacitor configuration with a dielectric of dielectric constant
(a) Find the charges on each capacitor εr as shown in the figure. Calculate the
(b) potential difference across them capacitance of capacitors P and Q.
(c) energy stored in each capacitor
6µF
c d P Q
8µF 2µF 8µF
a
ε A 2ε A  ε 
+ - Ans : CP = (1 + εr ), CQ =   r 
9V 2d d 1 + ε r 
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Douglas C.Giancoli, , “Physics for Scientist & Engineers with Modern Physics”, Pearson
Prentice Hall, Fourth edition
2. James Walker, “Physics”, Pearson- Addison Wesley Publishers, Fourth Edition
3. Purcell, Morin, “Electricity and Magnetism”, “Cambridge University Press, Third Edition.
4. Serway and Jewett, “Physics for Scientist and Engineers with Modern Physics”, Brook/Coole
Publishers, Eighth Edition
5. Tipler, Mosca, “Physics for scientist and Engineers with Modern Physics”, Freeman and
Company, Sixth Edition
6. Tarasov and Tarasova, “Questions and problems in School Physics”, Mir Publishers
7. H.C.Verma, “Concepts of Physics: Vol 2, Bharthi Bhawan Publishers
8. Eric Roger, Physics for the Inquiring Mind, Princeton University Press

ICT CORNER
Electrostatics
In this activity you will be able to learn Topic: Capacitor lab

about capacitor and the factors affecting
capacitance.
STEPS:
• Open the browser and type “phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/legacy/capacitor-lab” in the
address bar. Go to the tab ‘Dielectric’.
• Change the plate area, distance between the plate and dielectric. Identify what you would
maximize or minimize to make a capacitor with the greatest capacitance.
• Explore the relationships between charge, voltage, and stored energy for a capacitor. Design
a capacitor system to store the greatest energy.
• Charge the capacitor with 1.0 v using the battery. Disconnect the battery. Now insert a
dielectric between the plates. Discus how electric field changes in between the plates when
dielectric is introduced.
• What is the effect of introducing a dielectric between plates? (Change dielectric materials)
Step1 Step2
Step3 Step4
Connect capacitors parallel and series combination and find the effective capacitance.
Note:
Install Java application if it is not in your system. You can download all the phet
simulation and works in off line from https://phet.colorado.edu/en/offline-access .
URL:
https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/legacy/capacitor-lab
* Pictures are indicative only.
* If browser requires, allow Flash Player or Java Script to load the page.

UNIT
2 CURRENT ELECTRICITY
We will make electricity so cheap that only the rich will burn candles
– Thomas A. Edison
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
In this unit, the student is exposed to

• Flow of charges in a metallic conductor
• Ohm’s law, electrical resistance, V-I characteristics
• Carbon resistors and combination of resistors
• Kirchhoff ’s laws - Wheatstone’s bridge and its applications
• Electric power and Electric energy
• Heating effect - Joule’s law – Experimental verification and applications
• Thermoelectric effects – Seebeck effect – Peltier effect – Thomson effect
In unit 1, we studied the properties of charges

INTRODUCTION when it is at rest. In reality, the charges are
always moving within the materials. For
example, the electrons in a copper wire are
never at rest and are continuously in random
motion. Therefore it is important to analyse
the behaviour of charges when it is at motion.
The motion of charges is called ‘electric current’.
Current electricity is the study of flow of electric
charges. It owes its origin to Alessandro Volta
(1745-1827), who invented the electric battery
which produced the first steady flow of electric
current. Modern world depends heavily on the
use of electricity. It is used to operate machines,
communication systems, electronic devices,
home appliances etc., In this unit, we will study
about the electric current, resistance and related
phenomenon in materials.
82

2.1 charges from one end of the conductor to
other end and hence no current. When a
ELECTRIC CURRENT potential difference is applied by the battery
across the ends of the conductor, the free
electrons drift towards the positive terminal
Matter is made up of atoms. Each atom of the battery, producing a net electric
consists of a positively charged nucleus with current. This is easily understandable from
negatively charged electrons moving around the analogy given in the Figure 2.1.
the nucleus. Atoms in metals have one or In the XI Volume 2, unit 6, we studied,
more electrons which are loosely bound to that the mass move from higher gravitational
the nucleus. These electrons are called free potential to lower gravitational potential.
electrons and can be easily detached from Likewise, positive charge flows from higher
the atoms. The substances which have an electric potential to lower electric potential
abundance of these free electrons are called and negative charge flows from lower
conductors. These free electrons move at electric potential to higher electric potential.
random throughout the conductor at a So battery or electric cell simply creates
given temperature. In general due to this potential difference across the conductor.
random motion, there is no net transfer of
High potential
Equal potential
Flow of water
No water flow Low potential
(a) Equal gravitational (b) Water flows from high gravitational potential
potential-No water flow to low gravitational potential
(c) (d) I
B A
–
Copper wire
+
A B
End A and B are at same A is at higher electric potential

electric potential. Hence no th
than BB. SSo currentt flows
fl f
from
current A to B
Figure 2.1 Water current and Electric current
Unit 2 CURRENT ELECTRICIT Y 83

The electric current in a conductor is E X A M P L E 2. 1
defined as the rate of flow of charges through
a given cross-sectional area A. It is shown in Compute the current in the wire if a charge
the Figure 2.2. of 120 C is flowing through a copper wire
in 1 minute.
Solution
+
+ The current (rate of flow of charge) in the
+ wire is
+ Q 120
+ I= = = 2A
A t 60
I
2.1.1 Conventional Current
Figure 2.2 Charges flow across the area A
Direction of current
I
If a net charge Q passes through any
cross section of a conductor in time t, then
+
Q V
the current is defined as I = . But charge –
t
flow is not always constant. Hence current
can more generally be defined as
Flow of electrons
∆Q
I avg = (2.1) Figure 2.3 Direction of conventional
∆t
current and electron flow
Where ∆Q is the amount of charge that
passes through the conductor at any cross In an electric circuit, arrow heads are used
section during the time interval ∆t. If the to indicate the direction of flow of current.
rate at which charge flows changes in time, By convention, this flow in the circuit should
the current also changes. The instantaneous be from the positive terminal of the battery
current I is defined as the limit of the average to the negative terminal. This current is
current, as ∆t ® 0 called the conventional current or simply
∆Q dQ current and is in the direction in which a
I = lim = (2.2)
∆t →0 ∆t dt positive test charge would move. In typical
circuits the charges that flow are actually
The SI unit of current is the ampere (A) electrons, from the negative terminal of
1C the battery to the positive. As a result, the
1A =
1s flow of electrons and the
direction of conventional
That is, 1A of current is equivalent to
current points in opposite
1 Coulomb of charge passing through a
direction as shown in
perpendicular cross section in 1second. The
Figure 2.3. Mathematically,
electric current is a scalar quantity.
a transfer of positive charge
84 Unit 2 CURRENT ELECTRICIT Y

is the same as a transfer of negative charge electric field accelerates the electrons, while
in the opposite direction. ions scatter the electrons and change the
direction of motion. Thus, we have zigzag
paths of electrons. In addition to the zigzag
motion due to the collisions, the electrons
move slowly along the conductor  in a
direction opposite to that of E as shown in
the Figure 2.4.
Ions
Any material is made up of neutral
atoms with equal number of electrons
Electric current is not only produced and protons. If the outermost electrons
by batteries. In nature, lightning bolt leave the atoms, they become free
produces enormous electric current electrons and are responsible for
in a short time. During lightning, very electric current. The atoms after losing
high potential difference is created their outer most electrons will have
between the clouds and ground so more positive charges and hence are
charges flow between the clouds and called positive ions. These ions will not
ground. move freely within the material like the
free electrons. Hence the positive ions
will not give rise to current.
2.1.2 Drift velocity
In a conductor the charge carriers
are free electrons. These electrons move →
vd
freely through the conductor and collide
repeatedly with the positive ions. If there
is no electric field, the electrons move in –
random directions, so the directions of
their velocities are also completely random
direction. On an average, the number of -
electrons travelling in any direction will be
equal to the number of electrons travelling
in the opposite direction. As a result, there is →
E
no net flow of electrons in any direction and
hence there will not be any current.
Figure 2.4 Electric current
Suppose a potential difference is set
across the conductor by connecting a 
battery, an electric field E is created in the This velocity is called drift velocity vd . The
conductor. This electric field exerts a force drift velocity is the average velocity acquired
on the electrons, producing a current. The by the electrons inside the conductor when

it is subjected to an electric field. The E X A M P L E 2. 2
average time between successive collisions is
called the mean free time denoted by τ. The If an electric field of magnitude 570
 N C-1, is applied in the copper wire, find the
acceleration a experienced
 by the electron
in an electric field E is given by acceleration experienced by the electron.

 −eE  
a=
m
(since F = −eE ) (2.3) Solution:
 E = 570 N C-1, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C,
The drift velocity vd is given by
  m = 9.11 × 10-31 kg and a = ?
vd = a τ
F = ma = eE
 eτ 
vd = − E (2.4) eE
m 570×1.6×10−19
 a= =
 m 9.11×10−31
vd = −µE (2.5)
912×10−19 ×1031
eτ =
Here µ = is the mobility of the 9.11
m
electron and it is defined as the magnitude = 1.001 × 1014 m s-2
of the drift velocity per unit electric field.
Misconception

vd here is a common misconception that
(i) T
µ=  (2.6)
E the battery is the source of electrons. It
m2 is not true. When a battery is connected
The SI unit of mobility is . across the given wire, the electrons in the
Vs
closed circuit resulting the current. Battery
The typical drift velocity of sets the potential difference (electrical
Note electrons in the wire is 10-4 m s-1. energy) due to which these electrons in
If an electron drifts with this the conducting wire flow in a particular
speed, then the electrons leaving direction. The resulting electrical energy
the battery will take hours to reach the is used by electric bulb, electric fan etc.
light bulb. Then how electric bulbs glow
Similarly the electricity board is supplying
as soon as we switch on the battery?
When battery is switched on, the electrons
the electrical energy to our home.
begin to move away from the negative (ii) We often use the phrases like ‘charging
terminal of the battery and this electron the battery in my mobile’ and ‘my
exerts force on the nearby electrons. This mobile phone battery has no charge’
process creates a propagating influence etc. These sentences are not correct.
(electric field) that travels through the
wire at the speed of light. In other words,
the energy is transported from the battery
to light bulb at the speed of light through
propagating influence (electric field). Due
to this reason, the light bulb glows as soon
as the battery is switched on.

When we say ‘battery has no charge’, Substituting for dx from equation (2.7)
it means, that the battery has lost ability in (2.8)
to provide energy or provide potential = (A vd dt ) n
difference to the electrons in the circuit. Total charge in volume element dQ =
When we say ‘mobile is charging’, it implies (charge) × (number of electrons in the
that the battery is receiving energy from AC volume element)
power supply and not electrons.
dQ = (e)(Avddt)n
dQ neAv d dt
2.1.3 Microscopic model of Hence the current I = =
dt dt
current
I = ne Avd .(2.9)
Consider a conductor with area of cross
section A and an electric field E applied from Current density (J)
right to left. Suppose there are n electrons per The current density ( J ) is defined as the
unit volume in the conductor and assume current per unit area of cross section of the
that all the electrons move with the same conductor.
 I
drift velocity vd as shown in Figure 2.5. J=
A
The S.I unit of current density is A2 (or) A m-2
dx m
neAvd
J= (from equation 2.9)
A
→
v
- d J = ne vd (2.10)
A
The above expression is valid only when
e -
the direction of the current is perpendicular
to the area A. In general, the current density
vd dt is a vector quantity and it is given by
 
J = nevd
Figure 2.5 Microscopic model of current

Substituting vd from equation (2.4)
The drift velocity of the electrons = vd  n ⋅ e2 τ 
J =− E (2.11)
The electrons move through a distance m
dx within a small interval of dt  
J = −σE
vd = dx ; dx = vd dt(2.7) But conventionally, we take the direction
dt of (conventional) current density as the
Since A is the area of cross section of direction of electric field. So the above
the conductor, the electrons available in the equation becomes
 
volume of length dx is J = σE (2.12)
= volume × number per unit volume ne 2 τ
where σ = is called conductivity.
m
= Adx ń(2.8) The equation 2.12 is called microscopic
form of ohm’s law.

The inverse of conductivity is called E X A M P L E 2. 4
resistivity (ρ ) [Refer section 2.2.1].
Determine the number of electrons flowing
1 m per second through a conductor, when a
ρ= = 2 (2.13)
σ ne τ current of 32 A flows through it.
Solution
E X A M P L E 2. 3
A copper wire of cross-sectional area I = 32 A , t = 1 s
0.5 mm2 carries a current of 0.2 A. If the free Charge of an electron, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
electron density of copper is 8.4 × 1028 m-3
then compute the drift velocity of free The number of electrons flowing per
electrons. second, n =?
Solution I=
q ne
=
t t
The relation between drift velocity of
electrons and current in a wire of cross- It
n=
sectional area A is e
I 0. 2 32×1
vd = = n=
ne A 8.4 ×10 ×1.6×10−19 ×0.5×10−6
28
1.6×10−19 C
vd = 0.03 x 10-3 m s-1 n = 20 × 1019 = 2 × 1020 electrons
2.2
Why current density is a vector OHM’S LAW

Note but current is a scalar?
In general, the current I is
defined as the scalar product of the The ohm’s law can be derived from the
current density and area vector in which equation J = σE. Consider a segment of wire
the charges cross. of length l and cross sectional area A as
The current I can be positive or negative

depending on the choice of the unit l
vector normal to the surface area A.
A I
S

A →
A

E
A
JJ
I = JA cos
V
Figure 2.6 Current is a scalar
Figure 2.7 Current through the conductor

When a potential difference V is applied of resistance R of the conductor. It is shown
across the wire, a net electric field is created in the Figure 2.8 (a).
in the wire which constitutes the current.
For simplicity, we assume that the electric I I
field is uniform in the entire length of the
wire, the potential difference (voltage V)
can be written as
V = El
As we know, the magnitude of current
density Slope =
1
R
V
J = σE = σ (2.14) V
l
But J = I , so we write the equation (a) (b)
(2.14) as A
I I
I V
=σ .
A l
By rearranging the above equation, we
get
 l 
V = I  (2.15) 1
 σA  Slope =
R
l V
The quantity is called resistance of V
σA
the conductor and it is denoted as (a)R. Note (b)
that the resistance is directly proportional Figure 2.8 Current against voltage for
to the length of the conductor and inversely (a) a conductor which obey Ohm’s law
proportional to area of cross section. and (b) for a non-ohmic device (Diode
Therefore, the macroscopic form of given in XII physics, unit 9 is an example
ohm’s law can be stated as of a non-ohmic device)
V = IR (2.16)
Materials for which the current against
voltage graph is a straight line through the
From the above equation, the resistance
origin, are said to obey Ohm’s law and their
is the ratio of potential difference across
behaviour is said to be ohmic as shown in
the given conductor to the current passing
Figure 2.8(a). Materials or devices that do
through the conductor.
not follow Ohm’s law are said to be non-
V
R= (2.17) ohmic. These materials have more complex
I
relationships between voltage and current.
The SI unit of resistance is ohm (Ω). A plot of I against V for a non-ohmic
From the equation (2.16), we infer that the material is non-linear and they do not have
graph between current versus voltage is a constant resistance (Figure 2.8(b)).
straight line with a slope equal to the inverse

E X A M P L E 2. 5 proportionality constant ρ is called the
resistivity of the material.
A potential difference across 24 Ω resistor
is 12 V. What is the current through the If l = 1 m and A = 1 m2, then the resistance R
resistor? = ρ. In other words, the electrical resistivity
of a material is defined as the resistance
Solution
offered to current flow by a conductor
of unit length having unit area of cross
24 Ω section. The SI unit of ρ is ohm-metre
(Ω m). Based on the resistivity, materials are
classified as conductors, insulators and semi-
I
12 V
conductors. The conductors have lowest
+ – resistivity, insulators have highest resistivity
and semiconductors have resistivity greater
than conductors but less than insulators. The
typical resistivity values of some conductors,
V = 12 V and R = 24 Ω
insulators and semiconductors are given in
Current, I = ?
V 12 the Table 2.1
From Ohm’s law, I = = = 0.5 A
R 24
Table 2.1 Resistivity for various
2.2.1 Resistivity materials
In the previous section, we have seen that Resistivity, ρ (Ω m)
Material
the resistance R of any conductor is given by at 200C
l Insulators
R= (2.18)
σA Pure Water 2.5 × 105
where σ is called the conductivity of the Glass 1010 - 1014
material and it depends only on the type of Hard Rubber 1013 - 1016
the material used and not on its dimension.
NaCl - 1014
The resistivity of a material is equal to
the reciprocal of its conductivity. Fused Quartz - 1016
Semiconductors
1
ρ = (2.19) Germanium 0.46
σ
Silicon 640
Now we can rewrite equation (2.18)
using equation (2.19) Conductors
l Silver 1.6 × 10-8

R = ρ (2.20)
A Copper 17 × 10-8
The resistance of a material is directly Aluminium 2.7 × 10-8
proportional to the length of the conductor Tungsten 5.6 × 10-8
and inversely proportional to the area Iron 10 × 10-8
of cross section of the conductor. The

E X A M P L E 2. 6 B
C
B
C
The resistance of a wire is 20 Ω. What A A
will be new resistance, if it is stretched + – +

–
uniformly 8 times its original length? I = IAB
I= ?
(a) V (b) V
Solution
If a potential difference of V is applied
R1 = 20 Ω, R2= ?
between the two faces A and B of the block
Let the original length (l1) be l. (figure (a)), the current IAB is observed.
The new length, l2 = 8l1 (i.,e) l2 =8l Find the current that flows if the same
potential difference V is applied between
l1
The original resistance, R1 = ρ the two faces B and C of the block (figure
A1
(b)). Give your answers in terms of IAB.
l2 ρ(8l )
The new resistance R2 = ρ =
A2 A2 Solution
Though the wire is stretched, its volume is In the first case, the resistance of the block
unchanged.
length C
Initial volume = Final volume RAB = ρ =ρ
Area AB
A1l1= A2l2 , A1l = A28l V V AB
The current I AB = = ⋅ (1)
A1 8l RAB ρ C
= =8
A2 l In the second case, the resistance of the
y dividing equation R2 by equation R1,
B block RBC = ρ A
BC
we get V V BC
The current I BC = = ⋅ (2)
R2 ρ(8l ) A1 RBC ρ A
= ×
R1 A2 ρl
To express IBC interms of IAB, we multiply
R2 A1 and divide equation (2) by AC, we get
= ×8
R1 A2
A1 V BC AC V AB  C 2 C 2
Substituting the value of , we get I BC = ⋅ = ⋅ ⋅ = ⋅ I AB
A2 ρ A AC  ρ C  A2 A2
R2
= 8×8 = 64 Since C > A, the current IBC > IAB
R1
R2 = 64 × 20=1280 Ω
Hence, stretching the length of the wire has The human body contains a large
increased its resistance. amount of water which has low
resistance of around 200 Ω and
the dry skin has high resistance of
E X A M P L E 2. 7
around 500 k Ω. But when the skin is wet, the
Consider a rectangular block of metal of resistance is reduced to around1000 Ω. This is
the reason, repairing the electrical connection
height A, width B and length C as shown
with the wet skin is always dangerous.
in the figure.

and R3 since the charges cannot accumulate
2.2.2 Resistors in series and
anywhere in the circuit. Due to this reason, the
parallel
current I passing through all the three resistors
An electric circuit may contain a number is the same. According to Ohm’s law, if same
of resistors which can be connected in current pass through different resistors of
different ways. For each type of circuit, different values, then the potential difference
we can calculate the equivalent resistance across each resistor must be different. Let V1,
produced by a group of individual resistors. V2 and V3 be the potential difference (voltage)
Resistors in series across each of the resistors R1, R2 and R3
When two or more resistors are connected respectively, then we can write V1 = IR1, V2 = IR2
end to end, they are said to be in series. The and V3 = IR3. But the total voltage V is equal to
resistors could be simple resistors or bulbs the sum of voltages across each resistor.
or heating elements or other devices. Figure
V = V1 + V2 + V3 = IR1 + IR2 + IR3(2.21)
2.9 (a) shows three resistors R1, R2 and R3
connected in series. V = I (R1 + R2 + R3)
The amount of charge passing through
resistor R1 must also pass through resistors R2 V = I.RS (2.22)
R1
I I where RS is the equivalent resistance,
V1
RS= R1 + R2 + R3(2.23)
+
V V2 R2
–
When several resistances are connected
V3
I
in series, the total or equivalent resistance
I
R3 is the sum of the individual resistances as
(a) Three resistors in series shown in the Figure 2.9 (b).
I Note: The value of equivalent resistance
in series connection will be greater than
each individual resistance.
+
V RS
–
E X A M P L E 2. 8
Calculate the equivalent resistance for the
(b) Equivalent resistance (RS) has the same current circuit which is connected to 24 V battery
and also find the potential difference across
Resistor
4 Ω and 6 Ω resistors in the circuit.
1kΩ
+
Battery
Resistor
R1 R2
2kΩ
–
4Ω 6Ω
Resistor
3kΩ
I
I
(c) Resistors in series (Actual photo )
Figure 2.9 Resistors in series + -

24 V

Solution I
Since the resistors are connected in series, I1 I2 I3
the effective resistance in the circuit +

V R1 R2 R3 V
–
= 4 Ω + 6 Ω = 10 Ω
V 24
The Current I in the circuit = = = 2. 4 A
Req 10 I
(a) Three resistors in parallel
Voltage across 4Ω resistor I
V1 = IR1 = 2.4 A× 4Ω = 9.6V
Voltage across 6 Ω resistor +

RP
–
V2 = IR1 = 2.4 A×6 Ω = 14.4 V
Resistors in parallel I
(b) Equivalent resistance (RP) has the same current
Resistors are in parallel when they are
connected across the same potential
1kΩ
difference as shown in Figure 2.10 (a).
In this case, the total current I that leaves
2kΩ
the battery is split into three separate paths.
Let I1, I2 and I3 be the current through the 3kΩ
resistors R1, R2 and R3 respectively. Due to
Battery
the conservation of charge, total current in
– +
the circuit I is equal to sum of the currents
through each of the three resistors.
(c) Resistors in parallel(Actual photo)
I = I1 + I2 + I3(2.24)
Figure 2.10 Resistors in parallel
Since the voltage across each resistor
Here RP is the equivalent resistance of the
is the same, applying Ohm’s law to each
parallel combination of the resistors. Thus,
resistor, we have
when a number of resistors are connected
V V V in parallel, the sum of the reciprocal of the
I1 = , I 2 = , I 3 = (2.25)
R1 R2 R3 values of resistance of the individual resistor
Substituting these values in equation is equal to the reciprocal of the effective
(2.24),we get resistance of the combination as shown in
the Figure 2.10 (b)
V V V 1 1 1
I= + + =V  + +  Note: The value of equivalent resistance
R1 R2 R3 R 
 1 R2 R3  in parallel connection will be lesser than
V each individual resistance.
I= House hold appliances are always
RP
connected in parallel so that even if one
1 1 1 1
= + + (2.26) is switched off, the other devices could
RP R1 R2 R3
function properly.

E X A M P L E 2. 9 Solution
Calculate the equivalent resistance in the Rs = R1 + R2 = 15 Ω (1)

following circuit and also find the current R1R2 56
RP = = Ω (2)
I, I1 and I2 in the given circuit. R1 + R2 15
rom equation (1) substituting for R1 + R2
F
R1
in equation (2)
4Ω
R1R2 56
I1
R2 = Ω
15 15
6Ω
I
I2
∴ R1R2 = 56
+ –
R2 = 56 Ω (3)
24 V 15
Substituting for R2 in equation (1) from
Solution equation (3)
Since the resistances are connected in 56
R1 + = 15
parallel, therefore, the equivalent resistance R1
in the circuit is R12 + 56
Then, = 15
R1
1 1 1 1 1
= + = + R12+ 56 = 15 R1
RP R1 R2 4 6
1 5 12
= Ω or RP = Ω R12-15 R1+ 56 = 0
RP 12 5
he above equation can be solved using
T
The resistors are connected in parallel, the factorisation.
potential (voltage) across each resistor is
R12-8 R1-7 R1+ 56 = 0
the same.
R1 (R1– 8) – 7 (R1– 8) = 0
V 24V
I1 = = = 6A (R1– 8) (R1– 7) = 0
R1 6Ω
V 24 If (R1= 8 Ω)
I2 = = = 4A
R2 6
using in equation (1)
The current I is the total of the currents in
the two branches. Then, 8 + R2 = 15
I = I1 + I2= 6 A + 4 A = 10 A R2 = 15 – 8 = 7 Ω ,
R2 = 7 Ω i.e , (when R1 = 8 Ω ; R2 = 7 Ω)
E X A M P L E 2. 10
If (R1= 7 Ω)
When two resistances connected in series
Substituting in equation (1)
and parallel their equivalent resistances
56 7 + R2 = 15
are 15 Ω and Ω respectively. Find the
15 R2 = 8 Ω , i.e , (when R1 = 8 Ω ; R2 = 7 Ω )
individual resistances.

E X A M P L E 2. 11
1Ω 2Ω 3Ω
Calculate the equivalent resistance between A B

A and B in the given circuit.
Equivalent resistance between A and B is
2Ω 4Ω 6Ω
A B 6Ω
2Ω 4Ω 6Ω
A B
Solution
Parallel connection
E X A M P L E 2. 1 2
Part 1
Five resistors are connected in the
1 1 1
= + configuration as shown in the figure.
R p1 R1 R2
Calculate the equivalent resistance between
1 1 1 2 the points a and b.
= + = R p1 = 1Ω
R p1 2 2 2
c
4Ω 6Ω
1Ω 1Ω 1Ω
A RP1 B
4Ω 6Ω
5Ω
a b
Part II
1Ω 1Ω
1 1 1 2 1 1
= + = , = , R p2 = 2 Ω
R p2 4 4 4 R p 2 d
2
6Ω
Solution
1Ω 6Ω
A
R
B Case (a)
P2
6Ω
To find the equivalent resistance between
the points a and b, we assume that current
Part III
is entering the junction a. Since all the
1 1 1 2 resistances in the outside loop are the same
= + =
R p3 6 6 6 (1Ω), the current in the branches ac and
1 1 ad must be equal. So the electric potential
= , R p3 = 3 Ω
R p3 3 at the point c and d is the same hence no
current flows into 5 Ω resistance. It implies
R = R p1 + R p2 + R p3 that the 5 Ω has no role in determining
the equivalent resistance and it can be
R=1+2+3R=6Ω
removed. So the circuit is simplified as
The circuit became: shown in the figure.

1Ω 1Ω Table 2.2 Color Coding for Resistors
1/2Ω 1/2Ω 1Ω
Color Number Multiplier Tolerance
a c, d b a b
a c, d b
1Ω 1Ω Black 0 1
Brown 1 101
1Ω
1/2Ω 1/2Ω
Red 1Ω 2 102
Orange 3 103
a c, d b a b
c, d b Yellow 4 104
1Ω
Green 5 105
Blue 6 106
Violet 7 107
1/2Ω 1/2Ω 1Ω
Gray 8 108
a c, d b a b
White 9 109
Gold 10−1 5%
Sliver 10−2 10%
The equivalent resistance of the circuit
between a and b is Req = 1Ω Colorless 20%
shows the tolerance of the resistor at 10% or

2.2.3 Color code for Carbon 5% as shown in the Figure 2.12 .If there is no
resistors fourth ring, the tolerance is 20%.
For the resistor shown in Figure 2.12,
the first digit = 5 (green), the second digit
= 6 (blue), decimal multiplier = 103 (orange)
and tolerance = 5% (gold). The value of
resistance = 56 × 103 Ω or 56 kΩ with the
Figure 2.11 Resistance used in our tolerance value 5%.
laboratory
While reading the colour code,
Note hold the resistor with colour
Carbon resistors consists of a ceramic
bands to your left. Resistors
core, on which a thin layer of crystalline
never start with a metallic band on the left.
carbon is deposited as shown in Figure 2.11.
These resistors are inexpensive, stable and Decimal
multiplier Tolerance
compact in size. Color rings are used to (metallic band)
indicate the value of the resistance according
to the rules given in the Table 2.2.
Three coloured rings are used to indicate
the values of a resistor: the first two rings First digit
Second digit
are significant figures of resistances, the
third ring indicates the decimal multiplier
Figure 2.12 Resistor color coding
after them. The fourth color, silver or gold,

increase in temperature according to the
expression,
ρT = ρ 1 + α (T − T ) (2.27)
where ρT is the resistivity of a conductor

Measuring current
at T oC, ρo is the resistivity of the conductor
at some reference temperature To (usually at
o
C) and α is theMeasuring
Measuring20resistance temperature
voltagecoefficient
of resistivity. It is defined as the ratio of
increase in resistivity per degree rise in
temperature to its resistivity at To.
From the equation (2.27), we can write
Measuring current
ρT − ρ = α ρ (T − T )
Measuring resistance Measuring voltage ρT − ρ ∆ρ

∴α= =
ρ (T − T ) ρ ∆T
where ∆ρ = ρT – ρo is change in resistivity

for a change in temperature ∆T = T – To. Its
unit is per oC.
α of conductors
For conductors α is positive. If the
temperature of a conductor increases, the
average kinetic energy of electrons in the
Measuring resistance Measuring voltage conductor increases. This results in more
A multimeter is a very useful frequent collisions and hence the resistivity
electronic instrument used to increases. The graph of the equation (2.27)
measure voltage, current, resistance is shown in Figure 2.13
and capacitance. In fact, it can also Even though, the resistivity of conductors
measure AC voltage and AC current. like metals varies linearly for wide range
The circular slider has to be kept in of temperatures, there also exists a non-
appropriate position to measure each linear region at very low temperatures. The
electrical quantity. resistivity approaches some finite value as
the temperature approaches absolute zero as
shown in Figure 2.13(b).
As the resistance is directly proportional
2.2.4 Temperature to resistivity of the material, we can also write
dependence of resistivity the resistance of a conductor at temperature
The resistivity of a material is dependent T oC as
on temperature. It is experimentally found
that for a wide range of temperatures, the
RT = R 1 + α (T − T ) (2.28)
resistivity of a conductor increases with

(Ωm)
ρ
ρ (Ωm)
0 T
(K)
T(K)
ρ0
0
T
Figure 2.14 Temperature dependence of
resistivity for a semiconductor
Figure 2.13 (a) Temperature

dependence of resistivity for a conductor
Table 2.3
(b) Non linear region at low temperature
Temperature
Color
Coefficient α [(°C)−1]
The temperature coefficient can be also Silver 3.8 × 10−3
be obtained from the equation (2.28),
Copper 3.9 × 10−3
RT − R = α R (T − T )
Gold 3.4 × 10−3
RT − R 1 ∆R
∴α= = Aluminum 3.9 × 10−3
R (T − T ) R ∆T
1 ∆R Tungsten 4.5 × 10−3
α= (2.29)
R ∆T Iron 5.0 × 10−3
where ∆R = RT − R is change in resistance Platinum 3.92 × 10−3
during the change in temperature ∆T = T − T Lead 3.9 × 10−3
α of semiconductors Nichrome 0.4 × 10−3
For semiconductors, the resistivity Carbon −0.5 × 10−3
decreases with increase in temperature. As Germanium −48 × 10−3
the temperature increases, more electrons Silicon −75 × 10−3
will be liberated from their atoms (Refer
unit 9 for conduction in semi conductors). We can understand the temperature
Hence the current increases and therefore dependence of resistivity in the following
the resistivity decreases as shown in Figure way. In section 2.1.3, we have shown that
2.14. A semiconductor with a negative ne 2 τ
the electrical conductivity, σ = . As the
temperature coefficient of resistance is m
called a thermistor. resistivity is inverse of σ, it can be written as,
The typical values of temperature
m
coefficients of various materials are given in ρ= (2.30)
ne 2 τ
table 2.3.

The resistivity of materials is E X A M P L E 2. 1 4
i) inversely proportional to the number
density (n) of the electrons Resistance of a material at 100C and 400C
ii) inversely proportional to the average are 45 Ω and 85 Ω respectively. Find its
time between the collisions (τ). temperature co-efficient of resistance.
In metals, if the temperature increases, Solution
the average time between the collision (τ)
decreases and n is independent of temperature. T0 = 10 0C, T = 40 0C, R0= 45 Ω , R = 85 Ω
In semiconductors when temperature 1 ∆R
α=
increases, n increases and τ decreases, but R ∆T
increase in n is dominant than decreasing τ, 1  85 − 45  1  40 
so that overall resistivity decreases. α=   =  
45  40 −10  45  30 
α = 0.0296 per C
The resistance of certain
materials become zero below
certain temperature Tc. 2.3
This temperature is known as critical
ENERGY AND POWER IN
temperature or transition temperature.
ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
The materials which exhibit this property
are known as superconductors. This
phenomenon was first observed by When a battery is connected between the
Kammerlingh Onnes in 1911. He found
ends of a conductor, a current is established.
that mercury exhibits superconductor
The battery is transporting energy to the
behaviour at 4.2 K. Since R = 0, current
device which is connected in the circuit.
once induced in a superconductor persists
Consider a circuit in which a battery of
without any potential difference.
voltage V is connected to the resistor as
E X A M P L E 2. 13 I
If the resistance of coil is 3 Ω at 20 0C and b c

α = 0.004/0C then determine its resistance
+
at 100 0C.
- V R
Solution
a d
R0= 3 Ω, T = 100 C, T0 = 20 C
0 0
α = 0.004/0C, RT= ?
RT= R0(1 + α(T-T0)) Figure 2.15 Energy given by the battery
R100 = 3(1 + 0.004 × 80)
R100 = 3(1 + 0.32) Assume that a positive charge of dQ
R100 = 3(1.32) moves from point a to b through the battery
R100 = 3.96 Ω and moves from point c to d through the
resistor and back to point a. When the charge

moves from point a to b, it gains potential Usually these voltage rating refers AC
energy dU = V.dQ and the chemical potential RMS voltages. For a given bulb, if the voltage
energy of the battery decreases by the drop across the bulb is greater than voltage
same amount. When this charge dQ passes rating, the bulb will fuse.
through resistor it loses the potential energy
Using Ohm’s law, power delivered to the
dU = V.dQ due to collision with atoms in the
resistance R is expressed in other forms
resistor and again reaches the point a. This
process occurs continuously till the battery
is connected in the circuit. The rate at which P = IV = I (IR) = I2R(2.33)
the charge loses its electrical potential
energy in the resistor can be calculated. V V2
P = IV = V= (2.34)
The electrical power P is the rate at which R R
the electrical potential energy is delivered,
dV d dQ The electrical power

P= = (V .dQ ) = V (2.31)
dt dt dt
produced (dissipated) by
dQ a resistor is I2R. It depends
Since the electric current I = .
dt on the square of the current. Hence,
So the equation (2.31) can be rewritten as if current is doubled, the power
will increase by four times. Similar
P = VI(2.32) explanation holds true for voltage also.
This expression gives the power delivered

by the battery to any electrical system, where The total energy used by any device
I is the current passing through it and V is is obtained by multiplying the power and
the potential difference across it. The SI unit duration of the time when it is ON. If the
of electrical power is watt (1W = 1 J s-1). power is in watts and the time is in seconds,
Commercially, the electrical bulbs used in the energy will be in joules. In practice,
houses come with the power and voltage electrical energy is measured in kilowatt
rating of 5W-220V, 30W-220V, 60W-220V hour (kWh). 1 kWh is known as 1 unit of
etc. (Figure 2.16). electrical energy.
(1 kWh = 1000 Wh = (1000 W) (3600 s)
= 3.6 x 106 J)
The Tamilnadu
Electricity Board is charging
for the amount of energy you
use and not for the power. A current
of 1A flowing through a potential
difference of 1V produces a power of
Figure 2.16 Electrical bulbs with power
rating 1W.

E X A M P L E 2. 15 that, the 30W has twice as much as
A battery of voltage V is connected to resistance as 60 W bulb.
30 W bulb and 60 W bulb as shown in (c) When these two bulbs are connected
the figure. (a) Identify brightest bulb in series, the current passing through
(b) which bulb has greater resistance? each bulb is the same. It is equivalent
(c) Suppose the two bulbs are connected in to two resistors connected in series.
series, which bulb will glow brighter? The bulb which has higher resistance
30W has higher voltage drop. So 30W
bulb will glow brighter than 60W
bulb. So the higher power rating does
not always imply more brightness
e f and it depends whether bulbs are
60W connected in series or parallel.
E X A M P L E 2. 1 6
c d Two electric bulbs marked 20 W – 220 V
and 100 W – 220 V are connected in series
– to 440 V supply. Which bulb will be fused?
a
+
b
V Solution
To check which bulb will be fused, the
Solution voltage drop across each bulb has to be
he power delivered by the battery
(a) T calculated.
P = VI. Since the bulbs are connected The resistance of a bulb,
in parallel, the voltage drop across
2
each bulb is the same. If the voltage is V 2 (Rated voltage)
R= =
kept fixed, then the power is directly P Rated power
proportional to current (P ∝ I). For 20W-220V bulb,
So 60 W bulb draws twice as much
2
as current as 30 W and it will glow (220)
R1 = Ω = 2420 Ω
brighter then others. 20
o calculate the resistance of the
(b) T For 100W-220V bulb,
V2
bulbs, we use the relation P = . 2
R (220)
R2 = Ω = 484 Ω
In both the bulbs, the voltage drop 100
is the same, so the power is inversely
proportional to the resistance or Both the bulbs are connected in series. So
resistance is inversely proportional the current which passes through both the
  bulbs are same. The current that passes
to the power R ∝ 1 . It implies V
 P  through the circuit, I =
Rtot
.

Rtot = (R1 + R2 ) is connected to a circuit, electrons flow
from the negative terminal to the positive
Rtot = (484 + 2420) Ω = 2904Ω
terminal through the circuit. By using
440V chemical reactions, a battery produces
I= ≈ 0.151 A
2904Ω potential difference across its terminals.
The voltage drop across the 20W bulb is This potential difference provides the
440 energy to move the electrons through the
V1 = IR1 = ×2420 ≈ 366.6 V
2904 circuit. Commercially available electric cells
The voltage drop across the 100W bulb is and batteries are shown in Figure 2.18
440
V2 = IR2 = × 484 ≈ 73.3 V
2904
The 20 W bulb will be fused because its

voltage rating is only 220 V and 366.6 V is
dropped across it. Figure 2.18 Electric cells and Batteries
2.4 If we connect copper and

zinc rod in a lemon, it acts
ELECTRIC CELLS AND
as an electric cell. The citric
BATTERIES
acid in the lemon acts as an electrolyte.
The potential can be measured using a
An electric cell converts chemical energy multimeter.
into electrical energy to produce electricity.
It contains two electrodes immersed in an
electrolyte as shown in Figure 2.17.
+ –
Terminal Terminal
Carbon + – Zinc
electrode electrode
(+) (-)
Sulfuric acid
Figure 2.17 Simple electric cell
Several electric cells connected together

form a battery. When a cell or battery

2.4.1 Electromotive force
ξ r
and internal resistance + –
A battery or cell is called a source of
electromotive force (emf). The term
‘electromotive force’ is a misnomer since it
does not really refer to a force but describes
a potential difference in volts. The emf of
+ V
–
a battery or cell is the voltage provided by
(a) Voltmeter
the battery when no current flows in the
external circuit. It is shown in Figure 2.19.
ξ r
+ –
I + V
–
R
(b)
V
Figure 2.19 Measuring the emf of a cell
Figure 2.20 Internal resistance of the cell
Electromotive force determines the
amount of work a battery or cell does to The emf of cell ξ is measured by
move a certain amount of charge around the connecting a high resistance voltmeter
circuit. It is denoted by the symbol ξ and to across it without connecting the external
be pronounced as ‘xi’. An ideal battery has resistance R as shown in Figure 2.20(a).
zero internal resistance and the potential Since the voltmeter draws very little current
difference (terminal voltage) across the for deflection, the circuit may be considered
battery equals to its emf. But a real battery as open. Hence the voltmeter reading gives
is made of electrodes and electrolyte, there the emf of the cell. Then, external resistance
is resistance to the flow of charges within R is included in the circuit and current I
the battery. This resistance is called internal is established in the circuit. The potential
resistance r. For a real battery, the terminal difference across R is equal to the potential
voltage is not equal to the emf of the battery. difference across the cell (V) as shown in
A freshly prepared cell has low internal Figure 2.20(b).
resistance and it increases with ageing. The potential drop across the resistor R is
V = IR (2.35)
2.4.2 Determination of
internal resistance
Due to internal resistance r of the cell,
The circuit connections are made as shown the voltmeter reads a value V, which is less
in Figure 2.20. than the emf of cell ξ. It is because, certain

amount of voltage (Ir) has dropped across voltage and the internal resistance of the
the internal resistance r. battery (b) power delivered by the battery
Then V = ξ – Ir and power delivered to the resistor
Ir = ξ – V(2.36) Solution
The given values I = 3.93 A, ξ = 12 V,
Dividing equation (2.36) by equation
R=3Ω
(2.35), we get
Ir ξ − V he terminal voltage of the battery
(a) T
=
IR V is equal to voltage drop across the
 ξ −V  resistor
r=  R (2.37)
 V  V = IR = 3.93 × 3 = 11.79 V
Since ξ, V and R are known, internal The internal resistance of the battery,
resistance r can be determined. We can
also find the total current that flows in the  ξ −V  12 −11.79 
r= R =   ×3 = 0.05 Ω
circuit.  V   11.79 
Due to this internal resistance, the power (b) The power delivered by the battery P
delivered to the circuit is not equal to power = Iξ = 3.93 × 12 = 47.1 W
rating mentioned in the battery. For a battery
The power delivered to the resistor = I2 R
of emf ξ, with an internal resistance r, the
= 46.3 W
power delivered to the circuit of resistance
R is given by The remaining power = (47.1 – 46.3)
P = 0.772 W is delivered to the internal
P = Iξ = I (V + Ir) (from equation 2.36)
resistance and cannot be used to do useful
Here V is the voltage drop across the work. (it is equal to I2 r).
resistance R and it is equal to IR.
Therefore, P = I (IR +Ir)
2.4.3 Cells in series
P = I2 R + I2 r(2.38) Several cells can be connected to form a
battery. In series connection, the negative
Here I2 r is the power delivered to the terminal of one cell is connected to the
internal resistance and I2 R is the power positive terminal of the second cell, the
delivered to the electrical device (here it negative terminal of second cell is connected
is the resistance R). For a good battery, to the positive terminal of the third cell
the internal resistance r is very small, then and so on. The free positive terminal of the
I2 r << I2 R and almost entire power is first cell and the free negative terminal of
delivered to the resistance. the last cell become the terminals of the
battery.
E X A M P L E 2. 17
Suppose n cells, each of emf ξ volts and
A battery has an emf of 12 V and connected internal resistance r ohms are connected in
to a resistor of 3 Ω. The current in the series with an external resistance R as shown
circuit is 3.93 A. Calculate (a) terminal in Figure 2.21

Thus series connection of cells is
advantageous only when the effective
internal resistance of the cells is negligibly
small compared with R.
Activity
Construct lemon cells in series and
Cella in series (Schematic diagram) observe the potential of this combination
ξ ξ ξ ξ
+ –
Cells in series (circuit diagram)
Figure 2.21 cells in series
The total emf of the battery = nξ

The total resistance in the circuit = nr + R E X A M P L E 2. 1 8
By Ohm’s law, the current in the circuit is
From the given circuit,
total emf nξ
I= = (2.39) 9V 9V 9V 9V
total resistance nr + R + -
Case (a) If r << R, then, 0.1Ω 0.1Ω 0.1Ω 0.1Ω
I
nξ
I= ≈ nI1(2.40)
R R = 10Ω
where, I1 is the current due to a single cell
 
 I1 = ξ  Find
 R  i) Equivalent emf of the combination
Thus, if r is negligible when compared
ii) Equivalent internal resistance
to R the current supplied by the battery is n
otal current
iii) T
times that supplied by a single cell.
iv) otential difference across external
P
nξ ξ resistance
Case (b) If r>>R, I = ≈ (2.41)
nr r
v) Potential difference across each cell
It is the current due to a single cell. That is, Solution
current due to the whole battery is the same as
that due to a single cell and hence there is no i) Equivalent emf of the combination
advantage in connecting several cells. ξeq = nξ = 4 9 = 36 V

ii) Equivalent internal resistance req = nr ξ
= 4 × 0.1 = 0.4 Ω + –
nξ ξ
iii) Total current I = + + – –
R + nr
4 ×9 ξ
= I + –-
10 + (4 ×0.1)
4 ×9 36
= = V
10 + 0.4 10.4
I = 3.46 A R
cells in parallel (Circuit diagram)
iv) otential difference across external
P
resistance V = IR = 3.46 × 10 = 34.6
V. The remaining 1.4 V is dropped
across the internal resistance of cells.
v) Potential difference across each cell
V 34.6
= = 8.65V
n 4
2.4.4 Cells in parallel Cells in parallel (Schematic diagram)
In parallel connection all the positive Figure 2.22 Cells in parallel

terminals of the cells are connected to one
point and all the negative terminals to a second nξ
point. These two points form the positive and I= (2.42)
r + nR
negative terminals of the battery.
Let n cells be connected in parallel nξ
Case (a) If r >> R, I = = nI1(2.43)
between the points A and B and a resistance r
R is connected between the points A and B where I1 is the current due to a single cell
as shown in Figure 2.22. Let ξ be the emf ξ
and is equal to when R is negligible. Thus,
and r the internal resistance of each cell. r
The equivalent internal resistance of the the current through the external resistance
1 1 1 1 n due to the whole battery is n times the
battery is = + + .... (nterms) = . So current due to a single cell.
req r r r r
r ξ
req = and the total resistance in the circuit Case (b) If r<<R, I = (2.44)
n R
r
= R + . The total emf is the potential
n
difference between the points A and B, When the car engine is
which is equal to ξ. The current in the started with headlights
circuit is given by turned on, they sometimes
ξ become dim. This is due to the internal
I=
r resistance of the car battery.
+R
n

The above equation implies that current I
v) Current from each cell, I ′ =
due to the whole battery is the same as that n
due to a single cell. Hence it is advantageous 0. 5
I′ = = 0.125 A
to connect cells in parallel when the external 4
resistance is very small compared to the
internal resistance of the cells. 2.5
E X A M P L E 2. 19 KIRCHHOFF’S RULES
From the given circuit
5V Ohm’s law is useful only for simple circuits.

For more complex circuits, Kirchhoff ’s rules
0.5 Ω
5V can be used to find current and voltage. There
are two generalized rules: i) Kirchhoff ’s
0.5 Ω
5V current rule ii) Kirchhoff ’s voltage rule.
0.5 Ω
I 5V 2.5.1 Kirchhoff’s first rule
0.5 Ω (Current rule or Junction rule)
It states that the algebraic sum of the
currents at any junction of a circuit is zero.
It is a statement of conservation of electric
R = 10 Ω charge. All charges that enter a given
junction in a circuit must leave that junction
Find since charge cannot build up or disappear at
i) Equivalent emf a junction. Current entering the junction
ii) Equivalent internal resistance is taken as positive and current leaving the
iii) Total current (I) junction is taken as negative.
iv) Potential difference across each cell
v) Current from each cell
Solution I1 I2
i) Equivalent emf ξeq = 5 V
ii) Equivalent internal resistance, A I3
r 0. 5
Req = = = 0.125 Ω
n 4 I4
ξ I5
iii) total current, I =
R+ r
5 5 n
I= = Figure 2.23 Kirchhoff ’s current rule
10 + 0.125 10.125
I ≈ 0.5 A
Applying this law to the junction A in
iv) Potential difference across each cell
Figure 2.23
V = IR = 0.5 × 10 = 5 V

I1 + I2 – I3 – I4 – I5 = 0 The product of current and resistance is
(or) taken as positive when the direction of the
I1 + I2 = I3 + I4 + I5 current is followed. Suppose if the direction
of current is opposite to the direction of the
E X A M P L E 2. 20 loop, then product of current and voltage
From the given circuit find the value of I. across the resistor is negative. It is shown
in Figure 2.24 (a) and (b). The emf is
considered positive when proceeding from
the negative to the positive terminal of the
cell. It is shown in Figure 2.24 (c) and (d).
0.4A
0.6A Going from a to b
0.2A
0.5A R
I
I 0.7A
a b
(a) V = +IR
Going from b to a
R
I
Solution (b)
a
V = -IR
b
Applying Kirchoff ’s rule to the point P in Going from a to b
the circuit, ξ
The arrows pointing towards P are positive

- +
a b
and away from P are negative. (c) V = +ξ
Therefore, 0.2A – 0.4A + 0.6A – 0.5A + Going from b to a

0.7A – I = 0 ξ
1.5A – 0.9A – I = 0
- +
a b
0.6A – I = 0 (d) V = –ξ
I = 0.6 A
Figure 2.24 Kirchhoff voltage rule
2.5.2 Kirchhoff’s Second rule Kirchhoff voltage rule has to be applied

(Voltage rule or Loop rule) only when all currents in the circuit reach
a steady state condition (the current in
It states that in a closed circuit the algebraic
various branches are constant).
sum of the products of the current and
resistance of each part of the circuit is equal
E X A M P L E 2. 2 1
to the total emf included in the circuit. This
rule follows from the law of conservation of The following figure shows a complex
energy for an isolated system (The energy network of conductors which can be
supplied by the emf sources is equal to the divided into two closed loops like ACE and
sum of the energy delivered to all resistors). ABC. Apply Kirchoff ’s voltage rule.

ξ We can denote the current that flows from
+ - 9V battery as I1 and it splits into I2 and I1
– I2 in the junction according Kirchoff ’s
I1 E I3
current rule (KCR). It is shown below.
R1 R3
I2
Now consider the loop EFCBE and apply
A C KVR, we get
R2
R4 R5
1I2 + 3I1 + 2I1 = 9
I4 I5
5I1 + I2 = 9 (1)
B Applying KVR to the loop EADFE, we get

3 (I1 – I2 ) – 1I2 = 6
Solution
3I1 – 4I2 = 6 (2)
Thus applying Kirchoff ’s second law to the
closed loop EACE Solving equation (1) and (2), we get
I1R1 + I2R2 + I3R3 = ξ I1 = 1.83 A and I2 = -0.13 A
and for the closed loop ABCA It implies that the current in the 1 ohm
I4R4 + I5R5-I2R2= 0 resistor flows from F to E.
E X A M P L E 2. 22 2.5.3 Wheatstone’s bridge

Calculate the current that flows in the 1 Ω An important application of Kirchhoff ’s
resistor in the following circuit. rules is the Wheatstone’s bridge. It is used
to compare resistances and also helps in
A E B
2Ω
determining the unknown resistance in
6V electrical network. The bridge consists of
four resistances P, Q, R and S connected
1Ω
9V as shown in Figure 2.25. A galvanometer
3Ω
G is connected between the points B and
3Ω
D. The battery is connected between the
D F C
points A and C. The current through the
Solution galvanometer is IG and its resistance is G.
Applying Kirchhoff ’s current rule to
A E B junction B
I1 - I2 2Ω
I2 I1 I1 – IG – I3 = 0 (2.45)
6V
1Ω
9V Applying Kirchhoff ’s current rule to
junction D,
3Ω 3Ω
D F I1 C I2 + IG – I4 = 0 (2.46)

B Dividing equation (2.52) by equation
I3 (2.51), we get
P +Q R + S
P IG Q =
P R
I1
Q S
A
1+ = 1+
I2 G
C P R
Q S
=
P R
R I4 S
P R
= (2.53)
I I Q S
D
This is the bridge balance condition.
ξ Only under this condition, galvanometer
shows null deflection. Suppose we know
the values of two adjacent resistances, the
Figure 2.25 Wheatstone’s bridge
other two resistances can be compared. If
three of the resistances are known, the value
Applying Kirchhoff ’s voltage rule to loop of unknown resistance (fourth one) can be
ABDA, determined.
I1P + IGG – I2R = 0 (2.47)
Applying Kirchhoff ’s voltage rule to loop

ABCDA,
I1P + I3Q – I4S – I2R = 0 (2.48)
When the points B and D are at the

same potential, the bridge is said to be
balanced. As there is no potential difference
between B and D, no current flows through A galvanometer is an instrument used
galvanometer (IG = 0). Substituting IG = 0 in for detecting and measuring even very
equation (2.45), (2.46) and (2.47), we get small electric currents. It is extensively
useful to compare the potential
I1= I3(2.49)
difference between various parts of
the circuit.
I2 =I4(2.50)
I1P =I2R(2.51)
Substituting the equation (2.49) and E X A M P L E 2. 2 3
(2.50) in equation (2.48)
In a Wheatstone’s bridge P = 100 Ω, Q =
I1P + I1Q – I2S – I2R = 0 1000 Ω and R = 40 Ω. If the galvanometer
I1 (P + Q) = I2 (R +S) (2.52) shows zero deflection, determine the value
of S.

Solution 2.5.4 Meter bridge
P R The meter bridge is another form of
=
Q S Wheatstone’s bridge. It consists of a uniform
Q manganin wire AB of one meter length.
S= ×R
P This wire is stretched along a meter scale
1000 on a wooden board between two copper
S= × 40 S = 400 Ω
100 strips C and D. Between these two copper
strips another copper strip E is mounted
E X A M P L E 2. 24 to enclose two gaps G1 and G2 as shown in
Figure 2.26. An unknown resistance P is
What is the value of x when the Wheatstone’s
connected in G1 and a standard resistance
network is balanced?
Q is connected in G2. A jockey (conducting
P = 500 Ω, Q = 800 Ω, R = x + 400, wire) is connected to the terminal E on the
S = 1000 Ω central copper strip through a galvanometer
(G) and a high resistance (HR). The exact
position of jockey on the wire can be read
500Ω on the scale. A Lechlanche cell and a key (K)
800Ω
P Q are connected across the ends of the bridge
wire.
G
x
R P Q
S
1000Ω C E D
400Ω G1 G2
G HR
ξ
J
A B
l1 l2
Metre Scale
Solution
( )
P R
= ξ K
Q S

500 x + 400 Figure 2.26 Meter bridge
=
800 1000
x + 400 500
= The position of the jockey on the wire is
1000 800
adjusted so that the galvanometer shows zero
500
x + 400 = ×1000 deflection. Let the point be J. The lengths
800
5 AJ and JB of the bridge wire now replace
x + 400 = ×1000
8 the resistance R and S of the Wheatstone’s
x + 400 = 0.625 × 1000 bridge. Then
x + 400 = 625 P R R ′. AJ
x = 625 – 400 = = (2.54)
Q S R ′. JB
x = 225 Ω

where R′ is the resistance per unit length P l1
=
of wire Q l2
P AJ l1
= = (2.55) P = Q l1
Q JB l2 l2
l
P = Q 1 (2.56) P = 15 3 = 22.5 Ω
l2 2
The bridge wire is soldered at the ends of
the copper strips. Due to imperfect contact,
E X A M P L E 2. 2 6
some resistance might be introduced at the
contact. These are called end resistances. In a meter bridge, the value of resistance in
This error can be eliminated, if another the resistance box is 10 Ω. The balancing
set of readings are taken with P and Q length is l1 = 55 cm. Find the value of
interchanged and the average value of P is unknown resistance.
found.
Solution
To find the specific resistance of the
material of the wire in the coil P, the radius Q = 10 Ω
r and length l of the wire is measured. The P l1 l
= = 1
specific resistance or resistivity ρ can be Q 100 − l1 l2
calculated using the relation l1
P = Q×
l 100 − l1
Resistance = ρ
A 10×55
P=
By rearranging the above equation, we get 100 − 55
550
A P= = 12.2 Ω
ρ = Resistance × (2.57) 45
l
If P is the unknown resistance equation

(2.57) becomes, 2.5.5 Potentiometer
πr 2 Potentiometer is used for the accurate
ρ= P
l measurement of potential differences,
current and resistances. It consists of ten
E X A M P L E 2. 25 meter long uniform wire of manganin or
constantan stretched in parallel rows each of
In a meter bridge with a standard resistance
1 meter length, on a wooden board. The two
of 15 Ω in the right gap, the ratio of
free ends A and B are brought to the same
balancing length is 3:2. Find the value of
side and fixed to copper strips with binding
the other resistance.
screws. A meter scale is fixed parallel to
Solution the wire. A jockey is provided for making
Q = 15 Ω, l1:l2 = 3:2 contact.
The principle of the potentiometer is
l1 3 illustrated in Figure 2.27. A steady current is
=
l2 2 maintained across the wire CD by a battery

Bt. The battery, key and the potentiometer series. This is the primary circuit. The end
wire are connected in series forms the C of the wire is connected to the terminal
primary circuit. The positive terminal of M of a DPDT (Double Pole Double Throw)
a primary cell of emf ξ is connected to the switch and the other terminal N is connected
point C and negative terminal is connected to a jockey through a galvanometer G and
to the jockey through a galvanometer G a high resistance HR. The cells whose emf
and a high resistance HR. This forms the ξ1 and ξ2 to be compared are connected to
secondary circuit. the terminals M1,N1 and M2,N2 of the DPDT
switch. The positive terminals of Bt, ξ1 and
Bt K
( )
ξ2 should be connected to the same end C.
Rh
l
D Bt
C
J K
( )
G HR
ξ
J
Figure 2.27 Potentiometer C D
M1 ξ1 N1
Let contact be made at any point J
M N HR
on the wire by jockey. If the potential G
M2 N2
difference across CJ is equal to the emf of ξ2
the cell ξ then no current will flow through
the galvanometer and it will show zero
deflection. CJ is the balancing length l. The Figure 2.28 Comparison of emf of two
potential difference across CJ is equal to Irl cells
where I is the current flowing through the
wire and r is the resistance per unit length The DPDT switch is pressed towards M1,
of the wire. N1 so that cell ξ1 is included in the secondary
circuit and the balancing length l1 is found
Hence ξ = Irl(2.58)
by adjusting the jockey for zero deflection.
Then the second cell ξ2 is included in
Since I and r are constants, ξ ∝ l. The
the circuit and the balancing length l2 is
emf of the cell is directly proportional to the
determined. Let r be the resistance per unit
balancing length.
length of the potentiometer wire and I be
the current flowing through the wire.
2.5.6 Comparison of
emf of two cells with a we have ξ1 = Irl1(2.59)
potentiometer
ξ2 = Irl2 (2.60)
To compare the emf of two cells, the
circuit connections are made as shown By dividing equation (2.59) by (2.60)
in Figure 2.28. Potentiometer wire CD is ξ1 l1
= (2.61)
connected to a battery Bt and a key K in ξ2 l2

By including a rheostat (Rh) in the A suitable resistance (say, 10 Ω) is
primary circuit, the experiment can be included in the resistance box and key K2 is
repeated several times by changing the closed. Let r be the internal resistance of the
current flowing through it. cell. The current passing through the cell
and the resistance R is given by
ξ
2.5.7 Measurement of I=
R +r
internal resistance of a cell by
potentiometer The potential difference across R is
ξR
To measure the internal resistance of V=
R +r
a cell, the circuit connections are made as When this potential difference is
shown in Figure 2.29. The end C of the balanced on the potentiometer wire, let l2 be
potentiometer wire is connected to the the balancing length.
positive terminal of the battery Bt and the
ξR
negative terminal of the battery is connected Then ∝ l2 (2.63)
R +r
to the end D through a key K1. This forms
the primary circuit. From equations (2.62) and (2.63)
R + r l1
Bt K1 = (2.64)
R l2
( )
r l1
1+ = ;
J D R l2
C
l 
r = R  1 −1
ξ l 
2 
 
∴ r = R  l1 − l2 (2.65)
G HR

 l 
( )
K2
2
R Substituting the values of the R, l1

and l2 , the internal resistance of the cell is
Figure 2.29 measurement of internal
resistance determined. The experiment can be repeated
for different values of R. It is found that the
The positive terminal of the cell ξ whose internal resistance of the cell is not constant
internal resistance is to be determined is but increases with increase of external
also connected to the end C of the wire. The resistance connected across its terminals.
negative terminal of the cell ξ is connected
2.6
to a jockey through a galvanometer and a
high resistance. A resistance box R and key HEATING EFFECT OF
K2 are connected across the cell ξ. With K2 ELECTRIC CURRENT
open, the balancing point J is obtained and
the balancing length CJ = l1 is measured. When current flows through a resistor,
Since the cell is in open circuit, its emf is some of the electrical energy delivered to
ξ ∝ l1(2.62) the resistor is converted into heat energy
and it is dissipated. This heating effect of

current is known as Joule’s heating effect.
2.6.2 Application of Joule’s
Just as current produces thermal energy,
heating effect
thermal energy may also be suitably used
to produce an electromotive force. This is 1. Electric heaters
known as thermoelectric effect. Electric iron, electric heater, electric
toaster shown in Figure 2.30 are some of
2.6.1 Joule’s law the home appliances that utilize the heating
If a current I flows through a conductor effect of current. In these appliances, the
kept across a potential difference V for a heating elements are made of nichrome, an
time t, the work done or the electric potential alloy of nickel and chromium. Nichrome
energy spent is has a high specific resistance and can be
heated to very high temperatures without
W = VIt(2.66)
oxidation.
In the absence of any other external effect,
this energy is spent in heating the conductor.
The amount of heat(H) produced is
H = VIt(2.67)
For a resistance R,
H = I2Rt(2.68)
This relation was experimentally verified (a) (b) (c)
by Joule and is known as Joule’s law of

heating. It states that the heat developed
in an electrical circuit due to the flow of
current varies directly as
(i) the square of the current
(ii) the resistance of the circuit and
(iii) the time of flow. (a) (b) (c)
E X A M P L E 2. 27 Figure 2.30 (a) Electric Iron box,

(b) electric heater (c) electric Toaster
Find the heat energy produced in a
resistance of 10 Ω when 5 A current flows
through it for 5 minutes.
E X A M P L E 2. 2 8
Solution
An electric heater of resistance 10 Ω
R = 10 Ω, I = 5 A, t = 5 minutes = 5 × 60 s
connected to 220 V power supply is
H = I2 R t
immersed in the water of 1 kg. How long
= 52 × 10 × 5 × 60
the electrical heater has to be switched on
= 25 × 10 × 300
to increase its temperature from 30°C to
= 25 × 3000
60°C. (The specific heat of water is s = 4200
= 75000 J (or) 75 kJ
J kg-1)

Solution Contacts Fuse wire
According to Joule’s heating law H = I2 Rt

The current passed through the electrical
220V
heater = = 22 A
10 Ω Fuse
carrier
The heat produced in one second by the Base
(b)
electrical heater H = I2 R
Contacts Fuse wire
(a)
The heat produced in one second H = (22)2

× 10 = 4840 J = 4.84 k J. In fact the power
rating of this electrical heater is 4.84 k W.
The amount of energy to increase the
temperature of 1kg water from 30°C to Fuse
60°C is Base carrier
Figure 2.31 Electric Fuse
(b)
(a)
Q = ms ∆T (Refer XI physics vol 2, unit 8)
Here m = 1 kg,
Whenever there is an excessive current
s = 4200 J kg-1,
produced due to faulty wire connection, the
∆T = 30,
circuit breaker switch opens. After repairing
so Q = 1 × 4200 x 30 = 126 kJ the faulty connection, we can close the
circuit breaker switch. It is shown in the
The time required to produce this heat
Q 126×103 Figure 2.32.
energy t = = ≈ 26.03 s
I 2R 4840
2. Electric fuses
Fuses as shown in Figure 2.31, are
connected in series in a circuit to protect the
electric devices from the heat developed by Figure 2.32 circuit breakers
the passage of excessive current. It is a short
length of a wire made of a low melting point
material. It melts and breaks the circuit if 3. Electric furnace
current exceeds a certain value. Lead and Furnaces as shown in Figure 2.33 are
copper wire melts and burns out when used to manufacture a large number of
the current increases above 5 A and 35 A technologically important materials such
respectively. as steel, silicon carbide, quartz, gallium
The only disadvantage with the above arsenide, etc). To produce temperatures up
fuses is that once fuse wire is burnt due to to 1500°C, molybdenum-nichrome wire
excessive current, they need to be replaced. wound on a silica tube is used. Carbon
Nowadays in houses, circuit breakers arc furnaces produce temperatures up to
(trippers) are also used instead of fuses. 3000 °C.

2.7.1 Seebeck effect
Seebeck discovered that in a closed circuit
consisting of two dissimilar metals, when
the junctions are maintained at different
temperatures an emf (potential difference)
is developed. The current that flows due to
Figure 2.33 Electric furnace the emf developed is called thermoelectric
current. The two dissimilar metals
4. Electrical lamp connected to form two junctions is known
It consists of a tungsten filament (melting point as thermocouple (Figure 2.35).
3380 0C) kept inside a glass bulb and heated
G
to incandescence by current. In incandescent Cu
electric lamps only about 5% of electrical energy Fe

Metal A
is converted into light and the rest is wasted as

Ice - cubes Water HOT CO
Junction 1 Metal B Junc
heat. Electric discharge lamps, electric welding

and electric arc also utilize the heating effect of V
current as shown in Figure 2.34. G

(a) (b)
Tungsten filament Cu
Metal A
Fe
Ice - cubes Water HOT COLD
Junction 1 Metal B Junction 2
(a) (b)
Figure 2.35 Seebeck effect (Thermocouple)
If the hot and cold junctions are

interchanged, the direction of current also
Figure 2.34 Electric bulb, electric arc
and electric welding reverses. Hence the effect is reversible.
The magnitude of the emf developed in
a thermocouple depends on (i) the nature
2.7
of the metals forming the couple and (ii)
THERMOELECTRIC EFFECT the temperature difference between the
junctions.
Conversion of temperature differences
into electrical voltage and vice versa Applications of Seebeck effect
is known as thermoelectric effect. 1. Seebeck effect is used in
A thermoelectric device generates voltage thermoelectric generators (Seebeck
when there is a temperature difference on generators).These thermoelectric
each side. If a voltage is applied, it generates generators are used in power plants
a temperature difference. to convert waste heat into electricity.

2. This effect is utilized in automobiles as gets heated and junction B gets cooled as
automotive thermoelectric generators shown in the Figure 2.36(b). Hence Peltier
for increasing fuel efficiency. effect is reversible.
3. Seebeck effect is used in
thermocouples and thermopiles to 2.7.3 Thomson effect
measure the temperature difference Thomson showed that if two points in a
between the two objects. conductor are at different temperatures,
the density of electrons at these points
2.7.2 Peltier effect will differ and as a result the potential
difference is created between these points.
In 1834, Peltier discovered that when
Thomson effect is also reversible.
an electric current is passed through a
circuit of a thermocouple, heat is evolved
at one junction and absorbed at the other
Potential
Potential
junction. This is known as Peltier effect. Heat Heat Heat Heat
absorbed evolved evolved absorbed
I A C B A C B
I
Cu
+ - Cu - A
+
M N B A M N B
Copper bar Iron bar
A B A B
Cooled Heated Cooled Heated
(a) Positive thomson effect (b) Negative thomson effect
Fe Figure
Fe 2.37 (a) Positive Thomson effect
(a) (b)
(b) Negative Thomson effect
Cu
+ - Cu - +
If current is passed through a copper bar
B AB which is heated at the middle point C,
B A
Heated Cooled Heated the point C will be at higher potential. This
indicates that the heat is absorbed along
Fe Fe
(a)
AC and evolved along CB of the conductor
(b)
as shown in Figure 2.37(a). Thus heat is
Figure 2.36 Peltier effect: Cu – Fe transferred due to the current flow in the
thermocouple direction of the current. It is called positive
Thomson effect. Similar effect is observed
In the Cu-Fe thermocouple the junctions in metals like silver, zinc, and cadmium.
A and B are maintained at the same When the copper bar is replaced by
temperature. Let a current from a battery an iron bar, heat is evolved along CA and
flow through the thermocouple (Figure 2.36 absorbed along BC. Thus heat is transferred
(a)). At the junction A, where the current due to the current flow in the direction
flows from Cu to Fe, heat is absorbed and the opposite to the direction of current. It is
junction A becomes cold. At the junction B, called negative Thomson effect as shown in
where the current flows from Fe to Cu heat the Figure 2.37(b). Similar effect is observed
is liberated and it becomes hot. When the in metals like platinum, nickel, cobalt, and
direction of current is reversed, junction A mercury.

SUMMARY
dQ
The current, I flowing in a conductor I = , where dQ is the charge that flows
dt
through a cross-section in a time interval dt. SI unit of current is ampere (A).
1A = 1 C s-1.
 
The current density J in a conductor is the current flowing per unit area.  J = I 
Current is a scalar but current density is a vector.
 A 
 
The general form of Ohm’s law J = σE
Practical form of Ohm’s law states that V ∝ I, or V = IR where I is the current.
V
The resistance R of a conductor is R = . SI unit of resistance is ohm (Ω) and
I
1V
1Ω=
1A
l
The resistance of a material R = ρ where l is length of the material and A is the area
A
of cross section.
The resistivity of a material determines how much resistance it offers to the flow of
current.
The equivalent resistance (RS) of several resistances (R1, R2, R3……..) connected in
series combination is RS = (R1+R2 +R3……..)
The equivalent resistance (RP) of several resistances (R1, R2, R3……..) connected in
1 1 1 1
parallel combination is = + + + ......
RP R1 R2 R3
Kirchoff ’s first rule (Current rule or junction rule): The algebraic sum of the currents
at any junction is zero.
Kirchoff ’s second rule (Voltage rule or loop rule): In a closed circuit the algebraic
sum of the products of the current and resistance of each part of the circuit is equal
to the total emf included in the circuit.
Electric power is the rate at which energy is transformed.
If a current I flows across a potential difference V, the power delivered to the circuit
is P = IV.
V2
In a resistor R, the electrical power converted to heat is P = I R =
2
R
The energy equivalent of one kilowatt-hour (kWh) is 1kWh = 3.6 X 106 J.
Metre bridge is one form of Wheatstone’s bridge.
Potentiometer is used to compare potential differences.
Joule’s law of heating is H = VIt (or) H = I2Rt.
Thermoelectric effect: Conversion of temperature differences into electrical voltage
and vice versa.

CONCEPT MAP
CURRENT
ELECTRICITY
Flow of Charges
Drift velocity Mobility Current density
Resistance
Ohm’s Law V-I Graph Resistivity
Series
Carbon resistor Combination
Parallel
Temperature coefficient of resistance
Current rule
Kirchoff rule Wheatstone’s bridge Applications
Voltage rule
Heating effects of electric eurrent
Joule’s law of heating Thermoelectric effects
Applications
Seebeck effect Peltier effect Thomson effect

EVALUATION
I Multiple Choice Questions 4. A carbon resistor of (47 ± 4.7 ) k Ω to be

1. The following graph shows current marked with rings of different colours
versus voltage values of some unknown for its identification. The colour code
conductor. What is the resistance of sequence will be
this conductor? a) Yellow – Green – Violet – Gold
b) Yellow – Violet – Orange – Silver
V
c) Violet – Yellow – Orange – Silver
5
d) Green – Orange – Violet - Gold
4
3
5. What is the value of resistance of the
2
following resistor?
1
0 1 2 3 4 5
I
(a)2 ohm (b) 4 ohm

(c) 8 ohm (d)1 ohm (a)100 k Ω (b)10 k Ω
2. A wire of resistance 2 ohms per meter (c) 1k Ω (d)1000 k Ω
is bent to form a circle of radius 1m. 6. Two wires of A and B with circular cross
The equivalent resistance between its section made up of the same material
two diametrically opposite points, A with equal lengths. Suppose RA = 3 RB,
and B as shown in the figure is then what is the ratio of radius of wire
A to that of B?
(a) 3 (b) 3
1 1
A B
(c) (d)
3 3
7. A wire connected to a power supply
of 230 V has power dissipation P1.
Suppose the wire is cut into two equal
π
(a) π Ω (b) Ω pieces and connected parallel to the
2
same power supply. In this case power
π P
(c) 2πΩ (d) Ω dissipation is P2. The ratio 2 is
4 P1
3. A toaster operating at 240 V has a (a)1 (b) 2

resistance of 120 Ω. The power is (c) 3 (d) 4
a) 400 W b) 2 W
c) 480 W d) 240 W

8. In India electricity is supplied for a) 1A b) 2A
domestic use at 220 V. It is supplied at c) 3A d) 4A
110 V in USA. If the resistance of a 60W 12. The temperature coefficient of
bulb for use in India is R, the resistance resistance of a wire is 0.00125 per °C.
of a 60W bulb for use in USA will be At 300 K, its resistance is 1 Ω. The
(a) R (b) 2R resistance of the wire will be 2 Ω at
a) 1154 K b) 1100 K
(c) R (d) R c) 1400 K d) 1127 K
4 2
9. In a large building, there are 15 bulbs 13. The internal resistance of a 2.1 V cell
of 40W, 5 bulbs of 100W, 5 fans of 80W which gives a current of 0.2 A through
and 1 heater of 1kW are connected. The a resistance of 10 Ω is
voltage of electric mains is 220V. The a) 0.2 Ω b) 0.5 Ω
minimum capacity of the main fuse of c) 0.8 Ω d) 1.0 Ω
the building will be (IIT-JEE 14. A piece of copper and another of
2014) germanium are cooled from room
(a) 14 A (b) 8 A temperature to 80 K. The resistance of
(c) 10 A (d) 12 A a) each of them increases
10. There is a current of 1.0 A in the circuit b) each of them decreases
shown below. What is the resistance of c)
copper increases and germanium
P? decreases
d)
copper decreases and germanium
3 increases
15. In Joule’s heating law, when I and t are
constant, if the H is taken along the y
9V 2.5
axis and I2 along the x axis, the graph is
a) straight line b) parabola
P c) circle d) ellipse
Answers
a) 1.5 Ω b) 2.5 Ω
1) a 2) b 3) c 4) b 5) a
c) 3.5 Ω d) 4.5 Ω
6) c 7) d 8) c 9) d 10) c
11. What is the current out of the battery?
11) a 12) d 13) b 14) d 15) a
II Short Answer Questions

5V 15 15 15
1. Why current is a scalar?
2. Distinguish between drift velocity and
mobility.
3. State microscopic form of Ohm’s law.

4. State macroscopic form of Ohm’s law. 5. State and explain Kirchhoff ’s rules.
5. What are ohmic and non ohmic 6. Obtain the condition for bridge balance
devices? in Wheatstone’s bridge.
6. Define electrical resistivity. 7. Explain the determination of unknown
7. Define temperature coefficient of resistance using meter bridge.
resistance. 8. How the emf of two cells are compared
8. What is superconductivity? using potentiometer?
9. What is electric power and electric
energy? IV Numerical problems
10. Define current density. 1. The following graphs represent the
11. Derive the expression for power P=VI current versus voltage and voltage
in electrical circuit. versus current for the six conductors
12. Write down the various forms of A,B,C,D,E and F. Which conductor
expression for power in electrical has least resistance and which has
circuit. maximum resistance?
13. State Kirchhoff ’s current rule. V I
14. State Kirchhoff ’s voltage rule. 5

C
5
F
4 4
15. State the principle of potentiometer. 3
B
3
E
16. What do you mean by internal 2

A
2
D
resistance of a cell? 1 1
17. State Joule’s law of heating. 0 1 2

I
3 4 5 0 1 2
V
3 4 5
18. What is Seebeck effect?

19. What is Thomson effect? Ans: Least: RF = 0.4 Ω, maximum RC = 2.5 Ω
20. What is Peltier effect? 2. Lightning is very good example of
21. State the applications of Seebeck effect. natural current. In typical lightning,
there is 109 J energy transfer across the
III Long Answer Questions potential difference of 5 × 107 V during
a time interval of 0.2 s.
1. Describe the microscopic model of
current and obtain general form of
Ohm’s law
2. Obtain the macroscopic form of Ohm’s
law from its microscopic form and
discuss its limitation.
3. Explain the equivalent resistance of a
series and parallel resistor network
4. Explain the determination of the
internal resistance of a cell using
voltmeter.

v
Using this information, estimate the A B C
following quantities (a) total amount of

charge transferred between cloud and
ground (b) the current in the lightning
+
S
bolt (c) the power delivered in 0.2 s. -
Ans: charge = 20 C, I = 100 A, P = 5 GW
3. A copper wire of 10-6 m2 area of cross Suddenly the switch S is closed. (a)
section, carries a current of 2 A. If the Calculate the current in the circuit when
number of electrons per cubic meter is S is open and closed (b) What happens
8 × 1028, calculate the current density to the intensities of the bulbs A,B and
and average drift velocity. C. (c) Calculate the voltage across the
Ans: J = 2 × 106 Am−2 ; vd= 15.6 × 10−5 ms−1 three bulbs when S is open and closed
(d) Calculate the power delivered to the
4. The resistance of a nichrome wire at 0 circuit when S is opened and closed (e)
0
C is 10 Ω. If its temperature coefficient Does the power delivered to the circuit
of resistance is 0.004/0C, find its decreases, increases or remain same?
resistance at boiling point of water.
Ans:
Comment on the result.
Electrical Switch S is
Switch S is open
Ans: RT= 14 Ω. quantities closed
As the temperature increases the resistance Current ξ ξ
of the wire also increases. 3R 2R
Voltage ξ ξ
5. The rod given in the figure is made up VA = , VA = ,
of two different materials. 3R 2R
ξ ξ
VB = , VB = ,
3R 2R
ξ VC = 0
25 cm 70 cm VC =
3R
Power ξ2 ξ2
Both have square cross sections of 3 PA = , PA = ,
9R 4R
mm side. The resistivity of the first ξ2 ξ2
PB = , PB = ,
material is 4 x 10-3 Ω.m and it is 25 9R 4R
cm long while second material has ξ2 PC = 0
PC =
resistivity of 5 x 10-3 Ω.m and is of 70 9R Total power
cm long. What is the resistivity of rod increases
Intensity All the bulbs The
between its ends?
glow with equal intensities of the
Ans: 500 Ω intensity bulbs A and B
equally increase.
6. Three identical lamps each having Bulb C will
not glow since
a resistance R are connected to the no current pass
battery of emf as shown in the figure. through it.

7. The current through an element is 11. A potentiometer wire has a length of 4
shown in the figure. Determine the m and resistance of 20 Ω. It is connected
total charge that pass through the in series with resistance of 2980 Ω and
element at a) t = 0 s, b) t = 2 s, c) t = 5s a cell of emf 4 V. Calculate the potential
along the wire.
I(A)
10 Ans: Potential = 0.65 × 10-2 V m-1.
12. Determine the current flowing through
5
the galvanometer (G) as shown in the
0 1 2 3 4 5 figure.
t (s)
I1 Q I -I
Ans: At t= 0s,dq = 0 C, At t=2 s, 1 g
dq = 10 C; At t=5 s, dq = 0 C 5 10
Ig
8. An electronics hobbyist is building 2A P R 2A
a radio which requires 150 Ω in her G 10
circuit, but she has only 220 Ω, 79 Ω I2 + Ig
and 92 Ω resistors available. How can 15 20
I2
she connect the available resistors to S
get desired value of resistance?
Ans: Parallel combination of 220 Ω and 1
Ans: Ig = A
79 Ω in series with 92 Ω 11
13. Two cells each of 5V are connected in
9. A cell supplies a current of 0.9 A
series across a 8 Ω resistor and three
through a 2 Ω resistor and a current of
parallel resistors of 4 Ω, 6 Ω and 12 Ω.
0.3 A through a 7 Ω resistor. Calculate
Draw a circuit diagram for the above
the internal resistance of the cell.
arrangement. Calculate i) the current
Ans: 0.5 Ω
drawn from the cell (ii) current through
10. Calculate the currents in the following each resistor
circuit. 2
Ans: The current at 4 Ω , I = = 0.5 A,
4
I2 2
I1 the current at 6 Ω, I = = 0.33 A ,
6
+ –
9V
2
the current at 12 Ω, I = = 0.17 A
+ I3
12
15V
100Ω R3 100Ω
–
14. Four light bulbs P, Q, R, S are connected
100Ω in a circuit of unknown arrangement.
When each bulb is removed one at
I1 I2
a time and replaced, the following
behavior is observed.
Ans : I1 = 0.070 A, I2 = -0.010 A and
I3 = 0.080 A

15. In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell
P Q R S
of emf 1.25 V gives a balance point
P removed * on on on at 35 cm length of the wire. If the cell
Q removed on * on off is replaced by another cell and the
balance point shifts to 63 cm, what is
R removed off off * off the emf of the second cell?
Ans: emf of the second cell is 2.25 V
S removed on off on *
Draw the circuit diagram for these bulbs.

Ans:
R
Q
+
–
P
S

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Douglas C.Giancoli, , “Physics for Scientist &Engineers with Modern Physics”, Pearson
Prentice Hall, Fourth edition
2. James Walker, Physics, Pearson- Addison Wesley publishers, Fourth edition
3. Tipler, Mosca, “Physics for scientist and Engineers with Modern Physics”, Freeman and
Company, sixth edition
4. Purcell, Morin, Electricity and magnetism, Cambridge university press, third edition
5. Serway and Jewett, “Physics for Scientist and Engineers with Modern Physics”, Brook/Coole
publishers, eighth edition
6. Tarasov and Tarasova, “Questions and problems in School Physics”, Mir Publishers
7. H.C.Verma, “Concepts of Physics Vol 2, Bharthi Bhawan publishers
8. Eric Roger, Physics for the Inquiring Mind, Princeton University press

ICT CORNER
Electric current
In this activity you will be able to

(a) measure the potential difference of cells Topic: Potentiometer
(b) measure the internal resistance of a
given primary cell
STEPS:
• Open the browser and type “olabs.edu.in” in the address bar. Click physics tab and then click
“Potentiometer-Internal Resistance of a Cell” in class 12 section. Go to “simulator” tab to do
the experiment.
• Construct the electric circuit as per the connection diagram by clicking “show circuit diagram”
tab. You can connect wires between electric component by dragging the mouse between the
component.
• To check whether the connections are correct or not, drag the jockey and place it at the two end
points of the wire. If the galvanometer shows opposite deflections, the connections are correct.
(keep both keys on)
Step1 Step2
Step3 Step4
Find the balancing length. Calculate the internal resistance for the observed balancing lengths. Repeat the
experiment for five times and take the average.
Note:
1. One time sign up is needed to do simulation. Then login using that username and password.
2. Read theory, procedure and animation to get the theory by clicking the corresponding tab.
URL:
http://amrita.olabs.edu.in/?sub=1&brch=6&sim=147&cnt=4

UNIT MAGNETISM AND MAGNETIC
3
EFFECTS OF ELECTRIC CURRENT
“The magnetic force is animate, or imitates a soul; in many respects it surpasses

the human soul while it is united to an organic body” – William Gilbert
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
• Earth’s magnetic field and magnetic elements

• Basic property of magnets
• Statement of Coulomb inverse square law of magnetism
• Magnetic dipole
• Magnetic induction at a point due to axial line and equatorial line
• Torque acting on a bar magnet in a uniform magnetic field
• Potential energy of a bar magnet placed in a uniform magnetic field
• Tangent law and tangent Galvanometer
• Magnetic properties – permeability, susceptibility etc
• Classification of magnetic materials – dia, para and ferro magnetic materials
• Concept of Hysteresis
• Magnetic effects of electric current – long straight conductor and circular coil
• Right hand thumb rule and Maxwell’s right hand cork screw rule
• Biot-Savart’s law – applications
• Current loop as a magnetic dipole
• Magnetic dipole moment of revolving electron
• Ampère’s circuital law – applications
• Solenoid and toroid
• Lorentz force – charged particle moving in an electromagnetic field
• Cyclotron
• Force on a current carrying conductor in a magnetic field
• Force between two long parallel current carrying conductor
• Torque on a current loop in a magnetic field
• Moving coil Galvanometer
128

3.1 Magnetism is everywhere from tiny
particles like electrons to the entire universe.
INTRODUCTION TO
Historically the word ‘magnetism’ was
MAGNETISM
derived from iron ore magnetite (Fe3 O4). In
olden days, magnets were used as magnetic
compass for navigation, magnetic therapy
for treatment and also used in magic shows.
In modern days, most of the things we use
in our daily life contain magnets (Figure 3.2).
Motors, cycle dynamo, loudspeakers,
magnetic tapes used in audio and video
recording, mobile phones, head phones, CD,
pen-drive, hard disc of laptop, refrigerator
door, generator are a few examples.
Earlier, both electricity and magnetism
Figure 3.1: Magnetic levitation were thought to be two independent
branches in physics. In 1820, H.C. Oersted
Magnets! no doubt, its behaviour will attract observed the deflection of magnetic compass
everyone (see Figure 3.1). The world enjoys needle kept near a current carrying wire.
its benefits, to lead a modern luxurious life. This unified the two different branches,
The study of magnets fascinated scientists electricity and magnetism as a single subject
around our globe for many centuries and ‘electromagnetism’ in physics.
even now, door for research on magnets is In this unit, basics of magnets and
still open. their properties are given. Later, how a
current carrying conductor (here only
Many birds and animals have magnetic steady current, not time-varying current
sense in their eyes using Earth’s magnetic is considered) behaves like a magnet is
field for navigation. presented.
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
Magnetic sensing in eyes - for
Figure 3.2 Uses of magnets in modern
Zebrafinches bird, due to protein
world – (a) speakers (b) head phones
cryptochromes Cry4 present in retina, it (c) MRI scan (d) Hard disc of laptop
uses Earth magnetic field for navigation
Unit 3 M agnetism and magnetic effects of electric current 129

3.1.1 Earth’s magnetic field geographic north pole (Figure 3.3). Similarly,
and magnetic elements the south pole of magnetic compass needle is
attracted towards the geographic north pole
Geographic
Magnetic
North
of the Earth which is near magnetic north-
pole. The branch of physics which deals
North Pole
Pole
with the Earth’s magnetic field is called

Geomagnetism or Terrestrial magnetism.
There are three quantities required to
specify the magnetic field of the Earth on its
surface, which are often called as the elements
Magnetic Geographic
of the Earth’s magnetic field. They are
(a) magnetic declination (D)
South South Pole
Pole
(b) magnetic dip or inclination (I)

Figure 3.3 Earth’s magnetic field
(c)
the horizontal component of the
Earth’s magnetic field (BH)
From the activities performed in lower
classes, we have noticed that the needle in Magnetic
north pole
“True” North Pole - the
Earth rotates around
a magnetic compass or freely suspended this axis
Earth
magnet comes to rest in a position which Magnetic
field lines
is approximately along the geographical N
north-south direction of the Earth. William Axis around which

the Earth rotates
Gilbert in 1600 proposed that Earth itself S
once a day
behaves like a gigantic powerful bar magnet.

(a) Magnetic south pole
But this theory is not successful because the
“True” South Pole
temperature inside the Earth is very high
and so it will not be possible for a magnet to Geographic
maridian D = Angle of declination
retain its magnetism.

D
Gover suggested that the Earth’s
magnetic field is due to hot rays coming out
from the Sun. These rays will heat up the air
near equatorial region. Once air becomes
hotter, it rises above and will move towards
northern and southern hemispheres and (b) Magnetic
meridian
get electrified. This may be responsible
Geographical
to magnetize the ferromagnetic materials Magnetic meridian
Equator
near the Earth’s surface. Till date, so many Geographical
Equator
Angle of
theories have been proposed. But none of declination
the theory completely explains the cause for

the Earth’s magnetism. Geographical
meridian Magnetic
meridian Magnetic
The north pole of magnetic compass (c) meridian
needle is attracted towards the magnetic

south pole of the Earth which is near the Figure 3.4 Declination angle
130 Unit 3 M agnetism and magnetic effects of electric current

Day and night occur because Earth spins whereas near the equator, the declination is
about an axis called geographic axis. A vertical smaller. In India, declination angle is very
plane passing through the geographic axis is small and for Chennai, magnetic declination
called geographic meridian and a great circle angle is -1o 8’ (which is negative (west)).
perpendicular to Earth’s geographic axis is The angle subtended by the Earth’s

called geographic equator. total magnetic field B with the horizontal
The straight line which connects magnetic direction in the magnetic meridian is
poles of Earth is known as magnetic axis. called dip or magnetic inclination (I)
A vertical plane passing through magnetic at that point (Figure 3.5). For Chennai,
axis is called magnetic meridian and a great inclination angle is 14o 16’. The component
circle perpendicular to Earth’s magnetic axis of Earth’s magnetic field along the
is called magnetic equator. horizontal direction in the magnetic
When a magnetic needle is freely meridian is called horizontal component
suspended, the alignment of the magnet of Earth’s magnetic field, denoted by BH.
does not exactly lie along the geographic Let BE be the net Earth’s magnetic field
meridian as shown in Figure 3.4. The angle at a point P on the surface of the Earth.
between magnetic meridian at a point BE can be resolved into two perpendicular
and geographical meridian is called the components.
declination or magnetic declination (D). At
higher latitudes, the declination is greater Horizontal component BH = BE cos I (3.1)
Vertical component BV = BE sin I (3.2)

Dividing equation (3.2) and (3.1), we get
Lines of magnetic force
BV
Magnetic tan I = (3.3)
pole North BH
geographic
Dip needle pole
(i) At magnetic equator
The Earth’s magnetic field is parallel to
Equator Magnetic
inclination the surface of the Earth (i.e., horizontal)
Magnetic
equator Horizontal which implies that the needle of magnetic
compass rests horizontally at an angle of
dip, I = 0o as shown in figure 3.6.
True
Magnetic
BH = BE
North
D North BV = 0
This implies that the horizontal
component is maximum at equator and
Horizontal
vertical component is zero at equator.
I
(ii) At magnetic poles
The Earth’s magnetic field is
Declination Inclination
perpendicular to the surface of the Earth
Figure 3.5 Inclination angle (i.e., vertical) which implies that the needle

0.26
tan I = ⇒ I = tan−1 (1.732) = 60
0.15
The resultant magnetic field of the Earth is
B = BH2 + BV2 = 0.3 G
Figure 3.6: Needle of magnetic compass

rests horizontally at an angle of dip – at 3.1.2 Basic properties of
magnetic equator magnets
Some basic terminologies and properties
used in describing bar magnet.
(a) Magnetic dipole moment
S O N
qm qm
l l
Figure 3.7: Needle of magnetic compass
2l
rests vertically at an angle of dip – at
magnetic poles
Figure 3.8 A bar magnet
of magnetic compass rests vertically at an
angle of dip, I = 90o as shown in Figure 3.7. Consider a bar magnet as shown in Figure
Hence, 3.8. Let qm be the pole strength (it is also
BH = 0 called as magnetic charge) of the magnetic
BV = BE pole and let l be the distance between the
This implies that the vertical component geometrical center of bar magnet O and
is maximum at poles and horizontal one end of the pole. The magnetic dipole
component is zero at poles. moment is defined as the product of its
pole strength and magnetic length. It is a
E X A M P L E 3. 1 
vector quantity, denoted by pm .
The horizontal component and vertical
components of Earth’s magnetic field at a  
pm = qmd (3.4)
place are 0.15 G and 0.26 G respectively.
Calculate the angle of dip and resultant 
magnetic field. where d is the vector drawn from south

pole to north pole and its magnitude d = 2l .
Solution:
The magnitude of magnetic dipole
BH = 0.15 G and BV = 0.26 G moment is pm = 2 qm l

Aurora Borealis and Aurora Australis
People living at high latitude regions (near Arctic or Antarctic) might
experience dazzling coloured natural lights across the night sky. This
ethereal display on the sky is known as aurora borealis (northern lights) or
aurora australis (southern lights). These lights are often called as polar lights. The lights
are seen above the magnetic poles of the northern and southern hemispheres. They are
called as “Aurora borealis” in the north and “Aurora australis” in the south. This occurs as
a result of interaction between the gaseous particles in the Earth’s atmosphere with highly
charged particles released from the Sun’s atmosphere through solar wind. These particles
emit light due to collision and variations in colour are due to the type of the gas particles
that take part in the collisions. A pale yellowish – green colour is produced when the
ionized oxygen takes part in the collision and a blue or purplish – red aurora is produced
due to ionized nitrogen molecules.

The SI unit of magnetic moment is A m2. magnet in that region. The magnetic field B
Note that the direction of magnetic moment at a point is defined as a force experienced
is from South pole to North pole. by the bar magnet of unit pole strength.
(b) Magnetic field
1
Magnetic field is the region or space B= F (3.5)
qm
around every magnet within which its
influence can be felt by keeping another Its unit is N A-1 m-1.

(c) Types of magnets Properties of magnet
Magnets are classified into natural magnets The following are the properties of bar
and artificial magnets. For example, iron, magnet (Figure 3.9)
cobalt, nickel, etc. are natural magnets. 1. A freely suspended bar magnet will always
Strengths of natural magnets are very weak point along the north-south direction.
and the shapes of the magnet are irregular. 2.
A magnet attracts another magnet or
Artificial magnets are made by us in order magnetic substances towards itself. The
to have desired shape and strength. If the attractive force is maximum near the end
magnet is in the form of rectangular shape of the bar magnet. When a bar magnet is
or cylindrical shape, then it is known as bar dipped into iron filling, they cling to the
magnet. ends of the magnet.
ON
CTI
D IRE
RLY
THE
NOR
Geometrical length of a
N
bar magnet
S
Magnetic field lines

L
S N
N
N
S
qm qm
2l
Magnetic length of a
bar magnet
N
Cut in to two pieces
S N S N S N
=
qm qm qm qm qm qm
2l l l
Figure 3.9 Properties of bar magnet

3. When a magnet is broken into pieces, each When the bar magnet is cut along the axis
piece behaves like a magnet with poles at
into two pieces, new magnetic pole strength
its ends.
qm
4. Two poles of a magnet have pole strength is qm′ = but magnetic length does not
2
equal to one another. change. So, the magnetic moment is
5. The length of the bar magnet is called
geometrical length and the length between pm′ = qm′ 2l
two magnetic poles in a bar magnet is
qm 1 1
called magnetic length. Magnetic length pm 2l (qm 2l ) pm
2 2 2
is always slightly smaller than geometrical
 1
length. The ratio of magnetic length and In vector notation, pm pm
5 2
geometrical length is .
6
Magnetic length 5 (b)
a bar magnet cut into two pieces
= = 0.833
Geometrical length 6 perpendicular to the axis:
Cut in to two pieces

E X A M P L E 3. 2
Let the magnetic moment of a bar magnet S N S N

be pm whose magnetic length is d = 2l and =
pole strength is qm. Compute the magnetic qm qm qm qm
moment of the bar magnet when it is cut 2l l
into two pieces Cut in to two pieces

(a) along its length
S N S N S N
(b) perpendicular to its length.
=
Solutionqm qm qm qm qm qm
2l l l
(a) a bar magnet cut into two pieces along
its length:
S N
S When the bar magnet N is cut perpendicular
qm qm
2 to the axis into two pieces,
2 magnetic pole
= S strength will not Nchange but magnetic
qm qm
qm qm 2 length will be halved. 2So the magnetic
2l
moment2l is
Cut in to two pieces along the axis
1 1 1
pm qm 2l (qm 2l) pm
N
S N 2 2 2
qm qm
2 2
= S N  1
qm qm In vector notation pm pm
qm 2 2 2
2l
s along the axis

In this figure, the dot implies the pole
(i) Pole strength is a scalar quantity points.
Note with dimension [MoLToA]. Its SI
unit is N T-1 (newton per tesla) or 12 cm
A m (ampere-metre). S N
(ii) Like positive and negative charges
in electrostatics, north pole of a magnet
experiences a force in the direction of
10 cm
magnetic field while south pole of a magnet 1 cm 1 cm
experiences force opposite to the magnetic

field.
(iii) Pole strength depends on the nature Magnetic field lines
of materials of the magnet, area of cross-
1. Magnetic field lines are continuous closed
section and the state of magnetization.
curves. The direction of magnetic field lines
(iv) If a magnet is cut into two equal halves
is from North pole to South pole outside
along the length then pole strength is
reduced to half. the magnet (Figure 3.10) and South pole to
(v) If a magnet is cut into two equal halves North pole inside the magnet.
perpendicular to the length, then pole 2. The direction of magnetic field at any
strength remains same. point on the curve is known by drawing
(vi) If a magnet is cut into two pieces, we tangent to the magnetic line of force at
will not get separate north and south poles. that point. In the Figure No. 3.10 (b), the
Instead, we get two magnets. In other words, tangent drawn at points P, Q and R gives
isolated monopole does not exist in nature. 
the direction of magnetic field B at that
point.
E X A M P L E 3. 3 3. Magnetic field lines never intersect
Compute the magnetic length of a uniform each other. Otherwise, the magnetic
bar magnet if the geometrical length of the compass needle would point towards two
magnet is 12 cm. Mark the positions of directions, which is not possible.
magnetic pole points. 4. The degree of closeness of the field lines
determines the relative strength of the
12 cm
S N
magnetic field. The magnetic field is
strong where magnetic field lines crowd
and weak where magnetic field lines thin
out.
Solution
(d) Magnetic flux
Geometrical length of the bar magnet is 12 cm
The number of magnetic field lines
5 5 crossing per unit area is called magnetic
Magnetic length geometrical length 12 10 cm
6 6 flux ΦB. Mathematically, the magnetic flux
5
through a surface of area A in a uniform
geometrical length 12 10 cm magnetic field is defined as
6

 
B B. A BA cos B A (3.6)
 
where θ is the angle between Band A as
A
(a) B
θ = 0º θ
A
B
A θ
A
B B
Q
R P
Figure 3.11 Magnetic flux
Special cases
(b) 
(a) When B is normal to the surface i.e.,
θ = 0o, the magnetic flux is ΦB = BA
(maximum).

(b) When B is parallel to the surface i.e.,
θ = 90o, the magnetic flux is ΦB = 0.
Suppose the magnetic field is not
uniform over the surface, the equation (3.6)
can be written as
(c)  
Φ B = ∫ B.dA
Magnetic flux is a scalar quantity. The SI unit

for magnetic flux is weber, which is denoted
by symbol Wb. Dimensional formula for
magnetic flux is ML2T 2 A1 . The CGS unit
of magnetic flux is Maxwell.
1 weber = 108 maxwell

(d)
The magnetic flux density can also be
Figure 3.10 Properties of magnetic field defined as the number of magnetic field
lines– unlike poles attracts each other lines crossing unit area kept normal to the
shown in picture (a) and (b) like poles repel direction of line of force. Its unit is Wb m-2
each other-shown in picture (c) and (d)
or tesla.

Non-uniform magnetic field
Here the integral is taken over
Note Magnetic field is said to be non-uniform if
area.
the magnitude or direction or both varies at
Let X and Y be two planar all its points. Example: magnetic field of a
strips whose orientation is such that the bar magnet
direction of area vector of planar strips is
parallel to the direction of the magnetic
field as shown in figure. The number
of magnetic field lines passing through
area of the strip X is two. Therefore, the
(a)
flux passing through area X is ΦB = 2 Wb.
Similarly, the number of magnetic field
lines passing through area of strip Y is
ΦB = 4 Wb.

B
N S (b)
X 1 Y 1
2
2 3
4
(c)
N
(e) Uniform magnetic field and Non- Magnetic field lines
uniform magnetic field

Uniform magnetic field
N
N
S
S
N
(d)
Figure 3.13 Non-uniform magnetic field

– (a) direction is constant (b) direction
Figure 3.12 Uniform magnetic field is not a constant (c) both magnitude and
direction are not constant (d) magnetic
field of a bar magnet
Magnetic field is said to be uniform if it
has same magnitude and direction at all the
points in a given region. Example, locally E X A M P L E 3. 4
Earth’s magnetic field is uniform. Calculate the magnetic flux coming out
The magnetic field of Earth has same from the surface containing magnetic
value over the entire area of your school! dipole (say, a bar magnet) as shown in
figure.

Surface
Fine wire
S N S'
Glass cylinder
Magnet
S
P2 Magnet
N'
N P1
Solution
Magnetic dipole is kept, the total flux
emanating from the closed surface S is
Magnet A Magnet B
zero. So,
N N N N
∫ .dA = 0
ΦB = B Repulsion force
Here the integral is taken over closed

surface. Since no isolated magnetic pole
S Repulsion force S S S
(called magnetic monopole) exists, this Magnet A Magnet B
integral is always zero,
Magnet A Attractive force Magnet B

∫ B.dA =0 N S N S
This is similar to Gauss’s law in Magnet B Attractive force Magnet A

electrostatics. (Refer unit 1) N S N S
Opposite poles (unlike poles) attract each other

3.2
COULOMB’S INVERSE Figure 3.14: Magnetic poles behave like
SQUARE LAW OF electric charges – like poles repel and
MAGNETISM unlike poles attract
Consider two bar magnets A and B as in Unit I (opposite charges attract and like
shown in Figure 3.14. charges repel each other). So analogous to
When the north pole of magnet A and Coulomb’s law in electrostatics, (Refer unit
the north pole of magnet B or the south pole 1) we can state Coulomb’s law for magnetism
of magnet A and the south pole of magnet (Figure 3.15) as follows:
B are brought closer, they repel each other.
r
On the other hand, when the north pole of Magnet A Magnet B
N S N S
magnet A and the south pole of magnet B or
the south pole of magnet A and the north qmA qmB
pole of magnet B are brought closer, their
poles attract each other. This looks similar Figure 3.15 Coulomb’s law – force
to Coulomb’s law for static charges studied between two magnetic pole strength

The force of attraction or repulsion Given : F = 9 x 10-3N, r = 10 cm = 10 x 10-2 m
between two magnetic poles is directly
proportional to the product of their pole Therefore,
strengths and inversely proportional to the qm2
9 103 107 qm 30 N T 1
square of the distance between them. 10 10
2
2
Mathematically, we can write
 q m qm 3.2.1 Magnetic field at a

F ∝ A2 B 
r point along the axial line
r
of the magnetic dipole (bar
where mA and mB are pole strengths of magnet)
two poles and r is the distance between two
magnetic poles. Consider a bar magnet NS as shown in
Figure 3.16. Let N be the North Pole and S
 q m qm be the south pole of the bar magnet, each of
F = k A2 B r (3.7)
r pole strength qm and separated by a distance
of 2l. The magnetic field at a point C (lies
 qm qm along the axis of the magnet) at a distance
In magnitude, F = k A 2 B (3.8)
r from the geometrical center O of the bar
where k is a proportionality constant magnet can be computed by keeping unit
whose value depends on the surrounding north pole (qmc = 1 A m) at C. The force
medium. In S.I. unit, the value of k for free experienced by the unit north pole at C
 due to pole strength can be computed using
space is k 107 H m1 , where μo is the
4 Coulomb’s law of magnetism as follows:
absolute permeability of free space (air or
vacuum). The force of repulsion between north
pole of the bar magnet and unit north pole
E X A M P L E 3. 5 at point C (in free space) is
The repulsive force between two magnetic µ qm 
poles in air is 9 x 10-3 N. If the two poles FN = i (3.9)
4 π (r − l )2
are equal in strength and are separated
where r – l is the distance between north
by a distance of 10 cm, calculate the pole
pole of the bar magnet and unit north pole
strength of each pole.
at C.
Solution: The force of attraction between South
The force between two poles are given by Pole of the bar magnet and unit North Pole
at point C (in free space) is
 q m qm
F = k A2 B r µ qm 
r FS = − i (3.10)
4 π (r + l )2
The magnitude of the force is
where r + l is the distance between south
qm A qm B pole of the bar magnet and unit north pole
F =k
r2 at C.

y axis
O is the geometrical center of bar magnet qmC = 1 Am
S O N FS FN jˆ
C lˆ
x axis
BS qmC BN –lˆ
–jˆ
l l r–l
2l
r+l
Figure 3.16 Magnetic field at a point along the axial line due to magnetic dipole
From equation (3.9) and (3.10), the

  
net force at point C is F FN FS . From (r 2 − l 2 )2 ≈ r 4 (3.13)
definition, this net force is the magnetic field
 
due to magnetic dipole at a point C F B Therefore, using equation (3.13) in
equation (3.12), we get
µ qm  µ qm   µ 2 p  µ 2
 −
B= i + i
 4 π (r + l )2  Baxial =  3m 
i = 3 pm (3.14)
4 π (r − l )2 4 π  r  4π r

where pm = pmi .
µ q  1 1 

B = m  − i
4 π (r − l )2 (r + l )2 
3.2.2. Magnetic field at a

 
µ 2r  qm ⋅ (2l )  point along the equatorial line
B=  
i (3.11)
4 π (r 2 − l 2 )2  due to a magnetic dipole (bar
 
magnet)
Since, magnitude of magnetic dipole Consider a bar magnet NS as shown in

moment is pm pm qm 2l the magnetic Figure 3.17. Let N be the north pole and S
field at a point C equation (3.11) can be be the south pole of the bar magnet, each
written as with pole strength qm and separated by
  a distance of 2l. The magnetic field at a
µ  2rpm  point C (lies along the equatorial line) at
Baxial =  i (3.12)
4 π (r 2 − l 2 )2  a distance r from the geometrical center
 
O of the bar magnet can be computed by
If the distance between two poles in keeping unit north pole (qmC = 1 A m)
a bar magnet are small (looks like short at C. The force experienced by the unit
magnet) compared to the distance between north pole at C due to pole strength N-S
geometrical centre O of bar magnet and the can be computed using Coulomb’s law of
location of point C i.e., r >>l then, magnetism as follows:


FN
FS = −FS cos θ
i −FS sin θ j (3.16)
BN
θ C qmC = 1 Am
R
θ µ  qm
qmC where, FS =
FS 4 π r ′2
BS y axis
r' = (r2 + l2)½
From equation (3.15) and equation
 
r (3.16), the net force at point C is F = FN + FS .
jˆ
lˆ
x axis
This net force is equal to the magnetic field
–lˆ
θ θ –jˆ at the point C.
S O N 
B = −(FN + FS )cosθ 
l l
i
O is the geometrical center of bar magnet
Since, FN = FS
Figure 3.17 Magnetic field at a point
along the equatorial line due to a 2µ q 2µ q
B = − m2 cos θ 
i = − 2 m 2 cos θ 
i
magnetic dipole 4π r ′ 4 π (r + l )
(3.17)
The force of repulsion between North
In a right angle triangle NOC as
Pole of the bar magnet and unit north pole
shown in the Figure 3.17
at point C (in free space) is
adjacent l l
cos
 hypotenuse r 1
FN = −FN cos θ
i + FN sin θ 
j (3.15) r 2
l2 2
(3.18)
µ  qm Substituting equation (3.18) in equation

where FN =
4 π r ′2 (3.17) we get
The force of attraction (in free space) µ q ×(2l ) 
between south pole of the bar magnet and B =− m i (3.19)
4 π 2 2 23
unit north pole at point C is (Figure 3.18) is (r + l )
→ ĵ Since, magnitude of magnetic dipole

FN 
moment is pm pm qm 2l and substituting
FN sinθ(ĵ)
in equation (3.19), the magnetic field at a
point C is
FN cosθ(-i)
θ µ pm
-i Bequatorial = − i (3.20)
FN cosθ(i) θ 4π
(r 2 + l )
3
2 2
If the distance between two poles in a bar

FS sinθ(-ĵ)
→ magnet are small (looks like short magnet)
FS
-ĵ when compared to the distance between
geometrical center O of bar magnet and the
Figure 3.18 Components of force
location of point C i.e., r >>l, then,

(b)
When the point lies on the normal
3
(r 2 + l ) ≈ r 3 (3.21)
2 2 bisector (equatorial) line of the bar
magnet, the magnetic field for short
magnet is given by
Therefore, using equation (3.21) in
µ p
equation (3.20), we get Bequatorial = − m3  i
4π r
µ p   0.5 
Bequatorial = − m3 i Bequatorial = −10−7  i = −0.5×10−4 T i
4π r  (0.1)3 

Since pmi = pm , In general, the magnetic Hence, the magnitude of the magnetic field
field at equatorial point is given by along axial is Bequatorial = 0.5 x 10-4 T and
direction is towards North to South.
pm
Bequatorial (3.22)
4 r 3 Note that magnitude of Baxial is twice that of
magnitude of Bequatorial and the direction of
Note that magnitude of Baxial is twice that Baxial and Bequatorial are opposite.
of magnitude of Bequatorial and the direction of
Baxial and Bequatorial are opposite.
3.3
E X A M P L E 3. 6 TORQUE ACTING ON A
BAR MAGNET IN UNIFORM
A short bar magnet has a magnetic moment
MAGNETIC FIELD
of 0.5 J T-1. Calculate magnitude and
direction of the magnetic field produced by
Consider a magnet of length 2l of pole
the bar magnet which is kept at a distance
strength qm kept in a uniform magnetic
of 0.1 m from the center of the bar magnet 
field B as shown in Figure 3.19. Each pole
along (a) axial line of the bar magnet and
experiences a force of magnitude qmB but
(b) normal bisector of the bar magnet.
acts in opposite direction. Therefore, the net
Solution force exerted on the magnet is zero, so that
there is no translatory motion. These two
Given magnetic moment 0.5 J T-1 and
forces constitute a couple (about midpoint of
distance r = 0.1 m
bar magnet) which will rotate and try to align

(a) When the point lies on the axial line of in the direction of the magnetic field B .
the bar magnet, the magnetic field for
short magnet is given by The force experienced by north pole,
 
µ 2 p  FN = qm B (3.23)
Baxial =  3m  
i
4 π  r  The force experienced by south pole,
 
  2×0.5  FS qm B (3.24)
Baxial = 10−7 × i = 1×10−4 T 
 i
 (0.1)3 
Adding equations (3.23) and (3.24), we
Hence, the magnitude of the magnetic field get the net force acting on the dipole as
along axial is Baxial = 1 x 10-4 T and direction    
F FN FS 0
is towards South to North.

represents moment of inertia of the bar
magnet, pm is the magnetic moment and is
F = q mB the magnetic field.
N
N
2l
S
Solution
2l sinθ
S θ The magnitude of deflecting torque (the

torque which makes the object rotate)
F = q mB
acting on the bar magnet which will tend
to align the bar magnet parallel to the

Figure 3.19 Magnetic dipole kept in a direction of the uniform magnetic field B
uniform magnetic field is

pm B sin
This implies, that the net force acting on
the dipole is zero, but forms a couple which The magnitude of restoring torque acting
tends to rotate the bar magnet clockwise on the bar magnet can be written as

(here) in order to align it along B .  d 2
I 2
The moment of force or torque dt
experienced by north and south pole about Under equilibrium conditions, both
point O is magnitude of deflecting torque and

restoring torque will be equal but act in the
τ = ON × FN + OS × FS
opposite directions, which means
τ = ON ×qm B + OS ×(−qm B )
d 2
I pm B sin
By using right hand cork screw rule, we dt 2
conclude that the total torque is pointing
into the paper. Since the magnitudes
(a) Why a freely suspended
ON OS l and qm B qm B , the
bar magnet in your
magnitude of total torque about point O laboratory experiences only
torque (rotational motion) but not any
l qm B sin l qm B sin
translatory motion even though Earth
2l qm B sin has non-uniform magnetic field?
pm B sin qm 2l pm It is because Earth’s magnetic field is
   locally(physics laboratory)uniform.
In vector notation, pm B (3.25)
(b) Suppose we keep a freely suspended
bar magnet in a non-uniform
E X A M P L E 3. 7 magnetic field. What will happen?
Show the time period of oscillation when a It will undergo translatory motion
bar magnet is kept in a uniform magnetic (net force) and rotational motion
1 (torque).
field is T 2 in second, where I
pm B

The negative sign implies that both are in 3.3.1. Potential energy of
opposite directions. The above equation a bar magnet in a uniform
can be written as magnetic field
d 2 p B N
2
m sin
dt I
This is non-linear second order θ

homogeneous differential equation. In B
order to make it linear, we use small angle
approximation as we did in XI volume
II (Unit 10 – oscillations, Refer section
10.4.4) i.e., sin , we get S
Figure 3.20: A bar magnet (magnetic
d 2
p B dipole) in a uniform magnetic field
2
m
dt I
When a bar magnet (magnetic dipole) of
This linear second order homogeneous 
dipole moment pm is held at an angle θ with

differential equation is a Simple Harmonic the direction of a uniform magnetic field B ,
differential equation. Therefore, as shown in Figure 3.20 the magnitude of
the torque acting on the dipole is
  
Comparing with Simple Harmonic B pm B sin
Motion (SHM) differential equation
If the dipole is rotated through a very
d2x small angular displacement dθ against the
2 x
dt 2 torque τ B at constant angular velocity, then
where ω is the angular frequency 
the work done by external torque ext for
of the oscillation. this small angular displacement is given by

dW ext d
pm B p B The bar magnet has to be moved at
2 m
I I constant angular velocity, which implies
 
that B ext
I
T 2
pm B dW pm B sin d
I Total work done in rotating the dipole

T 2 in second from θʹ to θ is
pm BH
θ θ
θ
where, BH is the horizontal component of W = ∫ τdθ =∫ pm B sin θ dθ = pm B − cos θ dθ θ′
θ′ θ′
Earth’s magnetic field.
W pm B(cos cos )

This work done is stored as potential Solution
energy in bar magnet at an angle θ when 
Let pm be the dipole and before switching
it is rotated from θʹ to θ and it can be ON the external magnetic field, there is no
written as orientation. Therefore, the energy U = 0.
U pm B(cos cos ) (3.26) As soon as external magnetic field is switched
In fact, the equation (3.26) gives the ON, the magnetic dipole orient parallel
difference in potential energy between the (θ = 0o) to the magnetic field with energy,
angular positions θʹ and θ. We can choose U parallel = U min imum = − pm B cos0
the reference point θʹ = 90o, so that second U parallel = − pm B
term in the equation becomes zero and the
equation (3.26) can be written as since cos 0o = 1
U = − pm B (cos θ) (3.27) Otherwise, the magnetic dipole orients

anti-parallel (θ = 180o) to the magnetic
The potential energy stored in a bar magnet field with energy,
in a uniform magnetic field is given by
U anti−parallel = U max imum = − pm B cos180 ⇒ U anti−parallel = pm B
U = − pm i B (3.28)
U anti−parallel = U max imum = − pm B cos180 ⇒ U anti−parallel = pm B
Case 1
(i) If θ = 0o, then since cos 180o = -1
U = − pm B (cos 0 ) = − pm B
Direction of Direction of
Magnetic dipole Magnetic dipole
(ii) If θ = 180o, then parallel to anti-parallel to
external external
magnetic field magnetic field
U = − pm B (cos180 ) = pm B
Magnetic dipole Magnetic dipole
External External
We can infer from the above two results, Magnetic field Magnetic field
the potential energy of the bar magnet

is minimum when it is aligned along the
external magnetic field and maximum U = pmB (anti-parallel orientation)
when the bar magnet is aligned anti-parallel U=0

∆U = 2pmB (energy separation)
to external magnetic field. U = –pmB (parallel orientation)
E X A M P L E 3. 8
Consider a magnetic dipole which on 3.3.2 Tangent law and
switching ON external magnetic field orient Tangent Galvanometer
only in two possible ways i.e., one along the
Tangent Galvanometer (Figure 3.21) is a
direction of the magnetic field (parallel
device used to measure very small currents.
to the field) and another anti-parallel to
It is a moving magnet type galvanometer. Its
magnetic field. Compute the energy for the
working is based on tangent law.
possible orientation. Sketch the graph.

of the equipment we use in laboratory
consists of 2 turns, 5 turns and 50 turns
which are of different thickness and are
used for measuring currents of different
strengths.
At the center of turn table, a small
upright projection is seen on which compass
box (also known as magnetometre box)
is placed. Compass box consists of a small
magnetic needle which is pivoted at the
center, such that arrangement shows the
center of both magnetic needle and circular
coil exactly coincide. A thin aluminium
Figure 3.21 Tangent Galvanometer pointer is attached to the magnetic needle
normally and moves over circular scale. The
Tangent law circular scale is divided into four quadrants
and graduated in degrees which are used to
When a magnetic needle or magnet is freely
measure the deflection of aluminium pointer
suspended in two mutually perpendicular
on a circular degree scale. In order to avoid
uniform magnetic fields, it will come to rest
parallax error in measurement, a mirror is
in the direction of the resultant of the two
placed below the aluminium pointer.
fields.
Let B be the magnetic field produced
by passing current through the coil of
the tangent Galvanometer and BH be the
horizontal component of earth’s magnetic
field. Under the action of two magnetic
fields, the needle comes to rest making angle
θ with BH, such that
B = BH tan θ (3.29)
Construction
Tangent Galvanometer (TG) consists of Figure 3.22 Tangent Galvanometer and
its parts
copper coil wounded on a non-magnetic
circular frame. The frame is made up of
brass or wood which is mounted vertically Precautions
on a horizontal base table (turn table) with 1.
All the nearby magnets and magnetic
three levelling screws as shown in Figure materials are kept away from the instrument.
3.22. The TG is provided with two or more 2.
Using spirit level, the levelling screws
coils of different number of turns. Most at the base are adjustedso that the small

magnetic needle is exactly horizontal
and also coil (mounted on the frame) is
exactly vertical.
3. The plane of the coil is kept parallel to the
small magnetic needle by rotating the coil
about its vertical axis. So, the coil remains
in magnetic meridian.
BH
N
θ
Figure 3.23 Compass box S
4. The compass box (as shown in Figure Figure 3.24 (a) circuit connection
3.23) is rotated such that the pointer reads (b) resultant position of pivoted needle
0o – 0o
Theory Because of these crossed fields, the
pivoted magnetic needle deflects through an
The circuit connection for Tangent
angle θ. From tangent law (equation 3.29),
Galvanometer (TG) experiment is shown
in Figure 3.24. When no current is passed B = BH tan θ
through the coil, the small magnetic needle When an electric current is passed
lies along horizontal component of Earth’s through a circular coil of radius R having N
magnetic field. When the circuit is switched turns, the magnitude of magnetic field at the
ON, the electric current will pass through center is
the circular coil and produce magnetic NI
field. The magnetic field produced due to B  (3.30)
2R
the circulatory electric current is discussed From equation (3.29) and equation
(in section 3.8.3). Now there are two fields (3.30), we get
which are acting mutually perpendicular to NI
each other. They are:  BH tan
2R
(1) the magnetic field (B) due to the electric The horizontal component of Earth’s
current in the coil acting normal to the magnetic field can be determined as
plane of the coil.
(2) the horizontal component of Earth’s NI 1
BH  in tesla (3.31)
magnetic field (BH) 2R tan

3.4
1. The current in circuit can
Note be calculated from I = K tan
θ, where K is called reduction MAGNETIC PROPERTIES
factor of tangent Galvanometer, where
2RBH All the materials we use are not magnetic

K
 N materials. Further, all the magnetic
materials will not behave identically. So, in
2. Sensitivity measures the change
in the deflection produced by a unit order to differentiate one magnetic material
current, mathematically from another, we need to know some basic
parameters. They are:
d 1
(a) Magnetising field
dI I2
K 1 2 The magnetic field which is used to
K
magnetize a sample or specimen is called
3. The tangent Galvanometer is most the magnetising field. Magnetising field is

sensitive at a deflection of 45o. Generally a vector quantity and it denoted by H and its
the deflection is taken between 30o unit is A m-1.
and 60o. (b) Magnetic permeability
E X A M P L E 3. 9 The magnetic permeability can be defined
as the measure of ability of the material to
A coil of a tangent galvanometer of diametre allow the passage of magnetic field lines
0.24 m has 100 turns. If the horizontal through it or measure of the capacity of
component of Earth’s magnetic field is the substance to take magnetisation or the
25 × 10-6 T then, calculate the current degree of penetration of magnetic field
which gives a deflection of 60o. through the substance.
In free space, the permeability (or
Solution
absolute permeability) is denoted by µ0
The diameter of the coil is 0.24 m.
and for any medium it is denoted by µ.The
Therefore, radius of the coil is 0.12 m.
relative permeability µr is defined as the
Number of turns is 100 turns. ratio between absolute permeability of the
Earth’s magnetic field is 25 x 10-6 T medium to the permeability of free space.
Deflection is
r (3.32)

60 tan 60 3 1.732
 
2RBH Relative permeability is a dimensionless

I= tan θ
µN number and has no units. For free space
2×0.12×25×10−6 (air or vacuum), the relative permeability is
= ×1.732 = 0.82×10−1 A.
−7
4 ×10 ×3.14 ×100 unity i.e., µr = 1. In isotropic medium, µ is a
I = 0.082 A scalar but for non-isotropic medium, µ is a
tensor.

moment per unit volume of the material is
known as intensity of magnetisation or
magnetisation vector or magnetisation. It is
Physical Component Direction a vector quantity. Mathematically,
quantity
No direction magnetic moment 1
Scalar 1 Component (no unit = M = p (3.33)
vector) volume V m
1 direction
Vector Each Component (one unit The SI unit of intensity of magnetisation
vector) is ampere metre-1. For a bar magnet of pole
More than
strength qm, length 2l and area of cross-section
one direction
Tensor Each Component (more than A, the magnetic moment of the bar magnet is
one unit
vectors)

pm = q m 2l and volume of the bar magnet is

Physical Component Rank =
V A= 2l 2l A. The intensity of magnetisation
quantity
for a bar magnet is
1 Component with zero
Scalar Zero
direction

magnetic moment qm 2l
Each Component has one = M = (3.34)
Vector One
direction volume 2l A
Each Component
Tensor of
associated with two Two In magnitude, equation (3.34) is
rank two
directions
 q 2l q
Tensor Each Component M M m M m
of rank associated with three Three 2l A A
three directions
This means, for a bar magnet the intensity
Tensor of Each Component
rank n associated with n directions
n of magnetisation can be defined as the pole
strength per unit area (face area).
(d) Magnetic induction or total magnetic
(c) Intensity of magnetisation field
Any bulk material (any object of finite When a substance like soft iron bar is

size) contains a large number of atoms. Each placed in an uniform magnetising field H,
atom consists of electrons which undergo it becomes a magnet, which means that the
orbital motion. Due to orbital motion, substance gets magnetised. The magnetic
electron has magnetic moment which is a induction (total magnetic field) inside

vector quantity. In general, these magnetic the specimen B is equal to the sum of the

moments orient randomly, therefore, the net magnetic field B produced in vacuum due
magnetic moment is zero per unit volume of to the magnetising field and the magnetic

the material. field Bm due to the induced magnetisation of
When such a material is kept in an external the substance.

magnetic field, atomic dipoles are created and B Bo Bm H I
hence, it will try to align partially or fully along
the direction of external field. The net magnetic ⇒ B = Bo + Bm = µ (H + I ) (3.35)

(e) Magnetic susceptibility E X A M P L E 3. 1 0
When a substance is kept in a magnetising
 Compute the intensity of magnetisation
field H, magnetic susceptibility gives
information about how a material respond of the bar magnet whose mass, magnetic
to the external (applied) magnetic field. In moment and density are 200 g, 2 A m2 and
other words, the magnetic susceptibility 8 g cm-3, respectively.
measures, how easily and how strongly a
material can be magnetised. It is defined as Solution
the ratio of the intensity of magnetisation
 Density of the magnet is
(M ) induced in the 
material due to the
magnetising field (H )
Mass Mass
Density Volume
 Volume Density
M
m  (3.36)
H
200 103 kg
Volume 25 106 m3
It is a dimensionless quantity. For an 8 10 3

kg 10 m 6 3
isotropic medium, susceptibility is a scalar but Magnitude of magnetic moment pm = 2 Am2

for non-isotropic medium, susceptibility is a
tensor. Magnetic susceptibility for some of the Intensity of magnetization,
isotropic substances is given in Table 3.1.
Magnetic moment 2
I
Volume 25 106
Table 3.1 Magnetic susceptibility for
various materials M 0.8 105 Am1
Material Magnetic susceptibility (χm)
E X A M P L E 3. 1 1
Aluminium 2.3 × 10-5

Copper −0.98 × 10 −5 Using the relation B (H M ), show that
m r 1.
Diamond −2.2 × 10 −5
Gold Solution
−3.6 × 10 −5

Mercury −5 B (H M ),
−3.2 × 10
Silver But from equation (3.36), in vector form,

−2.6 × 10 −5
 
M m H
Titanium 7.06 × 10 −5

Hence, B ( m 1)H B H
Tungsten 6.8 × 10 −5
Carbon dioxide
−2.3 × 10 −9 where,  ( m 1) m 1 r
(1 atm) 
Oxygen (1 atm) 2090 × 10 −9 m r 1

E X A M P L E 3. 12 planes are oriented in random manner, the
vector sum of magnetic moments is zero
Two materials X and Y are magnetised, and there is no resultant magnetic moment
whose intensity of magnetisation are 500 for each atom.
A m-1 and 2000 A m-1, respectively. If the In the presence of an external magnetic
magnetising field is 1000 A m-1, then which field, some electrons are speeded up and
one among these materials can be easily some are slowed down. The electrons whose
magnetized?. moments were anti-parallel are speeded up
Solution according to Lenz’s law and this produces
an induced magnetic moment in a direction
The susceptibility of material X is opposite to the field. The induced moment
 disappears as soon as the external field is
M 500 removed.
m,X  0. 5
H 1000 When placed in a non-uniform magnetic
field, the interaction between induced
The susceptibility of material Y is
magnetic moment and the external field
 creates a force which tends to move the
M 2000
m,Y  2 material from stronger part to weaker part of
H 1000 the external field. It means that diamagnetic
material is repelled by the field.
Since, susceptibility of material Y is greater
This action is called diamagnetic action
than that of material X, material Y can be
and such materials are known as diamagnetic
easily magnetized than X.
materials. Examples: Bismuth, Copper and
Water etc.
3.5 The properties of diamagnetic materials are
CLASSIFICATION OF i) Magnetic susceptibility is negative.

MAGNETIC MATERIALS ii) Relative permeability is slightly less than
unity.
iii) The magnetic field lines are repelled or
The magnetic materials are generally
expelled by diamagnetic materials when
classified into three types based on the
placed in a magnetic field.
behaviour of materials in a magnetising
field. They are diamagnetic, paramagnetic iv) Susceptibility is nearly temperature
and ferromagnetic materials which are dealt independent.
with in this section.
(a) Diamagnetic materials Superconductors are perfect
Note diamagnetic materials.
The orbital motion of electrons around The expulsion of magnetic
the nucleus produces a magnetic field flux from a superconductor during its
perpendicular to the plane of the orbit. transition to the superconducting state is
Thus each electron orbit has finite orbital known as Meissner effect. (see figure 3.25)
magnetic dipole moment. Since the orbital

B B
(b) Paramagnetic materials
In some magnetic materials, each atom or
molecule has net magnetic dipole moment
which is the vector sum of orbital and spin
magnetic moments of electrons. Due to
the random orientation of these magnetic
moments, the net magnetic moment of the
materials is zero.
In the presence of an external magnetic
T > Tc T < Tc
field, the torque acting on the atomic dipoles
Figure 3.25 Meissner effect – will align them in the field direction. As a
superconductors behaves like perfect result, there is net magnetic dipole moment
diamagnetic materials below transition induced in the direction of the applied field.
temperature TC. The induced dipole moment is present as
long as the external field exists.
When placed in a non-uniform magnetic
field, the paramagnetic materials will have a
Magnetic levitated train
tendency to move from weaker to stronger
Magnetic levitated train
part of the field. Materials which exhibit
is also called as Maglev train.
weak magnetism in the direction of the
This train floats above few centimetre from
applied field are known as paramagnetic
the guideway because of electromagnet
materials. Examples: Aluminium, Platinum
used. Maglev train does not need wheels
and chromium etc.
and also achieve greater speed. The basic
The properties of paramagnetic materials
mechanism of working of Maglev train
are:
involves two sets of magnets. One set is
i) Magnetic susceptibility is positive and
used to repel which makes train to float
small.
above the track and another set is used to
ii)
Relative permeability is greater than
move the floating train ahead at very great
unity.
speed. These trains are quieter, smoother
iii)
The magnetic field lines are attracted
and environmental friendly compared
into the paramagnetic materials when
conventional trains and have potential
placed in a magnetic field.
for moving with much higher speeds with
iv)
Susceptibility is inversely proportional
technology in future.
to temperature.
Curie’s law
When temperature is increased, thermal
vibration will upset the alignment of
magnetic dipole moments. Therefore, the
magnetic susceptibility decreases with
increase in temperature. In many cases, the
susceptibility of the materials is

1 C aligned in a direction. This alignment is
m or χm =
caused by strong interaction arising from
T T
electron spin which depends on the inter-
This relation is called Curie’s law. Here atomic distance. Each domain has net
C is called Curie constant and temperature magnetisation in a direction. However
T is in kelvin. The graph drawn between the direction of magnetisation varies
magnetic susceptibility and temperature is from domain to domain and thus net
shown in Figure 3.26, which is a rectangular magnetisation of the specimen is zero.
hyperbola.
In the presence of external magnetic
χm field, two processes take place
(1) the domains having magnetic moments
parallel to the field grow in size
O
C
T (2) the other domains (not parallel to field)
χm = are rotated so that they are aligned with
T
the field.
Figure 3.26 Curie’s law – susceptibility vs
temperature As a result of these mechanisms,
there is a strong net magnetisation of the
material in the direction of the applied field
(c)Ferromagnetic materials
(Figure 3.28).
Magnetic Domains
A: Iron in the absence of a magnetic field.
B: Iron in the presence of a magnetic field.
C: A non-magnetic material
Unmagnetized Nonmagnetic
B iron Nail Magnet materia l no domains
Domains Domains
randomly aligned with
aligned external field A B C
Figure 3.27 magnetic domains – Figure 3.28 Processes of domain

ferromagnetic materials magnetization
An atom or a molecule in a ferromagnetic When placed in a non-uniform magnetic

material possesses net magnetic dipole field, the ferromagnetic materials will have
moment as in a paramagnetic material. a strong tendency to move from weaker to
A ferromagnetic material is made up of stronger part of the field. Materials which
smaller regions, called ferromagnetic exhibit strong magnetism in the direction
domain (Figure 3.27). Within each domain, of applied field are called ferromagnetic
the magnetic moments are spontaneously materials. Examples: Iron, Nickel and Cobalt.

The properties of ferromagnetic
materials are: Spin
i) Magnetic susceptibility is positive and Like mass and charge for
large. particles, spin is also another
important attribute for an elementary
ii) Relative permeability is large. particle. Spin is a quantum mechanical
iii)
The magnetic field lines are strongly phenomenon (this is discussed in
attracted into the ferromagnetic materials Volume 2) which is responsible for
when placed in a magnetic field. magnetic properties of the material.
Spin in quantum mechanics is entirely
iv)
Susceptibility is inversely proportional
different from spin we encounter in
to temperature.
classical mechanics. Spin in quantum
Curie-Weiss law mechanics does not mean rotation; it is
intrinsic angular momentum which does
As temperature increases, the
not have classical analogue. For historical
ferromagnetism decreases due to the
reason, the name spin is retained. Spin of a
increased thermal agitation of the atomic
particle takes only positive values but the
dipoles. At a particular temperature,
orientation of the spin vector takes plus
ferromagnetic material becomes
or minus values in an external magnetic
paramagnetic. This temperature is known
as Curie temperature TC . The susceptibility field. For an example, electron has spin
of the material above the Curie temperature 1
s = . In the presence of magnetic field,
is given by 2
the spin will orient either parallel or anti-
C parallel to the direction of magnetic field.
m
T TC
mS mS
This relation is called Curie-Weiss law.
The constant C is called Curie constant B B
and temperature T is in kelvin. A plot of
magnetic susceptibility with temperature is
as shown in Figure 3.29. Spin is parallel to the Spin is anti-parallel to the
magnetic field direction magnetic field direction
(Spin up) (Spin down)
This implies that the magnetic spin

ms takes two values for an electron, such
O Tc T 1 1
as ms = (spin up) and ms = − (spin
zm (T >Tc) = µ0
C 2 2
T–Tc down). Spin for proton and neutron is
1
Figure 3.29 Curie-Weiss law – s= . For a photon is spin s = 1.
Susceptibility vs temperature 2

Magnetising field is Magnetising field is
Type of present Magnetisation of Relative
absent Susceptibility
magnetism the material permeability
(H = 0) (H ≠ 0)
Diamagnetism M Negative Less than
unity
(Zero magnetic O H
moment) (Aligned opposite
to the field)
Paramagnetism M Positive and Greater than
small unity
(Net magnetic moment O H

but random alignment) (Aligned with the
field)
Ferromagnetism M Positive and Very large
large
(Net magnetic moment O H

in a domain but (Aligned with the
random alignment of field)
domains)

with magnetising field H is not linear. It
B
means that the ratio = µ is not a constant.
H
Let us study this behaviour in detail.
Three simple types of ordering of atomic magnetic moments
A ferromagnetic material (example,
Iron) is magnetised slowly by a magnetising
 
field H . The magnetic induction B of the
Ferromagnetic
(Adjacent magnetic
Antiferromagnetic
(Adjacent magnetic
Ferrimagnetic
(Adjacent magnetic
material increases from point A with the
moments are aligned) moments are antiparallel
and of equal magnitude)
moments are antiparallel
and of unequal magnitude)
magnitude of the magnetising field and then
(a) (b) (c)
attains a saturated level. This response of the
material is depicted by the path AC as shown
in Figure 3.30. Saturation magnetization is
3.6 defined as the maximum point up to which
the material can be magnetised by applying
HYSTERESIS
the magnetising field.
If the magnetising field is now reduced,
When a ferromagnetic material is kept the magnetic induction also decreases but
in a magnetising field, the material gets does not retrace the original path CA. It takes
magnetised by induction. An important different path CD. When the magnetising field
characteristic of ferromagnetic material is is zero, the magnetic induction is not zero and

that the variation of magnetic induction B it has positive value. This implies that some

of the reverse magnetising field for which
+B
Flux
density
the residual magnetism of the material
C
vanishes is called its coercivity.

D Further increase of H in the reverse
direction, the magnetic induction increases
–H E A K +H along EF until it reaches saturation at F in
Magnetising
field the reverse direction. If magnetising field is
decreased and then increased with direction
G reversed, the magnetic induction traces the
AD-AG: residual magnetism
path FGKC. This closed curve ACDEFGKC
F AE-AK: coercivity is called hysteresis loop and it represents a
–B
cycle of magnetisation.
Hysteresis loop for magnetic material
In the entire cycle, the magnetic induction
B Flux density
B lags behind the magnetising field H.
Saturation
Retentivity This phenomenon of lagging of magnetic
C
D induction behind the magnetising field is
called hysteresis. Hysteresis means ‘lagging
Coercivity behind’.
–H H
Magnetising field E A
K
Magnetising field
Hysteresis loss
in opposits direction
During the magnetisation of the
specimen through a cycle, there is loss
G of energy in the form of heat. This loss is
F attributed to the rotation and orientation of
Saturation
in opposits direction molecular magnets in various directions. It
Flux density
–B in opposits direction is found that the energy lost (or dissipated)
per unit volume of the material when it is
Figure 3.30 Hysteresis – plot for B vs H carried through one cycle of magnetisation
is equal to the area of the hysteresis loop.
magnetism is left in the specimen even when Thus, the loss of energy for a complete cycle
H = 0. The residual magnetism AD present is ∆E ,
in the specimen is called remanence or
retentivity. It is defined as the ability of the
∫ .dB
∆E = H
 
materials to retain the magnetism in them where B is in ampere – metre2 and H is
even magnetising field vanishes. in ampere per meter. The loss in energy is
In order to demagnetise the material, measured in joules.
the magnetising field is gradually increased Hard and soft magnetic materials
in the reverse direction. Now the magnetic
Based on the shape and size of the
induction decreases along DE and becomes
hysteresis loop, ferromagnetic materials are
zero at E. The magnetising field AE in
classified as soft magnetic materials with
the reverse direction is required to bring
smaller area and hard magnetic materials
residual magnetism to zero. The magnitude

with larger area. The comparison of the Applications of hysteresis loop
hysteresis loops for two magnetic materials The significance of hysteresis loop is that
is shown in Figure 3.31. Properties of soft it provides information such as retentivity,
and hard magnetic materials are compared coercivity, permeability, susceptibility and
in Table 3.2. energy loss during one cycle of magnetisation
for each ferromagnetic material. Therefore,
B Silicon steel (soft) the study of hysteresis loop will help us in
selecting proper and suitable material for a
Carbon steel (hard) given purpose. Some examples:
i) Permanent magnets:
–H H The materials with high retentivity, high
coercivity and high permeability are suitable
for making permanent magnets.
Examples: Steel and Alnico
ii) Electromagnets:
The materials with high initial
–B
permeability, low retentivity, low coercivity
Figure 3.31 Comparison of two and thin hysteresis loop with smaller area
ferromagnetic materials – hysteresis loop are preferred to make electromagnets.
Table 3.2 Difference between soft and hard ferromagnetic materials

S.No. Properties Soft ferromagnetic Hard ferromagnetic
materials materials
1 When external field is Magnetisation disappears Magnetisation persists
removed
2 Area of the loop Small Large
3 Retentivity Low High
4 Coercivity Low High
5 Susceptibility and High Low
magnetic permeability
6 Hysteresis loss Less More
7 Uses Solenoid core, transformer Permanent magnets
core and electromagnets
8 Examples Soft iron, Mumetal, Stalloy Steel, Alnico, Lodestone etc.
etc.

Examples: Soft iron and Mumetal (Nickel 3.3
Iron alloy).
MAGNETIC EFFECTS OF
iii) Core of the transformer: CURRENT
The materials with high initial
permeability, large magnetic induction and
3.7.1 Oersted experiment
thin hysteresis loop with smaller area are
needed to design transformer cores. In 1820, Hans Christian Oersted while
preparing for his lecture in physics noticed
Examples: Soft iron
that electric current passing through a wire
deflects the nearby magnetic compass. By
E X A M P L E 3. 13 proper investigation, he observed that the
deflection of magnetic compass is due to the
The following figure shows the variation of
change in magnetic field produced around
intensity of magnetisation with the applied
current carrying conductor (Figure 3.32).
magnetic field intensity for three magnetic
When the direction of current is reversed,
materials X, Y and Z. Identify the materials
the magnetic compass deflects in opposite
X,Y and Z.
direction. This lead to the development
of the theory ‘electromagnetism’ which
M Z
X unifies the two branches in physics, namely
electricity and magnetism.
Y (a) compass shows no deflection when no

current flows through the wire
O H
Solution
The slope of M-H graph measures the
magnetic susceptibility, which is
(b) deflection shown by compass needle
due to current flowing through
M the wire.
χm =
H
Material X: Slope is positive and larger
value. So, it is a ferromagnetic material.
Material Y: Slope is positive and lesser

value than X. So, it could be a paramagnetic
material.
Figure 3.32 Oersted’s experiment -
Material Z: Slope is negative and hence, it current carrying wire and deflection of
is a diamagnetic material. magnetic needle

3.7.2 Magnetic field around of the magnetic field will also increase. The
a straight current carrying strength of the magnetic field (B) decreases
conductor and circular loop as the distance (r) from the conductor
increases are shown in Figure 3.33 (b).
(a) Current carrying straight conductor:
(b) Circular coil carrying current
(a) the photograph of magnetic field lines curling around the

conductor carrying current
r Circular coil
carrying current
(b) the variation of

strength of magnetic
field and distance r are
shown
A B
Figure 3.33 Magnetic field lines around
straight, long wire carrying current
Magnetic lines
Suppose we keep a magnetic compass of force
near a current carrying straight conductor,
(•)
then the needle of the magnetic compass
experiences a torque and deflects to align
in the direction of the magnetic field at Figure 3.34 The magnetic field lines
that point. Tracing out the direction shown curling around the circular coil carrying
by magnetic compass, we can draw the current.
magnetic field lines at a distance. For a
straight current carrying conductor, the Suppose we keep a magnetic compass
nature of magnetic field is like concentric near a current carrying circular conductor,
circles having their center at the axis of the then the needle of the magnetic compass
conductor as shown in Figure 3.33 (a). experiences a torque and deflects to align
The direction of circular magnetic field in the direction of the magnetic field at that
lines will be clockwise or anticlockwise point. We can notice that at the points A and
depending on the direction of current in the B in the vicinity of the coil, the magnetic
conductor. If the strength (or magnitude) field lines are circular. The magnetic field
of the current is increased then the density lines are nearly parallel to each other near

the center of the loop, indicating that the If we hold the current carrying
field present near the center of the coil is conductor in our right hand such that the
almost uniform (Figure 3.34). thumb points in the direction of current
The strength of the magnetic field is flow, then the fingers encircling the wire
increased if either the current in the coil or the points in the direction of the magnetic field
number of turns or both are increased. The lines produced.
polarity (north pole or south pole) depends The Figure 3.35 shows the right hand
on the direction of current in the loop. rule for current carrying straight conductor
and circular coil.
3.7.3 Right hand thumb rule

Mnemonic means that it is a
Note special word or a collection of
I
words used to help a person to
I
remember something.
Current in wire
B
Resulting B field
3.7.4 Maxwell’s right hand

B
cork screw rule
I
This rule is used to determine the
B I
direction of the magnetic field. If we rotate
B
B a right-handed screw using a screw driver,
then the direction of current is same as the
I
direction in which screw advances and the

direction of rotation of the screw gives the
direction of the magnetic field. (Figure 3.36)
I
I
I Magnetic
field
Figure 3.35 Right hand rule – straight B

conductor and circular loop
The right hand rule is a mnemonic to

find the direction of magnetic field when
the direction of current in a conductor is Figure 3.36 Maxwell’s right hand cork
known. screw rule

E X A M P L E 3. 14 3.8.1 Definition and
The magnetic field shown in the figure is explanation of Biot- Savart law
due to the current carrying wire. In which
direction does the current flow in the wire?.
V
B B –
I dB
+ r P
dl
I rˆ
Figure 3.37 Magnetic field at a point P

I
B-field points out to the page

due to current carrying conductor
B-field points in to the page
Biot and Savart experimentally observed


Solution that the magnitude of magnetic field dB at a
point P (Figure 3.37) at a distance r from the
small elemental length taken on a conductor
I carrying current varies
(i) directly as the strength of the current I
(ii) directly as the magnitude of the length
B element dl
(iii) directly asthe sine of the angle (say,θ)
between dl and r .
(iv) inversely as the square of the distance
between the point P and length element

Using right hand rule, current flows upwards. dl .
3.8 This is expressed as

Idl
BIOT - SAVART LAW dB µ sinθ
r2
I dl
dB = k 2 sinθ
Soon after the Oersted’s discovery, both r
Jean-Baptiste Biot and Felix Savart in 1819 µ
where k =  in SI units and k = 1 in
did quantitative experiments on the force 4π
experienced by a magnet kept near current CGS units. In vector notation,
carrying wire and arrived at a mathematical
µ I dl ×r
expression that gives the magnetic field at dB = 2
(3.37)
4π r
some point in space in terms of the current

that produces the magnetic field. This is Here vector dB is perpendicular to both

true for any shape of the conductor. I dl (pointing the direction of current flow)


and the unit vector  r directed from dl  I dl
is maximum and is given by dB = 
n
toward point P (Figure 3.38). r2
where n is the unit vector perpendicular

dB to both I dl and 
r
Similarities between Coulomb’s law and

r Idℓ Biot-Savort’s law
Idℓ
Electric and magnetic fields
^r • obey inverse square law, so they are long
range fields.
• obey the principle of superposition
Figure 3.38 The direction of magnetic and are linear with respect to source.
field using right hand rule In magnitude,
E ∝q
The equation (3.37) is used to compute
the magnetic field only due to a small B ∝ Idl
elemental length dl of the conductor. The
net magnetic field at P due to the conductor
is obtained from principle of superposition Difference between Coulomb’s law and
by considering the contribution

from all Biot-Savort’s law
current elements I dl . Hence integrating S.
equation (3.37), we get Electric field Magnetic field
No.
Produced by a Produced by a
µ I dl ×r
B = ∫ dB = ∫ 2
(3.38) scalar source i.e., vector source i.e.,
4π r 1
an electric charge current

element
where the integral is taken over the entire
q I dl
current distribution.
It is directed
Cases
along the It is directed
1. If the point P lies on the conductor, then θ
 position vector perpendicular
= 0o. Therefore, dB is zero.
joining the to the position
2. If the point lies perpendicular to the 2 
 source and the vector r and the
conductor, then θ = 90o. Therefore, dB
point at which current

element
the field is I dl
Electric current is not a calculated
Note vector quantity. It is a scalar Depends on the
quantity. But electric current angle between
in a conductor has direction of flow. Does not depend the position
3 
Therefore, the electric current flowing on angle vector r and the
in a small elemental conductor can be current element

taken as vector quantity i.e. I I dl

Note that the exponent of charge q (source)
µ I dl unit vector perpendicular 
dB = sin θ  
and exponent of electric field E is unity. 4π r 2  todl and

r 

Similarly, the exponent of current element
Idl (source) and exponent of magnetic field The direction of the field is perpendicular

B is unity. In other words, electric field E to the plane of the paper and going into it.
is proportional only to charge (source) and This can be determined by taking

the cross

not on higher powers of charge ( q 2 , q 3 , etc ). product between two vectors dl and r (let

Similarly, magnetic field B is proportional it be n ). The net magnetic field can be

to current element Idl (source) and not on determined by integrating equation (3.38)
square or cube or higher powers of current with proper limits.
element. The cause and effect have linear
relationship. From the Figure 3.39, in a right angle
triangle PAO,
3.8.2 Magnetic field due a

tan (π − θ) =
to long straight conductor l
carrying current a
l =− (since tan (π- θ) = - tan θ )
tanθ
2 l = −a cot θ and r = a cos ec θ

M
A
Differentiating,
dl
l
dl = a cos ec 2θdθ
I r µ I (a cos ec 2θ dθ)
dB = sin θ dθ 
n
O P 4 π (a cos ec θ)2
a
µ I (a cos ec 2θ dθ)
dB = sin θ dθ
n
1
4 π a 2 cos ec2 θ
N µI
= sin θ dθ n
4 πa
Figure 3.39 Magnetic field due to a long
straight current carrying conductor This is the magnetic field at a point P
due to the current in small elemental length.
Note that we have expressed the magnetic
Consider a long straight wire NM with
field OP in terms of angular coordinate i.e. θ.
current I flowing from N to M as shown in
Therefore, the net magnetic field at the point
Figure 3.39. Let P be the point at a distance a 
P which can be obtained by integrating dB
from point O. Consider an element of length
by varying the angle from θ = φ1 to θ = φ2 is
dl of the wire at a distance l from point O
 µ I ϕ2 µI
and r be the vector joining the element dl
with the point P. Let θ be the angle between
B= ∫
4 πa ϕ
sin θ dθ 
n = (cos ϕ1 − cos ϕ2 ) 
4 πa
n

 1
dl and r . Then, the magnetic field at P due For a an infinitely long straight wire,
to the element is ϕ1 = 0 and ϕ2 = π , the magnetic field is

y
µI adjacent length
B= n (3.39) OM 2 y
2πa cos ϕ2 = = =− =−
hypotenuselength PM y2 y 2 + 4a 2
+ a2
Note that here represents the unit 4
vector from the point O to P. Hence,
µI 2y
E X A M P L E 3. 15 B= 
n
4 πa y + 4a 2
2
Calculate the magnetic field at a point P
which is perpendicular bisector to current For long straight wire, y → ∞,
carrying straight wire as shown in figure. µI
B= n
M ϕ2
2πa
The result obtained is same as we obtained

dl in equation (3.39).
A
I
r E X A M P L E 3. 1 6
I
Show that for a straight conductor, the
O a P
magnetic field
µI µI
B = (cos ϕ1 − cos ϕ2 )
n = (sin θ1 + sin θ2 )
n
y2 4 πa 4 πa
µI µI
B = (cos ϕ1 − cos ϕ2 )
n = (sin θ1 + sin θ2 )
n
4 πa 4 πa
N
M ϕ2
Solution
Let the length MN = y and the point P is dl

on its perpendicular bisector. Let O be the A
point on the conductor as shown in figure. I θ2
I r
y
Therefore, OM = ON = , then
2 O P
a
y y θ1
2 adjacent length ON 2 y
cos ϕ1 = = = =− =−
y2 hypotenuselength PN y2 y 2 + 4a 2
+ a2 y a2
+
4 4 2
y ϕ1
adjacent length ON 2 y N
= = =− =−
hypotenuselength PN y 2
y + 4a 2
2
+ a2
4 Solution:
y
adjacent length OM 2 In a right
y angle triangle OPN, let the angle
cos ϕ2 = = =− =− π
hypotenuselength PM y2 ∠OPNy 2 +=4θa12 which implies, ϕ1 = − θ1
+ a2 2
4

and also in a right angle triangle OPM, According to Biot-Savart’s law, the
π magnetic field at P due to the current
∠OPM = θ2 which implies, ϕ2 = + θ2 
2 element I dl is
Hence,
µ I dl ×r
dB =
µ I   π 
cos  − θ  − cos  π + θ  µI 2
4π r
B=    n = (sin θ1 + sin θ2 )
n
4 πa   2  2  The magnitude of magnetic field due
1 2
 4 πa 
 π  µI to current element I dl at C and D are
θ1  − cos  + θ2 
n = (sin θ1 + sin θ2 ) n equal because of equal distance from the
  2  4 πa 
coil. The magnetic field dB due to each
current element I dl is resolved into two
3.8.3 Magnetic field components; dB sin θ along y - direction
produced along the axis of the and dB cos θ along z - direction. Horizontal
current carrying circular coil components of each current element cancels
out while the vertical components (dB cos θ
Consider a current carrying circular loop 
k ) alone contribute to total magnetic field
of radius R and let I be the current flowing
at the point P. 
through the wire in the direction as shown 
If we integrate dl around the loop, dB
in Figure 3.40. The magnetic field at a point
sweeps out a cone as shown in Figure 3.40,
P on the axis of the circular coil at a distance 
then the net magnetic field B at point P is
z from its center of the coil O. It is computed  
by taking two diametrically opposite line B = ∫ dB = ∫ dB cos θ 
k

elements of the coil each of length dl at C µ I dl
 B = ∫ 2 cos θ k
and D. Let r be

the vector joining the current 4π r
element (I dl ) at C to the point P. R
But cos θ = 1 using Pythagorous
,
PC = PD = r = R 2 + Z 2 and
(R + Z )
2 2 2
angle ∠CPO = ∠DPO = θ theorem r 2 = R 2 + Z 2 and integrating line

element from 0 to 2πR, we get
z B B
dB
y 90º
dBz = dB cos θ
dBz = dB cos θ
dB θ θ dB O
90º 90º
x r
r =r
P
r 90º
r dl dBy = dB sinθ P dBy = dB sinθ
Z
current element
pointing out of page
90º θ
O R
dl dl
C D
Figure 3.40 Current carrying circular loop using Biot-Savart’s law

µI R2
Let A be the area of the circular loop
B= 3
k (3.40) A = π R2. So rewriting the equation (3.41) in
2π
(R 2
+Z 2 2
) terms of area of the loop, we have
Note that the magnetic field points µI A
B= 3 
k
along the direction from the point O to P. 2π Z
Suppose if the current flows in clockwise (multiply and divide by 2)
direction, then magnetic field points in the µ 2 IA
B= 3  k (3.42)
direction from the point P to O. 4π Z
Comparing equation (3.42) with
E X A M P L E 3. 17 equation (3.14) dimensionally, we get
What is the magnetic field at the center of pm = I A
the loop shown in figure?
where pm is called magnetic dipole
moment. In vector notation,
I I
O  
pm = I A(3.43)
+
– This implies that a current carrying
circular loop behaves as a magnetic dipole

Solution of magnetic moment pm . So, the magnetic
dipole moment of any current loop is
The magnetic field due to current in the equal to the product of the current and
upper hemisphere and lower hemisphere area of the loop.
of the circular coil are equal in magnitude
but opposite in direction. Hence, the net Right hand thumb rule
magnetic field at the center of the loop (at In order to determine the direction of
 
point O) is zero B = 0 . magnetic moment, we use right hand thumb
rule (mnemonic) which states that
If we curl the fingers of right hand in the
3.8.4 Current loop as a direction of current in the loop, then the
magnetic dipole stretched thumb gives the direction of the
magnetic moment associated with the loop.
The magnetic field from the centre of a
circular loop of radius R along the axis is Table 3.3 End rule – polarity with
given by direction of current in circular loop
µI R2 Current in circular loop Polarity Picture
B= 3
k
2
(R 2
+ z 2 )2
Anti-clockwise current North Pole
At larger distance Z >> R, therefore Anti-clockwise current
Polarity: North Pole
R 2 + Z 2 ≈ Z 2 , we have
µ I R2 Clockwise current South Pole

B= k (3.41) Clockwise current
2 Z3 Polarity: South Pole

3.8.5 Magnetic dipole e evR
µL = − πR 2 = − (3.47)
moment of revolving electron 2πR 2
Suppose an electron undergoes circular v
motion around the nucleus as shown in where A = πR2 is the area of the circular
Figure 3.41. The circulating electron in a loop. By definition, angular momentum of
loop is like current in a circular loop (since the electron about O is
  
flow of charge is current). The magnetic L = R× p
dipole moment due to current carrying
In magnitude,
circular loop is
 
µ L = I A (3.44) L = Rp = mvR (3.48)
In magnitude,
Using equation (3.47) and equation
µL = I A (3.48), we get
v evR
L
µL e  e 
v
me
=− 2 =− ⇒ µL = − L (3.49)
R me L mvR 2m 2m
O R
O
The negative sign indicates that the
magnetic moment and angular momentum
L
are in opposite direction.
In magnitude,
Figure 3.41 (a) Electron revolving in a
circular orbit (b) Direction of magnetic µL e 1.60×10−19
= = = 0.0878×1012
dipole moment vector and orbital angular L 2m 2×9.11×10 −31
momentum vector are opposite

µL
= 8.78×1010 C kg −1 = constant
If T is the time period of an electron, L
the current due to circular motion of the µ
The ratio L is a constant and also known
electron is L
 e 
as gyro-magnetic ratio   . It must be
−e  2m 
I= (3.45) noted that the gyro-magnetic ratio is a
T
constant of proportionality which connects
where −e is the charge of an electron. If R angular momentum of the electron and the
is the radius of the circular orbit and v is the magnetic moment of the electron.
velocity of the electron in the circular orbit, According to Neil’s Bohr quantization
then rule, the angular momentum of an electron
2πR moving in a stationary orbit is quantized,
T= (3.46) which means,
v
Using equation (3.45) and equation h
L = n = n
(3.46) in equation (3.44), we get 2π

where, h is the Planck’s constant (h = 3.9.1 Definition and
6.63 x 10-34 J s ) and number n takes natural explanation of Ampère’s
numbers circuital law
(i.e., n = 1,2,3,....). Hence, Ampère’s law: The line integral of
magnetic field over a closed loop is μ0 times
e eh net current enclosed by the loop.
µL = L=n Am2
2m 4 πm

µL = n
(1.60×10 −19
)h
Am2
∫ .dl = µ Ienclosed
B (3.50)
C
4 πm
where Ienclosed is the net current linked by
−19 −34
(1.60×10 )(6.63×10 ) the closed loop C. Note that the line integral
=n
4 ×3.14 ×(9.11×10−31 ) does not depend on the shape of the path
or the position of the conductor with the
µ L = n×9.27 ×10−24 Am2 magnetic field.
The minimum magnetic moment can be Line integral means integral

obtained by substituting n = 1, Note over a line or curve, symbol
used is .
−24 2 −24 −1
µ L = 9.27 ×10 Am = 9.27 ×10 JT
= (µ L )min = µ B Closed line integral means integral
over a closed curve (or line), symbol is
eh
where, µB = = 9.27 ×10−24 Am2 is
4 πm
called Bohr magneton. This is a convenient
unit with which one can measure atomic 3.9.2 Magnetic field due to
magnetic moments. the current carrying wire of
Note: Bohr quantization rule will be infinite length using Ampère’s
discussed in unit 8 of second volume law
I
3.9
AMPÈRE’S CIRCUITAL C O r
LAW A
n dB
Ampère’s circuital law is used to calculate

magnetic field at a point whenever there is Figure 3.42 Ampèrian loop for current
a symmetry in the problem. This is similar carrying straight wire
to Gauss’s law in electrostatics. These
are powerful methods whenever there is Consider a straight conductor of infinite
symmetry in the problem. length carrying current I and the direction of

magnetic field lines is shown in Figure 3.42. E X A M P L E 3. 1 8
Since the wire is geometrically cylindrical
in shape and symmetrical about its axis, we Compute the magnitude of the magnetic
construct an Ampèrian loop in the form of a field of a long, straight wire carrying a
circular shape at a distance r from the centre current of 1 A at distance of 1m from it.
of the conductor as shown in Figure 3.42. Compare it with Earth’s magnetic field.
From the Ampère’s law, we get

∫ .dl = µ I
B Solution
C
 Given that 1 = 1 A and radius r = 1 m
where dl is the line element along the

amperian loop (tangent to the circular loop). µ  I 4 π ×10−7 ×1
Bstraightwire = = = 2×10−7 T
Hence, the angle between magnetic field 2πr 2π ×1
vector and line element is zero. Therefore, But the Earth’s magnetic field is
−5
BEarth  10 T
∫ Bdl = µ I
C So, Bstraightwire is one hundred times smaller
where I is the current enclosed by the than BEarth .
Ampèrian loop. Due to the symmetry, the
magnitude of the magnetic field is uniform Solenoid
over the Ampèrian loop, we can take B out A solenoid is a long coil of wire closely
of the integration. wound in the form of helix as shown in
Figure 3.43. When electric current is passed
dl = µ I
B∫
through the solenoid, the magnetic field is
C
produced. The magnetic field of the solenoid
For a circular loop, the circumference is
is due to the superposition of magnetic fields
2πr, which implies,
of each turn of the solenoid. The direction
2 πr
of magnetic field due to solenoid is given by
B ∫ dl = µ  I
right hand palm-rule (mnemonic).
0
B ⋅ 2πr = µ I Inside the solenoid, the magnetic field
is nearly uniform and parallel to its axis
µI whereas, outside the solenoid the field is
B=
2πr negligibly small. Based on the direction of
In vector form, the magnetic field is the current, one end of the solenoid behaves
µI like North Pole and the other end behaves
B= n like South Pole.
2πr
The current carrying solenoid is held
where  n is the unit vector along the in right hand. If the fingers curl in the
tangent to the Ampèrian loop as shown in direction of current, then extended thumb
the Figure 3.42. This perfectly agrees with gives the direction of magnetic field of
the result obtained from Biot-Savart’s law as current carrying solenoid. It is shown in
given in equation (3.39). Figure 3.44. Hence, the magnetic field of a

solenoid looks like the magnetic field of a
bar magnet.
The solenoid is assumed to be long
which means that the length of the solenoid
is large when compared to its diameter. The
winding need not to be always circular, it can
also be in other shapes. We consider here
only circularly wound solenoid as shown in
Figure 3.45.
I I
Bubbin with Wound Over Molded Coil Can S N

Terminals Coil Coil (flux cage) and
Flux Washer
l
N S Figure 3.45 Solenoid as a bar magnet
+ –
3.9.3 Magnetic field due to a
long current carrying solenoid
Consider a solenoid of length L having
magnetic
N turns. The diametre of the solenoid
field is assumed to be much smaller when
compared to its length and the coil is wound
very closely.
current in current out
points out h
Figure 3.43 Solenoid points in
d c
i
B a b
Field (North)
Magnetic field of a solenoid
S Figure 3.46 Amperian loop for solenoid

N
In order to calculate the magnetic

Current field at any point inside the solenoid, we
use Ampere’s circuital law. Consider a
Figure 3.44 The direction of magnetic
rectangular loop abcd as shown in Figure
field of solenoid
3.46. Then from Ampère’s circuital law,

Since n is a constant for a given solenoid
∫ ⋅dl = µ Ienclosed
B
and μ0 is also constant. For a fixed current I,
C
= µ ×(total current enclosed by Amperianloop) the magnetic field inside the solenoid is also
a constant.
The left hand side of the equation is
b c
d
a
Solenoid can be used as
Note
∫ ⋅ dl = ∫ B. dl +
B ∫ B. dl + ∫ B. dl + ∫ B. dl electromagnets. It produces
C a b c d strong magnetic field that
Since the elemental lengths along bc and can be turned ON or OFF. This is not
da are perpendicular to the magnetic field possible in case of permanent magnet.
which is along the axis of the solenoid, the Further the strength of the magnetic
integrals field can be increased by keeping iron
c
c
bar inside the solenoid. This is because
∫ ∫

B. dl = B dl cos 90 = 0 the magnetic field of the solenoid
b b
magnetizes the iron bar and hence
a
 
∫ B. dl = 0 the net magnetic field is the sum of
d magnetic field of the solenoid and
Since the magnetic field outside the magnetic field of magnetised iron.
d
  Because of these properties, solenoids
solenoid is zero, the integral ∫ B. dl = 0
are useful in designing variety of
c
For the path along ab, the integral is electrical appliances.
b
b b
∫ B. dl = B ∫ dl cos 0 = B ∫ dl
a a a
where the length of the loop ab as shown E X A M P L E 3. 1 9

in the Figure 3.46 is h. But the choice of
length of the loop ab is arbitrary. We can Calculate the magnetic field inside a
take very large loop such that it is equal to solenoid, when
the length of the solenoid L. Therefore the (a) the length of the solenoid becomes
integral is twice and fixed number of turns
b
  (b) both the length of the solenoid and
∫ B. dl = BL
number of turns are double
a
Let N I be the current passing through (c) the number of turns becomes twice for
the solenoid of N turns, then the fixed length of the solenoid
b
NI
∫ B. dl = BL = µ NI ⇒ B = µ Compare the results.
a
L
The number of turns per unit length is Solution
N
given by = n, Then The magnetic field of a solenoid (inside) is
L
NI
nLI BL ,N = µ 
B = µ = µ nI (3.51) L
L

L→2L (length becomes twice)
N→2N (number of turns becomes
twice)
The magnetic field is
2NI
B2 L ,2 N = µ  = BL ,N
2L
(c) the number of turns becomes twice
but for the fixed length of the solenoid
L→L (length is fixed)
N→2N (number of turns becomes
twice)
2NI
MRI is Magnetic Resonance Imaging BL ,2 N = µ  = 2 BL ,N
L
which helps the physicians to diagonise
or monitor treatment for a variety of From the above results,
abnormal conditions happening within
the head, chest, abdomen and pelvis. BL ,2 N > B2 L ,2 N > B2 L , N
It is a non invasive medical test. The
Thus, strength of the magnetic field is
patient is placed in a circular opening
increased when we pack more loops into
(actually interior of a solenoid which
the same length for a given current.
is made up of superconducting wire)
and large current is sent through the
superconducting wire to produce a 3.9.5 Toroid
strong magnetic field. So, it uses more
A solenoid is bent in such a way its ends
powerful magnet, radio frequency
are joined together to form a closed ring
pulses and a computer to produce
shape, is called a toroid which is shown in
pictures of organs which helps the
Figure 3.47. The magnetic field has constant
physicians to examine various parts of
magnitude inside the toroid whereas in the
the body.
interior region (say, at point P) and exterior
region (say, at point Q), the magnetic field
(a) length of the solenoid becomes twice is zero.
and fixed number of turns Q
B
L→2L (length becomes twice)
N→N (number of turns are fixed) P

NI 1
B2 L ,N = µ  = BL ,N
2L 2 I I
(b) both the length of the solenoid and

number of turns are double Figure 3.47 Toroid

of radius r3 around the point Q as shown in
Q Figure 3.48. The length of the loop is
3 r3 S L3 = 2πr3
P Ampère’s circuital law for the loop 3 is

2 1

r1
∫ BQ . dl = µ I enclosed
loop 3
Since, in each turn of the toroid loop,

r2
current coming out of the plane of paper is
cancelled by the current going into the plane
of paper. Thus, Ienclosed = 0

Figure 3.48 Toroid – Amperian loop
∫
loop 3
BQ . dl = 0
This is possible only if the magnetic field

(a) Open space interior to the toroid at point Q vanishes i.e.
Let us calculate the magnetic field BP at 
BQ = 0
point P. We construct an Amperian loop 1
of radius r1 around the point P as shown in
Figure 3.48. For simplicity, we take circular (c) Inside the toroid
loop so that the length of the loop is its Let us calculate the magnetic field BS at
circumference. point S by constructing an Amperian loop 2
of radius r2 around the point S as shown in
L1 = 2π r1
Figure 3.48. The length of the loop is
Ampère’s circuital law for the loop 1 is
L2 = 2πr2
∫ B . dl = µ I
P enclosed
loop1
Since, the loop1 encloses no current, Ampere’s circuital law for the loop 2 is
Ienclosed = 0

∫ BS . dl =µ I enclosed
∫ BP . dl = 0 loop 2
loop1 Let I be the current passing through the

This is possible only if the magnetic field toroid and N be the number of turns of the
at point P vanishes i.e. toroid, then
 Ienclosed = NI
BP = 0

(b) Open space exterior to the toroid
and ∫ Bdl cos θ =B 2πr2
BS . dl = ∫
loop 2 loop 2
Let us calculate the magnetic field BQ at

point Q. We construct an Amperian loop 3 ∫ BS . dl =µ NI
loop 2

NI The equations (3.54) and (3.55) imply
BS = µ  
2πr2 1. Fm is directly proportional to the magnetic

The number of turns per unit length is field B
N 
n= , then the magnetic field at point S 2. Fm is directly proportional to the velocity
is 2 πr2 
v

3. Fm is directly proportional to sine of the
BS = µ nI (3.52)
angle between the velocity and magnetic
field

3.10 4. Fm is directly proportional to the
magnitude of the charge q
LORENTZ FORCE 
5. The direction of Fm is always perpendicular
   
to v and B as Fm is the cross product of v

When an electric charge q is kept at rest and B
in a magnetic field, no force acts on it. At
Fm
the same time, if the charge moves in the
magnetic field, it experiences a force. This
force is different from Coulomb force, B B
studied in unit 1. This force is known as _ +
θ θ
magnetic force. It is given by the equation V V
  
(
F = q v × B (3.53) )
Fm
In general, if the charge is moving in both (a) (b)
the electric and magnetic fields, the total
force experienced by the charge is given by Figure 3.49 Direction of the Lorentz force
    on (a) positive charge (b) negative charge
F = qE (v × B ) . It is known as Lorentz force.

7. The direction of Fm on negative charge is

3.10.1 Force on a moving opposite to the direction of Fm on positive
charge in a magnetic field charge provided other factors are identical
as shown Figure 3.49
When an electric charge q is moving 
  8. If velocity v of the charge q is along
with velocity v in the magnetic field B , it  
magnetic field B then, Fm is zero
experiences a force, called magnetic force

Fm . After careful experiments, Lorentz Definition of tesla
deduced the force experienced by a moving The strength of the magnetic field is one

charge in the magnetic field Fm tesla if unit charge moving in it with unit
   velocity experiences unit force.
(
Fm = q v × B (3.54) ) 1N s N
1T= =1 = 1N A−1m −1
In magnitude, Fm = qvB sinθ(3.55) Cm Am

E X A M P L E 3. 20 Therefore, the magnitude of the Lorentz
A particle of charge q moves with force is qvB and direction is along positive

velocity v along positive y - direction in x - direction.

a magnetic field B . Compute the Lorentz (c) Magnetic field is in zy - plane and making
force experienced by the particle (a) when an angle θ with the velocity of the particle,

magnetic field is along positive y-direction which implies B = B cos θ j + B sin θ k
(b) when magnetic field points in positive
z
z - direction (c) when magnetic field is B
in zy - plane and making an angle θ with θ

ν
+q
velocity of the particle. Mark the direction y
of magnetic force in each case.
x F
Solution
 From Lorentz force,
Velocity of the particle is v = v j 
Fm = q ( vj )×(B cos θ
j + B sin θ k)
(a)
Magnetic field is along positive = qvBsin θi

y - direction, this implies, B = v j
z
E X A M P L E 3. 2 1
ν
+q
Compute the work done and power
y delivered by the Lorentz force on the

B particle of charge q moving with velocity v .
x
Calculate the angle between Lorentz force
 and velocity of the charged particle and
From Lorentz force, Fm = q (v j × B j ) = 0 also interpret the result.
So, no force acts on the particle when it
Solution
moves along the direction of magnetic
For a charged particle moving on a
field.   
magnetic field, F = q (v × B )
(b)
Magnetic field points in positive The work done by the magnetic field is

z - direction, this implies, B = B 
k   
W = ∫ F .dr = ∫ F .vdt
z   
W = q ∫ (v × B ).v dt = 0
B
ν    
+q Since v ´ B is perpendicular to v ánd
B hence
   
y
(v × B)⋅ v = 0 This means that Lorentz force
do no work on the particle. From work-
x F
kinetic energy theorem, (Refer section
From Lorentz force, 4.2.6, XI th standard Volume I)

Fm = q (vj × Bk ) = qvB i dW
=P =0
dt

  
Since, F .v = 0 ⇒ F and v are perpendicular The Lorentz force on the charged particle is
to each other. The angle between Lorentz given by
force and velocity of the charged particle   
F = q (v × B )
is 90o. Thus Lorentz force changes the
direction of the velocity but not the Since Lorentz force alone acts on the
magnitude of the velocity. Hence Lorentz particle, the magnitude of the net force on
force does no work and also does not alter the particle is
kinetic energy of the particle.
∑F = F
i
i m = qvB
This Lorentz force acts as centripetal

force for the particle to execute circular
3.10.2 Motion of a charged motion. Therefore,
particle in a uniform magnetic v2
field qvB = m
r
The radius of the circular path is
B in
mv p
r= = (3.56)
qB qB
r
where p = mv is the magnitude of the
linear momentum of the particle. Let T be
F the time taken by the particle to finish one
complete circular motion, then
+
+q ν 2πr
T= (3.57)
v
Hence substituting (3.56) in (3.57), we
get
Figure 3.50 Circular motion of a charged 2πm
particle in a perpendicular uniform T= (3.58)
qB
magnetic field
Equation (3.58) is called the cyclotron
Consider a charged particle of charge period. The reciprocal of time period is the
q having mass m enters into a region of frequency f, which is
 
uniform magnetic field B with velocity v 1
f =
such that velocity is perpendicular to the T
magnetic field. As soon as the particle enters qB
into the field, Lorentz force acts on it in a f= (3.59)
2πm
direction perpendicular to both magnetic
  In terms of angular frequency ω,
field B and velocity v .
As a result, the charged particle moves q
ω = 2πf = B (3.60)
in a circular orbit as shown in Figure 3.50. m

Equations (3.59) and (3.60) are called as E X A M P L E 3. 2 2
cyclotron frequency or gyro-frequency.
An electron moving perpendicular to a
From equations (3.58), (3.59) and (3.60), uniform magnetic field 0.500 T undergoes
we infer that time period and frequency circular motion of radius 2.80 mm. What is
depend only on charge-to-mass ratio the speed of electron?
(specific charge) but not velocity or the
radius of the circular path. Solution
If a charged particle moves in a region of Charge of an electron q = -1.60 × 10-19 C
uniform magnetic field such that its velocity ⇒ q = 1.60 × 10−19 C
is not perpendicular to the magnetic field,
then the velocity of the particle is split up into Magnitude of magnetic field B = 0.500 T
two components; one component is parallel
Mass of the electron, m = 9.11 × 10-31 kg
to the field while the other perpendicular
to the field. The component of velocity Radius of the orbit, r = 2.50 mm = 2.50 ×
parallel to field remains unchanged and the 10-3 m
component perpendicular to field keeps rB
changing due to the Lorentz force. Hence Velocity of the electron, v = q
m
the path of the particle is not a circle; it is
2.50 × 10 −3 × 0.500
a helix around the field lines as shown in v = 1.60 × 10 −19 ×
9.11 × 10 −31
Figure 3.51.
v = 2.195 × 108 m s −1
B
E X A M P L E 3. 2 3
–
–q
A proton moves in a uniform magnetic
field of strength 0.500 T magnetic field
Figure 3.51 Helical path of the electron is directed along the x-axis. At initial
in a uniform magnetic field time, t = 0 s, the proton has velocity

For an example, the helical path of an v = (1.95×105 
i + 2.00×105 k )m s−1 . Find
electron when it moves in a magnetic field
is shown in Figure 3.52. Inside the particle (a) At initial time, what is the acceleration
detector called cloud chamber, the path is made of the proton.
visible by the condensation of water droplets. (b) Is the path circular or helical?. If helical,
calculate the radius of helical trajectory
and also calculate the pitch of the helix
(Note: Pitch of the helix is the distance
travelled along the helix axis per
revolution).
Solution
Figure 3.52 Helical path of the electron 
inside the cloud chamber Magnetic field B = 0.500
iT

Velocity of the particle number but different mass number) are
 sent with velocity 1.00 × 105 m s-1 into a
v = (1.95×105i + 2.00×105 
k )ms−1
magnetic field of strength 0.500 T normally.
Charge of the proton q = 1.60×10−19 C Compute the distance between the two
isotopes after they complete a semi-circle.
Mass of the proton m = 1.67 ×10−27 kg Also compute the time taken by each
isotope to complete one semi-circular
(a) The force experienced by the proton is path. (Given: masses of the isotopes: m235
  
F = q (v × B ) = 3.90 x 10-25 kg and m238 = 3.95 x 10-25 kg)
(
= 1.60×10−19 × (1.95×105 
i +2.00×105 k )×(0.500 )
i )
B

F = 1.60×10−14 N 
j
Therefore, from Newton’s second law, 235U

238U
 1 
a= F=
m
1
1.67 × 10 −27 (
1.60 × 10 −14 )
ν d
= 9.58 × 10 m s −2
12 2r235
2r238
(b) Trajectory is helical

Solution
Radius of helical path is
Since isotopes are singly ionized, they have
mv z 1.67 ×10−27 ×2.00×105 equal charge which is equal to the charge
R= =
qB 1.60×10−19 ×0.500 of an electron, q = - 1.6 × 10-19 C. Mass of
= 4.175×10−3 m = 4.118mm uranium 23592 U and 92 U are 3.90 × 10
238 -25
kg
Pitch of the helix is the distance travelled and 3.95 × 10 kg respectively. Magnetic
-25
along x-axis in a time T, which is P = vx T field applied, B = 0.500 T. Velocity of the

electron is 1.00 × 105 m s-1, then
But time,
2π 2πm 2×3.14 ×1.67 ×10−27
T= = = 92 U is r235
(a) the radius of the path of 235
ω qB 1.60×10−19 ×0.500
m235v 3.90×10−25 ×1.00×105
= 13.1×10 s −8 r235 = =
qB 1.6×10−19 ×0.500
Hence, pitch of the helix is = 48.8×10−2 m
P = v xT = (1.95×105 )(13.1×10−8 ) r235 = 48.8 cm
−3
= 25.5×10 m = 25.5 mm The diameter of the semi-circle due to 235
92 U
is d235 = 2r235 = 97.6 cm
The proton experiences appreciable
acceleration in the magnetic field, hence The radius of the path of 238
U is r238 then
92
the pitch of the helix is almost six times m238v 3.90×10 ×1.00×105
−25
greater than the radius of the helix. r238 = =

qB 1.6×10−19 ×0.500
= 49.4 ×10−2 m
E X A M P L E 3. 24
r238 = 49.4 cm
Two singly ionized isotopes of uranium
The diameter of the semi-circle due to 238
92 U
92 U and 92 U (isotopes have same atomic
235 238
is d238 = 2r238 = 98.8 cm


Therefore the separation distance between Consider an electric charge q of mass
the isotopes is ∆d = d 238 − d 235 = 1.2 cm m which enters into a region of uniform
 
magnetic field B with velocity v such that
velocity is not perpendicular to the magnetic
(b)
The time taken by each isotope to
field. Then the path of the particle is a helix.
complete one semi-circular path are
The Lorentz force on the charged particle
magnitudeof the displacement moving in a uniform magnetic field can
t 235 =
velocity be balanced by Coulomb force by proper
−2
= 97.6×10 5 = 9.76×10−6 s = 9.76 µs arrangement of electric and magnetic fields.
1.00×10 The Coulomb force acts along the
magnitudeof the displacement direction of electric field (for a positive
t 238 =
velocity charge q) whereas the Lorentz force is
−2
= 98.8×10 5 = 9.88×10−6 s = 9.88 µs perpendicular to the direction of magnetic
1.00×10 field. Therefore in order to balance these
Note that even though the difference forces, both electric and magnetic fields
between mass of two isotopes are very small, must be perpendicular to each other. Such
this arrangement helps us to convert this an arrangement of perpendicular electric
small difference into an easily measurable and magnetic fields are known as cross
distance of separation. This arrangement fields.
is known as mass spectrometer. A mass For illustration, consider an experimental
spectrometer is used in many areas in arrangement as shown in Figure 3.53. In the
sciences, especially in medicine, in space region of space between parallel plates of a
science, in geology etc. For example, in capacitor (which produces uniform electric
medicine, anaesthesiologists use it to field), uniform magnetic field is maintained
measure the respiratory gases and biologist perpendicular to the direction of electric
use it to determine the reaction mechanisms field. Suppose a charged particle enters this
in photosynthesis. space from the left side as shown, the net
force on the particle is
3.10.3 Motion of a charged
   
particle under crossed electric F = q ( E + v × B )
and magnetic field (velocity
selector) For a positive charge, the electric force
on the charge acts in downward direction
whereas the Lorentz force acts upwards.
When these two forces
qνB ++++++++++++++++++++++
balance one another, then
E
q +
ν qE = qv B
−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
qE
B into the page E

⇒ v =
B
Figure 3.53 Velocity selector (3.61)


This means, for a given magnitude of Solution:

E - field and B - field, the forces act only for
Electric field, E = 6.0 × 106 N C-1 and
the particle moving with particular speed magnetic field, B = 0.83 T.
E
v = . This speed is independent of mass
B Then
and charge.
E 6.0×106
If the charge enters into the crossed fields v= = = 7.23×106 ms−1
B 0.83
with velocity v, other than vo, it results in any
of the following possibilities (Table 3.4). When an electron goes with this velocity, it
shows null deflection. Since the accelerating
Table 3.4 Deflection based on the potential is 200 V, the electron acquires
velocity – velocity selector kinetic energy because of this accelerating
potential. Hence,
S.No. Velocity Deflection
1 2 eV
mv = eV ⇒ v =
Charged particle deflects 2 2m
1 v > vo in the direction of Since the mass of the electron,
−31
Lorentz force m = 9.1×10 kg and charge of an electron,
Charged particle deflects q = e = 1.6 × 10 −19 C. The velocity due to
2 v < vo in the direction of accelerating potential 200 V
Coulomb force
2(1.6×10−19 )(200)
No deflection and v200 = = 8.39×106 m s−1
3 v = vo
particle moves straight (9.1×10 )−31
Since the speed v200 > v, the electron is

So by proper choice of electric and deflected towards direction of Lorentz
magnetic fields, the particle with particular force. So, in order to have null deflection,
speed can be selected. Such an arrangement the potential, we have to supply is
of fields is called a velocity selector. 2
1 mv 2 (9.1×10 )×(7.23×10 )
−31 6
V= =
2 e 2×(1.6×10−19 )
This principle is used in
Note V = 148.65 V
Bainbridge mass spectrograph
to separate the isotopes.
3.10.4 Cyclotron
Cyclotron (Figure 3.54) is a device used
E X A M P L E 3. 25 to accelerate the charged particles to gain
large kinetic energy. It is also called as
Let E be the electric field of magnitude high energy accelerator. It was invented by
6.0 × 106 N C-1 and B be the magnetic field Lawrence and Livingston in 1934.
magnitude 0.83 T. Suppose an electron is
Principle
accelerated with a potential of 200 V, will
it show zero deflection?. If not, at what When a charged particle moves normal to
potential will it show zero deflection. the magnetic field, it experiences magnetic
Lorentz force.

Construction
The schematic diagram of a cyclotron
is shown in Figure 3.55. The particles are
allowed to move in between two semi-
circular metal containers called Dees (hollow
D - shaped objects). Dees are enclosed in an
evacuated chamber and it is kept in a region
with uniform magnetic field controlled by
an electromagnet. The direction of magnetic
field is normal to the plane of the Dees. The
two Dees are kept separated with a gap and
Figure 3.54 Cyclotron invented by the source S (which ejects the particle to be
Lawrence and Livingston accelerated) is placed at the center in the
gap between the Dees. Dees are connected
to high frequency alternating potential
Electromagnet N
difference.
High frequency
+ve
Working
oscillator –ve Ion source
D-shaped hollow D-shaped Let us assume that the ion ejected from
metal chamber D2 hollow metal
D1
chamber source S is positively charged. As soon as
Deflector plate
ion is ejected, it is accelerated towards a Dee
Electromagnet
(say, Dee – 1) which has negative potential at
S
that time. Since the magnetic field is normal
to the plane of the Dees, the ion undergoes
Constant-frequency
alternating circular path. After one semi-circular path
voltage
B
in Dee-1, the ion reaches the gap between
D1 Dees. At this time, the polarities of the Dees
S D2
are reversed so that the ion is now accelerated
towards Dee-2 with a greater velocity. For
this circular motion, the centripetal force of
the charged particle q is provided by Lorentz
force.
Source of protons High frequency
accelerating
voltage mv 2
= qvB
r
m
⇒r = v
qB
⇒ r ∝ v (3.62)
Dees
High-speed proton beam From the equation (3.62), the increase
in velocity increases the radius of circular
Figure 3.55 construction and working of path. This process continues and hence the
cyclotron
particle undergoes spiral path of increasing

radius. Once it reaches near the edge, it is which the electric field between two Dees
taken out with the help of deflector plate could be reversed.
and allowed to hit the target T.
Very important condition in cyclotron Solution
operation is the resonance condition. It Magnetic field B = 1 T
happens when the frequency f at which the Mass of the proton, mp = 1.67 ×10−27 kg
positive ion circulates in the magnetic field Charge of the proton, q = 1.60×10−19 C
must be equal to the constant frequency of (1.60×10−19 )(1)
qB
the electrical oscillator fosc f= =
2πmp 2(3.14)(1.67 ×10−27 )
From equation (3.59), we have
qB = 15.3×106 Hz = 15.33 MHz
fOSC =
2πm
The time period of oscillation is
2πm 3.10.5 Force on a current
T= carrying conductor placed in
qB
The kinetic energy of the charged particle is a magnetic field
1 2 q 2 B 2r 2
KE = mv = (3.63)
2 2m FB
Limitations of cyclotron Bin

A
(a) the speed of the ion is limited

(b) electron cannot be accelerated νd
q +
(c) uncharged particles cannot be
accelerated
L
Deutrons (bundles of one

Note proton and one neutron) can Figure 3.56 Current carrying conductor
be accelerated because it has in a magnetic field
same charge as that of proton. But neutron
(electrically neutral particle) cannot be When a current carrying conductor
accelerated by the cyclotron. When a
is placed in a magnetic field, the force
deutron is bombarded with a beryllium
experienced by the wire is equal to the
target, a beam of high energy neutrons are
sum of Lorentz forces on the individual
produced. These high-energy neutrons are
sent into the patient’s cancerous region to
charge carriers in the wire. Consider a small
break the bonds in the DNA of the cancer segment of wire of length dl, with cross-
cells (killing the cells). This is used in sectional area A and current I as shown in
treatment of fast-neutron cancer therapy. Figure 3.56. The free electrons drift opposite
to the direction of current. So the relation
between current I and magnitude of drift
E X A M P L E 3. 26
velocity vd (Refer Unit 2) is
Suppose a cyclotron is operated to
accelerate protons with a magnetic field I = neAvd (3.64)
of strength 1 T. Calculate the frequency in

 Fleming’s left hand rule (mnemonic)
If the wire is kept in a magnetic field B ,
then average force experienced by the charge When a current carrying conductor is
(here, electron) in the wire is placed in a magnetic field, the direction
   of the force experienced by it is given by
F = −e vd × B ( ) Fleming’s Left Hand Rule (FLHR) as shown
Let n be the number of free electrons per in Figure 3.57.
unit volume, therefore
Force
N Magnet
n=
V
where N is the number of free electrons
in the small element of volume V = A dl.
Current
Hence Lorentz force on the wire of
length dl is the product of the number of the
electrons
(N = nA dl) and the force acting on an
electron. Figure 3.57 Fleming’s Left Hand Rule
   (FLHR)
dF = −enAdl vd × B ( )
The length dl is along the length of the Stretch forefinger, the middle finger and
wire and hence

the current element in the the thumb of the left hand such that they

wire is I dl = −enAvd dl Therefore the force are in mutually perpendicular directions. If
on the wire is forefinger points the direction of magnetic
  
(
dF = I dl × B (3.65) ) field, the middle finger points the direction
of the electric current, then thumb will point
The force in a straight current carrying the direction of the force experienced by the
conducting wire of length l placed in a conductor.
uniform magnetic field is
   E X A M P L E 3. 2 7
(
F = Il × B (3.66) ) A metallic rod of linear density is 0.25
In magnitude, kg m-1 is lying horizontally on a smooth
inclined plane which makes an angle of 45o
F = BIl sinθ
with the horizontal. The rod is not allowed
(a) If the conductor is placed along to slide down by flowing a current through
the direction of the magnetic field, it when a magnetic field of strength 0.25
the angle between them is θ = 0o. T is acting on it in the vertical direction.
Hence, the force experienced by the Calculate the electric current flowing in
conductor is zero. the rod to keep it stationary.
(b) If the conductor is placed perpendicular B
BIl cos45°
to the magnetic field, the angle 45° BIl

mg sin45°
between them is θ =90o Hence, the mg
45°
force experienced by the conductor is
maximum, which is F = BIl.

Solution
r r
The linear density of the rod i.e., mass per
unit length of the rod is 0.25 kg m-1
B1
F2
m
⇒ = 0.25 kg m −1 I2
l B1
Let I be the current flowing in the metallic I1 I2
rod. The direction of electric current is into

the paper. The direction of magnetic force Figure 3.58 Two long straight parallel
IBl is given by Fleming’s left hand rule. wires
B
BIl cos45° From thumb rule, the direction of
45° BIl magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane
mg sin45°
mg
of the paper and inwards (arrow into the
45° page ⊗ ) i.e. along negative i direction.
Let us consider a small elemental length
For equilibrium, dl in conductor B at which the magnetic field

B1 is present. From equation 3.65, Lorentz
mg sin 45 = IBl cos 45 force on the element dl of conductor B is
1m µI
⇒I= g tan 45 dF = ( I 2dl × B1 ) = −I 2dl 1 (k × 
i)
B l 2πr
0.25 kg m −1 µ I I dl
= × 1 × 9.8 m s −2 =− 1 2  j
0.25 T 2πr
⇒ I = 9.8 A Therefore the force on dl of the wire B is
directed towards the wire W1. So the length
So, we need to supply current of 9.8 A to dl is attracted towards the conductor A. The
keep the metallic rod stationary. force per unit length of the conductor B due
to the wire conductor
A is
3.10.6 Force between two F µII
=− 1 2 
j
long parallel current carrying l 2πr
conductors In the same manner, we compute the
magnitude of net magnetic induction due to
Two long straight parallel current
current I2 (in conductor A) at a distance r in
carrying conductors separated by a distance
the elemental length dl of conductor A is
r are kept in air as shown in Figure 3.58.
Let I1 and I2 be the electric currents µI
B2 = 2 
i
passing through the conductors A and B 2πr
in same direction (i.e. along z - direction) From the thumb rule, direction of
respectively. The net magnetic field at a magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane
distance r due to current I1 in conductor A is of the paper and outwards (arrow out of
µI µI the page  ) i.e., along positive 
i direction.
B1 = 1 (−
i )=− 1
i
2πr 2πr

Hence, the magnetic force at element dl of Thus the force experienced by two
the wire is W1 is parallel current carrying conductors is
µI attractive if the direction of electric current
F = ( I1dl × B2 ) = I1dl 2 (k × 
i) passing through them is same as shown in
2πr
µ I I dl Figure 3.60.
= 1 2  j (3.67)
2πr
Current in the opposite direction
Therefore the force on dl of conductor A
is directed towards the conductor B. So the Current
length dl is attracted towards the conductor Force
B as shown in Figure (3.59).
W1 W2 Force
Current
i1 i2
F Figure 3.61 Two parallel conductors

carrying current in opposite direction
experience a repulsive force
r
Thus the force experienced by two parallel
Figure 3.59 Current in both the wire are current carrying conductors is repulsive if
in the same direction - attracts each other they carry current in the opposite directions
as shown in Figure 3.61.
The force per unit length of the conductor
A due to the conductor B is Definition of ampère
One ampère is defined as that current
F µII
=− 1 2 
j when it is passed through each of the
l 2πr
two infinitely long parallel straight
Current in the same direction conductors kept at a distance of one meter
apart in vacuum causes each conductor to
Force
experience a force of 2 × 10−7 newton per
meter length of conductor.
3.11
TORQUE ON A CURRENT
Current
LOOP
Figure 3.60 Two parallel conductors The force on a current carrying wire in a
carrying current in same direction magnetic field is responsible for the motor
experience an attractive force operation.

(a) Force on section PQ
3.11.1 Expression for torque  
on a current loop placed in a For section PQ, l = −a j and B = B 
i
  
magnetic field FPQ = Il × B

^ = −I a B(j ×i ) = I a B k
^ j
k
^
i Since the unit vector normal to the plane
F  is along the direction of k .
n
I
S
P
(b) The force on section QR
^   
l = bi and B = B 
n a
i
N
Q R
S    
I b
FQR = Il × B = I b B(i ×
i) =0
–F
B
(c) The force on section RS

 
Figure 3.62 Rectangular coil placed in a l =a 
j and B = B 
i
magnetic field   
FRS = Il × B = I a B(j ×i ) = − I aB k
Consider a single rectangular loop Since, the unit vector normal to the plane

PQRS kept in a uniform magnetic field B . is along the direction of −k .
Let a and b be the length and breadth of
(d) The force on section SP
the rectangular loop respectively. Let n be  
the unit vector normal to the plane of the l = −b  i and B = B  i
current loop. This unit vector n completely    
 FSP = Il × B = −I b B (i ×
i )=0
describes the orientation of the loop. Let B
be directed from north pole to south pole of The net force on the rectangular loop is
    
the magnet as shown in Figure 3.62. Fnet = FPQ + FQR + FRS + FSP
When an electric current is sent through     
Fnet = IaB k +0 − IaB k +0 ⇒ Fnet = 0
the loop, the net force acting is zero but there
will be net torque acting on it. For the sake Hence, the net force on the rectangular
of understanding, we shall consider two loop in this configuration is zero. Now let us
configurations of the loop; (i) unit vector  n calculate the net torque due to these forces
pointing perpendicular to the field (ii) unit about an axis passing through the center
vector pointing at an angle θ with the field.  4
 4
 
τnet = ∑ τi =∑ ri × Fi
(i) when unit vector 
n is perpendicular to i =1 i =1
the field b b 
=  IaB + 0 + IaB + 0 
j
 2 2 
In the simple configuration, the unit 
vector  n is perpendicular to the field τnet = abIB 
j
and plane of the loop is lying on xy plane
Since, A = ab is the area of the
as shown in Figure 3.62. Let the loop be
rectangular loop PQRS, the net torque for
divided into four sections PQ, QR, RS and
this configuration is
SP. The Lorentz force on each loop can be 
calculated as follows: τnet = ABI 
j

When the loop starts rotating due to this Q nˆ

torque, the magnetic field B is no longer in π/2−θ
ˆ
K
the plane of the loop. So the above equation
θ
is the special case.
b
When the loop starts rotating about z L̂

axis due to this torque, the magnetic field B
is no longer in the plane of the loop. So the R
above equation is the special case. P
(ii) when unit vector n is at an angle θ with ˆ

K
nˆ
the field I
b +
In the general case, the unit normal 2

2
vector n and magnetic field B is with an L̂
S
angle θ as shown in Figure 3.63. →
Horizontal component of PS=b cos( 2 + )
→
^
k
^
j Vertical component of PS=b sin ( 2 + )
^
i
F Figure 3.64 Horizontal and vertical

P
I
component of the sections - (a) QR (b) SP
^
n S
θ
(c) The force on section RS

Q  
N I –F S
l = a ˘jand B = Bi
R
B   
FRS = Il × B = IaB (  i ) = − IaB 
j × k
Figure 3.63 Unit vector makes an angle S ince, the unit vector normal to the plane
θ with the field is along the direction of -k .
(d) The force on section SP
(a) The force on section PQ  π  π  
  l = b cos  + θ 
i + sin  + θ k and B = B 
i
 2   2 
l = −a 
j and B = B 
i
   π 
   FSP = Il × B = IbB sin  + θ 
j
FPQ = Il × B = −IaB (  i ) = IaB 
j × k  2 

Since, the unit vector normal to the plane FSP = IbB cosθ j
 is along the direction of 
n k. The net force on the rectangular loop is
(b) The force on section QR     

Fnet = FPQ + FQR + FRS + FSP
  
π  π  Fnet = IaB k −IbB cos θ 
j −IaB k +IbB cos θ 
j
l = b cos  − θ i˘ − sin  − θ k˘ and B = B i˘  
 2   2  ⇒ Fnet = 0
   π 
FQR = Il × B = −IbB sin  − θ 
j Hence, the net force on the rectangular loop
 2 
 in this configuration is also zero. Notice
FQR = −IbB cosθ 
j that the force on section QR and SP are not

zero here. But, they have equal and opposite produced by these two forces about the axis of
effects, but we assume the loop to be rigid, so the rectangular loop is given by
no deformation. Hence, no torque produced 
τnet = baBI sin θ k = ABI sin θ k
by these two sections.
From the Figure 3.65 (c),
FPQ
b π  b π 
OA = cos  − θ(− i ) + sin  − θ(−k )
2  2  2  2 
FSP

a b
I
n^

b
= (−sin θ  i + cos θ k)
B 2
b π  b π 
i ) + sin  − θ( −k )
b sin
FQR OB = cos  − θ( 
2  2  2  2 

b
= (−sin θ  i + cos θ k )
(a) FRS 2
 b 

OA× FPQ =  (−sin θ  i + cos θ k ) ×{IaB k }
FPQ

 2 


1
= IabB sinθ  j
n^ 2
b
B  b 
90°
OB× FRS =  (sin θ  i + cos θ k )×{ −IaB k }
 2 
b sin 1
= IabB sinθ  j
2

(b)
FRS
The net torque τnet = IabB sin θ j
k
(3.68)
j
FPQ Note that the net torque is in the positive
i y direction which tends to rotate the loop
in clockwise direction about the y axis.
A net If the current is passed in the other way
b/2
b/2sin(/2−) (P→S→R→Q→P), then total torque will point
in the negative y direction which tends to
b/2cos(/2−) O
b/2 rotate the loop in anticlockwise direction
B about y axis.
Another important point is to note that
the torque is less in this case compared to
(c) FRS earlier case (where the n is perpendicular

Figure 3.65 Force on the rectangular to the magnetic field B ). It is because the
loop – (a) top view and (b) side view perpendicular distance is reduced between
 
(c) net torque on the loop the forces FPQ and FRS in this case.
The equation (3.68) can also be rewritten
Even though the forces PQ and RS also are in terms of magnetic dipole moment
 
also equal and opposite, they are not collinear. 
pm = I A = I ab n
So these two forces constitute a couple as   
τnet = p× B
shown in Figure 3.65 (a). Hence the net torque

This is analogous expression for torque When the current is passed through the
experienced by electric dipole in the uniform loop, the torque is produced. If the torque
electric field acting on the loop is increased then the loop
  
τnet = p × E which is given in the Unit 1. will start to rotate. The loop will start to lift
(Section 1.4.3) if and only if the magnitude of magnetic
Cases: torque due to current applied equals to the
gravitational torque as shown in Figure
(a) When θ = 90o, then the torque on the
current loop is maximum which is τ magnetic = τ gravitational

τnet = abIB 
j
IAB = mgR

Note here pm points perpendicular to the
 But pm = IA = I (πR2 )
magnetic field B . The torque is maximum
in this orientation. πIR 2 B = mgR
(b) When θ = 0o or 180o then the torque on
mg
the current loop is ⇒I=
 πRB
τnet = 0
  The current estimated using this equation
when θ = 0o, pm is parallel to B and for
  should be applied so that one edge of loop
θ = 180o, pm , is anti - parallel to B . The
is lifted of the surface.
torque is zero in these orientations.
E X A M P L E 3. 28 3.11.2 Moving coil

Consider a circular wire loop of radius R, galvanometer
mass m kept at rest on a rough surface. Let Moving coil galvanometer is a device
I be the current flowing through the loop which is used to indicate the flow of current

and B be the magnetic field acting along in an electrical circuit.
horizontal as shown in Figure. Estimate the Principle When a current carrying loop
current I that should be applied so that one is placed in a uniform magnetic field it
edge of the loop is lifted off the surface? experiences a torque.
B Construction
A moving coil galvanometer consists
R of a rectangular coil PQRS of insulated
I thin copper wire. The coil contains a
large number of turns wound over a light
Solution metallic frame. A cylindrical soft-iron core
is placed symmetrically inside the coil as
I
B shown in Figure 3.66. The rectangular coil
is suspended freely between two pole pieces
of a horse-shoe magnet.
The upper end of the rectangular
coil is attached to one end of fine strip of

Translucent
Mirror Force upwards I is the current
scale
Flying spot flowing through
Magnetic field P the coil
l S
Permanent Q
magnet
Fixed core Moving Magnetic field
Lens and l
graticule coil
R
Lamp
Force downwards
Figure 3.67 Force acting on current

carrying coil
radial magnetic field. Due to this radial field,

the sides QR and SP are always parallel to to
N S the B-field (magnetic field) and experience
no force. The sides PQ and RS are always
parallel to the B-field and experience force
and due to this, torque is produced.
Coil
F
Figure 3.66 Moving coil galvanometer – Q R

its parts l
l
P S
F
phosphor bronze and the lower end of the b

coil is connected to a hair spring which
is also made up of phosphor bronze. In Figure 3.68 Deflection couple
a fine suspension strip W, a small plane
mirror is attached in order to measure the For single turn, the deflection couple as
deflection of the coil with the help of lamp shown in Figure 3.68 is
and scale arrangement. The other end of the τ = bF = bBIl= (lb) BI = ABI
mirror is connected to a torsion head T. In since, area of the coil A = lb
order to pass electric current through the For coil with N turns, we get
galvanometer, the suspension strip W and
τ = NABI (3.69)
the spring S are connected to terminals.
Due to this deflecting torque, the coil
Working
gets twisted and restoring torque (also
Consider a single turn of the rectangular
known as restoring couple) is developed.
coil PQRS whose length be l and breadth
Hence the magnitude of restoring couple is
b. PQ = RS = l and QR = SP = b. Let I be
proportional to the amount of twist θ (Refer
the electric current flowing through the
Unit 10 of Std. XI Physics).Thus
rectangular coil PQRS as shown in Figure
3.67. The horse-shoe magnet has hemi - τ = K θ (3.70)
spherical magnetic poles which produces a

where K is the restoring couple per unit (b) by decreasing
twist or torsional constant of the spring. the couple per unit twist of the suspension
At equilibrium, the deflection couple is wire k. Phosphor - bronze wire is used as the
equal to the restoring couple. Therefore by suspension wire because the couple per unit
comparing equation (3.69) and (3.70), we twist is very small.
get Voltage sensitivity: It is defined as the
NABI = K θ deflection produced per unit voltage
K applied across it.
⇒I= θ (3.71)
NAB θ
VS =
V
(or) I = G θ
K θ NAB 1 I
where, G = is called galvanometer VS = = ⇒ VS = = S (3.73)
NAB IRg K Rg GRg Rg
constant or current reduction factor of the
where Rg is the resistance of galvanometer.
galvanometer.
Since, suspended moving coil E X A M P L E 3. 2 9
galvanometer is very sensitive, we have
The coil of a moving coil galvanometer has
to handle with high care while doing
5 turns and each turn has an effective area
experiments. Most of the galvanometer
of 2 × 10-2 m2. It is suspended in a magnetic
we use are pointer type moving coil
field whose strength is 4 × 10-2 Wb m-2. If
galvanometer.
the torsional constant K of the suspension
Figure of merit of a galvanometer fibre is 4 × 10-9 N m deg-1.
It is defined as the current which
produces a deflection of one scale division (a) Find its current sensitivity in degree per
in the galvanometer. micro - ampere.
(b) Calculate the voltage sensitivity of the
Sensitivity of a galvanometer galvanometer for it to have full scale
The galvanometer is said to be sensitive if deflection of 50 divisions for 25 mV.
it shows large scale deflection even though a (c)
Compute the resistance of the
small current is passed through it or a small galvanometer.
voltage is applied across it.
Current sensitivity: It is defined as the Solution
deflection produced per unit current The number of turns of the coil is 5 turns
flowing through it. The area of each coil is 2 × 10-2 m2
θ NAB 1 Strength of the magnetic field is
IS = = ⇒ I S = (3.72)
I K G 4 × 10-2 Wb m-2
The current sensitivity of a galvanometer Torsional constant is 4 × 10-9 N m deg-1
can be increased (a) Current sensitivity
(a) by increasing NAB 5 × 2 × 10 −2 × 4 × 10 −2
(1) the number of turns N IS = =
K 4 × 10 −9
(2) the magnetic induction B
(3) the area of the coil A = 106 divisions per ampere

1µA = 1microampere = 10−6 ampere Conversion of galvanometer into ammeter
and voltmeter
Therefore,
A galvanometer is very sensitive
div div div instrument to detect the current. It can
I S = 106 = 1 −6 = 1
A 10 A µA be easily converted into ammeter and
−1
I S = 1 div (µA) voltmeter.
(b) Voltage sensitivity Galvanometer to an Ammeter
θ 50 div
VS = = = 2×103 divV −1 Ammeter is an instrument used to
V 25 mV
measure current flowing in the electrical
(c) The resistance of the galvanometer is circuit. The ammeter must offer low
div resistance such that it will not change the
IS 106
Rg = = A = 0.5×103 V = 0.5 kΩ current passing through it. So ammeter is
VS 2×103 div A connected in series to measure the circuit
V current.
A galvanometer is converted into an
E X A M P L E 3. 30
ammeter by connecting a low resistance in
The resistance of a moving coil galvanometer parallel with the galvanometer. This low
is made twice its original value in order to resistance is called shunt resistance S. The
increase current sensitivity by 50%. Will scale is now calibrated in ampere and the
the voltage sensitivity change? If so, by how range of ammeter depends on the values of
much?. the shunt resistance.
Solution
S
Yes, voltage sensitivity will change. C D
IS I – Ig I – Ig
Voltage sensitivity is VS =
R
G
When the resistance is doubled, then new I A Ig Ig E I
resistance is R′ = 2R
Ammeter
Increase in current sensitivity is
 50  3 Figure 3.69 Shunt resistance connected
I S′ = 1 + I = I
 100  S 2 S in parallel
The new voltage sensitivity is

3 Let I be the current passing through
IS 3 the circuit as shown in Figure 3.69. When
VS′ = 2 = VS
2R 4 current I reaches the junction A, it divides
Hence the voltage sensitivity decreases. The into two components. Let Ig be the current
percentage decrease in voltage sensitivity is passing through the galvanometer of
resistance Rg through a path AGE and the
VS − VS′ remaining current (I – Ig) passes along the
×100% = 25%
VS path ACDE through shunt resistance S. The

value of shunt resistance is so adjusted that circuit. Let Iideal be current measured from
current Ig produces full scale deflection in ideal ammeter and Iactual be the actual current
the galvanometer. The potential difference measured in the circuit by the ammeter.
across galvanometer is same as the potential Then, the percentage error in measuring a
difference across shunt resistance. current through an ammeter is
Vgalvanometer = Vshunt ∆I I − I actual

×100% = ideal ×100%
I I actual
⇒ I g R g = ( I − I g )S
Key points
Ig
S= Rg Or
(I − I ) g
1. An ammeter is a low resistance instrument
and it is always connected in series to the
S
Ig = I ⇒ Ig ∝ I circuit
S + Rg
2. An ideal ammeter has zero resistance
Since, the deflection in the galvanometer
3.
In order to increase the range of an
is proportional to the current passing
ammeter n times, the value of shunt
through it.
resistance to be connected in parallel is
1 G
θ= Ig ⇒ θ ∝ Ig ⇒ θ ∝ I S=
G n −1
So, the deflection in the galvanometer Galvanometer to a voltmeter

measures the current I passing through the A voltmeter is an instrument used to
circuit (ammeter). measure potential difference across any two
Shunt resistance is connected in parallel points in the electrical circuits. It should not
to galvanometer. Therefore, resistance of draw any current from the circuit otherwise
ammeter can be determined by computing the value of potential difference to be
the effective resistance, which is measured will change.
1 1 1 Rg S Voltmeter must have high resistance
= + ⇒ Reff = = Ra
Reff Rg S Rg + S and when it is connected in parallel, it will
not draw appreciable current so that it will
Since, the shunt resistance is a very low indicate the true potential difference.
S
resistance and the ratio is also small. This
Rg
means, Rg is also small, i.e., the resistance Rh
offered by the ammeter is small. So, when G
A B
we connect ammeter in series, the ammeter Ig
will not change the resistance appreciably
and also the current in the circuit. For an Voltmeter
ideal ammeter, the resistance must be equal
Figure 3.70 Shunt resistance connected
to zero. Hence, the reading in ammeter is
in series
always lesser than the actual current in the

A galvanometer is converted into a Therefore,
voltmeter by connecting high resistance V
Ig =
Rh in series with galvanometer as shown Rg + Rh
in Figure 3.74. The scale is now calibrated V
⇒ Rh = − Rg
in volt and the range of voltmeter depends Ig
on the values of the resistance connected
Note that I g ∝ V
in series i.e. the value of resistance is so
adjusted that only current Ig produces full The deflection in the galvanometer is
scale deflection in the galvanometer. proportional to current Ig. But current Ig
Let Rg be the resistance of galvanometer is proportional to the potential difference.
and Ig be the current with which the Hence the deflection in the galvanometer is
galvanometer produces full scale deflection. proportional to potential difference. Since
Since the galvanometer is connected in the resistance of voltmeter is very large, a
series with high resistance, the current in voltmeter connected in an electrical circuit
the electrical circuit is same as the current will draw least current in the circuit. An
passing through the galvanometer. ideal voltmeter is one which has infinite
I = Ig resistance.
Key points
potential difference
I = Ig ⇒ Ig = 1. Voltmeter is a high resistance instrument
total resistance and it is always connected in parallel
Since the galvanometer and high with the circuit element across which the
resistance are connected in series, the total potential difference is to be calculated
resistance or effective resistance gives the 2. An ideal voltmeter has infinite resistance
resistance of voltmeter. The voltmeter 3. In order to increase the range of voltmeter
resistance is n times the value of resistance to be
Rv = Rg + Rh connected in series with galvanometer is
R = (n-1) G

SUMMARY:
A vertical plane passing through geographic axis is called geographic meridian.

A vertical plane passing through magnetic axis is called magnetic meridian.
The angle between magnetic meridian at a point with the geographical meridian is
called the declination or magnetic declination.

The angle subtended by the Earth’s total magnetic field B with the horizontal
direction in the magnetic meridian is called dip or magnetic inclination at that point.
The magnetic moment is defined as the product  of its pole strength and magnetic
p
length. It is a vector quantity, denoted by m .
The region surrounding magnet where magnetic pole of strength unity experiences

a force is known as magnetic field. It is a vector quantity and denoted by B Its unit is
N A-1 m-1 .
The number of magnetic field lines crossing per unit area is called magnetic flux ΦB.
It is a scalar quantity. In SI unit, magnetic flux ΦB is Weber, symbol Wb.
Statement of Coulomb’s law in magnetism “The force of attraction or repulsion
between two magnetic poles is proportional to the product of their pole strengths
and inversely proportional to the square of distance between them”.
Magnetic dipole kept in a uniform magnetic field experiences torque.
Tangent galvanometer is a device used to measure very small currents. It is a moving
magnet type galvanometer. Its working is based on tangent law.
Tangent law is B = BH tan θ.
The magnetic field which is used to magnetize a sample or specimen is called the

magnetising field. It is a vector quantity and denoted by H and its unit is A m-1.
The measure of ability of the material to allow the passage of magnetic lines of force
through it is known as magnetic permeability.
The net magnetic moment per unit volume of material is known as intensity of
magnetisation or magnetisation vector or magnetisation.

Magnetic susceptibility is defined as the ratio of the intensity of magnetisation ( I )

induced in the material due to the magnetising field ( H ).
Magnetic materials are classified into three categories: diamagnetic, paramagnetic
and ferromagnetic materials.

The lagging of magnetic induction B behind the cyclic variation in magnetising field

H is defined as “Hysteresis”, which means “lagging behind”.
The right hand thumb rule “If we hold the current carrying conductor in our right
hand such that the thumb points in the direction of current flow, then the rest of
the fingers encircling the wire points in the direction of the magnetic field lines
produced”.
Maxwell right hand cork screw rule “If we rotate a screw by a screw driver, then
the direction of current is same as the direction in which screw advances, and the
direction of rotation of the screw will determine the direction of the magnetic field”.

Ampère’s circuital law is ∫ ⋅ dl = µIenclosed .
B
C
Magnetic field inside the solenoid is B = µ nI , where n is the number of turns per
unit length.
Magnetic field interior to the toroid is B = µ nI , where n is the number of turns per
unit length.
   
Lorentz force is F = q ( E + v × B ).
Charged particle moving in a uniform magnetic field will undergo circular motion.
Fleming’s Left Hand Rule: Stretch forefinger, the middle finger and the thumb of the left
hand such that they are in mutually perpendicular directions. If we keep the forefinger in
the direction of magnetic field, the middle finger in the direction of the electric current,
then the thumb points in the direction the force experienced by the conductors.
One ampere is defined as that current when it is passed through each of the two
infinitely long parallel straight conductors kept at a distance of one meter apart in
vacuum causes each conductor to experience a force of 2 × 10-7 newton per meter
length of the conductor.
When a current carrying coil is placed in a uniform magnetic field, the net force on
it is always zero but net torque is not zero. The magnitude of net torque is τ = NABI
sin θ.
Moving coil galvanometer is an instrument used for the detection and measurement
of small currents.
In moving coil galvanometer, current passing through the galvanometer is directly
K
proportional to the deflection. Mathematically, I = Gθ, where G = is called
NAB
galvanometer constant or current reduction factor of the galvanometer.
Current sensitivity is defined as the deflection produced per unit current flowing
θ NAB 1
through it, I s = = ⇒ Is = .
I K G
Voltage sensitivity is defined as the deflection produced per unit voltage which is
θ 1 I
applied across it, Vs = = = S , where, Rg is the resistance of galvanometer.
V GRg Rg
Ammeter is an instrument used to measure current in an electrical circuit.
A galvanometer can be converted into an ammeter of given range by connecting a
suitable low resistance S called shunt in parallel to the given galvanometer.
An ideal ammeter has zero resistance.
Voltmeter is an instrument used to measure potential difference across any element
in an electrical circuit.
A galvanometer can be converted into suitable voltmeter of given range by connecting
a suitable resistance R in series with the given galvanometer.
An ideal voltmeter has infinite resistance.

198
CONCEPT MAP
UNIT-3(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 198
Magnetism and Magnetic effects of
electric current
Magnetic effects of
electric current
Magnetism
Biot Savart’s Ampere

Bar Magnetics Earth’s Magnetic law law
Magnetism materials
magnetic field of
current carrying
Coulomb’s Magnetic
Properties conductor
law elements
Tangent
Galvanometer Toroid Solenoid
Magnetic Magnetic field Torque

Lorentz force
field axial line equitorial line
Potential energy Torque Moving coil

Cyclotron
Galvanometer
Unit 3 M agnetism and magnetic effects of electric current
04-03-2019 10:35:59
EVALUATION
I Multiple choice questions

2q 3 BV q 3 B 2V
1. The magnetic field at the center O of (a) (b)
m 2m
the following current loop is
2q 3 B 2V 2q 3 BV
(c) (d)
I m m3
4. A circular coil of radius 5 cm and 50
r turns carries a current of 3 ampere. The
I I
O magnetic dipole moment of the coil is
(a) 1.0 amp – m2 (b) 1.2 amp – m2
µI µI
(a) Ä (b) (c) 0.5 amp – m2 (d) 0.8 amp – m2
4r 4r
µI µI
5. A thin insulated wire forms a plane
(c)  Ä (d) spiral of N = 100 tight turns carrying a
2r 2r
current I = 8 m A (milli ampere). The
2. An electron moves straight inside a radii of inside and outside turns are
charged parallel plate capacitor of a = 50 mm and b = 100 mm respectively.
uniform charge density σ. The time The magnetic induction at the center of
taken by the electron to cross the the spiral is
parallel plate capacitor when the plates
(a) 5 µT (b) 7 µT
of the capacitor are kept under constant
 (c) 8 µT (d) 10 µT
magnetic field of induction B is
6. Three wires of equal lengths are bent in
the form of loops. One of the loops is
circle, another is a semi-circle and the
E
third one is a square. They are placed
e–
in a uniform magnetic field and same
electric current is passed through
them. Which of the following loop
configuration will experience greater
torque ?
elB lB
(a) ε  (b) ε  (a) circle (b) semi-circle
σ σl
lB lB (c) square (d) all of them
(c) ε  (d) ε 
eσ σ 7. Two identical coils, each with N turns
3. The force experienced by a particle and radius R are placed coaxially at a
having mass m and charge q accelerated distance R as shown in the figure. If
through a potential difference V when I is the current passing through the
it is kept under perpendicular magnetic loops in the same direction, then the

field B is

magnetic field at a point P which is at (a) M (b) 3 M
R π
exactly at distance between two coils is
2
(c) 2 M (d) M
1
π 2
I
R
I
R
10. A non-conducting charged ring of
charge q, mass m and radius r is rotated
P with constant angular speed ω. Find
I I
the ratio of its magnetic moment with
angular momentum is
R
q 2q
(a) (b)
m m
8N µ  I 8N µ  I
(a) (b)
5R
3
5 2R q q
(c) (d)
2m 4m
8N µ  I 4N µI
(c) (d) 11. The BH curve for a ferromagnetic
5R 5R
material is shown in the figure.
8. A wire of length l carries a current I
The material is placed inside a long
along the Y direction and magnetic
 solenoid which contains 1000 turns/
β   
field is given by B = ( i + j + k )T . cm. The current that should be passed
3
in the solenonid to demagnetize the
The magnitude of Lorentz force acting
ferromagnet completely is
on the wire is
2 1 B in tesla
(a) βIl (b) βIl 4.0
3 3
3.0
2 βIl (d) 1
(c) βIl 2.0
2
9. A bar magnet of length l and magnetic 1.0 H in ampere
per meter
moment M is bent in the form of an arc
as shown in figure. The new magnetic –250 –200 –150 –100 –50 50 100 150 200 250
–1.0
dipole moment will be
–2.0
(NEET 2014) –3.0
–4.0
(a) 1.00 m A (milli ampere) (b) 1.25 mA

r 60° r
(c) 1.50 mA (d) 1.75 mA
12. Two short bar magnets have magnetic
moments 1.20 Am2 and 1.00 Am2

respectively. They are kept on a its plane passing through the center
horizontal table parallel to each other with angular velocity ω. Find the
with their north poles pointing towards magnitude of the torque on the disc if
the south. They have a common it is placed in a uniform magnetic field
magnetic equator and are separated whose strength is B which is directed
by a distance of 20.0 cm. The value perpendicular to the axis of rotation
of the resultant horizontal magnetic
induction at the mid-point O of the (a) 1 σωπBR (b) 1 σωπBR2
4 4
line joining their centers is (Horizontal
components of Earth’s magnetic (c) 1 σωπBR3 (d) 1 σωπBR 4
induction is 3.6 × 10-5 Wb m-2 ) 4 4
15. A simple pendulum with charged bob
(NSEP 2000-2001) is oscillating with time period T and
(a) 3.60 × 10-5 Wb m-2 let θ be the angular displacement. If
(b) 3.5 × 10-5 Wb m-2 the uniform magnetic field is switched
ON in a direction perpendicular to the
(c) 2.56 × 10-4 Wb m-2
plane of oscillation then
(d) 2.2 × 10-4 Wb m-2
(a) time period will decrease but θ will
13. The vertical component of Earth’s remain constant
magnetic field at a place is equal to the
(b) time period remain constant but θ
horizontal component. What is the
will decrease
value of angle of dip at this place?
(c) both T and θ will remain the same
(a) 30o (b) 45o
(d) both T and θ will decrease
(c) 60o (d) 90o
14. A flat dielectric disc of radius R carries Answers
an excess charge on its surface. The 1) a 2) d 3) c 4) b 5) b
surface charge density is σ. The disc
6) a 7) b 8) a 9) b 10) c
rotates about an axis perpendicular to
11) b 12) c 13) b 14) d 15) c
II Short answer questions:

1. What is meant by magnetic induction? 9. Compare dia, para and ferro-
2. Define magnetic flux. magnetism.
3. Define magnetic dipole moment. 10. What is meant by hysteresis?
4. State Coulomb’s inverse law.
5. What is magnetic susceptibility?
6. State Biot-Savart’s law.
7. What is magnetic permeability?
8. State Ampere’s circuital law.

III Long answer questions
1. Discuss Earth’s magnetic field in detail. 7. Find the magnetic induction due to a
2. Deduce the relation for the magnetic long straight conductor using Ampere’s
induction at a point due to an infinitely circuital law.
long straight conductor carrying 8. Discuss the working of cyclotron in
current. detail.
3. Obtain a relation for the magnetic 9. What is tangent law? Discuss in detail.
induction at a point along the axis of a 10. Explain the principle and working of a
circular coil carrying current. moving coil galvanometer.
4. Compute the torque experienced by a 11. Discuss the conversion of galvanometer
magnetic needle in a uniform magnetic into an ammeter and also a voltmeter.
field. 12. Calculate the magnetic field inside
5. Calculate the magnetic induction at a and outside of the long solenoid using
point on the axial line of a bar magnet. Ampere’s circuital law.
6. Obtain the magnetic induction at a
point on the equatorial line of a bar
magnet.
IV. Numerical problems

1. A bar magnet having a magnetic

moment M is cut into four pieces i.e.,
first cut in two pieces along the axis of
the magnet and each piece is further cut
Bin
into two pieces. Compute the magnetic
moment of each piece.
 1 
Answer Mnew = M Answer 2 mA
4
2. A conductor of linear mass density 3. A circular coil with cross-sectional area
0.2 g m-1 suspended by two flexible 0.1 cm2 is kept in a uniform magnetic
wire as shown in figure. Suppose the field of strength 0.2 T. If the current
tension in the supporting wires is zero passing in the coil is 3 A and plane
when it is kept inside the magnetic of the loop is perpendicular to the
field of 1 T whose direction is into the direction of magnetic field. Calculate
page. Compute the current inside the (a) total torque on the coil
conductor and also the direction of the (b) total force on the coil
current. Assume g = 10 m s-2 (c) average force on each electron in the
coil due to the magnetic field of the free
electron density for the material of the wire
is 1028 m-3.

Answer (a) zero (b) zero (c) 0.6 x 10-23 N 6. Calculate the magnetic field at the
4. A bar magnet is placed in a uniform center of a square loop which carries a
magnetic field whose strength is 0.8 current of 1.5 A, length of each loop is
T. Suppose the bar magnet orient at 50 cm. Answer 3.4 x 10-6 T
an angle 30o with the external field 7. Show that the magnetic field at any
experiences a torque of 0.2 N m. point on the axis of the solenoid
Calculate: having n turns per unit length is
(i) the magnetic moment of the magnet 1
B = µ nI (cos θ1 − cos θ2 ).
(ii) the work done by an applied force in 2
moving it from most stable configuration 8. Let I1 and I2 be the steady currents
to the most unstable configuration and passing through a long horizontal wire
also compute the work done by the applied XY and PQ respectively. The wire PQ
magnetic field in this case. is fixed in horizontal plane and the
Answer (i) 0.5 A m2 (ii) W = 0.8 J and wire XY be is allowed to move freely
Wmag = -0.8 J
in a vertical plane. Let the wire XY is
5. A non - conducting sphere has a
mass of 100 g and radius 20 cm. A flat in equilibrium at a height d over the
compact coil of wire with turns 5 is parallel wire PQ as shown in figure.
wrapped tightly around it with each
turns concentric with the sphere. This I1
X Y
sphere is placed on an inclined plane
such that plane of coil is parallel to the d
inclined plane. A uniform magnetic I2
P Q
field of 0.5 T exists in the region in
vertically upward direction. Compute
the current I required to rest the sphere Show that if the wire XY is slightly
2 displaced and released, it executes Simple
in equilibrium. Answer A
π Harmonic Motion (SHM). Also, compute
the time period of oscillations.
Answer ay = -ω2y (SHM) and time period
d
T = 2π insec
g

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. H. C. Verma, Concepts of Physics – Volume 2, Bharati Bhawan Publisher

2. Halliday, Resnick and Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, Wiley Publishers, 10th edition
3. Serway and Jewett, Physics for scientist and engineers with modern physics, Brook/Coole
publishers, Eighth edition
4. David J. Griffiths, Introduction to electrodynamics, Pearson publishers
5. Rita John, Solid State Physics (Magnetism chapter), McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt.
Ltd.
6. Paul Tipler and Gene Mosca, Physics for scientist and engineers with modern physics,
Sixth edition, W.H. Freeman and Company

ICT CORNER
Magnetism
Topic: Cyclotron
In this activity you will be able to visualize
and understand the working of cyclotron.
STEPS:
• Open the browser and type ‘physics.bu.edu/~duffy/HTML5/cyclotron.html’ in the address bar.
• Click ‘play’ to release the positively charged particle between the D-shaped sections.
• Observe trajectory of positively charged particle under the magnetic field between D-shaped
sections.
• Note the kinetic energy of the particle after some time (say t = 20 s)
Step1 Step2
Step3 Step4
Double the electric and magnetic fields by clicking corresponding buttons and observe the change in kinetic
energy for a particular given time t.
URL:
http://physics.bu.edu/~duffy/HTML5/cyclotron.html

UNIT ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
4 AND ALTERNATING CURRENT
“Nature is our kindest friend and best critic in experimental science if we only allow her
intimations to fall unbiased on our minds” ― Michael Faraday
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

• the phenomenon of electromagnetic induction
• the application of Lenz’s law to find the direction of induced emf
• the concept of Eddy current and its uses
• the phenomenon of self-induction and mutual-induction
• the various methods of producing induced emfs
• the construction and working of AC generators
• the principle of transformers and its role in long distance power communication
• the notion of root mean square value of alternating current
• the idea of phasors and phase relationships in different AC circuits
• the insight about power in an AC circuit and wattless current
• the understanding of energy conservation during LC oscillations
4.1 Physicists then began to think of the

converse effect. Is it possible to produce an
ELECTROMAGNETIC
electric current with the help of a magnetic
INDUCTION
field? A series of experiments were
4.1.1 Introduction conducted to establish the converse effect.
These experiments were done by Michael
In the previous chapter, we have learnt
Faraday of UK and Joseph Henry of USA,
that whenever an electric current flows
almost simultaneously and independently.
through a conductor, it produces a magnetic
These attempts became successful and
field around it. This was discovered by
led to the discovery of the phenomenon,
Christian Oersted. Later, Ampere proved
called Electromagnetic Induction. Michael
that a current-carrying loop behaves like a
Faraday is credited with the discovery of
bar magnet. These are the magnetic effects
electromagnetic induction in 1831.
produced by the electric current.
206

In this chapter, let us see a few
B B
experiments of Faraday, the results and the
phenomenon of Electromagnetic Induction.
Before that, we will recollect the concept of n̂ n̂
magnetic flux linked with a surface area.
An anecdote!
Michael Faraday was enormously
popular for his lectures as well. In (a) (b)
one of his lectures, he demonstrated
his experiments which led to Figure 4.1 Magnetic flux
the discovery of electromagnetic
induction.
If the magnetic field B is uniform over
At the end of the lecture, one
the area A and is perpendicular to the area
member of the audience approached
as shown in Figure 4.1(b), then the above
Faraday and said, “Mr. Faraday, the
equation becomes
behaviour of the magnet and the coil
of wire was interesting, but what is the
use of it?” Faraday answered politely, F B = BA (4.2)
“Sir, what is the use of a newborn
baby?” since θ = 0°, cos 0° = 1
Note: We will soon see the greatness
of ‘that little child’ who has now
grown as an adult to cater to the The SI unit of magnetic flux is T m2. It is
energy needs. also measured in weber or Wb.
1 Wb = 1 T m2
4.1.2 Magnetic Flux (FB) E X A M P L E 4. 1

The magnetic flux through an area A in
a magnetic field is defined as the number A circular antenna of area 3 m2 is installed
of magnetic field lines passing through that at a place in Madurai. The plane of the
area normally and is given by the equation area of antenna is inclined at 47o with the
(Figure 4.1(a)). direction of Earth’s magnetic field. If the
magnitude of Earth’s field at that place is

F B = ∫ B. d A = BA cos θ(4.1) 40773.9 nT find the magnetic flux linked
A with the antenna.
where the integral is taken over the area

Solution
A and θ is the angle between the direction of
the magnetic field and the outward normal B = 40773.9 nT; θ = 90o – 47o = 43°;
to the area. A = 3m2
Unit 4 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION AND ALTERNATING CURRENT 207

We know that F B = BA cosθ (ii) θ = 90° – 60° = 30°;
F B = BA cos θ = 0.2×5×10−2 × cos 30

= 40,773.9 ´ 10-9 ´ 3 ´ cos 43o
3
F B = 1×10−2 ×  8.66 103Wb
2
= 40.7739 ´ 10-6 ´ 3 ´ 0.7314
(iii) θ = 90°;
= 89.47 ´ 10-6 Wb
F B = BA cos90 = 0
F B = 89.47 mWb
4.1.3 Faraday’s Experiments

E X A M P L E 4. 2
on Electromagnetic Induction
A circular loop of area 5 ´ 10-2m2 rotates
First Experiment
in a uniform magnetic field of 0.2 T. If
the loop rotates about its diameter which Consider a closed circuit consisting of a
is perpendicular to the magnetic field as coil C of insulated wire and a galvanometer G
shown in figure. Find the magnetic flux as shown in Figure 4.2(a). The galvanometer
linked with the loop when its plane is (i) does not indicate deflection as there is no
normal to the field (ii) inclined 60o to the electric current in the circuit.
field and (iii) parallel to the field. When a bar magnet is inserted into the
stationary coil, with its north pole facing the
coil, there is a momentary deflection in the
galvanometer. This indicates that an electric
current is set up in the coil (Figure 4.2(b)).
If the magnet is kept stationary inside the
coil, the galvanometer does not indicate
B
deflection (Figure 4.2(c)).
The bar magnet is now withdrawn from
the coil, the galvanometer again gives a
momentary deflection but in the opposite
direction. So the electric current flows in
opposite direction (Figure 4.2(d)). Now if
Solution the magnet is moved faster, it gives a larger
A = 5 ´ 10-2 m2; B = 0.2 T deflection due to a greater current in the
circuit (Figure 4.2(e))
(i) θ = 0°;
The bar magnet is reversed i.e., the south
pole now faces the coil. When the above
F B = BA cos θ = 0.2×5×10−2 × cos 0
experiment is repeated, the deflections are
F B = 1×10−2Wb opposite to that obtained in the case of north

pole (Figure 4.2(f)).
208 Unit 4 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION AND ALTERNATING CURRENT

No motion Towards left Kept stationary
N S
N S NN SS
C C C
v1
G G G
No deflection Right deflection No deflection
(a) (b) (c)
Away from coil Higher speed S-pole towards left

N S N S S N
C C C
v2 > v1
i i i
G G G
Left deflection Larger deflection Left deflection
(d) (e) (f)
Figure 4.2 Faraday’s first experiment
If the magnet is kept stationary and the If the primary circuit is closed, electric
coil is moved towards or away from the coil, current starts flowing in the primary circuit.
similar results are obtained. It is concluded At that time, the galvanometer gives a
that whenever there is a relative motion momentary deflection (Figure 4.3(a)).
between the coil and the magnet, there is After that, when the electric current
deflection in the galvanometer, indicating reaches a certain steady value, no deflection
the electric current setup in the coil. is observed in the galvanometer.
Second Experiment Likewise if the primary circuit is broken,
the electric current starts decreasing and
Consider two closed circuits as shown
there is again a sudden deflection but in
in Figure 4.3(a). The circuit consisting of
the opposite direction (Figure 4.3(b)).
a coil P, a battery B and a key K is called
When the electric current becomes zero, the
as primary circuit while the circuit with a
galvanometer shows no deflection.
coil S and a galvanometer G is known as
From the above observations, it is
secondary circuit. The coils P and S are kept
concluded that whenever the electric
at rest in close proximity with respect to one
current in the primary circuit changes, the
another.
galvanometer shows a deflection.

Increasing Decreasing
current current
P S P S
ip iS ip iS
K B K
B G G
Right deflection Left deflection
(a) (b)
Figure 4.3 Faraday’s second experiment
Faraday’s Law of Electromagnetic Activity

Induction
Exploring Electromagnetic Induction
From the results of his experiments, Faraday
realized that
whenever the magnetic flux linked
with a closed coil changes, an emf
S
(electromotive force) is induced and N
hence an electric current flows in
the circuit. This current is called an
induced current and the emf giving
rise to such current is called an induced
emf. This phenomenon is known as
electromagnetic induction.
Based on this idea, Faraday’s experiments are

Make a circuit containing a coil of
understood in the following way. In the first
insulated wire wound around soft hollow
experiment, when a bar magnet is placed
core and a galvanometer as shown in
close to a coil, some of the magnetic field
Figure. It is better to use a thin wire for
lines of the bar magnet pass through the coil
the coil so that we can wind many turns
i.e., the magnetic flux is linked with the coil.
in the available space. Perform the steps
When the bar magnet and the coil approach
described in first experiment of Faraday
each other, the magnetic flux linked with the
with the help of a strong bar magnet.
coil increases. So this increase in magnetic
Students will get hands-on experience
flux induces an emf and hence a transient
about electromagnetic induction.

N S
N S
C C
magnetic flux
linked is less magnetic flux
i i linked is more
G Right deflection G
(a)
N S N S
C C
i
i
G Left deflection G
(b)
Figure 4.4 Explanation of Faraday’s first experiment
electric current flows in the circuit in one When the primary circuit is open, no
direction (Figure 4.4(a)). electric current flows in it and hence the
At the same time, when they recede away from magnetic flux linked with the secondary
one another, the magnetic flux linked with the coil is zero (Figure 4.5(a)).
coil decreases. The decrease in magnetic flux However, when the primary circuit is
again induces an emf in opposite direction closed, the increasing current builds up a
and hence an electric current flows in opposite magnetic field around the primary coil.
direction (Figure 4.4(b)). So there is deflection Therefore, the magnetic flux linked with the
in the galvanometer when there is a relative secondary coil increases. This increasing flux
motion between the coil and the magnet. linked induces a transient electric current in
In the second experiment, when the the secondary coil (Figure 4.5(b)). When the
primary coil P carries an electric current, a electric current in the primary coil reaches a
magnetic field is established around it. The steady value, the magnetic flux linked with
magnetic lines of this field pass through the secondary coil does not change and the
itself and the neighbouring secondary coil S. electric current in the secondary coil will
disappear.

No current Importance of Electromagnetic
P S
Induction!
The application of the phenomenon
of Electromagnetic Induction is almost
everywhere in the present day life. Right
from home appliances to huge factory
(a)
K machineries, from cellphone to computers
B G
No deflection
and internet, from electric guitar to satellite
Increasing communication, all need electricity for
current their operation. There is an ever growing
demand for electric power.
S
P
All these are met with the help of
electric generators and transformers which
ip iS function on electromagnetic induction.
The modern, sophisticated human
life would not be possible without the
(b)
B
K discovery of electromagnetic induction.
G
Decreasing Right deflection
current
The conclusions of Faraday’s experiments
P S are stated as two laws.
First law
ip iS
Whenever magnetic flux linked with
a closed circuit changes, an emf is
K
induced in the circuit.
B G
(c) Second law
Left deflection
The magnitude of induced emf in a
Figure 4.5 Explanation of Faraday’s closed circuit is equal to the time rate
second experiment of change of magnetic flux linked with
the circuit.
Similarly, when the primary circuit is If the magnetic flux linked with the
broken, the decreasing primary current induces coil changes by dΦB in a time dt, then the
an electric current in the secondary coil, but in induced emf is given by
the opposite direction (Figure 4.5(c)). So there
is deflection in the galvanometer whenever dF B
ε =−
there is a change in the primary current. dt
The negative sign in the above equation

The symbol ε is used for gives the direction of the induced current
Note permittivity in unit 1 and for
which will be dealt with in the next section.
emf in this chapter. Reader is If a coil consisting of N turns is tightly
advised to use ε in relevant context. wound such that each turn covers the same
212 Unit 4 ELECT ROMAGNETIC INDUCTION AND ALTERNATING CURRENT

area, then the flux through each turn will be Solution
the same. Then total emf induced in the coil N = 40 turns; B = 2 Wb m-2
is given by A = 200 cm2 = 200 ´ 10-4 m2;
dF B
ε = −N
dt Initial flux, Fi = BA cosθ
d (N F B )
(4.3)
=−  2  200 104  cos 60
dt
since θ = 90°− 30° = 60°
Here, NΦB is called flux linkage, defined F i = 2×10−2 Wb
as the product of number of turns N of the
coil and the magnetic flux linking each turn Final flux, F f = BA cosθ
of the coil ΦB.  2  200 104  cos 0 since θ = 0°
F f = 4 ×10−2Wb
E X A M P L E 4. 3
Magnitude of the induced emf is
A cylindrical bar magnet is kept along the
dF B
axis of a circular solenoid. If the magnet is ε=N
dt
rotated about its axis, find out whether an
electric current is induced in the coil. 40×(4 ×10−2 − 2×10−2 )
= = 4V
0. 2
Solution
The magnetic field of a cylindrical magnet

is symmetrical about its axis. As the magnet
is rotated along the axis of the solenoid, E X A M P L E 4. 5
there is no induced current in the solenoid A straight conducting wire is dropped
because the flux linked with the solenoid horizontally from a certain height with its
does not change due to the rotation of the length along east – west direction. Will an
magnet. emf be induced in it? Justify your answer.
Solution
E X A M P L E 4. 4 Yes! An emf will be induced in the wire
because it moves perpendicular to the
A closed coil of 40 turns and of area 200 horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic
cm2, is rotated in a magnetic field of flux field.
density 2 Wb m-2. It rotates from a position
where its plane makes an angle of 30o with
the field to a position perpendicular to the
4.1.4 Lenz’s law
field in a time 0.2 sec. Find the magnitude
of the emf induced in the coil due to its A German physicist Heinrich Lenz
rotation. performed his own experiments on
electromagnetic induction and deduced a

law to determine the direction of the induced the Figure 4.6(b). From the direction of
current. This law is known as Lenz’s law. the magnetic field thus produced, the
Lenz’s law states that the direction of direction of the induced current is found
the induced current is such that it always to be anti-clockwise by using right-hand
opposes the cause responsible for its thumb rule.
production.
Faraday discovered that when magnetic No Current
flux linked with a coil changes, an electric
current is induced in the circuit. Here the D × × × ×A ×
flux change is the cause while the induction

× × × × ×
of current is the effect. Lenz’s law says
that the effect always opposes the cause. × × × × ×
Therefore, the induced current would flow
in a direction so that it could oppose the C × × × ×B ×
flux change.
To understand Lenz’s law, let us × → (r, inwards)
consider two illustrations in which we
find the direction of the induced current (a)
in a circuit.
D × × i× × × A
Illustration 1
× × × × ×
Consider a uniform magnetic field, with
its field lines perpendicular to the plane of × × × × ×
the paper and pointing inwards. These field
C
lines are represented by crosses (x) as shown × × × × × B
in Figure 4.6(a). A rectangular metallic
frame ABCD is placed in this magnetic field, → ind(r, outwards)
with its plane perpendicular to the field.
The arm AB is movable so that it can slide (b)
towards right or left. × i× ×A × ×
D
If the arm AB slides to our right side, × ×
the number of field lines (magnetic flux) × × × × ×
passing through the frame ABCD increases × ×
and a current is induced. As suggested by × × × × ×
× ×
Lenz’s law, the induced current opposes
C
this flux increase and it tries to reduce it by × × ×B × ×
producing another magnetic field pointing
outwards i.e., opposite to the existing
× → ind(r, inwards)
magnetic field.
(c)
The magnetic lines of this induced field
are represented by red-colored circles in Figure 4.6 First illustration of Lenz’s law

The leftward motion of arm AB decreases
magnetic flux. The induced current, this No motion
time, produces a magnetic field in the
inward direction (red-colored crosses) i.e.,
in the direction of the existing magnetic
N S
field (Figure 4.6(c)). Therefore, the flux

decrease is opposed by the flow of induced
current. From this, it is found that induced
current flows in clockwise direction.
G
Illustration 2 (a)
Let us move a bar magnet towards the
solenoid, with its north pole pointing the
solenoid as shown in Figure 4.7(b). This
motion increases the magnetic flux of the coil S N
which in turn, induces an electric current. N S
Due to the flow of induced current, the

coil becomes a magnetic dipole whose two
magnetic poles are on either end of the coil. i Repulsion between
In this case, the cause producing the
coil and magnet
induced current is the movement of the G
magnet. According to Lenz’s law, the induced (b)
current should flow in such a way that it
opposes the movement of the north pole
towards coil. It is possible if the end nearer
to the magnet becomes north pole (Figure N S
4.7(b)). Then it repels the north pole of the N
N S
bar magnet and opposes the movement of

the magnet. Once pole ends are known, the
direction of the induced current could be i Attraction between
coil and magnet
found by using right hand thumb rule.
When the bar magnet is withdrawn,
G
the nearer end becomes south pole which (c)
attracts north pole of the bar magnet,
opposing the receding motion of the magnet Figure 4.7 Second illustration of Lenz’s law
(Figure 4.7(c)).
Thus the direction of the induced current
can be found from Lenz’s law. of energy. The explanation is as follows:
According to Lenz’s law, when a magnet is
Conservation of energy moved either towards or away from a coil,
The truth of Lenz’s law can be established the induced current produced opposes its
on the basis of the law of conservation motion. As a result, there will always be a

Then the magnet starts moving towards the
Activity
coil without any expense of energy. This,
then, becomes a perpetual motion machine.
In practice, no such machine is possible.
Therefore, the assumption that the induced
current helps the cause is wrong.
4.1.5 Fleming’s right hand

rule
When a conductor moves in a magnetic
field, the direction of motion of the
conductor, the field and the induced current
are given by Fleming’s right hand rule and is
as follows:
Demonstration of Lenz’s law
Take a narrow copper pipe and a
strongly magnetized button magnet as Direction of
force
shown in figure. Keep the copper pipe N Current
vertical and drop the magnet into the Direction S
pipe. Watch the motion of the magnet and of field
N
note that magnet has become slower than S
its free fall. The reason is that an electric Direction
of Current
current generated by a moving magnet
will always oppose the original motion of
the magnet that produced the current.
resisting force on the moving magnet. Work

has to be done by some external agency to Figure 4.8 Fleming’s right hand rule
move the magnet against this resisting force.
Here the mechanical energy of the moving The thumb, index finger and middle
magnet is converted into the electrical finger of right hand are stretched out in
energy which in turn, gets converted into mutually perpendicular directions (as
Joule heat in the coil i.e., energy is converted shown in Figure 4.8). If the index finger
from one form to another. points the direction of the magnetic field
On the contrary to Lenz’s law, let us and the thumb indicates the direction of
assume that the induced current helps the motion of the conductor, then the middle
cause responsible for its production. Now finger will indicate the direction of the
when we push the magnet little bit towards induced current.
the coil, the induced current helps the Fleming’s right hand rule is also known
movement of the magnet towards the coil. as generator rule.

E X A M P L E 4. 6 Solution
If the current i flowing in the straight
F B = (2t 3 + 3t 2 + 8t + 5)mWb ; N =1; t = 3 s
conducting wire as shown in the figure
decreases, find out the direction of induced d (N F B ) d
current in the metallic square loop placed (i) ε=
dt
=
dt
(2t 3 + 3t 2 + 8t + 5)×10−3
near it.
d (N F B ) d
ε
= = (2t 3 + 3t 2 + 8t + 5)×10−3
dt dt
 
 6t 2  6t  8 103
i
At t = 3 s,
Solution ε = (6×9) + (6×3) + 8 ×10−3
From right hand rule, the magnetic field by
the straight wire is directed into the plane = 80×10−3V = 80mV
of the square loop perpendicularly and its
magnetic flux is decreasing. The decrease
in flux is opposed by the current induced (ii) As time passes, the magnetic flux linked
in the loop by producing a magnetic field with the loop increases. According
in the same direction as the magnetic field to Lenz’s law, the direction of the
of the wire. Again from right hand rule, for induced current should be in a way so
this inward magnetic field, the direction of as to oppose the flux increase. So, the
the induced current in the loop is clockwise. induced current flows in such a way to
produce a magnetic field opposite to
E X A M P L E 4. 7 the given field. This magnetic field is
perpendicularly outwards. Therefore,
The magnetic flux passes perpendicular the induced current flows in anti-
to the plane of the circuit and is directed clockwise direction.
into the paper. If the magnetic flux varies
with respect to time as per the following
relation: F B = (2t 3 + 3t 2 + 8t + 5)mWb , what
4.1.6 Motional emf from
is the magnitude of the induced emf in the
Lorentz force
loop when t = 3 s? Find out the direction of
current through the circuit. Consider a straight conducting rod
AB of length l in a uniform magnetic field

B which is directed perpendicularly into
the plane of the paper as shown in Figure
4.9(a). The length of the rod is normal to
the magnetic field. Let the rod move with a
constant velocity v towards right side.
When the rod moves, the free
R
electrons present in it also move with same

 
velocity v in B . As a result, the Lorentz force

acts on free electrons in the direction from (r, inwards)
B to A and is given by the relation × × × B× × × B
+

× × × × × ×
(
FB = −e v × B (4.4) ) v v
× × × × × ×

E ε
× × l× × × ×
The action of this Lorentz force is to
accumulate the free electrons at the end × × × × × ×
A. This accumulation of free electrons × × × × × × _
produces a potential difference across the × × ×A× × × A
rod which in turn establishes an electric field
 × × × × × ×
E directed along BA (Figure 4.9(b)). Due to (b)
 (a)
the electric field E, the coulomb force starts
acting on the free electrons along AB and is Figure 4.9 Motional emf from Lorentz force
given by

Thus the Lorentz force on the free
FE  eE (4.5)
electrons is responsible to maintain this
 potential difference and hence produces an
The magnitude of the electric field E
emf
keeps on increasing as long as accumulation
of electrons at the end A continues. The ε = Blv (4.7)

force FE also increases until equilibrium
is reached. At equilibrium, the magnetic As this emf is produced due to the
Lorentz force FB and the coulomb force movement of the rod, it is often called

FE balance each other and no further as motional emf. If the ends A and B are
accumulation of free electrons at the end A connected by an external circuit of total
ε Blv
takes place. resistance R, then current i = R = R flows
  in it. The direction of the current is found
i.e., FB = FE from right-hand thumb rule.

e (v  B ) = eE
4.1.7 Motional emf from
vB sin 90  E
Faraday’s law and Energy
vB = E (4.6)
conservation
Let us consider a rectangular conducting
The potential difference between two loop
of width l in a uniform magnetic field
ends of the rod is B which is perpendicular to the plane of
the loop and is directed inwards. A part of
V = El
the loop is in the magnetic field while the
V = vBl remaining part is outside the field as shown
in Figure 4.10.

dx

where v = is the velocity of the loop.
(r, Inwards) F2 dt
× × × × × × i This emf is known as motional emf since
× × × × × × it is produced due to the movement of the
l
× × × × × × loop in the magnetic field.
F1 F
× × × × × × From Lenz’s law, it is found that
× × × × × × the induced current flows in clockwise
v
× × × × ×
direction. If R is the resistance of the loop,
F3
then the induced current is given by
x
ε
i=
Figure 4.10 Motional emf from Faraday’s law R
Blv
i= (4.10)
When the loop is pulled with a constant R
velocity v to the right, the area of the portion
Energy conservation
of the loop within the magnetic field will
decrease. Thus, the flux linked with the loop In order
 to move the loop with a constant
will also decrease. According to Faraday’s velocity v , a constant force that is equal and
law, an electric current is induced in the loop opposite to the magnetic force, must be
which flows in a direction so as to oppose applied. Therefore, mechanical work is done
the pull of the loop. to move the loop. Then the rate of doing
Let x be the length of the loop which is work or power is
 
still within the magnetic field, then its area P = F ⋅ v = Fv cosθ
is lx . The magnetic flux linked with the
loop is = Fv Here θ = 0 (4.11)

F B = ∫ B ⋅ d A = BA cosθ Now, let us find the magnetic force acting
A on the loop due to its movement in the
Here θ = 0 and cos0 = 1 magnetic field. Let three deflecting forces
  
= BA F1 , F2 and F3 be acting on the three segments
F B = Blx (4.8) of the loop as shown in Figure 4.10. The
general equation of such a deflecting force
As this magnetic flux decreases due to is given by
  
the movement of the loop, the magnitude of Fd = i l × B
the induced emf is given by  
Forces F2 and F3 are equal in magnitude
dF B d
ε= = (Blx ) and opposite in direction and
 cancel each
dt dt
other. Therefore, the force F1 alone acts on
Here, both B and l are constants. the left segment of the loop in a direction
Therefore, shown in Figure 4.10 and is given by
dx   
ε = Bl F1 = il × B
dt
ε = Blv (4.9) F = il B sinθ (4.12)


Here θ is the angle between B and the E X A M P L E 4. 8
length vector l for the left segment and is 90 A conducting rod of length 0.5 m falls
∴ F1 = il B sin 90 = il B since sin90 = 1 freely from the top of a building of
height 7.2 m at a place in Chennai where

F must be equal to the horizontal component of Earth’s
 The applied force
F1 in order to just magnetic field is 40378.7 nT. If the length
 move the loop with a
constant velocity v of the rod is perpendicular to Earth’s
  horizontal magnetic field, find the emf
∴ F = −F1
induced across the conductor when the
 
(since F and F are in opposite direction)
1
rod is about to touch the ground. [Take
g = 10 m s-2]
Considering only the magnitudes,
F = F1 = i l B Solution
Substituting for i from equation (4.10) l = 0.5 m; h = 7.2 m; u = 0 m s-1;
g = 10 m s-2; BH = 40378.7 nT
 
F =  Blv lB
 R  The final velocity of the rod is
B 2l 2v
F = v 2 = u2 + 2 gh
R
From equation (4.11), the rate at which = 0 + (2×10×7.2)
the mechanical work is done to pull the loop
from the magnetic field or power is given by v 2 = 144
 B 2l 2v 
P = Fv =  v v = 12 ms−1
 R 
B 2l 2v 2
P= (4.13) Induced emf when the rod is about to
R
touch the ground, ε = BH lv
When the induced current flows in the
loop, Joule heating takes place. The rate at = 40, 378.7 ×10−9 ×0.5×12
which thermal energy is dissipated in the
= 242.27 ×10−6 V
loop or power dissipated is
= 242.27µV
P = i2R
2
 Blv 
P =  R E X A M P L E 4. 9
 R 
A copper rod of length l rotates about one
B 2l 2v 2
P= (4.14) of its ends with an angular velocity ω in a
R
magnetic field B as shown in the figure.
This equation is exactly same as the The plane of rotation is perpendicular to
equation (4.13). Thus the mechanical the field. Find the emf induced between
work done in moving the loop appears as the two ends of the rod.
thermal energy in the loop.

s
× × × × × ×
Alternating
× × × × × ×
magnetic
s
field
× × × × × × ω
v
× × × ×
x ×
O
× × × × dx
l
× × × × × ×

× × × × × × B Eddy currents
× × × × × ×
Metal plate
Solution
Consider a small element of length dx at Figure 4.11 Eddy currents
a distance x from the centre of the circle
Even for a conductor in the form of
described by the rod. As this element
a sheet or plate, an emf is induced when
moves perpendicular to the field with a
magnetic flux linked with it changes. But
linear velocity v = xω , the emf developed
the difference is that there is no definite
in the element dx is
loop or path for induced current to flow
d ε = Bvdx = B(xω)dx away. As a result, the induced currents flow
in concentric circular paths (Figure 4.11).
This rod is made up of many such elements,
As these electric currents resemble eddies
moving perpendicular to the field. The emf
of water, these are known as Eddy currents.
developed across two ends is
They are also called Foucault currents.
l l
 x2 
ε = ∫ dε = ∫ Bωxdx = Bω   Demonstration
2
0  0 Here is a simple demonstration
1
ε = Bωl 2 for the production of eddy currents.
2
Consider a pendulum that can be made to
oscillate between the poles of a powerful
electromagnet as shown in Figure 4.12(a).
4.2 First the electromagnet is switched off, the
pendulum is slightly displaced and released.
EDDY CURRENTS It begins to oscillate and it executes a large
number of oscillations before stopping. The
air friction is the only damping force.
According to Faraday’s law of When the electromagnet is switched on and
electromagnetic induction, an emf is the disc of the pendulum is made to oscillate,
induced in a conductor when the magnetic eddy currents are produced in it which will
flux passing through it changes. However, oppose the oscillation. A heavy damping force
the conductor need not be in the form of a of eddy currents will bring the pendulum to
wire or coil. rest within a few oscillations (Figure 4.12(b)).

N
S S
(a) (b) (c)

Figure 4.12 Demonstration of eddy currents
However if some slots are cut in the huge eddy currents to flow and hence losses
disc as shown in Figure 4.12(c), the eddy are minimized.
currents are reduced. The pendulum now Laminated Core
will execute several oscillations before
coming to rest. This clearly demonstrates
the production of eddy current in the disc
of the pendulum.
Drawbacks of Eddy currents

When eddy currents flow in the
conductor, a large amount of energy is
Single Lamination
dissipated in the form of heat. The energy
loss due to the flow of eddy current is Figure 4.13 (a) Insulated laminas of the
inevitable but it can be reduced to a greater core of a transformer
extent with suitable measures.
The design of transformer core and
electric motor armature is crucial in order
to minimise the eddy current loss. To reduce
these losses, the core of the transformer is
made up of thin laminas insulated from one
another (Figure 4.13 (a)) while for electric Insulated wire
motor the winding is made up of a group
Figure 4.13 (b) Insulated winding of an
of wires insulated from one another (Figure
electric motor
4.13 (b)). The insulation used does not allow

Application of eddy currents
Activity
Though the production of eddy current
is undesirable in some cases, it is useful in
some other cases. A few of them are
i. Induction stove
N S N S ii. Eddy current brake
iii. Eddy current testing
Glass Metal iv. Electromagnetic damping
Slow damping Rapid damping i. Induction stove
Make a pendulum with a strong Cooking Zone

magnet suspended at the lower end of
the suspension wire as shown in the first
figure. Make it oscillate with a glass plate
Cooking
below it and note the time it takes to Pan
come to rest.
Next just place a metallic plate below
the oscillating magnet as shown in the
second figure and again note the time it
takes to stop.
In the second case, the magnet
stops soon because eddy currents are Coil High frequency
Alternating magnetic field
produced in the plate which opposes the
oscillation of the magnet. Figure 4.14 Induction stove
Example Induction stove is used to cook the

A spherical stone and a spherical food quickly and safely with less energy
metallic ball of same size and mass are consumption. Below the cooking zone, there
dropped from the same height. Which is a tightly wound coil of insulated wire. The
one, a stone or a metal ball, will reach the cooking pan made of suitable material, is
earth’s surface first? Justify your answer. placed over the cooking zone. When the stove
Assume that there is no air friction. is switched on, an alternating current flowing
Answer in the coil produces high frequency alternating
magnetic field which induces very strong eddy
The stone will reach the earth’s
currents in the cooking pan. The eddy currents
surface earlier than the metal ball. The
in the pan produce so much of heat due to
reason is that when the metal ball falls
Joule heating which is used to cook the food.
through the magnetic field of earth, the
Note: The frequency of the domestic
eddy currents are produced in it which
AC supply is increased from 50–60 Hz to
opposes its motion. But in the case of
around 20–40 KHz before giving it to the
stone, no eddy currents are produced
coil in order to produce high frequency
and it falls freely.
alternating magnetic field.

ii. Eddy current brake In some cases, the circular disc, connected
This eddy current braking system is to the wheel of the train through a common
generally used in high speed trains and shaft, is made to rotate in between the poles
roller coasters. Strong electromagnets are of an electromagnet. When there is a relative
fixed just above the rails. To stop the train, motion between the disc and the magnet,
electromagnets are switched on. The eddy currents are induced in the disc which
magnetic field of these magnets induces stop the train. This is Eddy current circular
eddy currents in the rails which oppose or brake (Figure 4.15(b))
resist the movement of the train. This is iii. Eddy current testing
Eddy current linear brake (Figure 4.15(a)). It is one of the simple non–destructive
testing methods to find defects like surface
cracks, air bubbles present in a specimen. A
N coil of insulated wire is given an alternating
electric current so that it produces an
B C alternating magnetic field. When this coil is
brought near the test surface, eddy current
v is induced in the test surface. The presence
of defects causes the change in phase and
amplitude of the eddy current that can be
detected by some other means.In this way,
the defects present in the specimen are
identified (Figure 4.16).
Figure 4.15 (a) Linear Eddy current brake
Coil’s
magnetic field
N
Coil Eddy current’s
D magnetic field
Eddy
currents
S
Conductive
material
Figure 4.16 Eddy current testing
iv. Electro magnetic damping

The armature of the galvanometer coil
Figure 4.15(b) Circular Eddy current brake is wound on a soft iron cylinder. Once the

will study about self-induction and mutual
induction in the next sections.
Eddy currents
Soft iron N
cylinder S
Coil Toroid
T id
Figure 4.17 Electromagnetic damping
Solenoid
armature is deflected, the relative motion
between the soft iron cylinder and the
radial magnetic field induces eddy current Figure 4.18 Examples for inductor
in the cylinder (Figure 4.17). The damping
force due to the flow of eddy current brings Self-induction
the armature to rest immediately and then
An electric current flowing through a
galvanometer shows a steady deflection.
coil will set up a magnetic field around it.
This is called electromagnetic damping.
Therefore, the magnetic flux of the magnetic
field is linked with that coil itself. If this flux
4.3 is changed by changing the current, an emf is
induced in that same coil (Figure 4.19). This
SELF–INDUCTION phenomenon is known as self-induction.
The emf induced is called self-induced emf.
4.3.1 Introduction
→
Inductor is a device used to store energy B
in a magnetic field when an electric current
flows through it. The typical examples
are coils, solenoids and toroids shown in i
Figure 4.18.
Inductance is the property of inductors
to generate emf due to the change in
current flowing through that circuit (self-
induction) or a change in current through
a neighbouring circuit with which it is
magnetically linked (mutual induction). We Figure 4.19 Self-Induction

Let F B be the magnetic flux linked with Unit of inductance
each turn of the coil of N turns, then the total Inductance is a scalar and its unit is
flux linked with the coil N F B (flux linkage) Wb A-1 or V s A . It is also measured in
-1
is proportional to the current i in the coil. henry (H).

1 H = 1 W b A−1 = 1 V s A−1
NFB µ i The dimensional formula of inductance
is M L2 T -2 A-2 .
N F B = Li (4.15)
If i = 1 A and N F B =1 Wb turns, then
NFB L =1 H .
(or) L=
i
Therefore, the inductance of the coil
The constant of proportionality L is is said to be one henry if a current of 1 A
called self-inductance of the coil. It is produces unit flux linkage in the coil.
also referred to as the coefficient of self- If di = 1 A s−1 and ε = −1 V , then
dt
induction. If i =1A , then L = N F B . Self- L =1 H .
inductance or simply inductance of a coil Therefore, the inductance of the coil is
is defined as the flux linkage of the coil one henry if a current changing at the rate
when 1A current flows through it. of 1 A s−1 induces an opposing emf of 1 V
When the current i changes with time, in it.
an emf is induced in it. From Faraday’s
law of electromagnetic induction, this self- Physical significance of inductance
induced emf is given by We have learnt about inertia in XI
standard. In translational motion, mass is
a measure of inertia; in the same way, for
d (N F B ) d (Li)
ε =− =− rotational motion, moment of inertia is a
dt dt
measure of rotational inertia (Refer sections
3.2.1 and 5.4 of XI physics text book).
(using equation 4.15)
Generally, inertia means opposition to
change its state.
di
∴ ε = −L (4.16) The inductance plays the same role in a
dt
circuit as mass and moment of inertia play
−ε in mechanical motion. When a circuit is
(or) L =
di switched on, the increasing current induces
dt
an emf which opposes the growth of current
in a circuit (Figure 4.20(a)). Likewise, when
means that the self-induced emf always
circuit is broken, the decreasing current
opposes the change in current with respect
induces an emf in the reverse direction.
to time. If di = 1 A s−1 , then L = −ε .
dt This emf now opposes the decay of current
Inductance of a coil is also defined as the
(Figure 4.20(b)).
opposing emf induced in the coil when the
Thus, inductance of the coil opposes any
rate of change of current through the coil
is 1 A s−1. change in current and tries to maintain the
original state.

ε N turns
A →
B
i
i
Increasing current
l
(a)
ε Figure 4.21 Self-inductance of a long
solenoid

F B = ∫ B. d A = BA cos θ = BA since θ = 0°
A
i = (µ 0ni)A
Decreasing current
The total magnetic flux linked or
flux linkage of the solenoid with N turns
(b)
(the total number of turns N is given by
Figure 4.20 Induced emf ε opposes the N = n l) is
changing current i
N F B = (nl )(µ 0ni)A
N F B = (µ n2 Al ) i (4.17)
4.3.2 Self-inductance of a
long solenoid The equation (4.15) is
Consider a long solenoid of length l and N F B = Li
cross-sectional area A. Let n be the number
of turns per unit length (or turn density) of Comparing equations (4.15) and (4.17),
the solenoid. When an electric current i is we have
passed through the solenoid, a magnetic field
L = µ n2 Al
is produced by it which is almost uniform
and is directed along the axis of the solenold From the above equation, it is clear that
as shown in Figure 4.21. The magnetic field inductance depends on the geometry of the
at any point inside the solenoid is given by solenoid (turn density n, cross-sectional area
(Refer section 3.9.3) A, length l) and the medium present inside
B = µ ni the solenoid. If the solenoid is filled with a
dielectric medium of relative permeability
As this magnetic field passes through the
µ r , then
solenoid, the windings of the solenoid are
linked by the field lines. The magnetic flux L = µn2 Al or L = µ µ rn2 Al

passing through each turn is

Energy stored in an inductor
Li 2 (µ 0n Al )i
2 2
Whenever a current is established in the uB = =  L = µ 0n2 Al

2 Al 2 Al
circuit, the inductance opposes the growth 2 2
µni
of the current. In order to establish a current = 0
2
in the circuit, work is done against this
opposition by some external agency. This B2
uB =  B = µ 0ni
2µ 0
work done is stored as magnetic potential
energy.
E X A M P L E 4. 1 0
Let us assume that electrical resistance
of the inductor is negligible and inductor A solenoid of 500 turns is wound on an
effect alone is considered. The induced emf iron core of relative permeability 800. The
ε at any instant t is length and radius of the solenoid are 40 cm
di and 3 cm respectively. Calculate the average
ε = −L emf induced in the solenoid if the current
dt
in it changes from 0 to 3 A in 0.4 second.
Let dW be work done in moving a charge
dq in a time dt against the opposition, then Solution
dW = −εdq
N = 500 turns; µ r = 800 ;
l = 40 cm = 0.4 m; r = 3 cm = 0.03 m;
= −εidt  dq = idt di = 3 – 0 = 3 A; dt = 0.4 s
Substituting for ε from equation (4.16), Self inductance,

 N
 di  L = µn2 Al ∵ µ = µ µ r ; A = πr 2 ; n = 
= −−L idt  l
 di 
dW = Lidi µ µ r N 2 πr 2
=
l
Total work done in establishing the 2
4 ×3.14 ×10−7 ×800×5002 ×3.14 ×(3×10−2 )
current i is =
0. 4
i i
i  2
W = ∫ dW = ∫ Lidi = L   L = 1.77 H
2 di
0  o Magnitude of induced emf, ε = L
1 2 dt
W = Li 1.77 ×3
2 =
0. 4
This work done is stored as magnetic ε =13.275V
potential energy.
1 E X A M P L E 4. 1 1
∴ U B = Li 2 (4.18)
2
The self-inductance of an air-core solenoid
The energy density is the energy stored
is 4.8 mH. If its core is replaced by iron
per unit volume of the space and is given by
core, then its self-inductance becomes
UB 1.8 H. Find out the relative permeability of
uB =  Volume of the solenoid = Al
Al iron.

Solution Consider two coils which are placed close
to each other. If an electric current i1 is sent
Lair = 4.8×10−3 H through coil 1, the magnetic field produced
by it is also linked with coil 2 as shown in
Liron =1.8H Figure 4.22(a).
Let F 21 be the magnetic flux linked with
Lair = µ n2 Al = 4.8×10−3 H each turn of the coil 2 of N 2 turns due to
coil 1, then the total flux linked with coil 2
Liron = µn2 Al = µ µ rn2 Al = 1.8H
(N 2F 21 ) is proportional to the current i1 in
the coil 1.
Liron 1. 8
∴ µr = = = 375
Lair 4.8×10−3 N 2 F 21 µ i1
N 2F 21 = M21 i1 (4.19)
4.3.3 Mutual induction N 2F 21

(or) M21 =
When an electric current passing through i1
a coil changes with time, an emf is induced
in the neighbouring coil. This phenomenon The constant of proportionality M21 is the
is known as mutual induction and the emf is mutual inductance of the coil 2 with respect to
called mutually induced emf. coil 1. It is also called as coefficient of mutual
induction. If i1 = 1A , then M21 = N 2F 21 .
N1turns N2turns Therefore, the mutual inductance M21 is
i1 defined as the flux linkage of the coil 2
when 1A current flows through coil 1.
Φ21
ε 2
When the current i1 changes with
time, an emf ε 2 is induced in coil 2. From
Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction,
Coil 1 Coil 2 this mutually induced emf ε 2 is given by
(a)
d (N 2F 21 ) d(M21i1 )
ε2 = − =−
N1turns N2turns dt dt
i2 di1
ε 2 = −M21
dt
ε 1 Φ12 (or) M21 =
−ε 2
di1
dt
Coil 1
Coil 2
shows that the mutually induced emf always
(b)
opposes the change in current i1 with respect
Figure 4.22 Mutual induction to time. If di1 = 1A s−1 , then M21 = −ε 2 .
dt

Mutual inductance M21 is also defined as 4.3.4 Mutual inductance
the opposing emf induced in the coil 2 between two long co-axial
when the rate of change of current through solenoids
the coil 1 is 1As-1.
Similarly, if an electric current i2 through Consider two long co-axial solenoids of
coil 2 changes with time, then emf ε1 is same length l. The length of these solenoids
induced in coil 1. Therefore, is large when compared to their radii so
that the magnetic field produced inside the
solenoids is uniform and the fringing effect
N1F12 −ε1 at the ends may be ignored. Let A1 and A2 be
M12 = and M12 =
i2 di2 the area of cross section of the solenoids with
dt A1 being greater than A2 as shown in Figure
4.23. The turn density of these solenoids are
where M12 is the mutual inductance
n1 and n2 respectively.
of the coil 1 with respect to coil 2. It can
be shown that for a given pair of coils, the Solenoid 1 Solenoid 2
mutual inductance is same. of N1 turns of N2 turns
i.e., M21 = M12 = M

A1 A2
In general, the mutual induction between
two coils depends on size, shape, the number
of turns of the coils, their relative orientation l
and permeability of the medium. Common axis
Unit of mutual-inductance
Figure 4.23 Mutual inductance of two
The unit of mutual inductance is also
long co-axial solenoids
henry (H).
If i1 = 1A and N 2F 21 = 1 Wb turns, then Let i1 be the current flowing through
M21 = 1H . solenoid 1, then the magnetic field produced
Therefore, the mutual inductance inside it is
between two coils is said to be one henry if
B1 = µ  n1 i1
a current of 1A in coil 1 produces unit flux
linkage in coil 2.

As the field lines of B1 are passing
di1 through the area bounded by solenoid 2,
If =1As−1 and ε 2 = −1 V , then
dt the magnetic flux is linked with each turn of
M21 = 1H . solenoid 2 due to solenoid 1 and is given by

Therefore, the mutual inductance F 21 = ∫ B1 .d A = B1 A2 since θ = 0°
between two coils is one henry if a current A2
changing at the rate of 1As-1 in coil 1

induces an opposing emf of 1V in coil 2. = (µ n1i1 ) A2

The flux linkage of solenoid 2 with total M12i2 = (µ n1n2 A2l )i2
turns N2 is
Therefore, we get
N 2F 21 = (n2l )(µ n1i1 ) A2 since N 2 = n2l ∴ M12 = µ n1n2 A2l (4.23)
N 2F 21 = (µ n1n2 A2l )i1 (4.20)
From equation (4.22) and (4.23), we can
From equation (4.19), write
N 2F 21 = M21i1 (4.21) M12 = M21 = M (4.24)
Comparing the equations (4.20) and In general, the mutual inductance

(4.21), between two long co-axial solenoids is given
by
M21 = µ n1n2 A2l (4.22)
M = µ n1n2 A2l (4.25)
This gives the expression for mutual
inductance M21 of the solenoid 2 with If a dielectric medium of relative
respect to solenoid 1. Similarly, we can find permeability µ r is present inside the
mutual inductance M12 of solenoid 1 with solenoids, then
respect to solenoid 2 as given below. M = µn1n2 A2l
The magnetic field produced by the (or) M = µ µ rn1n2 A2l
solenoid 2 when carrying a current i2 is
B2 = µ n2i2 E X A M P L E 4. 1 2
The current flowing in the first coil changes
This magnetic field B2 is uniform inside
from 2 A to 10 A in 0.4 sec. Find the mutual
the solenoid 2 but outside the solenoid 2,
inductance between two coils if an emf of
it is almost zero. Therefore for solenoid 1,
60 mV is induced in the second coil. Also
the area A2 is the effective area over which
determine the induced emf in the second
the magnetic field B2 is present; not area
coil if the current in the first coil is changed
A1. Then the magnetic flux F12 linked with
from 4 A to 16 A in 0.03 sec. Consider only
each turn of solenoid 1 due to solenoid 2 is
the magnitude of induced emf.

F12 = ∫ B 2 ⋅ d A = B2 A2 = (µ n2i2 ) A2 Solution
A2
Case (i):
The flux linkage of solenoid 1 with total
di1 = 10 – 2 = 8 A; dt = 0.4 s;
turns N1 is
ε 2 = 60×10−3V
N1F12 = (n1l )(µ on2i2 ) A2 since N1 = n1l
Case (ii):
N1F12 = (µ on1n2 A2l )i2 di1 = 16 – 4 = 12 A; dt = 0.03 s
since N1F12 = M12i2 (i) Mutual inductance of the second coil

with respect to the first coil

Solution
ε
M21 = 2 NA = 200 turns; NB = 1000 turns;
di1
dt rA = 20 × 10-2 m; rB = 2 × 10-2 m;
60×10−3 ×0.4 dt = 0.04 s; diA = 6−2 = 4A
=
8
M21 = 3×10−3 H Let iA be the current flowing in coil A, then

the magnetic field BA at the centre of the
(ii) Induced emf in the second coil due to circular coil A is
the rate of change of current in the first µ  N AiA 4 π ×10−7 N AiA
BA = =
coil is 2rA 2rA
di1
ε 2 = M21 10−7 ×2×3.14 ×200
dt = ×i A
20×10−2
3×10−3 ×12
= = 6.28×10−4 iA Wbm−2
0.03
ε 2 = 1. 2 V The magnetic flux linkage of coil B is
N B F B = N B BA AB
2
= 1000×6.28×10−4 ×iA ×3.14 ×(2×10−2 )
E X A M P L E 4. 13
= 7.89×10−4 iA Wb turns
Consider two coplanar, co-axial circular
coils A and B as shown in figure. The radius The mutual inductance of the coil B with
of coil A is 20 cm while that of coil B is 2 respect to coil A is
cm. The number of turns is 200 and 1000 N BF B
M BA = = 7.89×10−4 H
for coils A and B respectively. Calculate the iA
mutual inductance of coil B with respect Induced emf in coil B is
to coil A. If the current in coil A changes
diA
from 2 A to 6 A in 0.04 sec, determine the ε B = −M BA
dt
induced emf in coil B and the rate of change
of flux through the coil B at that instant. Considering only the magnitude,
7.89×10−4 ×(6 − 2)
εB =
0.04
A(200 turns)
B(1000 turns) 7.89×10−4 ×(4)
εB =
4 ×10−2
20 cm
ε B = 7.89×10−2 V
2 cm ε B = 78.9 mV
Common axis
The rate of change of magnetic flux of coil

B is
d (N B F B )
= ε B = 78.9 mWb s−1
dt

4.4 4.4.2 Induction of emf by
METHODS OF PRODUCING changing the magnetic field
INDUCED EMF From Faraday’s experiments on
electromagnetic induction, it was discovered
that an emf is induced in a circuit on
4.4.1 Introduction
changing the magnetic flux of the field
Electromotive force is the characteristic through it. The change in flux is brought
of any energy source capable of driving about by (i) relative motion between the
electric charge around a circuit. We have circuit and the magnet (First experiment)
already learnt that it is not actually a force. (ii) variation in current flowing through the
It is the work done in moving unit electric nearby coil (Second experiment).
charge around the circuit. It is measured in
J C-1 or volt.
Some examples of energy source which 4.4.3 Induction of emf by
provide emf are electrochemical cells, changing the area of the coil
thermoelectric devices, solar cells and
electrical generators. Of these, electrical Consider a conducting rod of length l
generators are most powerful machines. moving with a velocity v towards left on a
They are used for large scale power rectangular metallic framework as shown
generation. in Figure 4.24. The whole arrangement is

According to Faraday’s law of placed in a uniform magnetic field B whose
electromagnetic induction, an emf is magnetic lines are perpendicularly directed
induced in a circuit when magnetic flux into the plane of the paper.
linked with it changes. This emf is called As the rod moves from AB to DC in a
induced emf. The magnitude of the induced time dt, the area enclosed by the loop and
emf is given by hence the magnetic flux through the loop
decreases.
dF B
ε= or
dt
× × i ×D× × A
d
ε= (BA cos θ) (4.26)
dt × × × × ×
v l
From the above equation, it is clear that × × × × ×
induced emf can be produced by changing
C vdt B
magnetic flux in any of the following ways. × × × × ×
(i) By changing the magnetic field B
× → (r, inwards)
(ii) By changing the area A of the coil
and
(iii) By changing the relative orientation
Figure 4.24 Induction of emf by
θ of the coil with magnetic field changing the area enclosed by the loop

The change in magnetic flux in time dt is
Induced emf, ε= Rate of change of flux
d F B = B × change in area d F B d (BA)
= =
dt dt
= B × Area ABCD
0. 4 × 0. 6
ε=
= Blvdt since Area ABCD = l (vdt ) 1
ε = 0.24 V
dFB ε 0.24
(or) = Blv Induced current, i = = = 0.06 A
dt R 4
As a result of change in flux, an emf is
generated in the loop. The magnitude of the
induced emf is Emf can be induced by
Note changing relative orientation
dF B
between the coil and the
ε= magnetic field. This can be achieved
dt
either by rotating a coil in a magnetic
ε = Blv (4.27) field or by rotating a magnetic field
within a stationary coil. Here rotating
This emf is called motional emf. The coil type is considered.
direction of induced current is found to be
clockwise from Fleming’s right hand rule.
E X A M P L E 4. 14 4.4.4 Induction of emf by

changing relative orientation of
A circular metal of area 0.03 m2 rotates
the coil with the magnetic field
in a uniform magnetic field of 0.4 T. The
axis of rotation passes through the centre Consider a rectangular coil of N turns

and perpendicular to its plane and is also kept in a uniform magnetic field B as shown
parallel to the field. If the disc completes in Figure 4.25(a). The coil rotates in anti-
20 revolutions in one second and the clockwise direction with an angular velocity
resistance of the disc is 4 Ω, calculate the ω about an axis, perpendicular to the field.
induced emf between the axis and the rim →
B
and induced current flowing in the disc.
Solution
A = 0.03 m2; B = 0.4 T; f = 20 rps;

R=4Ω m
Area covered in 1 sec = Area of the disc Axis of rotation

× frequency
= 0.03 × 20 Figure 4.25(a) Top view of the coil with its

= 0.6 m2 plane perpendicular to the magnetic field

→
B
linked with the coil has its maximum value
Фm = BA (where A is the area of the coil).
In a time t seconds, the coil is rotated
m cos t through an angle θ (= ωt) in anti–clockwise
t direction. In this position, the flux linked
m is Фm cos ωt, a component of Фm normal to
the plane of the coil (Figure 4.25(b)). The
Axis
of rotation component parallel to the plane (Фm sin ωt)
has no role in electromagnetic induction.
m sin t Therefore, the flux linkage at this deflected
position is
Figure 4.25(b) The coil has rotated
through an angle θ = ωt N F B = N F m cos ω t
At time = 0, the plane of the coil is According to Faraday’s law, the emf
perpendicular to the field and the flux induced at that instant is
t= t= t= t= t=
→
B
m sin0 m sin m sin m sin m sin
=0 = m =0 = –m =0

m
t
0

–m
Figure 4.26 Variation of induced emf as a function of ωt

to a magnetic field of 0.4 Wb m-2. If the
d d coil completes 500 revolutions in a minute,
ε =− (N F B ) = − (N F m cos ω t)
dt dt calculate the instantaneous emf when the
= −N F m (−sinωt ) ω plane of the coil is (i) perpendicular to
the field (ii) parallel to the field and (iii)
= N F mω sin ωt
inclined at 60o with the field.
When the coil is rotated through 90o
from initial position, sin ωt = 1. Then the Solution
maximum value of induced emf is
A = 70 ´ 10-4m2; N = 600 turns
ε m = N F mω B = 0.4 Wbm-2; f = 500 rpm
ε m = NBAω since F m = BA
The instantaneous emf is
Therefore, the value of induced emf at ε = ε m sin ωt
that instant is then given by
since ε m = N F mω = N ( BA)(2πf )
ε = ε m sin ωt (4.28)
ε = NBA×2πf ×sin ωt
It is seen that the induced emf varies
as sine function of the time angle ωt. The
graph between induced emf and time (i) When ωt = 0 ,
angle for one rotation of coil will be a sine
ε = ε m sin0 = 0
curve (Figure 4.26) and the emf varying
in this manner is called sinusoidal emf or
alternating emf.
(ii) When ωt = 90 ,
If this alternating voltage is given to a
closed circuit, a sinusoidally varying current
flows in it. This current is called alternating ε = ε m sin90 = NBA×2πf ×1
current and is given by
22  500 
= 600 × 0.4 × 70 × 10 −4 × 2 × × 
i = I m sinωt (4.29) 7  60 
where Im is the maximum value of = 88V

induced current.
(iii) When ωt = 90° – 60° = 30°,

E X A M P L E 4. 15
1
A rectangular coil of area 70 cm2 having 600 ε = ε m sin30 = 88× = 44 V
2
turns rotates about an axis perpendicular

4.5 the conductor which in turn, induces an
emf. The magnitude of the induced emf is
AC GENERATOR given by Faraday’s law of electromagnetic
induction and its direction by Fleming’s
right hand rule.
4.5.1 Introduction
Alternating emf is generated
AC generator or alternator is an energy Note by rotating a coil in a magnetic
conversion device. It converts mechanical field or by rotating a magnetic
energy used to rotate the coil or field magnet field within a stationary coil.
into electrical energy. Alternator produces The first method is used for small AC
a large scale electrical power for use in generators while the second method is
homes and industries. AC generator and its employed for large AC generators. The
components are shown in Figure 4.27. rotating-field method is the one which
is mostly used in power stations.
4.5.3 Construction
Alternator consists of two major parts,
Stator Rotor
namely stator and rotor. As their names
suggest, stator is stationary while rotor
rotates inside the stator. In any standard
construction of commercial alternators, the
armature winding is mounted on stator and
Alternator the field magnet on rotor.
The construction details of stator, rotor
and various other components involved in
them are given below.
i) Stator
Stator core P Armature slot

Brush box Slip rings
Figure 4.27 AC generator and its

components
4.5.2 Principle Stator frame Ventilating

Alternators work on the principle of hole
electromagnetic induction. The relative
motion between a conductor and a magnetic
Figure 4.28 Stator and its components
field changes the magnetic flux linked with

The stationary part which has armature Two types of windings are commonly
windings mounted in it is called stator. It used. They are i) single-layer winding and
has three components, namely stator frame, ii) double-layer winding. In single-layer
stator core and armature winding. winding, a slot is occupied by a coil as a
Stator frame single layer. But in double-layer winding,
the coils are split into two layers such as top
This is the outer frame used for holding
and bottom layers (Figure 4.29).
stator core and armature windings in
proper position. Stator frame provides best ii) Rotor
ventilation with the help of holes provided
Rotor contains magnetic field windings.
in the frame itself (Figure 4.28).
The magnetic poles are magnetized by
Stator core DC source. The ends of field windings are
Stator core or armature core is made up connected to a pair of slip rings, attached to a
of iron or steel alloy. It is a hollow cylinder common shaft about which rotor rotates. Slip
and is laminated to minimize eddy current rings rotate along with rotor. To maintain
loss. The slots are cut on inner surface of the connection between the DC source and
core to accommodate armature windings. field windings, two brushes are used which
Armature winding continuously slide over the slip rings.
There are 2 types of rotors used in
Armature winding is the coil, wound on
alternators i) salient pole
slots provided in the armature core. One
rotor and ii) cylindrical
or more than one coil may be employed,
pole rotor.
depending on the type of alternator.
(a) Single layer
Salient pole rotor
N B
Salient pole Magnetic axis of
the field
N
Field winding
Stator core
Slot
Coil D.C. Source
N
Slip rings Brushes
Shaft
S
(b) Double layer
Figure 4.29 Armature windings Figure 4.30 Salient 2-pole rotor

Construction of AC generator (Not for examination)
Alternator consists of two major parts,
namely stator and rotor. (This box
is given for better understanding of
constructional details)
i) Stator
Stator has three components, namely
stator frame, stator core and armature Rectangular loop
winding.
Figure(b): Stator core with rectangular loop
Stator core
Outlet Stator winding
terminal
Slot
Stator core
Figure(a): Stator core with empty slots Figure(c): Stator core with armature windings
Salient pole
ii) Rotor Magnetic Slip ring

lines
Rotor contains magnetic field windings, N
slip rings and brushes mounted on the

S
same shaft.
S
Salient pole Magnetic yoke Excitation

N
N
coil – S
+
DC supply Brushes
N input
Figure(e): Salient 6-pole rotor with field

windings, slip rings and brushes
S
S
N
N
1
6
6
S
1
1
±

6
Figure(d): Salient 6-pole rotor Figure(f): Stator core and rotor

The word salient means projecting. 4.5.4 Advantages of
This rotor has a number of projecting poles stationary armature-rotating
having their bases riveted to the rotor. field alternator
It is mainly used in low-speed alternators. Alternators are generally high current
The salient 2-pole rotor is shown in the and high voltage machines. The stationary
Figure 4.30. armature-rotating field construction has
Cylindrical pole rotor many advantages. A few of them include:
1) The current is drawn directly from fixed
B
Field winding terminals on the stator without the use
of brush contacts.
N 2) The insulation of stationary armature
winding is easier.
3) The number of sliding contacts (slip rings)
is reduced. Moreover, the sliding contacts
are used for low-voltage DC Source.
4) Armature windings can be constructed
more rigidly to prevent deformation due
S to any mechanical stress.
Slots
4.5.5 Single phase AC generator
Figure 4.31 Cross-sectional view of
cylindrical 2-pole rotor In a single phase AC generator, the
armature conductors are connected in series
so as to form a single circuit which generates
This rotor consists of a smooth solid
a single-phase alternating emf and hence it is
cylinder. The slots are cut on the outer
called single-phase alternator.
surface of the cylinder along its length. It
is suitable for very high speed alternators B
(Figure 4.31).
The frequency of alternating emf induced
is directly proportional to the rotor speed.
Armature
Conductors P
In order to maintain the frequency constant, N
the rotor must run at a constant speed.
These are standard construction D.C.
details of alternators. Based on the type of source
alternator being constructed, the details

like number of poles, pole type, number of
coils and type of windings would change S
from one another. Q
We will discuss the construction and
working of two examples, namely single
Figure 4.32 Stator core with a
phase and three phase AC generators in
rectangular loop and 2-pole rotor
the following sections.

The simplified version of a AC generator graph between induced emf and time angle
is discussed here. Consider a stator core (Figure 4.34).
consisting of 2 slots in which 2 armature When field magnet rotates through
conductors PQ and RS are mounted to form 90°, magnetic field becomes parallel to
single-turn rectangular loop PQRS as shown PQRS. The induced emfs across PQ and RS
in Figure 4.33. Rotor has 2 salient poles with would become maximum. Since they are
field windings which can be magnetized by connected in series, emfs are added up and
means of DC source. the direction of total induced emf is given
Working by Fleming’s right hand rule.
The loop PQRS is stationary and is Care has to be taken while applying this
perpendicular to the plane of the paper. rule; the thumb indicates the direction of
When field windings are excited, magnetic the motion of the conductor with respect
field is produced around it. The direction of to field. For clockwise rotating poles, the
magnetic field passing through the armature conductor appears to be rotating anti-
core is shown in Figure 4.33. Let the field clockwise. Hence, thumb should point to
magnet be rotated in clockwise direction the left. The direction of the induced emf is
by the prime mover. The axis of rotation is at right angles to the plane of the paper. For
perpendicular to the plane of the paper. PQ, it is downwards and for RS upwards.
Therefore, the current flows along PQRS.
Q
The point A in the graph represents this
maximum emf.
P
ω For the rotation of 180° from the initial
position, the field is again perpendicular to
Initial PQRS and the induced emf becomes zero.
n position
B N S This is represented by point B.
The field magnet becomes again parallel
to PQRS for 270° rotation of field magnet.
The induced emf is maximum but the
R
S direction is reversed. Thus the current flows
along SRQP. This is represented by point C.
Figure 4.33 The loop PQRS and field On completion of 360°, the induced
magnet in its initial position emf becomes zero and is represented by the
point D. From the graph, it is clear that emf
Assume that initial position of the field induced in PQRS is alternating in nature.
magnet is horizontal. At that instant, the Therefore, when field magnet completes
direction of magnetic field is perpendicular one rotation, induced emf in PQRS finishes
to the plane of the loop PQRS. The induced one cycle. For this construction, the
emf is zero (Refer case (iii) of section 4.4). frequency of the induced emf depends on
This is represented by origin O in the the speed at which the field magnet rotates.

t= t= t= t= t=
Q B Q Q
Q Q
P P P
P P
B
B B
R R R
R R
S S B S
S S

A
t
B D
0
Figure 4.34 Variation of induced emf with respect to time angle
4.5.6 Three-phase AC
Phase difference
Note generator
If two alternating quantities of
same frequency do not pass Some AC generators may have more
through a particular point, say zero than one coil in the armature core and
point, in the same direction at the same each coil produces an alternating emf. In
instant, they are said to have a phase these generators, more than one emf is
difference. The angle between zero produced. Thus they are called poly-phase
points is the angle of phase difference.
generators.
If there are two alternating emfs
i produced in a generator, it is called two-
i phase generator. In some AC generators,
t there are three separate coils, which would
0 give three separate emfs. Hence they are
A
called three-phase AC generators.
In the simplified construction of three-
phase AC generator, the armature core has
6 slots, cut on its inner rim. Each slot is
For the graph shown above, the phase 60° away from one another. Six armature
difference between ε and i is given by conductors are mounted in these slots. The
OA = ϕ. conductors 1 and 4 are joined in series to
form coil 1. The conductors 3 and 6 form

coil 2 while the conductors 5 and 2 form clockwise direction, alternating emf ε1 in
coil 3. So, these coils are retangular in coil 1 begins a cycle from origin O. This is
shape and are 120° apart from one another shown in Figure 4.36.
(Figure 4.35). The corresponding cycle for alternating
emf ε 2 in coil 2 starts at point A after field
magnet has rotated through 120°. Therefore,
Coil 1
1 P the phase difference between ε1 and ε 2
2 is 120°. Similarly, emf ε 3 in coil 3 would
120
begin its cycle at point B after 240° rotation
6 Initial
position of field magnet from initial position. Thus
B N S these emfs produced in the three phase
3
120
AC generator have 120° phase difference
120
5 between one another.
Coil 3 4
Q Coil 2
4.5.7 Advantages of three-

Figure 4.35 Construction of three- phase alternator
phase AC generator
Three-phase system has many advantages
over single-phase system. Let us see a few of
The initial position of the field them.
magnet is horizontal and field direction is 1) For a given dimension of the generator,
perpendicular to the plane of the coil 1. As three-phase machine produces higher
it is seen in single phase AC generator, when power output than a single-phase machine.
field magnet is rotated from that position in 2) For the same capacity, three-phase
alternator is smaller in size when

1 For coil 1, field magnet compared to single phase alternator.
is in initial position at t=0 3) Three-phase transmission system is
0 t
cheaper. A relatively thinner wire is
90° 180° 270° 360°
sufficient for transmission of three-
270
phase power.
2 For coil 2, field
magnet has to rotate
120°
through 120 4.6
0 t
A
TRANSFORMER
3
B
0 t
240° Transformer is a stationary device used to
For coil 3, 240rotation
of field magnet is required transform electrical power from one circuit
The dotted lines represent emfs induced in previous cycle to another without changing its frequency.
The applied alternating voltage is either
Figure 4.36 Variation of emfs increased or decreased with corresponding
ε1 , ε 2 and ε 3 with time angle. decrease or increase of current in the circuit.

If the transformer converts an alternating Construction
current with low voltage into an alternating In the simple construction of
current with high voltage, it is called step-up transformers, there are two coils of high
transformer. On the contrary, if the transformer mutual inductance wound over the same
converts alternating current with high voltage transformer core. The core is generally
into an alternating current with low voltage, laminated and is made up of a good
then it is called step-down transformer. magnetic material like silicon steel. Coils
are electrically insulated but magnetically
linked via transformer core (Figure 4.37).
4.6.1 Construction and The coil across which alternating voltage
working of transformer is applied is called primary coil P and the
Principle coil from which output power is drawn out
is called secondary coil S. The assembled
The principle of transformer is the
core and coils are kept in a container which
mutual induction between two coils. That
is filled with suitable medium for better
is, when an electric current passing through
insulation and cooling purpose.
a coil changes with time, an emf is induced
in the neighbouring coil. Working
If the primary coil is connected to a
source of alternating voltage, an alternating
Primary winding of Secondary winding of
magnetic flux is set up in the laminated
Np turns Ns turns
core. If there is no magnetic flux leakage,
Primary Secondary then whole of magnetic flux linked with
current, Ip current, Is
primary coil is also linked with secondary
Primary Secondary coil. This means that rate at which magnetic
voltage, VP voltage,V s
flux changes through each turn is same for
both primary and secondary coils.
Transformer
core As a result of flux change, emf is induced
in both primary and secondary coils. The
emf induced in the primary coil εp is almost
Figure 4.37(a) Construction of transformer
equal and opposite to the applied voltage υp
and is given by
dF B
υ p = ε p = −N p (4.30)
dt
The frequency of alternating magnetic
flux in the core is same as the frequency of
the applied voltage. Therefore, induced emf
in secondary will also have same frequency
as that of applied voltage. The emf induced
in the secondary coil εs is given by
dF B
Figure 4.37(b) Roadside transformer ε s = −N s
dt

where N p and N s are the number of turns in 4.6.2 Energy losses in a
the primary and secondary coil respectively. transformer
If the secondary circuit is open, then εs = υs
Transformers do not have any moving
where υs is the voltage across secondary coil.
parts so that its efficiency is much higher
dF B
υs = ε s = −N s (4.31) than that of rotating machines like generators
dt
and motors. But there are many factors
From equations (4.30) and (4.31),
which lead to energy loss in a transformer.
υs N
= s = K (4.32) i) Core loss or Iron loss
υp N p
This loss takes place in transformer core.
This constant K is known as voltage
Hysteresis loss (Refer section 3.6) and
transformation ratio. For an ideal transformer,
eddy current loss are known as core loss
Input power υ pi p = Output power υsis
or Iron loss. When transformer core is
where i p and is are the currents in the
magnetized and demagnetized repeatedly
primary and secondary coil respectively.
by the alternating voltage applied across
Therefore,
primary coil, hysteresis takes place due to
υs N ip
= s = (4.33) which some energy is lost in the form of
υ p N p is heat. Hysteresis loss is minimized by using
Equation 4.33 is written in terms of steel of high silicon content in making
transformer core.
amplitude of corresponding quantities,
Vs N Ip Alternating magnetic flux in the core
= s = =K induces eddy currents in it. Therefore
Vp N p Is
there is energy loss due to the flow of
i) If N s > N p (or K > 1), ∴ Vs > Vp and I s < I p .
eddy current, called eddy current loss
This is the case of step-up transformer
which is minimized by using very thin
in which voltage is increased and the
laminations of transformer core.
corresponding current is decreased.
ii) If N s < N p (or K < 1), ∴ Vs < Vp and I s > I p . ii) Copper loss
This is step-down transformer where Transformer windings have electrical
voltage is decreased and the current is resistance. When an electric current
increased. flows through them, some amount of
Efficiency of a transformer: energy is dissipated due to Joule heating.
The efficiency η of a transformer is This energy loss is called copper loss
defined as the ratio of the useful output which is minimized by using wires of
power to the input power. Thus larger diameter.
Output power iii) Flux leakage
η= ×100% (4.34)
Input power Flux leakage happens when the magnetic
Transformers are highly efficient devices lines of primary coil are not completely
having their efficiency in the range of 96 – linked with secondary coil. Energy loss
99%. Various energy losses in a transformer due to this flux leakage is minimized by
will not allow them to be 100% efficient. winding coils one over the other.

important property of alternating voltage
4.6.3 Advantages of AC
that it can be stepped up and stepped down
in long distance power
by using transformers could be exploited
transmission
in reducing current and thereby reducing
Electric power is produced in a large power losses to a greater extent.
scale at electric power stations with the help At the transmitting point, the voltage is
of AC generators. These power stations are increased and the corresponding current
classified based on the type of fuel used as is decreased by using step-up transformer
thermal, hydro electric and nuclear power (Figure 4.38). Then it is transmitted through
stations. Most of these stations are located transmission lines. This reduced current at
at remote places. Hence the electric power high voltage reaches the destination without
generated is transmitted over long distances any appreciable loss. At the receiving point,
through transmission lines to reach towns the voltage is decreased and the current is
or cities where it is actually consumed. This increased to appropriate values by using
process is called power transmission. step-down transformer and then it is given
But there is a difficulty during power to consumers. Thus power transmission is
transmission. A sizable fraction of electric done efficiently and economically.
power is lost due to Joule heating (i 2 R ) in
the transmission lines which are hundreds Illustration:
of kilometer long. This power loss can be An electric power of 2 MW is transmitted
tackled either by reducing current i or by to a place through transmission lines
reducing resistance R of the transmission of total resistance, say R = 40 Ω, at two
lines. The resistance R can be reduced different voltages. One is lower voltage
with thick wires of copper or aluminium. (10 kV) and the other is higher (100 kV).
But this increases the cost of production Let us now calculate and compare power
of transmission lines and other related losses in these two cases.
expenses. So this way of reducing power loss
Case (i):
is not economically viable.
P = 2 MW; R = 40 Ω; V = 10 kV
Step-up Step-down
transformer transformer
Power, P = VI
P 2×106
sub-station
∴Current, I = = = 200 A
Station
Power
V 10×103
City
P 2×106
I= = = 200 A
V 10×103
Transmission line Power loss = Heat produced
Figure 4.38 Long distance power = I 2 R = ( 200) × 40 = 1.6 × 106 W
2
transmissions
1.6 × 106
% of power loss = × 100%
2 × 106
Since power produced is alternating
in nature, there is a way out. The most = 0.8 × 100% = 80%

Power system at a glance (Not for Examination)
The generating stations present in a region are interconnected to form a common electrical
network and are operated in parallel. This is to ensure uninterrupted power supply to a large
number of consumers in the case of failure of any power station or a sudden increase of load
beyond the capacity of the generating station.
The various elements such as generating stations, transmission lines, the substations and
distributors etc are all tied together for continuous generation and consumption of electric
energy.This is called power system. A part of power system consisting of the sub-stations and
transmission lines is known as a grid.
In a power system, the transfer of electric power produced to the consumer is carried out
in two stages which are further sub-divided into two as given below.
1) Transmission stage
a) Primary transmission stage
b) Secondary transmission stage Generator
G
2) Distribution stage
11kV Power station
a) Primary distribution stage
b) Secondary transmission stage Primary
transmissin
and then it is supplied to individual 132 kV
consumers. These two stages of power
transmission is presented in a single- Receiving station
line diagram shown in figure. The

central system usually generates power Secondary 33 kV
transmissin
at 11 kV which is stepped up to 132 kV
and is transmitted through transmission
Sub -station
lines. This is known as primary or high-
voltage transmission. Primary 3.3 kV
This high-voltage power reaches distribution
receiving station at the outskirts of the Distribution

transformer
city where it is stepped down to 33 kV
and is transmitted as secondary or low-
voltage transmission to sub-stations Secondary 440 V/220 V
distribution
situated within the city limits. Distribution
In the primary distribution system, network
the voltage is reduced from 33 kV to

3.3kV at sub-stations and is given to Consumer’s Connection
distribution sub-stations. The voltage is
finally brought down to 440V or 230V at
distribution sub-station from where secondary distribution is done to factories (440V) and
homes (230V) via distribution networks.

Case (ii): E X A M P L E 4. 1 7
P = 2 MW; R = 40 Ω; V = 100 kV An inverter is common electrical device
P 2 × 106 which we use in our homes. When there is
∴ Current, I = = = 20 A no power in our house, inverter gives AC
V 100 × 103
power to run a few electronic appliances
P 2 × 106
I= = = 20 A like fan or light. An inverter has inbuilt
V 100 × 103
step-up transformer which converts 12 V
Power loss = I2R AC to 240 V AC. The primary coil has 100
= ( 20) × 40 = 0.016 × 106 W
2 turns and the inverter delivers 50 mA to
the external circuit. Find the number of
0.016 × 106
% of power loss = × 100% turns in the secondary and the primary
2 × 106
current.
= 0.008 × 100% = 0.8%
Solution
Thus it is clear that when an electric
power is transmitted at higher voltage, the Vp = 12 V; Vs = 240 V
power loss is reduced to a large extent. Is = 50mA; Np = 100 turns
VS N I
E X A M P L E 4. 16 = S = P =K
VP N P IS
An ideal transformer has 460 and 40,000 240
Transformation ratio, K = = 20
turns in the primary and secondary coils 12
The number of turns in the secondary
respectively. Find the voltage developed per
turn of the secondary if the transformer N S = N P × K = 100×20 = 2000
is connected to a 230 V AC mains. The
secondary is given to a load of resistance 104 Ω. Primary current,
Calculate the power delivered to the load. IP = K × Is = 20 × 50 mA = 1 A
Solution
4.7
NP = 460 turns; NS = 40,000 turns
VP = 230 V; RS = 104 Ω ALTERNATING CURRENT
(i) Secondary voltage,
VP N S 230× 40, 000
VS = = 4.7.1 Introduction
NP 460
= 20, 000V In section 4.5, we have seen that when
VS
the orientation of the coil with the magnetic
20, 000
Secondary voltage per turn, = field is changed, an alternating emf is
N S 40, 000
induced and hence an alternating current
= 0.5 V
flows in the closed circuit. An alternating
(ii) Power delivered voltage is the voltage which changes
VS2 20, 000×20, 000 polarity at regular intervals of time and
= VS I S = = = 40 kW
RS 104 the direction of the resulting alternating
current also changes accordingly.

In the Figure 4.39(a), an alternating
voltage source is connected to a resistor R i = I m sinωt (4.36)
in which the upper terminal of the source
is positive and lower terminal negative at where I m is the maximum value (amplitude)
an instant. Therefore, the current flows of the alternating current. The direction
in clockwise direction. After a short time, of sinusoidal voltage or current is reversed
the polarities of the source are reversed so after every half-cycle and its magnitude
that current now flows in anti-clockwise is also changing continuously as shown in
direction (Figure 4.39(b)). This current Figure 4.40.
which flows in alternate directions in the v i
circuit is called alternating current. Vm Im
i i 0
2 2
0
t t
–Vm –Im
(a) (b)
+ - Figure 4.40 (a) Sinusoidal alternating

R R voltage (b) Sinusoidal alternating current
- +
Interestingly, sine waves are

Note very common in nature. The
(a) (b)
periodic motions like waves
in water, swinging of pendulum are
Figure 4.39 Alternating voltage and the associated with sine waves. Thus sine
corresponding alternating current wave seems to be nature’s standard. Also
refer unit 11 of XI physics text book.
Sinusoidal alternating voltage
If the waveform of alternating voltage is
a sine wave, then it is known as sinusoidal
4.7.1 Mean or Average
alternating voltage which is given by the
value of AC
relation.
The current and voltage in a DC system
υ = Vm sin ωt (4.35) remain constant over a period of time
so that there is no problem in specifying
where υ is the instantaneous value of their magnitudes. However, an alternating
alternating voltage; Vm is the maximum current or voltage varies from time to time.
value (amplitude) and ω is the angular Then a question arises how to express the
frequency of the alternating voltage. When magnitude of an alternating current or
sinusoidal alternating voltage is applied to voltage. Though there are many ways of
a closed circuit, the resulting alternating expressing it, we limit our discussion with
current is also sinusoidal in nature and its two ways, namely mean value and RMS
relation is (Root Mean Square) value of AC.

Mean or Average value of AC Consider an elementary strip of thickness
We have learnt that the magnitude of dθ in the positive half-cycle of the current
an alternating current in a circuit changes wave (Figure 4.41). Let i be the mid-ordinate
from one instant to other instant and its of that strip.
direction also reverses for every half cycle. Area of the elementary strip = i dθ
During positive half cycle, current is taken
Area of positive half-cycle
as positive and during negative cycle it is
negative. Therefore mean or average value π π
of symmetrical alternating current over one = ∫ idθ =∫ I m sin θdθ

complete cycle is zero. 0 0
π
Therefore the average or mean value is = I m [− cos θ ]0 = −I m [ cos π − cos 0 ] = 2I m
measured over one half of a cycle. These
Substituting this in equation (4.37),
electrical terms, average current and average
we get (The base length of half-cycle is π)
voltage can be used in both AC and DC
circuit analysis and calculations. 2Im
Average value of AC, I av =
π
The average value of alternating
current is defined as the average of all I av = 0.637 I m (4.38)
values of current over a positive half-cycle
or negative half-cycle. Hence the average value of AC is
The instantaneous value of sinusoidal 0.637 times the maximum value Im of the
alternating current is given by the equation alternating current. For negative half-cycle,
i = I m sin ω t or i = I m sin θ (where θ = ωt) I av = −0.637 I m .
whose graphical representation is given in
Figure 4.41. For example, if we consider n
The sum of all currents over a half-cycle Note currents in a half-cycle of AC,
is given by area of positive half-cycle (or namely i1, i2, ... in, then average
negative half-cycle). Therefore, value is given by
Area of positive half-cycle
Sum of all currents over half-cycle
(or negative half-cycle) I av =
I av = (4.37) Number of currents
Base length of half-cycle
i + i + .... + in
I av = 1 2
i n
i 4.7.2 RMS value of AC

The term RMS refers to time-varying
2
0
sinusoidal currents and voltages and not
d used in DC systems.
The root mean square value of an
alternating current is defined as the
square root of the mean of the squares of
Figure 4.41 Sine wave of an alternating current
all currents over one cycle. It is denoted by

I RMS . For alternating voltages, the RMS value 1 − cos 2θ
since sin2 θ =
is given by VRMS . 2
The alternating current I m2 
2π 2π 

2  ∫0 ∫
i = I m sin ω t or i = I m sin θ , is represented = d θ − cos 2θ d θ 
0 
graphically in Figure 4.42. The corresponding
2π
squared current wave is also shown by the I m2  sin 2θ  I 2  sin 2×2π   sin 0 
= θ −  = m 2π −  −
 0 − 
dotted lines. 2  2  0 2  2 2 
The sum of the squares of all currents 2π
I m2  sin 2θ  I m2  sin 2×2π   sin 0 
=
over one cycle is given by the area of  one  θ −  = 2π −  −  0 − 
2  2  0 2  2   2 
cycle of squared wave. Therefore,
I m2
= ×2π = I m2 π [ sin 0 = sin 4 π = 0]
Area of one cycle 2
of squared wave
I RMS = (4.39) Substituting this in equation (4.39), we get
Base length of one cycle
I m2 π I
I RMS = = m [Base length of one
An elementary area of thickness dθ 2π 2
is considered in the first half-cycle of the cycle is 2π ]
squared current wave as shown in Figure
4.42. Let i 2 be the mid-ordinate of the I rms = 0.707 I m (4.41)
element.
Area of the element = i 2dθ Thus we find that for a symmetrical
2π
sinusoidal current rms value of current is
Area of one cycle of squared wave = ∫ i 2dθ
0
70.7 % of its peak value.
Similarly for alternating voltage, it can be
i i2 wave shown that
i2 Vrms = 0.707 Vm (4.42)
RMS value of alternating

Note current is also called effective
2 value and is represented as Ieff.
0 It is used to compare RMS current of AC
d
to an equivalent steady current.
RMS value is also defined as that value
of the steady current which when
flowing through a given circuit for a
Figure 4.42 Squared wave of AC
given time produces the same amount
of heat as produced by the alternating
2π 2π
= ∫ I sin θdθ = I (4.40) current when flowing through the

∫ sin
2 2 2 2
m m θdθ
0 0 same circuit for the same time. The
2π
 1 − cos 2θ  effective value of an alternating voltage
∫ 
2
=I m
dθ is represented by Veff.
0
2 

v
For example, if we consider n
Note currents in one cycle of AC,
namely i1, i2, ... in, then RMS 20V
value is given by
Sum of squares of all currents t (ms)

0
over one cycle 5 10 15 20
I RMS =
Number off currents
i12 + i22 + ... + in2
I RMS = –20V
n
For common household

E X A M P L E 4. 1 9
appliances, the voltage
rating and current rating
are generally specified in terms of The equation for an alternating current is
their RMS value. The domestic AC given by i = 77 sin 314t. Find the peak value,
supply is 230V, 50 Hz. It is the RMS or frequency, time period and instantaneous
effective value. Its peak value will be value at t = 2 ms.
Vm = 2 Vrms = 2 × 230 = 325V . Solution
i = 77 sin 314t ; t = 2 ms = 2×10-3 s
E X A M P L E 4. 18
The general equation of an alternating
Write down the equation for a sinusoidal current is i = I m sinωt . On comparsion,
voltage of 50 Hz and its peak value is 20 V.
Draw the corresponding voltage versus (i) Peak value, I m = 77 A
time graph. (ii) Frequency, f =
ω 314
= = 50 Hz
2π 2×3.14
Solution 1 1
(iii) Time period, T = = = 0.02 s
f = 50 Hz ; Vm = 20 V f 50
Instantaneous voltage, υ = Vm sin ωt

(iv) At t = 2 m s,
= Vm sin2πvt
Instantaneous value,
i = 77 sin(314 ×2×10−3 )
= 20 sin(2π ×50)t = 20 sin(100 × 3.14) t i = 45.24 A
υ = 20 sin 314 t
Time for one cycle, T =

1
=
1
= 0.02 s Phasor and phasor diagram
f 50
Phasor
−3
= 20 × 10 s = 20 ms A sinusoidal alternating voltage (or
current) can be represented by a vector which
The wave form is given below.
rotates about the origin in anti-clockwise

direction at a constant angular velocity ω. alternating voltage υ = Vm sin ωt applied to a
Such a rotating vector is called a phasor. A circuit. This voltage

can be represented by a
phasor is drawn in such a way that phasor, namely OA as shown in Figure 4.43.
· the length of the line segment equals
the peak value Vm (or Im) of the υ

alternating voltage (or current) υ
A
· its angular velocity ω is equal to the
Vm sin t
υ
angular frequency of the alternating Vm
voltage (or current) t
t

· the projection of phasor on any 0 0
vertical axis gives the instantaneous
value of the alternating voltage (or
current)
· the angle between the phasor and
the axis of reference (positive x-axis) Figure 4.43 Phasor diagram for an
alternating voltage υ = Vm sin ωt
indicates the phase of the alternating
voltage (or current).
The notion of phasors is introduced to Here the length of OA equals the
analyse phase relationship between voltage peak value (Vm), the angle it makes with
and current in different AC circuits. x-axis gives the phase (ωt) of the applied
Phasor diagram voltage. Its projection on y-axis provides
the instantaneous value (Vm sin ωt) at that
The diagram which shows various instant.

phasors and their phase relations is called When OA rotates about O with angular
phasor diagram. Consider a sinusoidal velocity ω in anti-clockwise direction, the
υ
υ
i A
Im sin (t+ )
B υ
Vm sin t
Im i
Vm

t t

0 0
Figure 4.44 Phasor diagram and wave diagram say that i leads υ by ϕ

waveform of the voltage

is generated. For Consider a circuit containing a pure
one full rotation of OA, one cycle of voltage resistor of resistance R connected across
is produced. an alternating voltage source (Figure 4.45).
The alternating current in the same The instantaneous value of the alternating
circuit may be given by the relation voltage is given by
i = Imsin (ωt + ϕ)which

is represented by υ = Vm sin ωt (4.43)
another phasor OB . Here ϕ is the phase
angle between voltage and current. In this An alternating current i flowing in
case, the current leads the voltage by phase the circuit due to this voltage, develops a
angle ϕ which is shown in Figure 4.44. If potential drop across R and is given by
the current lags behind the voltage, then we
write i = Im sin (ωt - ϕ). VR = iR (4.44)
Kirchoff ’s loop rule (Refer section 2.4)

states that the algebraic sum of potential
4.7.3 AC circuit containing differences in a closed circuit is zero. For
pure resistor this resistive circuit,
R
υ− VR = 0
From equation (4.43) and (4.44),
Vm sinωt = iR
Vm
i= sinωt
υ = Vm sin t R
Figure 4.45 AC circuit with resistance i = I m sinωt (4.45)
υ i
υ
i A
i
B υ
Vm sin t
Im sin (t)
Vm
Im
t t

0 0
Figure 4.46 Phasor diagram and wave diagram for AC circuit with R

Vm υ+ε = 0
where = I m , the peak value of alternating di
R Vm sinωt = L
current in the circuit. From equations dt
(4.43) and (4.45), it is clear that the applied Vm
di = sinωt dt
voltage and the current are in phase with L
each other in a resistive circuit. It means Integrating both sides, we get
that they reach their maxima and minima
Vm
L ∫
simultaneously. This is indicated in the i= sinωt dt
phasor diagram (Figure 4.46). The wave Vm
diagram also depicts that current is in phase i= (−cos ωt ) + constant
Lω
with the applied voltage (Figure 4.46). The integration constant in the above
equation is independent of time. Since the
voltage in the circuit has only time dependent
4.7.4 AC circuit containing part, we can set the time independent part in
only an inductor the current (integration constant) into zero.
Consider a circuit containing a pure 
 2 (
cos ωt = sin π − ωt
) 

inductor of inductance L connected across 
an alternating voltage source (Figure 4.47).  ( 2 ) (
−sin π − ωt = sin ωt − π
2 ) 

The alternating voltage is given by the Vm
equation.
i=
ωL
(
sin ωt − π
2 )
υ = Vm sin ωt (4.46) (
or i = I m sin ωt − π
2 ) (4.47)
The alternating current flowing through the Vm
inductor induces a self-induced emf or back where = I m , the peak value of the
ωL
emf in the circuit. The back emf is given by alternating current in the circuit. From
di
equation (4.46) and (4.47), it is evident
Back emf ,ε = −L that current lags behind the applied voltage
dt
by π in an inductive circuit. This fact is
By applying Kirchoff ’s loop rule to the 2
depicted in the phasor diagram. In the wave
purely inductive circuit, we get diagram also, it is seen that current lags the
voltage by 90o (Figure 4.48).
L Inductive reactance XL
The peak value of current Im is given by
Vm
Im = . Let us compare this equation with
ωL
V
I m = m from resistive circuit. The quantity
R
ωL plays the same role as the resistance
υ = Vm sin t in resistive circuit. This is the resistance
offered by the inductor, called inductive
Figure 4.47 AC circuit with reactance (XL). It is measured in ohm.
inductance
X L = ωL

υ i
υ
A
i
υ
Vm sin t
Vm
t t

0 0
Im sin (t– )

Im
B
i
Figure 4.48 Phasor diagram and wave diagram for AC circuit with L
X L = 2πf L (4.48)
An inductor blocks AC but it allows
DC. Why? and How? where f is the frequency of the alternating
An inductor L is a closely wound current. For a steady current, f = 0. Therefore,
helical coil. The steady DC current XL = 0. Thus an ideal inductor offers no
flowing through L produces uniform resistance to steady DC current.
magnetic field around it and the magnetic
flux linked remains constant. Therefore 4.7.5 AC circuit containing
there is no self-induction and self- only a capacitor
induced emf (back emf). Since inductor
Consider a circuit containing a capacitor
behaves like a resistor, DC flows through
of capacitance C connected across an
an inductor.
alternating voltage source (Figure 4.49). The
The AC flowing through L produces
alternating voltage is given by
time-varying magnetic field which in
turn induces self-induced emf (back υ = Vm sin ωt (4.49)
emf). This back emf, according to Lenz’s
law, opposes any change in the current. C
Since AC varies both in magnitude and
direction, its flow is opposed in L. For an
ideal inductor of zero ohmic resistance,
the back emf is equal and opposite to the
applied emf. Therefore L blocks AC.
υ = Vm sin t
The inductive reactance (XL) varies Figure 4.49 AC circuit with capacitance
directly as the frequency.

Let q be the instantaneous charge on the capacitive reactance (XC). It measured in
capacitor. The emf across the capacitor at ohm.
q
that instant is . According to Kirchoff ’s
C 1
loop rule, Xc = (4.51)
ωC
q
υ− =0
C The capacitive reactance (XC) varies
q = CVm sinωt inversely as the frequency. For a steady
current, f = 0.
By the definition of current,
dq d 1 1 1
i= = (CVm sinωt ) ∴ XC = = = =∞
dt dt ωC 2πf C 0
d
= CVm (sinωt )
dt Thus a capacitive circuit offers infinite
resistance to the steady current. So that
= CVm ω cos ωt
steady current cannot flow through the
Vm capacitor.
or i =
1 (
sin ωt + π
2 )
Cω
Instantaneous value of current, What is ELI?
(
i = I m sin ωt + π
2 ) (4.50) E L I
Vm
where = I m , the peak value of the
1
Cω
EMF
(Voltage) E L
Inductor I Current
alternating current. From equations (4.49)

and (4.50), it is clear that current leads the ELI
EMFis an acronym which means that
applied voltage by π 2 in a capacitive circuit. (Voltage) Inductor Current
EMF (voltage) leads the current in an
This is shown pictorially in Figure 4.50. The inductive circuit.
wave diagram for a capacitive circuit also I C E
What is ICE?
shows that the current leads the applied
voltage by 90o. Current I C
Capacitor E EMF
(Voltage)
Capacitive reactance XC
The peak value of current Im is given Current Capacitor
EMF
(Voltage)
V
by I m = m . Let us compare this equation
1
Cω ICE is an acronym which means
V that the current leads the EMF (voltage)
with I m = m from resistive circuit. The
R current in a capacitive circuit.
quantity 1 plays the same role as the It is easier to may remember
Cω the results of AC circuits with the
resistance R in resistive circuit. This is the mnemonic ‘ELI the ICE man’.
resistance offered by the capacitor, called

υ i υ
A
B υ
Vm sin t
Im sin (t+ )
Vm i
Im
t t

0 0

i
Figure 4.50 Phasor diagram and wave diagram for AC circuit with C
E X A M P L E 4. 20 E X A M P L E 4. 2 1
102
A capacitor of capacitance µF is
A 400 mH coil of negligible resistance π
is connected to an AC circuit in which connected across a 220 V, 50 Hz A.C.
an effective current of 6 mA is flowing. mains. Calculate the capacitive reactance,
Find out the voltage across the coil if the RMS value of current and write down the
frequency is 1000 Hz. equations of voltage and current.
Solution
Solution 2
10
L = 400 x 10 H; Ieff = 6 x 10 A
-3 -3 C= ×10−6 F , VRMS = 220 V ; f = 50Hz
π
f = 1000 Hz (i) Capacitive reactance,
1 1
Inductive reactance, X L = Lω = L ×2πf XC = =
ωC 2πfC
= 2×3.14 ×1000×0.4 1
= = 100Ω
10−4
= 2512 Ω 2× π ×50×
π
Voltage across L, (ii) RMS value of current,
V = I X L = 6 × 10 −3 × 2512 VRMS 220

I RMS = = = 2.2 A
XC 100
V = 15.072V ( RMS )
(iii) Vm = 220 × 2 = 311 V

A capacitor blocks DC but it allows AC. Why? and How? (Not for examination)
Capacitors have two parallel metallic plates placed close to each other and there is a gap between plates.
Whenever a source of voltage (either DC voltage or AC voltage) is connected across a capacitor C, the electrons
from the source will reach the plate and stop. They cannot jump across the gap between plates to continue
its flow in the circuit. Therefore the electrons flowing in one direction (i.e. DC) cannot pass through the
capacitor. But the electrons from AC source seem to flow through C. Let us see what really happens!
DC cannot flow through a capacitor:
Consider a parallel plate capacitor whose plates are uncharged (same amount of positive and negative
charges). A DC source (battery) is connected across C as shown in Figure (a).
As soon as battery
+ - + +
is connected, electrons -----
-
-
-
start to flow from the –+ –+ ++– – –– ++ – –
+– +– + + ++ – –
negative terminal and –+ –+
- ++– – –– ++ – –
+– +–
–+ –+ -
-
+
++
+
–– ++ – –
++ – –
are accumulated at the +– +– - - - - - + – +– ++ – –
(a)
–+ –+
+ +
– – (b)++
+ +
–
––
– (c) ++ ––
++ – –
right plate, making it –+ –+
+– +–
+
+
+ ––
– +– ++ – –
+ + ––
–+ –+ ++– – –– ++ – –
negative. Due to this +– +– + + ++ – –
negative potential, the

electrons present in the nearby left plate are repelled and are moved towards positive terminal of the battery.
When electrons leave the left plate, it becomes positively charged. This process is known as charging. The
direction of flow of electrons is shown by arrows.
The charging of the plates continues till the level of the battery. Once C is fully charged and current will stop.
At this time, we say that capacitor is blocking DC Figure (c).
AC AC AC AC
+ - + - - + - +
- ----
- - ----
- -
-
- -
++– –– ++ –– –– ++ –– ++
+ +– ++ –– –+ –+ –– ++
- ++ –– ++ –– –– ++ - –– ++
-
-----
+–
++–
+–
––
++
++
––
––
–+
––
–+
++ -
-
––
––
++
++
- +
++–
+ –– ++ –– –+ –+ - - - - - –– ++
– ++ –– –– ++ –– ++
+ +– ++ –– –+ –+ –– ++
++– –– ++ –– –– ++ –– ++
+ +– ++ –– –+ –+ –– ++
(d) ++–
+
––
+– (e) ++
++
––
–– (f) ––
–+
++
–+ (g) ––
––
++
++
AC flows (?!) through a capacitor:

Now an AC source is connected across C. At an instant, the right side of the source is at negative potential,
then the electrons flow from negative terminal to the right plate and from left plate to the positive terminal as
shown in Figure (d) but no electron crosses the gap between the plates. These electron-flows are represented
by arrows. thus, the charging of the plates takes place and the plates become fully charged (Figure (e)).
After a short time, the polarities of AC source are reversed and the right side of the source is now positive.
The electrons which were accumulated in the right plate start to flow to the positive terminal and the electrons
from negative terminal flow to the left plate to neutralize the positive charges stored in it. As a result, the
net charges present in the plates begin to decrease and this is called discharging. These electron-flows are
represented by arrows as shown in Figure (f). Once the charges are exhausted, C will be charged again but
with reversed polarities as shown in Figure (g).
Thus the electrons flow in one direction while charging the capacitor and its direction is reversed while
discharging (the conventional current is also opposite in both cases). Though electrons flow in the circuit, no
electron crosses the gap between the plates. In this way, AC flows through a capacitor.

The length of these phasors are
I m = 2.2 × 2 = 3.1A
OI = Im, OA = ImR, OB = ImXL; OC = ImXC
Therefore,
The circuit is either effectively inductive
υ = 311sin 314 t or capacitive or resistive that depends on
the value of VL or VC. Let us assume that
(
i = 3.1sin 314t + π
2 ) VL > VC so that net voltage drop across L-C
combination isVL – VC which is represented
by a phasor AD .
4.7.6 AC circuit containing By parallelogram law, the diagonal
a resistor, an inductor and a
OE gives the resultant voltage υ of VR and
capacitor in series – Series (VL – VC) and its length OE is equal to Vm.
RLC circuit Therefore,
Consider a circuit containing a resistor Vm2 = VR2 + (VL − VC )
2
of resistance R, a inductor of inductance L

(Im R) + (Im X L − Im X C )
2 2
and a capacitor of capacitance C connected =
across an alternating voltage source (Figure
= Im R2 + ( X L − X C )
2
4.51). The applied alternating voltage is

Vm
given by the equation. or I m = (4.53)
R2 + ( X L − X C )
2
υ = Vm sin ωt (4.52) Vm
or I m =
Z
R L C
where Z = R 2 + ( X L − X C ) (4.54)
2
VR VL VC
Z is called impedance of the circuit

which refers to the effective opposition to
the circuit current by the series RLC circuit.
The voltage triangle and impedance triangle
υ = Vm sin t
are given in the Figure 4.53.
Figure 4.51 AC circuit containing R, L and C E
Let i be the resulting circuit current in B A

the circuit at that instant. As a result, the υ
VL VR
voltage is developed across R, L and C.
I
We know that voltage across R (VR) is in D i
phase with i, voltage across L (VL) leads i by VL–VC t
π/2 and voltage across C (VC) lags i by π/2. 0
The phasor diagram is drawn with VC
current as the reference phasor. The C
current

is represented

by thephasor
Figure 4.52 Phasor diagram for a series
OI , VR by OA; VL by OB and VC by OC
RLC – circuit when VL> VC
as shown in Figure 4.52.

(iii) If XL = XC, ϕ is zero. Therefore current
E E and voltage are in the same phase and
the circuit is resistive.
υ VL–VC Z XL–XC
∴ υ = Vm sin ωt ; i = I m sin ωt
0 VR A 0 R A
(a) (b)
4.7.7 Resonance in series
Figure 4.53 Voltage and impedance RLC Circuit
triangle when XL > XC
When the frequency of the applied
alternating source (ω r ) is equal to the
From phasor diagram, the phase angle
 
between υ and i is found out from the natural frequency  1  of the RLC
 LC 
following relation
circuit, the current in the circuit reaches its
VL − VC X L − XC maximum value. Then the circuit is said to
tanφ = = (4.55)
VR R be in electrical resonance. The frequency
at which resonance takes place is called
Special cases resonant frequency.
(i) If XL > XC, (XL−XC) is positive and 1
phase angle ϕ is also positive. It Resonant angular frequency, ω r =
LC
means that the applied voltage leads
the current by ϕ (or current lags 1
or fr = (4.56)
behind voltage by ϕ). The circuit is 2π LC
inductive. At series resonance,
∴ υ = Vm sin ωt ; i = I m sin (ωt − φ)
(ii) If XL < XC, (XL − XC) is negative and 1 1
ωr = or ω 2r =
ϕ is also negative. Therefore current LC LC
leads voltage by ϕ and the circuit is 1
capacitive. ωr L = or
ω rC
∴ υ = Vm sin ωt ; i = I m sin (ωt + φ) X L = X C (4.57)
Table 4.1 Summary of results of AC circuits
Phase angle of
Type of Impedance Value of Impedance Power factor
current with voltage
Resistance R 0o 1
Inductance XL = ωL 90o lag 0
Capacitance XC = 1 90o lead 0
ωC
R- L - C Between 0o and 90o lag Between 0 and 1
( )
2
R + ωL − 1
2
or lead
ωC

Since XL and XC are frequency dependent, with sharper curve is obtained and vice
the resonance condition ( X L = X C ) can be versa.
achieved by the varying the frequency of the Applications of series RLC resonant
applied voltage. circuit
Effects of series resonance RLC circuits have many applications like
When series resonance occurs, the filter circuits, oscillators, voltage multipliers
impedance of the circuit is minimum and etc. An important use of series RLC resonant
is equal to the resistance of the circuit. As circuits is in the tuning circuits of radio
a result of this, the current in the circuit and TV systems. The signals from many
becomes maximum. This is shown in the broadcasting stations at different frequencies
resonance curve drawn between current are available in the air. To receive the signal
and frequency (Figure 4.54). of a particular station, tuning is done.
At resonance, the impedance is The tuning is commonly achieved by
varying capacitance of a parallel plate
Z = R 2 + ( X L − X C ) = R since X L = X C
2
variable capacitor, thereby changing the

resonant frequency of the circuit. When
Therefore, the current in the circuit is resonant frequency is nearly equal to the
frequency of the signal of the particular
Vm station, the amplitude of the current in the
Im =
R2 + ( X L − X C )
2 circuit is maximum. Thus the signal of that
station alone is received.
Vm
Im = (4.58)
R
The phenomenon of electrical
Note resonance is possible when the
circuit contains both L and
i C. Only then the voltage across L and
Small R C cancel one another when VL and VC
are 180° out of phase and the circuit
becomes purely resistive. This implies
Large R
that resonance will not occur in a RL
and RC circuits.
0 fr Frequency
4.7.8 Quality factor or

Figure 4.54 Resonance curve Q–factor
The current in the series RLC circuit
becomes maximum at resonance. Due to the
The maximum current at series increase in current, the voltage across L and
resonance is limited by the resistance of the C are also increased. This magnification
circuit. For smaller resistance, larger current of voltages at series resonance is termed as
Q–factor.

It is defined as the ratio of voltage (ii) Phase angle is
across L or C to the applied voltage.
X L − XC
tanφ =
Voltage across L or C R
Q-factor =
Applied voltage 184 − 144
= = 1.33
At resonance, the circuit is purely 30
resistive. Therefore, the applied voltage is φ = 53.1
equal to the voltage across R.
Im XL XL
Q-factor = = Since the phase angle is positive, voltage
ImR R
leads current by 53.1 for this inductive
ωr L circuit.
Q-factor = (4.59)
R
L E X A M P L E 4. 2 3
Q-factor = since ω r = 1
R LC LC 80
A 500 μH inductor, pF capacitor and
1 L π2
Q-factor = (4.60) a 628 Ω resistor are connected to form a
R C
series RLC circuit. Calculate the resonant
The physical meaning is that Q–factor frequency and Q-factor of this circuit at
indicates the number of times the voltage resonance.
across L or C is greater than the applied
voltage at resonance. Solution
80
E X A M P L E 4. 22 L = 500 × 10-6H ; C = 2
×10−12 F ; R = 628 Ω
π
Find the impedance of a series RLC circuit
(i) Resonant frequency is
if the inductive reactance, capacitive
reactance and resistance are 184 Ω, 144 Ω 1 1
fr = =
and 30 Ω respectively. Also calculate the 2π LC 80
2π 500×10−6 × ×10−12
phase angle between voltage and current. π2
Solution 1
=
2 40, 000×10−18
XL = 184 Ω; XC = 144 Ω
10, 000 × 103
R = 30 Ω =
4
(i ) The impedance is
f r = 2500 KHz
2
Z = R + ( X L − XC )
2
2
(ii) Q–factor
= 302 + (184 −144)
ω r L 2×3.14 ×2500×103 ×500×10−6
= 900 + 1600 = =
R 628
Impedance, Z = 50 Ω Q =12.5

E X A M P L E 4. 24 In an inductive circuit, the voltage leads
Find the instantaneous value of alternating the current by 90o Therefore,
voltage υ = 10 sin(3π ×104 t) volt at i) 0 s
ii) 50 μs iii) 75 μs. υ = Vm sin (ωt + 90 )
Solution υ = 2.4 sin (200t − 40 + 90 )
The given equation is υ = 10 sin(3π ×104 t )

υ = 2.4 sin (200t + 50 )volt
(i) At t = 0 s,
4.8
υ = 10 sin 0 = 0 V
POWER IN AC CIRCUITS
(ii) At t = 50 µs,
υ = 10 sin (3π ×104 ×50×10-6 ) 4.8.1 Introduction of power

= 10 sin (150π ×10-2 ) in AC circuits
= 10 sin(4.71 raad ) Power of a circuit is defined as the rate
= 10×−0.99 of consumption of electric energy in that
= −9 . 9 V circuit. It is given by the product of the voltage
and current. In an AC circuit, the voltage and
(iii) At t = 75 µs,
current vary continuously with time. Let us
υ = 10 sin (3π ×104 ×75×10-6 ) first calculate the power at an instant and then
it is averaged over a complete cycle.
= 10 sin (225π ×10-2 )
The alternating voltage and alternating
= 10 sin(7.071 rad ) current in the series RLC circuit at an instant
= 10×0.709 are given by
= 7.09 V
υ = Vm sin ωt and i = I m sin (ωt + φ)
E X A M P L E 4. 25 where ϕ is the phase angle between υ

and i. The instantaneous power is then
The current in an inductive circuit is given written as
by 0.3 sin (200t – 40°) A. Write the equation
P=υi
for the voltage across it if the inductance is
40 mH. = Vm Im sin ωt sin (ωt + φ)
Solution = Vm Im sin ωt [sin ωt cos φ − cos ωt sin φ ]
L = 40 × 10-3 H; i = 0.1 sin (200t – 40o) P = Vm Im cos φ sin2 ωt − sin ωt cos ωt sin φ
XL = ωL = 200 × 40 × 10-3 = 8 Ω (4.61)
Vm = Im XL = 0.3 × 8 = 2.4 V

Here the average of sin2 ωt over a VRMS
cycle is 1 2 and that of sin ωt cos ωt is zero.
Substituting these values, we obtain average
power over a cycle.
Pav = Vm I m cos φ× 1
2
Vm I m x
= cos φ IRMS
2 2
Pav = VRMS I RMS cos φ (4.62) Figure 4.55 VRMS leads IRMS by ϕ
where VRMS I RMS is called apparent power Now, IRMS is resolved into two
and cos ϕ is power factor. The average power perpendicular components namely, I RMS cos φ
of an AC circuit is also known as the true along VRMS and I RMS sinφ perpendicular to
power of the circuit. VRMS as shown in Figure 4.56.
Special Cases
(i) For a purely resistive circuit, the VRMS
phase angle between voltage and
current is zero and cos ϕ = 1. IRMScos
∴ Pav = VRMS I RMS

(ii) For a purely inductive or capacitive x
circuit, the phase angle is ± π 2 and IRMS
cos (± π ) = 0 .
2
∴ Pav = 0
IRMSsin
(iii)
For series RLC circuit, the phase
 X L − XC  Figure 4.56 The components of IRMS
angle f = tan−1  
 R 
∴ Pav = VRMS I RMS cosf
(i) The component of current ( I RMS cos φ)
(iv)
For series RLC circuit at resonance, which is in phase with the voltage
the phase angle is zero and cos f = 1. is called active component. The
power consumed by this current
∴ Pav = VRMS I RMS
= VRMS I RMS cos φ . So that it is also
known as ‘Wattful’ current.
The other component ( I RMS sinφ)
(ii)
4.8.2 Wattless current
which has a phase angle of π 2
Consider an AC circuit in which there
with the voltage is called reactive
is a phase angle of ϕ between VRMS and IRMS
component. The power consumed
and voltage is assumed to be leading the
is zero. So that it is also known as
current by ϕ as shown in the phasor diagram
‘Wattless’ current.
(Figure 4.55).

The current in an AC circuit is said to be (iii) AC can easily be converted into DC
wattless current if the power consumed by with the help of rectifiers.
it is zero. This wattless current happens in a Disadvantages:
purely inductive or capacitive circuit.
(i) Alternating voltages cannot be used
for certain applications e.g. charging
4.8.3 Power factor of batteries, electroplating, electric
The power factor of a circuit is defined traction etc.
in one of the following ways: (ii) At high voltages, it is more dangerous
to work with AC than DC.
Power factor = cos ϕ = cosine of the
(i)
angle of lead or lag E X A M P L E 4. 2 6
R Resistance
Power factor = =
(ii) A series RLC circuit which resonates at 400
Z Impedance
kHz has 80 μH inductor, 2000 pF capacitor
VI cos φ
Power factor =
(iii) and 50 Ω resistor. Calculate (i) Q-factor of
VI the circuit (ii) the new value of capacitance
True power
= when the value of inductance is doubled
Apparent power and (iii) the new Q-factor.
Some examples for power factors:
(i) Power factor = cos 0° = 1 for a pure Solution
resistive circuit because the phase L = 80 × 10-6H; C = 2000 × 10-12 F
angle ϕ between voltage and current R = 50 Ω; fr = 400 × 103Hz
is zero. 1 L
(i) Q-factor, Q1 =
(
(ii) Power factor = cos ± π = 0 for a
2 ) R C
purely inductive or capacitive circuit 1 80×10−6
because the phase angle ϕ between = =4
50 200×10−12
voltage and current is ± π 2 . (ii) When L2 = 2 L
(iii) Power factor lies between 0 and 1 for =2 × 80 × 10-6 H = 160 × 10-6 H,
a circuit having R, L and C in varying
1
proportions. C2 =
4 π f r2 L2
2
4.8.4 Advantages and 1

= 2
disadvantages of AC over DC 4 ×3.142 ×(400×103 ) ×160×10−6
There are many advantages and  1000×10−12 F

disadvantages of AC system over DC system. C2  1000 pF
Advantages:
(i) The generation of AC is cheaper than 1 L2 1 160×10−6
(iii) Q2 = =
that of DC. R C2 50 1000×10−12
(ii)
When AC is supplied at higher 2
1 16×10−5 4 ×10
voltages, the transmission losses are = = =8
50 10−9
50
small compared to DC transmission.

E X A M P L E 4. 27 4.9
10-4
A capacitor of capacitance F, an OSCILLATION IN LC
π
2 CIRCUITS
inductor of inductance H and a resistor
π
of resistance 100 Ω are connected to form
a series RLC circuit. When an AC supply 4.9.1 Energy conversion
of 220 V, 50 Hz is applied to the circuit, during LC oscillations
determine (i) the impedance of the circuit
(ii) the peak value of current flowing in the We have learnt that energy can be stored
circuit (iii) the power factor of the circuit in both inductors and capacitors (Refer
and (iv) the power factor of the circuit at sections 1.8.2 and 4.3.2). In inductors, the
resonance. energy is stored in the form of magnetic
field while in capacitors; it is stored as the
Solution electric field.
2 10−4 Whenever energy is given to a circuit
L= H ;C = F ; R = 100 Ω
π π containing a pure inductor of inductance
VRMS = 220 V ; f = 50 Hz L and a capacitor of capacitance C, the
energy oscillates back and forth between
X L = 2πfL = 2π ×50× 2 = 200 Ω the magnetic field of the inductor and the
π
electric field of the capacitor. Thus the
1 1 electrical oscillations of definite frequency
XC = = = 100 Ω
2πfC 10−4 are generated. These oscillations are called
2π ×50×
π LC oscillations.
(i) Impedance, Z = R2 + ( X L − XC )
2
Generation of LC oscillations
Let us assume that the capacitor is fully
2 charged with maximum charge Qm at the
= 1002 + (200 −100) =141.4 Ω
initial stage. So that the energy stored in
(ii) Peak value of current, the capacitor is maximum and is given by
Q m2
V 2 VRMS UE = . As there is no current in the
2C
Im = m =
Z Z inductor, the energy stored in it is zero i.e.,
2 ×220 U B = 0. Therefore, the total energy is wholly
= = 2.2 A
141.4 electrical. This is shown in Figure 4.57(a).
The capacitor now begins to discharge
(iii) Power factor of the circuit,
through the inductor that establishes
R 100 current i in clockwise direction. This
cos φ = = = 0.707
Z 141.4 current produces a magnetic field around
(iv) Power factor at resonance the inductor and the energy stored in the
2
R R inductor is given by U B = Li 2 . As the

cos φ = = = 1
Z R charge in the capacitor decreases, the energy
stored in it also decreases and is given by

i im i
C L C L C L
++ – –
– – + +
UE UB UE UB UE UB
(b) (c) (d)
Wholly magnetic
energy
i=0 i=0
C L C L
++ ++ –– ––
–– –– ++ ++
UE UB UE UB
(a) Wholly electrical
(e)
Wholly electrical
energy energy
i im i
C L C L C L
++ – –
– – + +
UE UB UE UB UE UB
(h) Wholly magnetic
(g) (f)
energy
Figure 4.57 LC oscillations
2
UE = q . Thus there is a transfer of some sum of the electrical and magnetic energies
2C
part of energy from the capacitor to the (Figure 4.57(d)).
inductor. At that instant, the total energy is When the current in the circuit reduces
the sum of electrical and magnetic energies to zero, the capacitor becomes fully charged
(Figure 4.57(b)). in the opposite direction. The energy stored
When the charges in the capacitor are in the capacitor becomes maximum. Since
exhausted, its energy becomes zero i.e., the current is zero, the energy stored in the
U E = 0 . The energy is fully transferred to the inductor is zero. The total energy is wholly
magnetic field of the inductor and its energy electrical (Figure 4.57(e)).
The state of the circuit is similar to the
is maximum. This maximum energy is given
initial state but the difference is that the
LI 2
by U B = m 2 where I m is the maximum capacitor is charged in opposite direction.
current flowing in the circuit. The total The capacitor then starts to discharge through
energy is wholly magnetic (Figure 4.57(c)). the inductor with anti-clockwise current.
Even though the charge in the capacitor is The total energy is the sum of the electrical
zero, the current will continue to flow in the and magnetic energies (Figure 4.57(f)).
same direction because the inductor will not As already explained, the processes
allow it to stop immediately. The current is are repeated in opposite direction (Figure
made to flow with decreasing magnitude by 4.57(g) and (h)). Finally, the circuit returns
the collapsing magnetic field of the inductor. to the initial state (Figure 4.57(a)). Thus,
As a result of this, the capacitor begins to when the circuit goes through these stages,
charge in the opposite direction. A part of an alternating current flows in the circuit.
the energy is transferred from the inductor As this process is repeated again and
back to the capacitor. The total energy is the again, the electrical oscillations of definite

frequency are generated. These are known 1 1
U = 0 + LI m2 = LI m2
as LC oscillations. 2 2
In the ideal LC circuit, there is no loss L Q2  Q
of energy. Therefore, the oscillations will = × m  since I m = Qm ω = m
2  LC  LC
continue indefinitely. Such oscillations are
called undamped oscillations. Q m2
= (4.64)
2C
But in practice, the Joule The total energy is wholly magnetic.

Note heating and radiation of
Case (iii) When charge = q ; current = i ,
electromagnetic waves from
the circuit decrease the energy of the the total energy is
system. Therefore, the oscillations
become damped oscillations. q2 1 2
U= + Li
2C 2
dq
Since q = Qm cos ωt , i = − = Qm ω sin ωt .
dt
The negative sign in current indicates that
4.9.2 Conservation of energy
the charge in the capacitor decreases with
in LC oscillations
time.
During LC oscillations in LC circuits,
the energy of the system oscillates between Q m2 cos2 ωt Lω 2Q m2 sin2 ωt
U= +
the electric field of the capacitor and the 2C 2
magnetic field of the inductor. Although,
Q m2 cos2 ωt LQ m2 sin2 ωt 1
these two forms of energy vary with time, = + since ω 2 =
the total energy remains constant. It means 2C 2LC LC
that LC oscillations take place in accordance Q m2
with the law of conservation of energy.
=
2C
(cos 2
ωt + sin2 ωt )
q2 1 2 Q m2
Total energy,U = U E + U B = + Li U= (4.65)
2C 2 2C
Let us consider 3 different stages of LC From above three cases, it is clear that the
oscillations and calculate the total energy of total energy of the system remains constant.
the system.
4.9.3 Analogies between
Case (i) When the charge in the capacitor,
LC oscillations and simple
q = Qm and the current through the
harmonic oscillations
inductor, i = 0, the total energy is given by
(i) Qualitative treatment
Qm2 Qm2
U= +0 = (4.63) The electromagnetic oscillations of LC
2C 2C
system can be compared with the mechanical
The total energy is wholly electrical.
oscillations of a spring-mass system.
Case (ii) When charge = 0 ; current = I m , There are two forms of energy involved
the total energy is in LC oscillations. One is electrical energy

Table 4.3 Energy in two oscillatory systems
LC oscillator Spring-mass system
Element Energy Element Energy

1 1 2 1 2
Capacitor Electrical Energy =  q Spring Potential energy = kx
2 C 2
Inductor 1 dq Mass 1 2 dx
Magnetic energy = Li 2 i = Kinetic energy = mv v =
2 dt 2 dt
of the charged capacitor; the other magnetic Table 4.4 Analogies between
energy of the inductor carrying current. electrical and mechanical quantities
Likewise, the mechanical energy of the
Electrical system Mechanical system
spring-mass system exists in two forms;
the potential energy of the compressed or Charge q Displacement x
extended spring and the kinetic energy of dq dx
Current i = Velocity v =
the mass. The Table 4.3 lists these two pairs dt dt
of energy. Inductance L Mass m
By examining the Table 4.3, the analogies Reciprocal Force constant k
between the various quantities can be 1
of capacitance
understood and these correspondences are C
given in the Table 4.4. Electrical energy Potential energy
The angular frequency of oscillations of a 1 1 2 1 2
=  q = kx
spring-mass is given by (Refer equation 10.22 2 C 2
of section 10.4.1 of XI physics text book). Magnetic energy Kinetic energy
1 1 2
k = Li 2 = mv
ω= 2 2
m
Electromagnetic Mechanical energy
From Table 4.4, k → 1C and m → L.
energy E=
1 2 1 2
k x + mv
Therefore, the angular frequency of LC
1 1 2 1 2 2 2
oscillations is given by U=   q + Li
2 C 2
1
ω= (4.66)
LC
dE 1  dv  1  dx 
= m  2v  + k  2 x  = 0
(ii) Quantitative treatment dt 2  dt  2  dt 
The mechanical energy of the spring- d 2x
mass system is given by or m + kx = 0(4.68)
dt 2
1 1 dx dv d 2 x
E = mv 2 + k x 2 (4.67) since = v and =
2 2 dt dt dt 2
The energy E remains constant for This is the differential equation of the
varying values of x and v . Differentiating E oscillations of the spring-mass system. The
with respect to time, we get general solution of equation (4.68) is of the form

x(t ) = Xm cos (ωt + f ) (4.69) d 2q
= −Qm ω 2 cos (ωt + φ) (4.74)
dt
where X m is the maximum value of x (t ),
ω the angular frequency and ϕ the phase Substituting equations (4.72) and (4.74)
constant. in equation (4.71), we obtain
Similarly, the electromagnetic energy of 1
L −Qm ω 2 cos (ωt + φ) + Qm cos (ωt + φ) = 0
the LC system is given by C
1 2 1 1 2 Rearranging the terms, the angular

U= Li +   q = constant (4.70)
2 2 C frequency of LC oscillations is given by
Differentiating U with respect to time, we get 1
ω= (4.75)
LC
dU 1  di  1  dq 
= L  2i  +  2q  = 0 This equation is the same as that obtained
dt 2  dt  2C  dt 
from qualitative analogy.
d 2q 1
or L + q = 0(4.71) Oscillations of electrical and magnetic energy
dt 2 C
dq di d 2 q The electrical energy of the LC oscillator is
since i = and = 2
dt dt dt
q 2 Qm2
UE = = cos2 (ωt + φ) (4.76)
The general solution of equation (4.71) 2C 2C
is of the form
The magnetic energy is
q (t ) = Qm cos (ωt + f ) (4.72) 1 Q2
U B = Li 2 = m sin2 (ωt + φ) (4.77)
2 2C
where Qm is the maximum value of q (t ),
If the two energies are plotted with an
ω the angular frequency and ϕ the phase
assumption of f = 0 , we obtain Figure 4.58.
constant.
Q2m U (= UB+ UE)
Current in the LC circuit 2C
The current flowing in the LC circuit is

UE
obtained by differentiating q(t) with respect
Energy
to time.
UB
dq d 
i (t ) = = Qm cos (ωt + f )
dt dt  0
T/2 T Time
= −Qm ω sin (ωt + φ) since Im = Qmω
Figure 4.58 The variation of UE and UB
or i (t ) = −I m sin(ωt + φ) (4.73) as a function of time
The equation (4.73) clearly shows that From the graph, it can be noted that
current varies as a function of time t. In Qm2
(i) At any instant UE + UB= =constant
fact, it is a sinusoidally varying alternating 2C
current with angular frequency ω. (ii) The maximum values of UE and UB are
Qm2
both .
2C
Angular frequency of LC oscillations (iii) When UE is Maximum, UB is zero and
By differentiating equation (4.72) twice, we get vice versa.

SUMMARY
Whenever the magnetic flux linked with a closed coil changes, an emf is induced
and hence an electric current flows in the circuit. This phenomenon is known as
electromagnetic induction.
Faraday’s first law states that whenever magnetic flux linked with a closed circuit
changes, an emf is induced in the circuit.
Faraday’s second law states that the magnitude of induced emf in a closed circuit is
equal to the time rate of change of magnetic flux linked with the circuit.
Lenz’s law states that the direction of the induced current is such that it always
opposes the cause responsible for its production.
Lenz’s law is established on the basis of the law of conservation of energy.
Fleming’s right hand rule states that if the index finger points the direction of the
magnetic field and the thumb indicates the direction of motion of the conductor,
then the middle finger will indicate the direction of the induced current.
Even for a conductor in the form of a sheet or a plate, an emf is induced when magnetic
flux linked with it changes. The induced currents flow in concentric circular paths
called Eddy currents or Foucault currents.
Inductor is a device used to store energy in a magnetic field when an electric current
flows through it.
If the flux linked with the coil is changed, an emf is induced in that same coil. This
phenomenon is known as self-induction. The emf induced is called self-induced emf.
When an electric current passing through a coil changes with time, an emf is induced
in the neighbouring coil. This phenomenon is known as mutual induction and the
emf is called mutually induced emf.
AC generator or alternator is an energy conversion device. It converts mechanical
energy used to rotate the coil or field magnet into electrical energy.
In some AC generators, there are three separate coils, which would give three separate
emfs. Hence they are called three-phase AC generators.
Transformer is a stationary device used to transform AC electric power from one
circuit to another without changing its frequency.
The efficiency of a transformer is defined as the ratio of the useful output power to
the input power.
An alternating voltage is a voltage which changes polarity at regular intervals of time
and the resulting alternating current changes direction accordingly.
The average value of alternating current is defined as the average of all values of
current over a positive half-circle or negative half-circle.
The root mean square value or effective value of an alternating current is defined as
the square root of the mean of the squares of all currents over one cycle.

A sinusoidal alternating voltage (or current) can be represented by a vector which
rotates about the origin in anti-clockwise direction at a constant angular velocity.
Such a rotating vector is called a phasor.
When the frequency of the applied alternating source is equal to the natural frequency
of the RLC circuit, the current in the circuit reaches its maximum value. Then the
circuit is said to be in electrical resonance.
The magnification of voltages at series resonance is termed as Q–factor.
Power of a circuit is defined as the rate of consumption of electric energy in that
circuit. It depends on the components of the circuit.
Whenever energy is given to a LC circuit, the electrical oscillations of definite
frequency are generated. These oscillations are called LC oscillations.
During LC oscillations, the total energy remains constant. It means that LC
oscillations take place in accordance with the law of conservation of energy.

274
CONCEPT MAP
UNIT-4(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 274
Electromagnetic induction and Alternating currents
Electromagnetic induction Alternating currents
Electromagnetic Eddy’s currents Methods of

induction inducing emf Self-induction Mean value Power in AC circuits LC oscillations
Faraday’s law Demonstration Mutual induction RMS value Wattless current Energy conversion
Lenz’s law Applications Transformer Resistive circuit Power factor Energy conservation
Merits and
Inductive circuit Demerits of AC Mechanical
Fleming’s RH rule analogies
By changing By changing
By changing area
magnetic field orientation
Capacitive circuit
Motional emf
RLC series circuit
Single-phase Three-phase
From From AC generator AC generator
Lorentz force Faraday’s law
Unit 4 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION AND ALTERNATING CURRENT
04-03-2019 10:42:02
EVALUATION
I Multiple Choice Questions

1. An electron moves on a straight line (a) Zero
path XY as shown in the figure. The Bv πr 2
coil abcd is adjacent to the path of the (b) and P is at higher potential
2
electron. What will be the direction of (c) πrBv and R is at higher potential
current, if any, induced in the coil?
(d) 2rBv and R is at higher potential
(NEET – 2015) 3. The flux linked with a coil at any instant
t is given by F B = 10t 2 − 50t + 250. The
a induced emf at t = 3s is
(a) −190 V (b) −10 V
b d
(c) 10 V (d) 190 V
4. When the current changes from +2A
c
x y to −2A in 0.05 s, an emf of 8 V is
Electron
induced in a coil. The co-efficient of
self-induction of the coil is
(a) The current will reverse its
direction as the electron goes past (a) 0.2 H (b) 0.4 H
the coil (c) 0.8 H (d) 0.1 H
(b) No current will be induced 5. The current i flowing in a coil varies
(c) abcd with time as shown in the figure. The
variation of induced emf with time
(d) adcb
would be (NEET – 2011)
2. A thin semi-circular conducting ring
i
(PQR) of radius r is falling with its
plane vertical in a horizontal magnetic
field B, as shown in the figure. t
O T/4 T/2 3T/4 T
Q
×
×
×
×
×
×
r
emf emf
×
×
×
P R T/4
T/2
t
t
O
×
×
×
3T/4 T O T/4 T/2 3T/4 T
(a) (b)
×
×
×
emf emf
The potential difference developed

across the ring when its speed v , is T/4 T/2 3T/4
t
O
T/2 3T/4
t
O T T/4 T
(NEET 2014) (c) (d)

6. A circular coil with a cross-sectional Then the phase difference between the
area of 4 cm2 has 10 turns. It is placed voltage and current in the circuit is
at the centre of a long solenoid that has π π
15 turns/cm and a cross-sectional area (a) (b)
4 2
of 10 cm2. The axis of the coil coincides π
with the axis of the solenoid. What is (c) (d) zero
6
their mutual inductance? 11. In a series resonant RLC circuit, the
(a) 7.54 µH (b) 8.54 µH voltage across 100 Ω resistor is 40 V.
The resonant frequency ω is 250 rad/s.
(c) 9.54 µH (d) 10.54 µH
If the value of C is 4 µF, then the voltage
7. In a transformer, the number of turns across L is
in the primary and the secondary
(a) 600 V (b) 4000 V
are 410 and 1230 respectively. If the
(c) 400V (d) 1 V
current in primary is 6A, then that in
the secondary coil is 12. An inductor 20 mH, a capacitor 50 μF
and a resistor 40 Ω are connected in
(a) 2 A (b) 18 A
series across a source of emf v = 10 sin
(c) 12 A (d) 1 A
340 t. The power loss in AC circuit is
8. A step-down transformer reduces the (a) 0.76 W (b) 0.89 W
supply voltage from 220 V to 11 V and (c) 0.46 W (d) 0.67 W
increase the current from 6 A to 100 A.
13. Th
e instantaneous values of alternating
Then its efficiency is
current and voltage in a circuit are
(a) 1.2 (b) 0.83
i = 1 sin(100πt ) A and
(c) 0.12 (d) 0.9 2
9. In an electrical circuit, R, L, C and AC  
v = 1 sin100πt + π  V.
voltage source are all connected in 2   3
series. When L is removed from the
circuit, the phase difference between The average power in watts consumed
the voltage and current in the circuit is in the circuit is (IIT Main 2012)
π . Instead, if C is removed from the 1 3
3 (a) (b)
circuit, the phase difference is again π . 4 4
3
The power factor of the circuit is 1
(c) (d)
1
2 8
(NEET 2012) 14. In an oscillating LC circuit, the
maximum charge on the capacitor is Q.
(a) 1 2 (b) 1 The charge on the capacitor when the
2 energy is stored equally between the
(c) 1 (d) 3 2 electric and magnetic fields is
Q Q
10. In a series RL circuit, the resistance (a) (b)
2 3
and inductive reactance are the same. Q
(c) (d) Q
2

16. How will you define RMS value of an
15. 20 H inductor is connected to a
π2 alternating current?
capacitor of capacitance C. The value of 17. What are phasors?
C in order to impart maximum power 18. Define electric resonance.
at 50 Hz is
19. What do you mean by resonant
(a) 50 μF (b) 0.5 μF frequency?
(c) 500 μF (d) 5 μF 20. How will you define Q-factor?
Answers 21. What is meant by wattles current?
1) a 2) d 3) b 4) d 5) a 22. Give any one definition of power factor.
6) a 7) a 8) b 9) c 10) a 23. What are LC oscillations?
11) c 12) c 13) d 14) c 15) d
III Long Answer Questions
II Short Answer Questions 1. Establish the fact that the relative
1. What is meant by electromagnetic motion between the coil and the
induction? magnet induces an emf in the coil of a
closed circuit.
4. State Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic
induction. 2. Give an illustration of determining
direction of induced current by using
5. State Lenz’s law.
Lenz’s law.
6. State Fleming’s right hand rule.
3. Show that Lenz’s law is in accordance
7. How is Eddy current produced? How with the law of conservation of energy.
do they flow in a conductor?
4. Obtain an expression for motional emf
8. Mention the ways of producing induced from Lorentz force.
emf.
5. Using Faraday’s law of electromagnetic
9. What for an inductor is used? Give induction, derive an equation for
some examples. motional emf.
10. What do you mean by self-induction? 6. Give the uses of Foucault current.
11. What is meant by mutual induction? 7. Define self-inductance of a coil interms
12. Give the principle of AC generator. of (i) magnetic flux and (ii) induced
13. List out the advantages of stationary emf.
armature-rotating field system of AC 8. How will you define the unit of
generator. inductance?
14. What are step-up and step-down 9. What do you understand by self-
transformers? inductance of a coil? Give its physical
15. Define average value of an alternating significance.
current. 10. Assuming that the length of the
solenoid is large when compared to

its diameter, find the equation for its 24. Obtain an expression for average power
inductance. of AC over a cycle. Discuss its special
11. An inductor of inductance L carries an cases.
electric current i. How much energy is 25. Show that the total energy is conserved
stored while establishing the current in during LC oscillations.
it? 26. Prove that energy is conserved during
12. Show that the mutual inductance electromagnetic induction.
between a pair of coils is same (M12 = 27. Compare the electromagnetic
M21). oscillations of LC circuit with the
13. How will you induce an emf by mechanical oscillations of block-
changing the area enclosed by the coil? spring system to find the expression
14. Show mathematically that the rotation for angular frequency of LC oscillators
of a coil in a magnetic field over one mathematically.
rotation induces an alternating emf of
one cycle. IV. Numerical problems
15. Elaborate the standard construction 1. A square coil of side 30 cm with 500
details of AC generator. turns is kept in a uniform magnetic
16. Explain the working of a single-phase field of 0.4 T. The plane of the coil is
AC generator with necessary diagram. inclined at an angle of 30o to the field.
17. How are the three different emfs Calculate the magnetic flux through
generated in a three-phase AC the coil. (Ans: 9 Wb)
generator? Show the graphical 2. A straight metal wire crosses a magnetic
representation of these three emfs. field of flux 4 mWb in a time 0.4 s. Find
18. Explain the construction and working the magnitude of the emf induced in
of transformer. the wire. (Ans: 10 mV)
19. Mention the various energy losses in a 3. The magnetic flux passing through
transformer. a coil perpendicular to its plane is
20. Give the advantage of AC in long a function of time and is given by
distance power transmission with an F B = (2t 3 + 4t 2 + 8t + 8) Wb . If the
example. resistance of the coil is 5 Ω, determine
the induced current through the coil at
21. Find out the phase relationship between
a time t = 3 second. (Ans: 17.2 A)
voltage and current in a pure inductive
circuit. 4. A closely wound coil of radius 0.02 m is
placed perpendicular to the magnetic
22. Derive an expression for phase angle
field. When the magnetic field is
between the applied voltage and
changed from 8000 T to 2000 T in
current in a series RLC circuit.
6 s, an emf of 44 V is induced. Calculate
23. Define inductive and capacitive the number of turns in the coil.
reactance. Give their units.
(Ans: 35 turns)

5. A rectangular coil of area 6 cm2 having is 0.04 m. Find the magnetic flux of a
3500 turns is kept in a uniform magnetic turn when it carries a current of 1 A.
field of 0.4 T. Initially, the plane of the (Ans: 1.26 Wb)
coil is perpendicular to the field and is 12. A coil of 200 turns carries a current of
then rotated through an angle of 180o. 0.4 A. If the magnetic flux of 4 mWb is
If the resistance of the coil is 35 Ω, find linked with the coil, find the inductance
the amount of charge flowing through of the coil. (Ans: 2H)
the coil.
13. Two air core solenoids have the
(Ans: 48 × 10-3 C) same length of 80 cm and same
6. An induced current of 2.5 mA flows cross–sectional area 5 cm2. Find the
through a single conductor of resistance mutual inductance between them if the
100 Ω. Find out the rate at which the number of turns in the first coil is 1200
magnetic flux is cut by the conductor. turns and that in the second coil is 400
(Ans: 250 mWbs-1) turns. (Ans: 0.38 mH)
7. A fan of metal blades of length 0.4 m 14. A long solenoid having 400 turns per
rotates normal to a magnetic field of cm carries a current 2A. A 100 turn coil
4 × 10 −3 T . If the induced emf between of cross-sectional area 4 cm2 is placed
the centre and edge of the blade is 0.02 co-axially inside the solenoid so that
V, determine the rate of rotation of the the coil is in the field produced by the
blade. solenoid. Find the emf induced in the
(Ans: 9.95 revolutions/second) coil if the current through the solenoid
8. A bicycle wheel with metal spokes of reverses its direction in 0.04 sec.
1 m long rotates in Earth’s magnetic field. (Ans: 0.20 V)
The plane of the wheel is perpendicular 15. A 200 turn coil of radius 2 cm is placed
to the horizontal component of Earth’s co-axially within a long solenoid of
field of 4 × 10−5 T.If the emf induced 3 cm radius. If the turn density of
across the spokes is 31.4 mV, calculate the solenoid is 90 turns per cm, then
the rate of revolution of the wheel. calculate mutual inductance of the coil.
(Ans: 250 revolutions/second) (Ans: 2.84 mH)
9. Determine the self-inductance of 4000 16. The solenoids S1 and S2 are wound on
turn air-core solenoid of length 2m and an iron-core of relative permeability
diameter 0.04 m. (Ans: 12.62 mH) 900. The area of their cross-section and
10. A coil of 200 turns carries a current of their length are the same and are 4 cm2
4 A. If the magnetic flux through the coil and 0.04 m respectively. If the number
is 6 x 10-5 Wb, find the magnetic energy of turns in S1 is 200 and that in S2 is
stored in the medium surrounding the 800, calculate the mutual inductance
coil. (Ans: 0.024 J) between the coils. The current in
11. A 50 cm long solenoid has 400 turns solenoid 1 is increased form 2A to 8A
per cm. The diameter of the solenoid

in 0.04 second. Calculate the induced Magnetic flux
emf in solenoid 2. b c
d
(Ans: 1.81H; 271.5 V) a
17. A step-down transformer connected
to main supply of 220 V is made to 0 time
operate 11V,88W lamp. Calculate (i)
Transformation ratio and (ii) Current
2. Using Lenz’s law, predict the direction
in the primary.
of induced current in conducting rings
(Ans: 1/20 and 0.4A) 1 and 2 when current in the wire is
18. A 200V/120V step-down transformer steadily decreasing.
of 90% efficiency is connected to an
induction stove of resistance 40 Ω.
Find the current drawn by the primary 1
of the transformer.
(Ans: 2A)
19. The 300 turn primary of a transformer
has resistance 0.82 Ω and the resistance 2
of its secondary of 1200 turns is 6.2 Ω.
Find the voltage across the primary if
the power output from the secondary 3. A flexible metallic loop abcd in the
at 1600V is 32 kW. Calculate the shape of a square is kept in a magnetic
power losses in both coils when the field with its plane perpendicular to the
transformer efficiency is 80%. field. The magnetic field is directed into
(Ans: 8.2 kW and 2.48 kW) the paper normally. Find the direction
20. Calculate the instantaneous value at of the induced current when the square
60o, average value and RMS value of an loop is crushed into an irregular shape
alternating current whose peak value is as shown in the figure.
20 A. (Ans: 17.32A, 12.74A, 14.14 A) × × × × × × × × ×
a b
a b
IV Conceptual Questions × × × × × × × × ×
1. A graph between the magnitude of the
× × × × × × × × ×
magnetic flux linked with a closed loop
d c
and time is given in the figure. Arrange d c
× × × × × × × × ×
the regions of the graph in ascending
order of the magnitude of induced emf
4. Predict the polarity of the capacitor in
in the loop.
a closed circular loop when two bar
magnets are moved as shown in the
figure.

A
7. Draw graphs showing the distribution
B
of charge in a capacitor and current
N S N S through an inductor during LC
oscillations with respect to time.
Assume that the charge in the capacitor
is maximum initially.
5. In series LC circuit, the voltages across
L and C are 180° out of phase. Is it
correct? Explain.
6. When does power factor of a series
RLC circuit become maximum?
BOOK FOR REFERENCES
1. H.C.Verma, Concepts of Physics, Volume 1 and 2, Bharathi Bhawan publishers.

2. Halliday, Resnick and Walker, Principles of Physics, Wiley publishers.
3. D.C.Tayal, Electricity and Magnetism, Himalaya Publishing House.
4. K.K.Tewari, Electricity and Magnetism with Electronics, S.Chand Publishers.
5. B.L.Theraja and A.K.Theraja, A text book of Electrical Technology, Volume 1 and 2,
S.Chand publishers.

ICT CORNER
Electromagnetic induction and alternating current
In this activity you will be able to Topic: Faraday’s

(1) understand electromagnetic induction. electromagnetic lab
(2) verify Faraday’s laws in virtual lab.
STEPS:
• Open the browser and type “phet.colorado.edu” in the address bar. Click play with
simulation tab. Search Faraday’s electromagnetic lab in the search box.
• Select ‘pick coil’ tab. Move the magnet through the coil. Note what happens when the
magnetic field linked with the coil changes. Change the loop area, flux change and observe
the intensity of current with the help of glowing bulb.
• Select ‘Electromagnet’ tab, Change the current flowing through the coil and observe the
change in magnetic flux generated.
• Select ‘Generator’ tab. Observe induced emf in the coil if you change the angular velocity
of the coil.
Step1 Step2
Step3 Step4
Note:
simulation and works in off line from https://phet.colorado.edu/en/offline-access.
URL:
https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/legacy/faraday

UNIT
5 ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
“One scientific epoch ended and another began with James Clerk Maxwell”
– Albert Einstein
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

• the displacement current
• Maxwell’s correction to Ampere's circuital law
• Maxwell’s equation in integral form
• production and properties of electromagnetic waves – Hertz’s experiment
• sources of electromagnetic waves
• electromagnetic spectrum
5.1 and properties of various things from atom

INTRODUCTION to universe. Without light, even our eyes
cannot see objects. What is light?. This puzzle
made many physicists sleepless until middle
of 19th century. Earlier, many scientists
thought that optics and electromagnetism
are two different branches of physics. But
from the work of James Clerk Maxwell, who
actually enlightened the concept of light
from his theoretical prediction is that light is
an electromagnetic wave which moves with
the speed equal to 3 × 108 m/s (in free space
or vacuum). Later, it was confirmed that light
is just only small portion of electromagnetic
Figure 5.1 Visible spectrum – rainbow
spectrum, which ranges from gamma rays
and lightning
to radio waves.
We see the world around us through In the unit 4, we studied that time
light. Light from the Sun is one of the sources varying magnetic field produces an electric
of energy without which we human beings field (Faraday’s law of electromagnetic
cannot survive in this planet. Light plays induction). Maxwell strongly believed that
crucial role in understanding the structure nature must possess symmetry and he asked
283

the following question, “when the time In today's digital world, cell phones
varying magnetic field produces an electric (Figure 5.2 (a)) have greater influence in our
field, why not the time varying electric field day to day life. It is a faster and more effective
produce a magnetic field?” mode of transferring information from one
place to another. It works on the basis that
light is an electromagnetic wave. In hospitals,
the location of bone fracture can be detected
using X-rays as shown in Figure 5.2 (b), which
is also an electromagnetic wave. For cooking
microwave oven is used. The microwave
is also an electromagnetic wave. There are
plenty of applications of electromagnetic
waves in engineering, medical (example
LASER surgery, etc), defence (example,
RADAR signals) and also in fundamental
scientific research. In this unit, basics of
electromagnetic waves are covered.
5.1.1 Displacement current

and Maxwell’s correction to
Symmetry in nature Ampere's circuital law
In unit 4, we studied Faraday’s law of
electromagnetic induction which states that
Later he proved that indeed it exists,
the change in magnetic field produces an
which is often known as Maxwell’s law of
electric field. Mathematically
induction. In 1888, H. Hertz experimentally
verified Maxwell’s predication and hence, ∂ ∂
this understanding resulted in new ∫ E ⋅ dl = − ∂t Φ B
∫
=−
∂t S
B ⋅ dS (5.1)
l
technological invention, especially in ∂ ∂
wireless communication, LASER (Light ∫ E ⋅ dl = −
∂t
Φ B = −
∂t ∫ ⋅ dS
B
l S
Amplification by Stimulated Emission of
Radiation) technology, RADAR (Radio Electric field Variation of Changing magnetic
induced along magnetic flux flux ΦB in the region
Detection And Ranging), etc. a closed loop with time enclosed by the loop
(a) (b) ¶
where ΦB is the magnetic flux and is
¶t
the partial derivative with respect to time.
Equation (5.1) means that the electric field

E is induced along a closed loop by the
changing magnetic flux ΦB in the region
encircled by the loop. Now the question
Figure 5.2 (a) cell phone and cell phone
tower (b) X-ray radiograph of a human being asked by James Clerk Maxwell is ‘Is converse
of this statement true?’ Answer is ‘yes’. He
284 Unit 5 E lectromagnetic waves


showed that the change in electric field also ‘the line integral of the magnetic field B
produces magnetic field which is around any closed loop is equal to µo times
∂ ∂ the net current I threading through the
∫ B ⋅ dl = −
∂t
Φ E = − ⋅ dS (5.2)
∂t ∫
B
area enclosed by the loop’. Ampere's law in
l S
equation form is

∂ ∂
∫ E ⋅ dl = −
∂ t
Φ E = −
∂ t ∫ ⋅ dS
B

l S ∫ B ⋅ dl = µ I (t )
(5.3)
l
Magnetic field Variation of Changing electric
induced along electric flux flux ΦE in the region where µo is the permeability of free space.
a closed loop with time enclosed by the loop
P
where ΦB is the electric flux. This is
S1
known as Maxwell’s law of induction, which

explains that the magnetic field B induced IC
+ –
IC
along a closed loop by the changing electric +q –q
flux ΦE in the region encircled by that loop.
This in turn, explains the existence of radio
waves, gamma rays, infrared rays, etc. + –
V
In order to understand how the changing
Figure 5.4 Applying Ampere's circuital
electric field produces magnetic field, let us
law - loop enclosing surface
consider a situation of ‘charging a parallel
plate capacitor’ shown in Figure 5.3 Assume To calculate the magnetic field at a point
that the medium in between the capacitor P near the wire as shown in Figure 5.4, let
plates is a non-conducting medium. us draw an amperian loop (circular loop)
which encloses the surface S1 (circular
surface). Therefore, using Ampere's circuital
IC IC
+ – law (equation 5.3), we get
+q –q
∫ ⋅ dl = µ0 IC (5.4)
B
S1
+ – where Ic is the conduction current.

V
Suppose the same loop is enclosed by
Figure 5.3 charging of capacitor balloon shaped surface S2 as shown in
Figure 5.5. This means that the boundaries
The electric current passing through of two surfaces S1 and S2 are same but shape
the wire is the conduction current IC. This of the enclosing surfaces are different (first
current generates magnetic field around surface (S1) is circular in shape and second
the wire (refer Unit 3) connected across one is balloon shaped surface (S2)). As the
the capacitor. Therefore, when a magnetic Ampere’s law applied for a given closed loop
needle is kept near the wire, deflection is does not depend on shape of the enclosing
observed. In order to compute the strength surface, the integrals will give the same
of magnetic field at a point, we use Ampere's answer. But by applying Ampere’s circuital
circuital law (from Unit 3) which states that law (equation 5.3), we get
Unit 5 E lectromagnetic waves 285

between the plates of the capacitor also
S2 produces a current known as displacement
current.
IC IC
+ –
+q –q S2 d
+ – →
V E
IC IC
Figure 5.5 Applying Ampere's circuital
+ –
+q –q
law - loop enclosing surface S2

∫ B ⋅ dl = 0 (5.5) + –
enclosing S2 V
The right hand side of equation is Figure 5.6 Applying Gauss’s law between
zero because the surface S2 no where the plates of the capacitor
touches the wire carrying conduction
current and further, there is no current in From Gauss’s law (refer Unit 1), the electric
between the plates of the capacitor (there flux between the plates of the capacitor
is a discontinuity). So the magnetic field (Figure 5.6) is
at a point P is zero. Hence there is an q
inconsistency between equation (5.4) and ⋅ dA = EA = ε0
Φ E = ∫∫ E
equation (5.5). J. C.Maxwell resolved this
inconsistency as follows: where A is the area of the plates of capacitor.
Due to external source (battery or cell), The change in electric flux is
the capacitor gets charged up because of
current flowing through the capacitor. dΦ E 1 dq dq dΦ E
= ⇒ = Id = ε
This produces an increasing electric field dt ε  dt dt dt
between the capacitor plates. So, there must where Id is known as displacement current.
be a current associated with the changing The displacement current can be defined
electric field in between the capacitor plates. as the current which comes into play in
In other words, the time varying electric the region in which the electric field and
flux (or time varying electric field) existing the electric flux are changing with time. In
other words, whenever the change in electric
field takes place, displacement current
Displacement current
Note is produced. Maxwell modified Ampere's
The name stuck because law as
Maxwell named it. The word
displacement is poorly chosen because
nothing is being displaced here. ∫ ⋅ dS = µ I = µ (IC + Id )
B (5.6)

where I = Ic + Id which means the total
5.1.3 Maxwell’s equations in
current enclosed by the surface is sum
integral form
of conduction current and displacement
current. When a constant current is applied, Electrodynamics can be summarized into
displacement current Id = 0 and hence Ic = I. four basic equations, known as Maxwell’s
Between the plates, the conduction current equations. These equations are analogous to
Ic = 0 and hence Id = I. Newton’s equations in mechanics. Maxwell’s
equations completely explain the behaviour
of charges, currents and properties of electric
E X A M P L E 5. 1
and magnetic fields. These equations can
Consider a parallel plate capacitor which be written in integral form (or integration
is maintained at potential of 200 V. If the form) or derivative form (or differentiation
separation distance between the plates of form). The differential form of Maxwell’s
the capacitor and area of the plates are 1 equation is beyond higher secondary
mm and 20 cm2. Calculate the displacement level because we need to learn additional
current for the time in µs. mathematical operations like curl of vector
fields and divergence of vector fields. So we
Solution
focus here only in integral form of Maxwell’s
Potential difference between the plates of equations:
the capacitor, V = 200 V 1. First equation is nothing but the Gauss’s
The distance between the plates, law. It relates the net electric flux to net
electric charge enclosed in a surface.
d = 1 mm = 1 × 10-3 m Mathematically, it is expressed as
Area of the plates of the capacitor, Qenclosed

∫ ⋅ dA = ε
E (Gauss’s law) (5.7)
A = 20 cm2 = 20 × 10-4 m2

where E is the electric field and Qenclosed
Time is given in micro-second, µs = 10-6 s
is the charge enclosed. This equation
Displacement current is true for both discrete or continuous
distribution of charges. It also indicates
that the electric field lines start from
dΦ B EA
Id = ε ⇒ Id = ε positive charge and terminate at
dt t
negative charge. This implies that
the electric field lines do not form
V
But electric field, E = a continuous closed path. In other
d
words, it means that isolated positive
Therefore, charge or negative charge can exist.
2.
Second equation has no name. But
V VA 200×20×10−4
I= Id = ε = 8.85×10−12 × −6 this law is similar to Gauss’s law in
d td 10 ×1×10−3
electrostatics. So this law can also be
= 35400×10−7 = 3.5 mA
called as Gauss’s law in magnetism. The


surface integral of magnetic field over a where B is the magnetic field. This equation
closed surface is zero. Mathematically, shows that both conduction and also
displacement current produces magnetic
∫ ⋅ dA = 0
B (Noname) (5.8)
field. These four equations are known as
 Maxwell’s equations in electrodynamics.
where B is the magnetic field. This
equation implies that the magnetic This equation ensures the existence
lines of force form a continuous closed of electromagnetic waves. The entire
path. In other words, it means that no communication system in the world
isolated magnetic monopole exists. depends on electromagnetic waves. In fact
3.
Third equation is Faraday’s law of our understanding of stars, galaxy, planets
electromagnetic induction. This law etc come by analysing the electromagnetic
relates electric field with the changing waves emitted by these astronomical objects.
magnetic flux which is mathematically
5.2
written as
ELECTROMAGNETIC
d WAVES
∫ ⋅ dl = − dt Φ B (Faraday’s law) (5.9)
E

where E is the electric field. This Electromagnetic waves are non-
equation implies that the line integral mechanical waves which move with speed
of the electric field around any closed equals to the speed of light (in vacuum).
path is equal to the rate of change of It is a transverse wave. In the following
magnetic flux through the closed path subsections, we discuss the production of
bounded by the surface. Our modern electromagnetic waves and its properties,
technological revolution is due to sources of electromagnetic waves and also
Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic classification of electromagnetic spectrum.
induction. The electrical energy
supplied to our houses from electricity
board by using Faraday’s law of 5.2.1 Production and
induction. properties of electromagnetic
4. Fourth equation is modified Ampere’s waves - Hertz experiment
circuital law. This is also known as Maxwell’s prediction was experimentally
Ampere – Maxwell’s law. This law confirmed by Heinrich Rudolf Hertz (Figure
relates the magnetic field around any 5.7 (a)) in 1888. The experimental set up
closed path to the conduction current used is shown in Figure 5.7 (b).
and displacement current through that It consists of two metal electrodes which
path. are made of small spherical metals as
shown in Figure 5.7. These are connected
d to larger spheres and the ends of them are
∫ B.dl = µ I
0 enclosed + µ ε
0 0
dt ∫s
E .dA
connected to induction coil with very large
(5.10)
(Ampere-Maxwell ’s law
w) number of turns. This is to produce very
high electromotive force (emf). Since the

2. Spark produces
3. Electromagnectic waves create electromagnetic waves
electric current in resonator, pro-
duces small spark in spark gap
1. Induction coil produces

high voltage
Figure 5.7 Hertz experiment (a) Heinrich Rudolf Hertz (1857 – 1894) (b) Hertz apparatus
coil is maintained at very high potential, The electric and magnetic fields are in
air between the electrodes gets ionized the y and z directions respectively and
and spark (spark means discharge of the direction of propagation is along x
electricity) is produced. The gap between direction. This is shown in Figure 5.8.
electrode (ring type – not completely closed 4.
Electromagnetic waves travel with
and has a small gap in between) kept at a speed which is equal to the speed
distance also gets spark. This implies that of light in vacuum or free space,
the energy is transmitted from electrode 1
to the receiver (ring electrode) as a wave, c= = 3×108 ms-1 , where εo is the
εµ 
known as electromagnetic waves. If the
permittivity of free space or vacuum
receiver is rotated by 90° - then no spark is
and µo is the permeability of free space
observed by the receiver. This confirms that
or vacuum (refer Unit 1 for permittivity
electromagnetic waves are transverse waves
and Unit 3 for permeability).
as predicted by Maxwell. Hertz detected
radio waves and also computed the speed of 5.
In a medium with permittivity ε
radio waves which is equal to the speed of and permeability µ, the speed of
light (3 × 108 m s-1). electromagnetic wave is less than
speed in free space or vacuum, that is,
Properties of electromagnetic waves v < c. In a medium of refractive index,
1. Electromagnetic waves are produced 1
by any accelerated charge. c εµ 
2. Electromagnetic waves do not µ= = ⇒ µ = ε r µ r , where εr is
v 1
require any medium for propagation. εµ
So electromagnetic wave is a non- the relative permittivity of the medium
mechanical wave. (also known as dielectric constant) and
3. Electromagnetic waves are transverse in µr is the relative permeability of the
nature. This means that the oscillating medium.
electric field vector, oscillating magnetic
field vector and propagation vector
6.
Electromagnetic waves are not
(gives direction of propagation) are deflected by electric field or magnetic
mutually perpendicular to each other. field.

z

E
y
Direction of
propagation

B
Figure 5.8 Electromagnetic waves – transverse wave
7. Electromagnetic waves can show 10. The energy crossing per unit area
interference, diffraction and can also per unit time and perpendicular
be polarized. to the direction of propagation of
8. The energy density (energy per electromagnetic wave is called the
unit volume) associated with an intensity.
electromagnetic wave propagating in Intensity, I = u c or
vacuum or free space is total electromagneticenergy (U)
1 1 2 I=
u = ε E 2 + B Surfacearea(A)×time(t)
2 2µ 
Powerr (P)
1 =
where, ε  E 2 = uE is the energy density Surfacearea(A)
2
1 2
in an electric field and B = uB is
2µ 0 For a point source,
the energy density in a magnetic field. Note
Since, E = Bc ⇒ uB = uE.
The energy density of the For a line source,
electromagnetic wave is
For a plane source, I is independent of r
1 2
u = ε0 E 2 = B
µ0
11. Like other waves, electromagnetic
9. The average energy density waves also carry energy and
for electromagnetic wave, momentum. For the electromagnetic
1 1 1 2 wave of energy U propagating with
u = ε E 2 = B.
2 2 µ speed c has linear momentum which

Energy U 5.2.2 Sources of
is given by = = . The force
speed c electromagnetic
exerted by an electromagnetic wave on
waves
unit area of a surface is called radiation
pressure. Propagation of an Electromagnetic Wave
Source
12. If the electromagnetic wave incident
on a material surface is completely

E
absorbed, then the energy delivered Discharging

B Z
spark or Magnetic Direction
is U and momentum imparted on the oscillating
molecular
field Electric
field
vectors
U dipole vectors
surface is p = .
c Figure 5.9 Oscillating charges - sources
13. If the incident electromagnetic wave of
of electromagnetic waves
energy U is totally reflected from the
surface, then the momentum delivered Any stationary source charge produces only
U  U U electric field (refer Unit 1). When the charge
to the surface is ∆p = − −  = 2 .
c  c  c moves with uniform velocity, it produces steady
14. The rate of flow of energy crossing a
current which gives rise to magnetic field
unit area is known as pointing vector
(not time dependent, only space dependent)
for electromagnetic waves, which is
1 around the conductor in which charge flows.
S = ( E × B ) = c 2 ε ( E × B ). The unit for If the charged particle accelerates, in addition
µ
to electric field it also produces magnetic
pointing vector is W m-2. The pointing
field. Both electric and magnetic fields are
vector at any point gives the direction
time varying fields. Since the electromagnetic
of energy transport from that point.
waves are transverse waves, the direction
15.
Electromagnetic waves carries not of propagation of electromagnetic waves is
only energy and momentum but also perpendicular to the plane containing electric
angular momentum. and magnetic field vectors.
Any oscillatory motion is also an
E X A M P L E 5. 2
accelerating motion, so, when the charge
The relative magnetic permeability of the oscillates (oscillating molecular dipole)
medium is 2.5 and the relative electrical about their mean position as shown in Figure
permittivity of the medium is 2.25. Compute 5.9, it produces electromagnetic waves.
the refractive index of the medium. Suppose the electromagnetic field in free
Solution space propagates along z direction, and if the
electric field vector points along y axis then
Dielectric constant (relative permeability
the magnetic field vector will be mutually
of the medium) is εr = 2.25
perpendicular to both electric field and the
Magnetic permeability is µr = 2.5 propagation vector direction, which means
Refractive index of the medium, E y = E sin (k z − ωt )
n = ε r µ r = 2.25×2.5 = 2.37 Bx = B sin (k z − ωt )

where, Eo and Bo are amplitude of oscillating
5.2.3 Electromagnetic
electric and magnetic field, k is a wave
spectrum
number, ω is the angular frequency of the
wave and  k (unit vector, here it is called ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM
propagation vector) denotes the direction of
propagation of electromagnetic wave.
Note that both electric field and magnetic
field oscillate with a frequency (frequency
of electromagnetic wave) which is equal to
the frequency of the source (here, oscillating
charge is the source for the production
ELECTROMAGNETIC of
SPECTRUM
electromagnetic waves). In free space or in
vacuum, the ratio between Eo and Bo is equal
to the speed of electromagnetic wave, which
is equal to speed of light c.
E
c=
B Figure 5.10 Electromagnetic spectrum -
In any medium, the ratio of Eo and Bo is
equal to the speed of electromagnetic wave Electromagnetic spectrum is an orderly
in that medium, mathematically, it can be distribution of electromagnetic waves in
written as terms of wavelength or frequency as shown
E in Figure 5.10.
v= <c
B Radio waves
Further, the energy of electromagnetic waves It is produced by oscillators in electric
comes from the energy of the oscillating circuits. The wavelength range is 1 × 10-1
charge. m to 1 × 104 m and frequency range is 3 ×
109 Hz to 3 × 104 Hz. It obeys reflection and
E X A M P L E 5. 3
diffraction. It is used in radio and television
Compute the speed of the electromagnetic communication systems and also in cellular
wave in a medium if the amplitude of phones to transmit voice communication in
electric and magnetic fields are 3 × 104 N the ultra high frequency band.
C-1 and 2 × 10-4 T, respectively.
Microwaves
Solution
It is produced by electromagnetic
The amplitude of the electric field, Eo = 3 × oscillators in electric circuits. The
104 N C-1 wavelength range is 1 × 10-3 m to 3 × 10-1 m
The amplitude of the magnetic field, and frequency range is 3 × 1011 Hz to 1 × 109
Bo = 2 × 10-4 T. Therefore, speed of the Hz. It obeys reflection and polarization. It is
electromagnetic wave in a medium is used in radar system for aircraft navigation,
speed of the vehicle, microwave oven for
3×104 cooking and very long distance wireless
v= −4
= 1.5×108 ms−1
2×10 communication through satellites.

Activity
Measuring the speed of light using the microwave oven
Nowadays the microwave oven is very commonly used to heat the food items. Micro waves
of wavelengths 1 mm to 30 cm are produced in these ovens. Such waves form the standing
waves between the interior walls of the oven. It is interesting to note that the speed of light
can be measured using micro wave oven.
H
Hot H
Hot H
Hot Ho
Hot o
Hot
(a)
(b) (c) (d)
We studied about the standing waves in XI physics, Volume 2, Unit 11. The standing waves have
nodes and antinodes at fixed points. At node point, the amplitude of the wave is zero and at
antinodes point, the amplitude is maximum. In other words, the maximal energy of microwaves
is located at antinode points. When we keep some food items like chappathi or choclate (after
removing the rotating platform) inside the oven, we can notice that at antinode locations, chappathi
will be burnt more than other locations. It is shown in the Figure (c) and (d). The distance between
two successive burnt spots will give the wavelength of microwave. The frequency of microwave
is printed in the panel of oven. By knowing wavelength and frequency of microwaves, using the
formula vλ = c, we can calculate the speed of light c.
Infrared radiation 1014 Hz to 4 × 1014 Hz. It obeys the laws

It is produced from hot bodies (also known of reflection, refraction, interference,
as heat waves) and also when the molecules diffraction, polarization, photo-electric
undergo rotational and vibrational transitions. effect and photographic action. It can be
The wavelength range is 8 × 10-7 m to 5 × 10-3 m used to study the structure of molecules,
and frequency range are 4 × 1014 Hz to 6 × 1010 arrangement of electrons in external shells
Hz. It provides electrical energy to satellites of atoms and sensation of our eyes.
by means of solar cells. It is used to produce Ultraviolet radiation
dehydrated fruits, in green houses to keep It is produced by Sun, arc and ionized
the plants warm, heat therapy for muscular gases. The wavelength range is 6 × 10-10 m
pain or sprain, TV remote as a signal carrier, to 4 × 10-7 m and frequency range are 5 ×
to look through haze fog or mist and used in 1017 Hz to 7 × 1014 Hz. It has less penetrating
night vision or infrared photography. power. It can be absorbed by atmospheric
Visible light ozone and harmful to human body. It is
It is produced by incandescent bodies used to destroy bacteria, sterilizing the
and also it is radiated by excited atoms in surgical instruments, burglar alarm, detect
gases. The wavelength range is 4 × 10-7 m the invisible writing, finger prints and also
to 7 × 10-7 m and frequency range are 7 × in the study of molecular structure.

Table 5.1 visible region, frequency frequency range are 3 × 1022 Hz to 3 × 1018
and wavelength of different types of Hz. Gamma rays have high penetrating
radiation power than X-rays and ultraviolet radiations;
it has no charge but harmful to human body.
Infrared
light
Ultraviolet
light Gamma rays provide information about the
700 600 500 400 structure of atomic nuclei. It is used in radio
Type of Frequency Wavelength therapy for the treatment of cancer and
Radiation Range (Hz) Range tumour, in food industry to kill pathogenic
gamma-rays 1020-1024 <10-12m microorganism.
x-rays 1017-1020 1 nm - 1pm
E X A M P L E 5. 4
ultraviolet 1015-1017 400 nm - 1nm
A magnetron in a microwave oven emits
visible 4 - 7.5 × 1014 750 nm - 400nm
electromagnetic waves (em waves) with
near-infrared 1 × 1014-4 × 1014 2.5 μm - 750nm
frequency f = 2450 MHz. What magnetic
infrared 1013-1014 25 μm - 2.5μm field strength is required for electrons to
microwaves 3 × 1011-1013 1 mm - 25 μm move in circular paths with this frequency?.
radio waves < 3 × 1011 > 1 mm
Solution
X-rays Frequency of the electromagnetic waves
It is produced when there is a sudden given is f = 2450 MHz
deceleration of high speed electrons at high- The corresponding angular frequency is
atomic number target, and also by electronic ω = 2πf = 2 x 3.14 x 2450 x 106
transitions among the innermost orbits of
= 15,386 x 106 Hz
atoms. The wavelength range 10-13 m to 10-8
= 1.54 × 1010 s-1
m and frequency range are 3 × 1021 Hz to 1 ×
me ω
1016 Hz. X-rays have more penetrating power The magnetic field B =
q
than ultraviolet radiation. X-rays are used
extensively in studying structures of inner Mass of the electron, me = 9.22 x 10-31 kg
atomic electron shells and crystal structures. It Charge of the electron
is used in detecting fractures, diseased organs,
q = −1.60×10−19 C ⇒ q = 1.60×10−19 C
formation of bones and stones, observing
the progress of healing bones. Further, in a (9.22×10 )(1.54×10 )
−31 10
−2
B= = 8.87425×10 T
finished metal product, it is used to detect (1.60×10 ) −19
faults, cracks, flaws and holes.

B = 0.0887 T
Gamma rays
This magnetic field can be easily
It is produced by transitions of atomic
produced with a permanent magnet. So,
nuclei and decay of certain elementary
electromagnetic waves of frequency 2450
particles. They produce chemical reactions
MHz can be used for heating and cooking
on photographic plates, fluorescence,
food because they are strongly absorbed by
ionisation, diffraction. The wavelength
water molecules.
range is 1 × 10-14 m to 1 × 10-10 m and

5.3
TYPES OF SPECTRUM-
EMISSION AND
ABSORPTION SPECTRUM-
FRAUNHOFER LINES
Figure 5.12 White light passed through

Blackbody radiation curves
prism – dispersion
6000 K Bodies radiating at similar
temperaturees pattern of colours obtained on the screen
Surface of the sun ≈ 6000 K
after dispersion is called as spectrum. The
Carbon arc lamp ≈ 4000 K plural for spectrum is spectra. The spectra
Lamp filament max ≈ 3000 K
can be broadly classified into two catagories:
Intensity
4000 K
3000 K (a)Emission spectra
When the spectrum of self luminous source
is taken, we get emission spectrum. Each
source has its own characteristic emission
spectrum. The emission spectrum can be
Ultraviolet Infrared
divided into three types:
Wavelength
(i)
Continuous emission spectra (or
Figure 5.11 Black body radiation continuous spectra)
spectrum – variation with temperature Continuous spectrum
When an object burns, it emits colours. That

is, it emits electromagnetic radiation which Figure 5.13 continuous emission spectra
depends on temperature. If the object becomes
hot then it glows in red colour. If the temperature If the light from incandescent lamp
of the object is further increased then it glows (filament bulb) is allowed to pass through
in reddish-orange colour and becomes white prism (simplest spectroscope), it splits
when it is hottest. The spectrum in Figure 5.11 into seven colours. Thus, it consists of
usually called as black body spectrum (refer wavelengths containing all the visible
plus one volume two Unit 8). It is a continuous colours ranging from violet to red (Figure
frequency (or wavelength) curve and depends 5.13). Examples: spectrum obtained from
on the body’s temperature. carbon arc, incandescent solids, liquids
Suppose we allow a beam of white light to gives continuous spectra.
pass through the prism as shown in Figure (ii) Line emission spectrum (or line spectrum):
5.12, it is split into its seven constituent
Hot gas
colours which can be viewed on the screen as Emission spectrum
continuous spectrum. This phenomenon is

known as dispersion of light and the definite Figure 5.14 line emission spectra

Suppose light from hot gas is allowed to pass When light from the incandescent lamp
through prism, line spectrum is observed is passed through cold gas (medium), the
(Figure 5.14). Line spectra are also known spectrum obtained through the dispersion
as discontinuous spectra. The line spectra due to prism is line absorption spectrum
are sharp lines of definite wavelengths or (Figure 5.15). Similarly, if the light from the
frequencies. Such spectra arise due to excited carbon arc is made to pass through sodium
atoms of elements. These lines are the vapour, a continuous spectrum of carbon
characteristics of the element which means it
arc with two dark lines in the yellow region
is different for different elements. Examples:
of sodium vapour is obtained.
spectra of atomic hydrogen, helium, etc.
(iii) Band absorption spectrum
(3) Band emission spectrum (or band spectrum)
When the white light is passed through the
Band spectrum consists of several number
of very closely spaced spectral lines which iodine vapour, dark bands on continuous
overlapped together forming specific bands bright background is obtained. This type
which are separated by dark spaces, known of band is also obtained when white light is
as band spectra. This spectrum has a sharp passed through diluted solution of blood or
edge at one end and fades out at the other end. chlorophyll or through certain solutions of
Such spectra arise when the molecules are organic and inorganic compounds.
excited. Band spectrum is the characteristic Fraunhofer lines
of the molecule hence, the structure of the
molecules can be studied using their band
spectra. Examples, spectra of hydrogen gas,
ammonia gas in the discharge tube etc.
(b) Absorption spectra
When light is allowed to pass through Figure 5.16 Solar spectrum - Fraunhofer
a medium or an absorbing substance lines
then the spectrum obtained is known as
absorption spectrum. It is the characteristic When the spectrum obtained from the Sun
of absorbing substance. Absorption is examined, it consists of large number of
spectrum is classified into three types: dark lines (line absorption spectrum). These
(i) Continuous absorption spectrum dark lines in the solar spectrum are known
When the light is passed through a medium, as Fraunhofer lines (Figure 5.16). The
it is dispersed by the prism, we get continuous absorption spectra for various materials are
absorption spectrum. For instance, when we compared with the Fraunhofer lines in the
pass white light through a blue glass plate, it solar spectrum, which helps in identifying
absorbs everything except blue. This is an elements present in the Sun’s atmosphere.
example of continuous absorption spectrum.
(ii) Line absorption spectrum
Gold gas Absorption spectrum
Figure 5.15 line absorption spectra

SUMMARY
Displacement current can be defined as ‘the current which comes into play in the
region in which the electric field and the electric flux are changing with time’
Maxwell modified Ampere's law as

∫ ⋅ dS = µo I = µo (Ic + Id )
B
An electromagnetic wave is radiated by an accelerated charge which propagates
through space as coupled electric and magnetic fields, oscillating perpendicular to
each other and to the direction of propagation of the wave
Electromagnetic wave is a transverse wave. They are non-mechanical wave and do
not require any medium for propagation
The instantaneous magnitude of the electric and magnetic field vectors in
electromagnetic wave are related by E = Bc
Electromagnetic waves are transverse in nature. This means that the oscillating
electric field vector, oscillating magnetic field vector and propagation vector are
(gives direction of propagation) mutually perpendicular to each other
Electromagnetic waves can show interference, diffraction and also can be polarized
1 2
The average energy density u = 2ue = 2um = ε  E 2 = B
µ
The energy crossing per unit area per unit time and perpendicular to the direction of
propagation of electromagnetic wave is called the intensity, which is I = u c
If the electromagnetic wave incident on a material surface is completely absorbed,
U
then the energy delivered is U and momentum imparted on the surface is p =
c
If the incident electromagnetic wave of energy U is totally reflected from the surface,
U  U  U
then the momentum delivered to the surface is ∆p = − −  = 2
c  c  c
The rate of flow of energy crossing a unit area is known as poynting vector for
1
electromagnetic waves, which is S =
µ
( E × B ) = c 2 ε ( E × B ).
Electromagnetic waves carry not only energy and momentum but also angular
momentum.
Types of spectrum – emission and absorption
When the spectrum of self luminous source is taken, we get emission spectrum. Each
source has its own characteristic emission spectrum. The emission spectrum can be
divided into three types: continuous, line and band.
The spectrum obtained from the Sun is examined, it consists of large number of dark
lines (line absorption spectrum). These dark lines in the solar spectrum are known
as Fraunhofer lines.

CONCEPT MAP
Electromagnetic waves
Displacement Sources
Current
Maxwell’s Production
equations
EM Spectrum
Absorption Emission
Spectrum Spectrum
Continuous Band Emission

Line Absorption
Absorption Spectrum
Spectrum
Spectrum
Band Absorption
Spectrum Continuous
Emission Spectrum
Franhofer Lines
Line Emission
Spectrum

EVALUATION
I Multiple choice questions
(c) E = Ei and B = B j
1
1. The dimension of is
µo ε (d) E = E j and B = Bi
(a) [L T−1] (b) [L2 T−2]
7. In an electromagnetic wave in free
(c) [L−1 T] (d) [L−2 T2]
space the rms value of the electric
2. If the amplitude of the magnetic field is field is 3 V m−1. The peak value of the
3 × 10−6 T, then amplitude of the electric magnetic field is
field for a electromagnetic waves is
(a) 1.414 × 10−8 T (b) 1.0 × 10−8 T
(a) 100 V m −1
(b) 300 V m −1
(c) 2.828 × 10−8 T (d) 2.0 × 10−8 T
(c) 600 V m −1
(d) 900 V m −1
3. Which of the following electromagnetic 8. During the propagation of

radiation is used for viewing objects electromagnetic waves in a medium:
through fog (a) electric energy density is double of
(a) microwave (b) gamma rays the magnetic energy density
(c) X- rays (d) infrared (b) electric energy density is half of the
magnetic energy density
4. Which of the following are false
for electromagnetic waves (c) electric energy density is equal to
the magnetic energy density
(a) transverse
(d) both electric and magnetic energy
(b) mechanical waves
densities are zero
(c) longitudinal
9.If the magnetic monopole exists,
(d) produced by accelerating charges then which of the Maxwell’s equation
5. Consider an oscillator which has a to be modified?.
charged particle and oscillates about Qenclosed
its mean position with a frequency (a) ∫ E ⋅ dA =
∈
of 300 MHz. The wavelength of
(b) ∫ E ⋅ dA = 0
electromagnetic waves produced by
d
(c) ∫ E ⋅ dA = µ I enclosed + µ ∈
dt ∫
this oscillator is E ⋅ dA
(a) 1 m (b) 10 m d
(d) ∫ E ⋅ dl = − ΦB
(c) 100 m (d) 1000 m dt
6. The electric and the magnetic field, 10. A radiation of energy E falls normally
associated with an electromagnetic on a perfectly reflecting surface. The
wave, propagating along X axis can be momentum transferred to the surface
represented by is
E E
(a) (b) 2
(a) E = E j and B = B
k c c
E
(b) E = E k and B = B 
j (c) Ec (d) 2
c

11. Which of the following is an Answers
electromagnetic wave? 1) b 2) d 3) d 4) c 5) a
(a) α - rays (b) β - rays 6) b 7) a 8) c 9) b 10) b
(c) γ - rays (d) all of them 11) c 12) a 13) d 14) d 15) a
12. Which one of them is used to produce a
propagating electromagnetic wave?. II Short answer questions
(a) an accelerating charge 1. What is displacement current?
(b) a charge moving at constant velocity 2. What are electromagnetic waves?
(c) a stationary charge
3. Write down the integral form of
(d) an uncharged particle modified Ampere’s circuital law.
13. Let E = Eo sin[106 x -ωt] be the electric 4. Explain the concept of intensity of
field of plane electromagnetic wave, electromagnetic waves.
the value of ω is 5. What is meant by Fraunhofer lines?
(a) 0.3 × 10 −14
rad s −1
(b) 3 × 10−14 rad s−1 III Long answer questions

(c) 0.3 × 10 rad s14 −1
1. Write down Maxwell equations in
(d) 3 × 10 rad s
14 −1
integral form.
14. Which of the following is NOT true for 2. Write short notes on (a) microwave
electromagnetic waves?. (b) X-ray (c) radio waves (d) visible
spectrum
(a) it transport energy
3. Discuss briefly the experiment
(b) it transport momentum
conducted by Hertz to produce and
(c) it transport angular momentum detect electromagnetic spectrum.
(d) in vacuum, it travels with different 4. Explain the Maxwell’s modification of
speeds which depend on their Ampere’s circuital law.
frequency
5. Write down the properties of
15. The electric and magnetic fields of an electromagnetic waves.
electromagnetic wave are 6. Discuss the source of electromagnetic
(a) in phase and perpendicular to each waves.
other 7. What is emission spectra?. Give their
(b) out of phase and not perpendicular types.
to each other 8. What is absorption spectra?. Give their
(c) in phase and not perpendicular to types.
each other
(d) out of phase and perpendicular to
each other

IV Numerical problems pulse is 60 × 10−3 W, calculate the final
1. Consider a parallel plate capacitor momentum of the object.
whose plates are closely spaced. Let R be Answer: 20 × 10−17 kg m s−1
the radius of the plates and the current 4. Let an electromagnetic wave propagate
in the wire connected to the plates is along the x direction, the magnetic
5 A, calculate the displacement current field oscillates at a frequency of 1010 Hz
through the surface passing between and has an amplitude of 10−5 T, acting
the plates by directly calculating the along the y - direction. Then, compute
rate of change of flux of electric field the wavelength of the wave. Also write
through the surface. down the expression for electric field
Answer: Id = Ic = 5 A in this case.
2. A transmitter consists of LC circuit with Answer: λ = 3 × 10−18 m and

an inductance of 1 µH and a capacitance E (x , t ) = 3×103 sin(2.09×1018 x − 6.28×1010 t )
i N C −1
of 1 µF. What is the wavelength of 5. If the relative permeability and relative
the electromagnetic waves it emits? permittivity of the medium is 1.0 and
Answer: 18.84 × 10−6 m 2.25, respectively. Find the speed of the
3. A pulse of light of duration 10−6 s is electromagnetic wave in this medium.
absorbed completely by a small object Answer: v = 2 m s−1
initially at rest. If the power of the
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. H. C. Verma, Concepts of Physics – Volume 2, Bharati Bhawan Publisher

2. Halliday, Resnick and Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, Wiley Publishers, 10th edition
3. Serway and Jewett, Physics for scientist and engineers with modern physics, Brook/Coole
publishers, Eighth edition
4. David J. Griffiths, Introduction to electrodynamics, Pearson publishers
5. Paul Tipler and Gene Mosca, Physics for scientist and engineers with modern physics, Sixth
edition, W.H.Freeman and Company
301

ICT CORNER
Electromagnetic waves
Physics of
In this activity you will be able to how do microwaves and
microwaves heat food? heating food
STEPS:
• Open the browser and type “phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/microwaves” in the address bar.
Run the simulation.
• select ‘one molecule’ tab. Turn on the microwave using the button in the right control panel. The
arrows indicate the strength and direction of the force that would be exerted by the micro wave
on the water molecules present in food. Observe the response of water molecule in response to
this force?
• Observe how do microwaves heat food by rotating water molecule?
• Change amplitude and frequency of microwave and discuss how fast the water molecules are
rotating?
Step1 Step2
Step3 Step4
Discuss the relationship between rotating speed of the molecule with cooking time.
Note:
simulation and works in off line from https://phet.colorado.edu/en/offline-access.
URL:
https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/microwaves
302

Higher Secondary Second Year
PHYSICS
PRACTICAL
303
XII-Physics_Vol-1) PRACTICAL.indd 303 04-03-2019 11:06:33

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of the specific resistance of the material of the given coil using metre bridge.
2. Determination of the value of the horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field using
tangent galvanometer.
3. Determination of the magnetic field at a point on the axis of a circular coil.
4. Determination of the refractive index of the material of the prism by finding angle of prism and
angle of minimum deviation using spectrometer.
5. Determination of the wavelength of a composite light by normal incidence method using

diffraction grating and spectrometer (The number of lines per metre length of the grating is
given).
6. Investigation of the voltage-current (V-I) characteristics of PN junction diode.
7. Investigation of the voltage-current (V-I) characteristics of Zener diode.
8. Investigation of the static characteristics of a NPN Junction transistor in common emitter

configuration.
9. Verification of the truth table of the basic logic gates using integrated circuits.
10. Verification of De Morgan’s theorems using integrated circuits.
304

1. SPECIFIC RESISTANCE OF THE MATERIAL OF THE COIL USING
METRE BRIDGE
AIM To determine the specific resistance of the material of the given coil
using metre bridge.
APPARATUS REQUIRED
Meter bridge, galvanometer, key, resistance box, connecting wires,
Lechlanche cell, jockey and high resistance.
X πr 2
FORMULA ρ= (Ωm)
L
where, X → Resistance of the given coil (Ω)
R → Known resistance (Ω)

L → Length of the coil (m)

r → Radius of the wire (m)

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
X
R
D
G1 G2
G
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
A J HR B
l (100 - l)
+ –
( )
Lechlanche cell K
PROCEDURE
• A resistance box R is connected in the left gap and the unknown resistance X in the right gap.
• A Lechlanche cell is connected across the wire of length 1 m through a key.
•
A sensitive galvanometer G is connected between the central strip and the jockey through a
high resistance (HR).
• With a suitable resistance included in the resistance box, the circuit is switched on.
•
To check the circuit connections, the jockey is pressed near one end of the wire, say A.
The galvanometer will show deflection in one direction. When the jockey is pressed near the
other end of the wire B, the galvanometer will show deflection in the opposite directions.
This ensures that the circuit connections are correct.
305

•
By moving the jockey over the wire, the point on the wire at which the galvanometer shows
null deflection i.e., balancing point J is found.
• The balancing length AJ = l is noted.
R (100 − l )
• The unknown resistance X1 is found using the formula X 1 = .
l
• The experiment is repeated for different values of R.
•
The same procedure is repeated after interchanging R and X.
Rl
•
The unknown resistance X2 is found using the formula X 2 = .
(100 − l )
•
The experiment is repeated for same values of R as before.
•
The resistance of the given coil is found from the mean value of X1 and X2.
• The radius of the wire r is found using screw gauge.
• The length of the coil L is measured using meter scale.
•
From the values of X, r and L, the specific resistance of the material of the wire is determined.
OBSERVATION
length of the coil L = ____________________________________ cm.
Table 1 To find the resistance of the given coil
Before interchanging After interchanging Mean

Resistance X + X2
S.No. Balancing Balancing X= 1
R (Ω) Rl
length l R (100 − l ) length l X 2 = 2
X1 = (Ω) (100 − l ) (Ω)
(cm) l (cm) (Ω)
1
Mean resistance, X = -----------Ω
306

Table 2 To find the radius of the wire
Zero error =
Zero correction = LC = 0.01 mm
Total Reading Corrected Reading
PSR HSC
Sl.No. = PSR + (HSC × LC) = TR ± ZC
(mm) (div.)
(mm) (mm)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Mean diameter 2r = . . . . . . . . . . . cm
Radius of the wire r = . . . . . . . . . . . cm
r= ........... m
CALCULATION
X πr 2
(i) ρ = =
L
RESULT
The specific resistance of the material of the given coil = _____________________(Ωm)
Note:
i)
To check the circuit connections:
The meter bridge wire is touched near one end (say, end A) with jockey, galvanometer
shows a deflection in any one direction. Now the other end (say, end B) is touched. If the
galvanometer shows a deflection in the opposite direction, then the circuit connections are
correct.
ii)
The usage of high resistance (HR):
The galvanometer is a very sensitive device. If any high current flows through the galvanom-
eter, its coil gets damaged. Therefore in order to protect the galvanometer, a high resistance
(HR) is used. When HR is connected in series with the galvanometer, the current through it
is reduced so that the galvanometer is protected. But the balancing length is not accurate.
iii) To find the accurate balancing length:
The HR is first included in the circuit (that is, the plug key in HR is removed), the approx-
imate balancing length is found. Now HR is excluded in the circuit (that is, the plug key in
HR is closed), then the accurate balancing length is found.
307

2. HORIZONTAL COMPONENT OF EARTH’S MAGNETIC FIELD
USING TANGENT GALVANOMETER
AIM
To determine the horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field
using tangent galvanometer.
APPARATUS REQUIRED
Tangent galvanometer (TG), commutator, battery, rheostat, ammeter,
key and connecting wires.
µ 0nk
FORMULA BH = (Tesla)
2r
I
k= (A)
tanθ
where, BH → Horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field (T)
µ0 → Permeability of free space (4π × 10−7 H m−1)
n → Number of turns of TG in the circuit (No unit)
k → Reduction factor of TG (A)
r → Radius of the coil (m)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Clrcular coil
Compass box
Pointer
Leveling screw
Terminals
Figure (a) Tangent Galvanometer Figure (b) Number of turns
k Bt
( ) + –
C TG
+A –
Rh
(c) Circuit diagram
308

PROCEDURE
• The preliminary adjustments are carried out as follows.
a. The leveling screws at the base of TG are adjusted so that the circular turn table is horizontal
and the plane of the circular coil is vertical.
b. The circular coil is rotated so that its plane is in the magnetic meridian i.e., along the north-
south direction.
c. The compass box alone is rotated till the aluminium pointer reads 0° − 0°.
• The connections are made as shown in Figure (c).
• The number of turns n is selected and the circuit is switched on.
• The range of current through TG is chosen in such a way that the deflection of the aluminium
pointer lies between 30° − 60°.
• A suitable current is allowed to pass through the circuit, the deflections θ1 and θ2 are noted from
two ends of the aluminium pointer.
• Now the direction of current is reversed using commutator C, the deflections θ3 and θ4 in the
opposite direction are noted.
• The mean value θ of θ1, θ2, θ3 and θ4 is calculated and tabulated.
• The reduction factor k is calculated for each case and it is found that k is a constant.
• The experiment is repeated for various values of current and the readings are noted and tabulated.
• The radius of the circular coil is found by measuring the circumference of the coil using a thread
around the coil.
• From the values of r, n and k, the horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field is determined.
Commutator:
It is a kind of switch employed in electrical circuits, electric motors and electric

generators. It is used to reverse the direction of current in the circuit.
309

OBSERVATION
Number of turns of the coil n =
Circumference of the coil (2πr) =
Radius of the coil r =
S.No Current I Deflection in TG (degree) Mean θ I

θ1 θ2 θ3 θ4 k=
(A) (degree) tanθ
1
2
3
4
Mean
CALCULATION
µ 0nk
BH = =
2r
RESULT
The horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field is found to be ________
Note:
i)
The magnetic materials and magnets present in the vicinity of TG should be removed.
ii)
The readings from the ends of the aluminium pointer should be taken without parallax
error.
iii) The deflections of TG is restricted between 30° and 60°. It is because, the TG is most sensi
tive for deflection around 45° and is least sensitive around 0° and 90°. We know that
I = k tan θ
or dI =k sec2 θ dθ
dθ sin2θ
=
dI 2I
dθ
For given current, sensitivity maximum for sin 2θ = 1 or θ = 45°
dI
310

3. MAGNETIC FIELD ALONG THE AXIS OF A CIRCULAR
COIL-DETERMINATION OF BH
AIM
To determine the horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field using
current carrying circular coil and deflection magnetometer.
Circular coil apparatus, compass box, rheostat, battery or power

APPARATUS REQUIRED
supply, ammeter, commutator, key and connecting wires.
µ 0 n I r 2  1 
BH =
FORMULA 
32
 (Tesla)
2(r + x ) 
2 2  tan θ 
BH → Horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field (T)

where,
µo → Permeability of the free space (4π x 10-7 H m-1)
n → Number of turns included in the circuit (No unit)
I → Current flowing through the coil (A)
r → Radius of the circular coil (m)
x → Distance between center of compass box and centre of the coil (m)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
West x East
Compass
box
C
A + – ()
Bt k Rh
PROCEDURE
• The preliminary adjustments are carried out as follows.
i.
The leveling screws are adjusted so that the circular coil is vertical.
ii. The wooden bench is adjusted to be along the magnetic east-west direction i.e., along
aluminium pointer.
iii. The circular coil is rotated so that its plane is in magnetic meridian i.e., along the north-south
direction.
iv. A compass box is placed with its centre coinciding with the axis of the coil.
v. The compass box alone is rotated till the aluminium pointer reads 0° − 0°
• Electrical connections are made as shown in the circuit diagram.
• The compass box is placed along its axis, with its centre at a distance x from the centre of the coil
on one side.
311

• A suitable current (1A) is passed through the coil by adjusting rheostat so that the deflection of
the aluminium pointer lies between 30o and 60o.
• The value of the current I is noted from ammeter.
• Two readings θ1 and θ2 corresponding to two ends of the pointer are noted.
• Now the direction of the current is reversed using commutator, two more readings θ3 and θ4 are
noted.
• Now the compass box is taken to the other side and is kept at the same distance x.
• Four more readings θ5, θ6, θ7 and θ8 are taken as done before.
• These eight readings and their average value are tabulated.
• The experiment is repeated for another value of current, say 1.5 A by keeping the compass box at
the same distance x.
• The radius of the circular coil is found by measuring the circumference of the coil using a thread
around the coil.
• The number of turns n of the coil is noted.
• From the values of n, r, x and I/tanθ, the horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic field is now
found using the formula.
OBSERVATION
Number of turns in the coil n=
Circumference of the coil (2πr) =
Radius of the coil r =
To find horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field
Distance Current Deflection for eastern Deflection for

side western side I
S.No x I Mean θ
θ1 θ2 θ3 θ4 θ5 θ6 θ7 θ8 tanθ
(cm) (A)
Mean
CALCULATION
 1 
µ0 n I r 2
BH =   =
32 
2(r + x ) 
2 2  tan θ
RESULT
Horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field at a place = _________T
312

4. REFRACTIVE INDEX OF THE MATERIAL OF THE PRISM
AIM To determine the refractive index of the material of a prism using
spectrometer.
Spectrometer, prism, prism clamp, sodium vapour lamp, spirit level.

APPARATUS REQUIRED
 A + D 
sin  
 2 
µ=
FORMULA (No unit)
 A 
sin  
 2 
where, μ → Refractive index of the material of the prism (No unit)
A → Angle of the prism (degree)
D → Angle of minimum deviation (degree)
DIAGRAMS
Collimator Prism Table
Eyepiece
Slit
Telescope
Focussing knob
Leveling screw Leveling screws

of the prism
Vernier scale
table
Figure (a) Angle of the prism
C
C
2A D
T2 T1 T
T
Figure (c) Angle of

Figure (b) Angle of the prism minimum deviation
313

PROCEDURE
1) Initial adjustments of the spectrometer
� Eye-piece: The eye-piece of the telescope is adjusted so that the cross-wires are seen clearly.
� Slit: The slit of the collimator is adjusted such that it is very thin and vertical.
� Base of the spectrometer: The base of the spectrometer is adjusted to be horizontal using
leveling screws.
� Telescope: The telescope is turned towards a distant object and is adjusted till the clear
inverted image of the distant object is seen. Now the telescope is adjusted to receive parallel
rays.
� Collimator: The telescope is brought in line with the collimator. Collimator is adjusted until a
clear image of the slit is seen in the telescope. Now the collimator gives parallel rays.
� Prism table: Using a spirit level, the prism table is adjusted to be horizontal with the three
leveling screws provided in the prism table.
2) Determination of angle of the prism (A)
� The slit is illuminated by yellow light from sodium vapour lamp.
� The given equilateral prism is placed on the prism table in such a way that refracting edge of
the prism is facing the collimator.
� The light emerging from the collimator is incident on both reflecting faces of the prism and is
reflected.
� The telescope is rotated towards left to obtain reflected image of the slit from face 1 of the
prism and is fixed.
� Using tangential screws, the telescope is adjusted until the vertical cross-wire coincides with
the reflected image of the slit.
� The main scale reading and vernier coincidence are noted from both vernier scales.
� The telescope is now rotated towards right to obtain the reflected image from face 2 of the
prism. As before, the readings are taken.
� The difference between the two readings gives 2A from which the angle of the prism A is
calculated.
3) Determination of angle of minimum deviation (D)
� The prism table is rotated such that the light emerging from the collimator is incident on one
of the refracting faces of the prism, gets refracted and emerges out from the other refracting
face.
� The telescope is turned to view the refracted image.
� Looking through the telescope, the prism table is rotated in such a direction that the image
moves towards the direct ray.
314

� At one particular position, the refracted ray begins to retrace its path. The position where the
refracted image returns is the position of minimum deviation.
� The telescope is fixed in this position and is adjusted until the vertical cross-wire coincides
with the refracted image of the slit.
� The readings are taken from both vernier scales.
� The prism is now removed and the telescope is rotated to obtain the direct ray image and the
readings are taken.
� The readings are tabulated and the difference between these two readings gives the angle of
minimum deviation D.
� From the values of A and D, the refractive index of the material of the glass prism is deter-
mined.
Least count
1 MSD = 30′
Number of vernier scale divisions = 30
For spectrometer, 30 vernier scale divisions will cover 29 main scale divisions.
∴ 30 VSD = 29 MSD
Or 1 VSD = 29 / 30 MSD
Least count (LC) = 1 MSD – 1 VSD

= 1 / 30 MSD
= 1′
OBSERVATION
Table 1 To find the angle of the prism (A)
Vernier A (Degree) Vernier B (Degree)

Image
MSR VSC TR MSR VSC TR
Reflected image from face 1
Reflected image from face 2
Difference 2A
Mean 2A =
Mean A =
315

Table 2 To find the angle of minimum deviation (D)
Vernier A (Degree) Vernier B (Degree)

Image
MSR VSC TR MSR VSC TR
Refracted image
Direct image
Difference D
Mean D =
RESULT
1. Angle of the Prism (A) = ............ (degree)
2. Angle of the minimum deviation of the prism (D) =............. (degree)
3. Refractive index of the material of the Prism (μ) =............. (No unit)
Note:
i)
Once initial adjustments are done, spectrometer should not be disturbed.
ii)
Total reading TR = MSR + (VSC × LC)
Where
MSR → Main Scale Reading
VSC → Vernier Scale Coincidence
LC → Least count (= 1′)
316

5. WAVELENGTH OF THE CONSTITUENT COLOURS OF A COMPOSITE
LIGHT USING DIFFRACTION GRATING AND SPECTROMETER
AIM
To find the wavelength of the constituent colours of a composite light
using diffraction grating and spectrometer.
APPARATUS REQUIRED Spectrometer, mercury vapour lamp, diffraction grating, grating table,
and spirit level.
sin θ
λ=
FORMULA å
nN
where, λ → Wavelength of the constituent colours of a
composite light (å)
N → Number of lines per metre length of the given grating
(No unit) (the value of N for the grating is given)
n → Order of the diffraction (No unit)
θ → Angle of diffraction (degree)
DIAGRAMS
C C C
C
G
G 45°
T
T
(1) T (2) (3) (4) T
Figure (a) Normal incidence

C
R R
Y Y
G B T B G
Figure (b) Angle of diffraction

PROCEDURE
1) Initial adjustments of the spectrometer
� Eye-piece: The eye-piece of the telescope is adjusted so that the cross-wires are seen clearly.
� Slit: The slit of the collimator is adjusted such that it is very thin and vertical.
� Base of the spectrometer: The base of the spectrometer is adjusted to be horizontal using
leveling screws.
317

� Telescope: The telescope is turned towards a distant object and is adjusted till the clear image
of the distant object is seen. Now the telescope is adjusted to receive parallel rays.
� Collimator: The telescope is brought in line with the collimator. Collimator is adjusted until a
clear image of the slit is seen in the telescope. Now the collimator gives parallel rays.
� Grating table: Using a spirit level, the grating table is adjusted to be horizontal with the three
leveling screws provided in the grating table.
2) Adjustment of the grating for normal incidence
� The slit is illuminated with a composite light (white light) from mercury vapour lamp.
� The telescope is brought in line with the collimator. The vertical cross-wire is made to coin-
cide with the image of the slit (Figure (a)1).
� The vernier disc alone is rotated till the vernier scale reads 00 - 1800 and is fixed. This is the
reading for the direct ray.
� The telescope is then rotated (anti-clockwise) through an angle of 900 and fixed (Figure (a)2).
� Now the plane transmission grating is mounted on the grating table.
� The grating table alone is rotated so that the light reflected from the grating coincides with
vertical cross-wire of the telescope. The reflected image is white in colour (Figure (a)3).
� Now the vernier disc is released. The vernier disc along with grating table is rotated through
an angle of 450 in the appropriate direction such that the light from the collimator is incident
normally on the grating (Figure (a)4).
3) Determination of wave length of the constituent colours of the mercury spectrum
� The telescope is released and is brought in line with the collimator to receive central direct
image. This undispersed image is white in colour.
� The diffracted images of the slit are observed on either side of the direct image.
� The diffracted image consists of the prominent colours of mercury spectrum in increasing
order of wavelength.
� The telescope is turned to any one side (say left) of direct image to observe first order dif-
fracted image.
� The vertical cross-wire is made to coincide with the prominent spectral lines (violet, blue,
yellow and red) and the readings of both vernier scales for each case are noted.
� Now the telescope is rotated to the right side of the direct image and the first order image is
observed.
� The vertical cross-wire is made to coincide with the same prominent spectral lines and the
readings of both vernier scales for each case are again noted.
� The readings are tabulated.
� The difference between these two readings gives the value of 2θ for the particular spectral line.
� The number of lines per metre length of the given grating N is noted from the grating.
� From the values of N, n and θ, the wave length of the prominent colours of the mercury light
is determined using the given formula.
318

OBSERVATION
To find the wave length of prominent colours of the mercury spectrum
Diffracted Ray Reading (Degree)

Difference θ
Colour of Light
Left Right 2θ
(Degree)
Vernier A Vernier B Vernier A Vernier B
(Degree)
VER A
VER B
Mean
MSR
MSR
MSR
MSR
VSC
VSC
VSC
VSC
TR
TR
TR
TR
Blue
Green
Yellow
Red
CALCULATION
sin θ sin θ
(i) For blue, λ = , (ii) For green, λ =
nN nN
sin θ sin θ
(iii) For yellow, λ = , (iv) For red, λ =
nN nN
RESULT
1. The wavelength of blue line = ----------------m
2. The wavelength of green line = ------------------m
3. The wavelength of yellow line = ----------------m
4. The wavelength of red line = ----------------m
Note:
i)
Once initial adjustments are done, spectrometer should not be disturbed.
ii)
Total reading TR = MSR + (VSC × LC)
Where
MSR → Main Scale Reading
VSC → Vernier Scale Coincidence
LC → Least count (= 1′)
319

6. VOLTAGE-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS OF A PN
JUNCTION DIODE
AIM
To draw the voltage-current (V- I) characteristics of the PN junction
diode and to determine its knee voltage and forward resistance.
APPARATUS REQUIRED N junction diode (IN4007), variable DC power supply,

P
milli-ammeter, micro-ammeter, voltmeter, resistance and
connecting wires.
∆VF
FORMULA RF = (Ω)
∆I F
where, RF → Forward resistance of the diode (Ω)
∆VF ® The change in forward voltage (volt)
∆I F ® The change in forward current (mA)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
N P N P
Figure (a) PN junction diode and its symbol (Silver ring denotes the negative terminal of the diode)
470 mA 470 µA
+ – + –
+ + – +
(0-2 V) IN4007 (0-15 V) IN4007 V
V
– – + –
Figure (b) PN junction diode in forward bias Figure (c) PN junction diode in reverse bias
Precaution
Care should be taken to connect the terminals of ammeter, voltmeter, dc power supply and the
PN junction diode with right polarity.
320

PROCEDURE
i) Forward bias characteristics
• In the forward bias, the P- region of the diode is connected to the positive terminal and
N-region to the negative terminal of the DC power supply.
• The connections are given as per the circuit diagram.
•
The voltage across the diode can be varied with the help of the variable DC power supply.
•
The forward voltage (VF) across the diode is increased from 0.1 V in steps of 0.1 V up to
0.8|V and the forward current (IF) through the diode is noted from the milli-ammeter.
The readings are tabulated.
• The forward voltage VF and the forward current IF are taken as positive.
• A graph is drawn taking the forward voltage (VF) along the x-axis and the forward current
(IF) along the y-axis.
• The voltage corresponding to the dotted line in the forward characteristics gives the knee
voltage or threshold voltage or turn-on voltage of the diode.
• The slope in the linear portion of the forward characteristics is calculated. The reciprocal of
the slope gives the forward resistance of the diode.
ii) Reverse bias characteristics
• In the reverse bias, the polarity of the DC power supply is reversed so that the P- region of
the diode is connected to the negative terminal and N-region to the positive terminal of the
DC power supply
• The connections are made as given in the circuit diagram.
•
•
The reverse voltage (VR) across the diode is increased from 1 V in steps of 1 V up to 5 V and
the reverse current (IR) through the diode is noted from the micro-ammeter. The readings are
tabulated.
• The reverse voltage VR and reverse current IR are taken as negative.
•
A graph is drawn taking the reverse bias voltage (VR) along negative x-axis and the reverse
bias current (IR) along negative y-axis.
+IF (mA)
Forward
∆IF bias
∆I F
Slope =
∆VF
–VR Knee voltage +VF
∆VF 1
Forward resistance =
slope
Reverse
bias
–IR (µA)
321

OBSERVATION
Table 1 Forward bias characteristic curve
Forward bias voltage VF Forward bias current I F

S.No.
(volt) (mA)
Table 2 Reverse bias characteristic curve
Reverse bias voltage VR Reverse bias current I R

S.No.
(volt) (µA)
CALCULATION
(i) Forward resistance RF =
(ii) knee voltage =
RESULT
The V-I characteristics of the PN junction diode are studied.
i) Knee voltage of the PN junction diode =………………V
ii) Forward resistance of the diode =………………Ω
Practical Tips
• The DC power supply voltage should be increased only up to the specified range in the for-
ward (0 – 2V) and reverse (0 – 15V) directions. Forward bias offers very low resistance and
hence an external resistance of 470Ω is connected as a safety measure.
• The voltage applied beyond this limit may damage the resistance or the diode.
• In the forward bias, the current flow will be almost zero till it crosses the junction
potential or knee voltage (approximately 0.7 V). Once knee voltage is crossed, the current
increases with the applied voltage.
• The diode voltage in the forward direction should be increased in steps of 0.1 V to
a maximum of 0.8 V after the threshold voltage to calculate the forward resistance.
• The diode voltage in the reverse direction is increased in steps of 1 V to a maximum of 5 V.
The current must be measured using micro-ammeter as the strength of current in the
reverse direction is very less. This is due to the flow of the minority charge carriers called
the leakage current.
322

7. VOLTAGE-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS OF A ZENER DIODE
AIM
To draw the voltage-current (V-I) characteristic curves of a Zener
diode and to determine its knee voltage, forward resistance and
reverse breakdown voltage.
APPARATUS REQUIRED Zener diode IZ5.6V, variable dc power supply (0 – 15V),

milli ammeter, volt meter, 470 Ω resistance, and connecting wires.
∆VF
FORMULA RF = (Ω)
∆I F
where, RF → Forward resistance of the diode (Ω)
∆VF ® The change in forward voltage (volt)
∆I F ® The change in forward current (mA)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
P N
P N
Figure (a) Zener diode and its symbol (The black colour ring denotes the negative terminal of the
Zener diode)
470 mA 470 mA
+ – + –
+ + + + – +
(0-12 V) IZ5.6V V (0 - 15V) IZ5.6V V
– – – – + –
Figure (b) Zener diode in forward bias Figure (c) Zener diode in reverse bias
Precaution
Care should be taken to connect the terminals of ammeter, voltmeter, dc power supply and the
Zener diode with right polarity.
323

PROCEDURE
i) Forward bias characteristics
•
In the forward bias, the P- region of the diode is connected to the positive terminal and N-re-
gion to the negative terminal of the DC power supply.
•
The connections are given as per the circuit diagram.
•
•
The forward voltage (VF) across the diode is increased from 0.1V in steps of 0.1V up to 0.8V
and the forward current (IF) through the diode is noted from the milli-ammeter. The read-
ings are tabulated.
•
The forward voltage and the forward current are taken as positive.
•
A graph is drawn taking the forward voltage along the x-axis and the forward current along
the y-axis.
•
The voltage corresponding to the dotted line in the forward characteristics gives the knee
voltage or threshold voltage or turn-on voltage of the diode.
•
The slope in the linear portion of the forward characteristics is calculated. The reciprocal of
the slope gives the forward resistance of the diode.
ii) Reverse bias characteristics
•
In the reverse bias, the polarity of the DC power supply is reversed so that the P- region of
the diode is connected to the negative terminal and N-region to the positive terminal of the
DC power supply
•
The connections are made as given in the circuit diagram.
•
•
The reverse voltage (VR) across the diode is increased from 0.5V in steps of 0.5V up to 6V
and the reverse current (IR) through the diode is noted from the milli-ammeter. The readings
are tabulated.
•
Initially, the voltage is increased in steps of 0.5V. When the breakdown region is approxi-
mately reached, then the input voltage may be raised in steps of, say 0.1V to find the break-
down voltage.
•
The reverse voltage and reverse current are taken as negative.
•
A graph is drawn taking the reverse bias voltage along negative x-axis and the reverse bias
current along negative y-axis.
•
In the reverse bias, Zener breakdown occurs at a particular voltage called Zener voltage VZ
(~5.6 to 5.8V) and a large amount of current flows through the diode which is the character-
istics of a Zener diode.
•
The breakdown voltage of the Zener diode is determined from the graph as shown.
324

+IZ
Forward
Zener
Bias
breakdown ∆IF
Region
voltage
∆I F
-VZ Slope =
Knee voltage +VF ∆VF
-VR
∆VF 1
Forward resistance =
Zener slope
Breakdown
Region
-IR
OBSERVATION
Table 1 Forward bias characteristic curve
Forward bias voltage VF Forward bias current I F

S.No.
(volt) (mA)
Table 2 Reverse bias characteristic curve
Reverse bias voltage VR Reverse bias current I R

S.No.
(volt) (mA)
CALCULATION
(ii) knee voltage =
(iii) The breakdown voltage of the Zener diode VZ= ----V
325

RESULT
The V-I characteristics of the Zener diode are studied.
(ii) knee voltage =
(iii) The breakdown voltage of the Zener diode VZ= ----V
Practical Tips
• The DC power supply voltage should to be increased only up to the specified range in the
forward (0 – 2 V) and reverse (0 – 15 V) directions.
• The voltage applied beyond this limit may damage the resistor or the diode.
• Zener diode functions like an ordinary PN junction diode in the forward direction.
Hence the forward characteristic is the same for both PN junction diode and Zener diode.
Therefore, knee voltage and forward resistance can be determined as explained in the
previous experiment.
• Unlike ordinary PN junction diode, the reverse current in Zener diode is measured using
milli-ammeter due to the large flow of current.
326

8 CHARACTERISTICS OF A NPN-JUNCTION
TRANSISTOR IN COMMON EMITTER CONFIGURATION
AIM
To study the characteristics and to determine the current gain of a
NPN junction transistor in common emitter configuration.
APPARATUS REQUIRED ransistor - BC 548/BC107, bread board, micro ammeter,

T
milli ammeter, voltmeters, variable DC power supply and connecting
wires.
 ∆V   ∆V   ∆I 
FORMULA ri =  BE  (Ω), ro =  CE  (Ω), β=  C  (No unit)
 ∆I B VCE  ∆I C  I B  ∆I 
 BV CE
Where, ri → Input impedance (Ω)

∆VBE → The change in base-emitter voltage (volt)
∆IB → The change in base current (µA)
ro → Output impedance (Ω)
∆VCE → The change in collector-emitter voltage (volt)
∆ IC → The change in collector current (mA)
β → Current gain of the transistor (No unit)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Collector
1
2
Base
1
2
3
3 Emitter
BC 548 Transistor
Figure (a) NPN - Junction transistor and its symbol (Transistor is held with the flat surface facing us)
IC
mA
10Ω IB
+ – B C +
+
+ + µA E VCE – VCC
VBB –
– – VEE IE
Figure (b) NPN junction transistor in CE configuration
Note
A resistor is connected in series with the base to prevent excess current flowing into the base.
327

Precautions
• Care should be taken to connect the terminals of ammeters, voltmeters, and dc power
supplies with right polarity.
• The collector and emitter terminals of the transistor must not be interchanged.
PROCEDURE
� Th
e connections are given as shown in the diagram.
� The current and voltage at the input and output regions can be varied by adjusting the DC power
supply.
(i) Input characteristic curve: VBE vs IB (VCE constant)

•
The collector-emitter voltage VCE is kept constant.
• The base-emitter voltage VBE is varied in steps of 0.1V and the corresponding base current
(IB) is noted. The readings are taken till VCE reaches a constant value.
•
The same procedure is repeated for different values of VCE. The readings are tabulated.
• A graph is plotted by taking VBE along x-axis and IB along y-axis for both the values of VCE.
• The curves thus obtained are called the input characteristics of a transistor.
• The reciprocal of the slope of these curves gives the input impedance of the transistor.
VCE = 1V VCE = 2V
S. No VBE IB VBE IB
(V) (μA) (V) (μA)
IB (µA)
VCE =1V
VCE =2V
∆I B
Slope =
∆VBE
∆IB
1
Input impedance =
slope
VBE(V)
0
∆VBE
328

(ii) Output characteristic curve: VCE vs IC (IB constant)
•
The base current IB is kept constant.
• VCE is varied in steps of 1V and the corresponding collector current IC is noted. The readings
are taken till the collector current becomes almost constant.
•
Initially IB is kept at 0 mA and the corresponding collector current is noted. This current is
the reverse saturation current ICEO.
•
The experiment is repeated for various values of IB. The readings are tabulated.
•
A graph is drawn by taking VCE along x-axis and IC along y-axis for various values of IB.
•
The set of curves thus obtained is called the output characteristics of a transistor.
•
The reciprocal of the slope of the curve gives output impedance of the transistor.
IB =20 μA IB =40 μA
S. No VCE IC VCE IC
(V) (mA) (V) (mA)
IC (mA)
60 µA
∆I C
Slope =
40 µA
∆VCE
∆IC
20 µA
1
Output impedance =
slope
IB=0
VCE(V)
0 ∆VCE
(iii) Transfer characteristic curve: IB vs IC (VCE constant)

• The collector-emitter voltage VCE is kept constant.
•
The base current IB is varied in steps of 10 µA and the corresponding collector current IC is
noted.
•
This is repeated by changing the value of VCE. The readings are tabulated.
•
The transfer characteristics is a plot between the input current IB along x-axis and the output
current IC along y-axis keeping VCE constant.
•
The slope of the transfer characteristics plot gives the current gain β can be calculated.
329

VCE =1V VCE =2V
S.No IB IC IB IC
(μA) (mA) (μA) (mA)
IC (mA)
∆I C
Slope =
∆ IB
∆IC
Current gain = slope
IB (µA)
0 ∆IB
RESULT
i)
The input, output and transfer characteristics of the NPN junction in common emitter mode are
drawn.
ii) (a) Input impedance = ________Ω
(b) Output impedance = ________Ω
(c) Current gain β = ____(no unit)
330

9. VERIFICATION OF TRUTH TABLES OF LOGIC GATES
USING INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
AIM
To verify the truth tables of AND, OR, NOT, EX-OR, NAND and
NOR gates using integrated circuits
COMPONENTS REQUIRED AND gate (IC 7408), NOT gate (IC 7404), OR gate (IC 7432),
NAND gate (IC 7400), NOR gate (IC 7402), X-OR gate (IC 7486),
Power supply, Digital IC trainer kit, connecting wires.
BOOLEAN EXPRESSIONS
(i) AND gate Y = A.B (iv) Ex OR gate Y = AB + AB
(ii) OR gate Y = A+B (v) NAND gate Y = A.B
(iii) NOT gate Y = A (vi) NOR gate Y = A+B
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Pin Identification
Identification mark
9 8
12 11 10
1 2 13
3 4 14
5 6
7 Identification mark
Figure (a) Integrated circuit
Note:
The chip must be inserted in the bread board in such a way that the identification mark should
be on our left side. In this position, pin numbers are counted as marked in the picture above. Pin
identification is the same for all chips that are mentioned below.
AND Gate: OR Gate:
PIN DIAGRAM-IC 7408 SYMBOL PIN DIAGRAM-IC 7432 SYMBOL

1 1
A Y=AB A Y=A+B
IC 7408 B 3 IC 7432 B 3
1 14 VCC 2 1 14 VCC 2
2 13 2 13
TRUTH TABLE TRUTH TABLE
3 12 3 12
A B Y=AB A B Y=A+B
4 11 4 11
0 0 0 0 0 0
5 10 5 10
0 1 0 0 1 1
6 9 1 0 0 6 9 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
GND
GND
7 8 7 8
331

NOT Gate: X-OR Gate :

1
1 A Y=AB+AB
IC 7404 A
2
IC 7486 B 3
1 14 VCC
1 14 VCC 2
2 13
2 13
3 12
3 12
A B Y=AB+AB
A Y=A
4 11
4 11
0 0 0
0 1 5 10
5 10
0 1 1
1 0
6 9
6 9 1 0 1
1 1 0
GND
GND
7 8
7 8
NAND Gate: NOR Gate:

1 3
A Y=AB A Y=A+B
IC 7400 IC 7402
1 14 VCC
B 3
1 14 VCC
B 1
2 2
2 13 2 13
3 12 3 12
A B Y=AB A B Y=A+B
4 11 4 11
0 0 1 0 0 1
5 10 5 10
0 1 1 0 1 1
6 9 1 0 1 6 9 1 0 1
1 1 0 1 1 0
GND
GND
7 8 7 8
PROCEDURE
• To verify the truth table of a logic gate, the suitable IC is taken and the connections are given
using the circuit diagram.
• For all the ICs, 5V is applied to the pin 14 while the pin 7 is connected to the ground.
• The logical inputs of the truth table are applied and the corresponding output is noted.
• Similarly the output is noted for all other combinations of inputs.
• In this way, the truth table of a logic gate is verified.
RESULT
The truth table of logic gates AND, OR, NOT, Ex-OR, NAND and NOR using integrated circuits is
verified.
Precautions
(i) VCC and ground pins must not be interchanged while making connections. Otherwise the
chip will be damaged. (ii) The pin configuration for NOR gate is different from other gates
332

10. VERIFICATION OF DE MORGAN’S THEOREMS
AIM:
To verify De Morgan’s first and second theorems.
COMPONENTS REQUIRED: Power Supply (0 – 5V), IC 7400, 7408, 7432, 7404, and 7402, Digital
IC trainer kit, connecting wires.
FORMULA De Morgan’s first theorem A + B = A.B

De Morgan’s second theorem A.B = A + B
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM:
De Morgan’s first theorem
A
A
A A+B A+B A.B
=
B
B
B
De Morgan’s second theorem
A A
A AB AB A+B
=
B B
B
PROCEDURE:
i) Verification of De Morgan’s first theorem
•
The connections are made for LHS  A + B  of the theorem as shown in the circuit diagram
using appropriate ICs.
•
The output is noted and tabulated for all combinations of logical inputs of the truth table.
•
The same procedure is repeated for RHS  A.B  of the theorem.
•
From the truth table, it can be shown that A + B = A.B .
333

ii) Verification of De Morgan’s second theorem
•
The connections are made for LHS  A.B  of the theorem as shown in the circuit diagram
using appropriate ICs.
•
The output is noted and tabulated for all combinations of logical inputs of the truth table.
•
The same procedure is repeated for RHS  A + B  of the theorem.
• From the truth table, it can be shown that A.B = A + B .
OBSERVATION
De-Morgan’s first theorem
Truth Table
A B A+B A. B
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
De-Morgan’s second theorem
Truth Table
A B A.B A+ B
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
RESULT
De Morgan’s first and second theorems are verified.
Note
The pin diagram for IC 7408, IC 7432 and IC 7404 can be taken from previous experiment
Precautions
VCC and ground pins must not be interchanged while making connections. Otherwise the chip
will be damaged.
For the ICs used, 5V is applied to the pin 14 while the pin 7 is connected to the ground.
334

SUGGESTED QUESTIONS FOR THE PRACTICAL EXAMINATION
1. Determine the resistance of a given wire using metre bridge. Also find the radius of the wire
using screw gauge and hence determine the specific resistance of the material of the wire.
Take at least 4 readings.
2. Determine the value of the horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field, using tangent
galvanometer. Take at least 4 readings.
3. Determine the value of the horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field using the
magnetic field produced along the axial line of the carrying-current circular coil. Take at least 2
readings.
4. Using the spectrometer, measure the angle of the given prism and angle of minimum deviation.
Hence calculate the refractive index of the material of the prism.
5. Adjust the grating for normal incidence using the spectrometer. Determine the wavelength of
green, blue, yellow and red lines of mercury spectrum (The number of lines per metre length of
the grating can be noted from the grating).
6. Draw the V-I characteristics of PN junction diode and determine its forward resistance and
knee voltage from forward characteristics.
7. Draw the V-I characteristics of Zener diode and determine its forward resistance and knee
voltage from forward characteristics. Also find break down voltage of the Zener diode from
reverse characteristics.
8. Draw the input and transfer characteristic curves of the given NPN junction transistor in
CE mode. Find the input impedance from input characteristics and current gain from transfer
characteristics.
9. Draw the output and transfer characteristic curves of the given NPN junction transistor in
CE mode. Find the output impedance from output characteristics and current gain from
transfer characteristics.
10. Verify the truth table of logic gates AND, NOT, Ex-OR and NOR gates using integrated circuits.
11. Verify the truth table of logic gates OR, NOT, Ex-OR and NOR gates using integrated circuits.
12. Verify De Morgan’s first and second theorems.
Solved examples Competitive Exam corner

335

GLOSSARY
கைலச்ெசாற்கள்
1. Absorption spectra - உட்கெர் நி்றமபாலை

2. Armature - சுருள் த்தபாகுப்பு
3. Axial symmetry - அச்சுச் சமச்சீர்
4. Average current - சரபாசரி மின்ம்னபாட்டம்
5. Blackbody radiation - ்கரும்த்பாருள் ்கதிர்வீச்சு
6. Charge - மின்னூட்டம்
7. Continuous charge distribution - த்தபா்டர் மின்னூட்டப் ்ரெல்
8. Conventional current - மரபு மின்ம்னபாட்டம்
9. Conservation of charges - மின்னூட்டம் மபா்றபாத ்தன்லம
10. Capacitor - மின்ம்தககி
11. Corona discharge - ஒளிெட்ட மின்னி்றக்கம் அல்ைது
சி்தத்றபாளி மின்னி்றக்கம்
12. Capacitance - மின்ம்தககுததி்றன்
13. Coercivity - ்கபாந்த நீககுததி்றன்
14. Current density - மின்ம்னபாட்ட அ்டர்ததி
15. Conductivity - மின்்க்டதது எண
16. Configuration - நிலை அலமப்பு
17. Conduction current - ்க்டதது மின்ம்னபாட்டம்
18. Carbon Resistor - ்கபார்்ன் மின்்தல்ட
19. Current sensitivity - மின்ம்னபாட்ட உணர்வுநுட்ம்
20. Dielectrics - மின்்கபாப்பு்கள்
21. Displacement current - இ்டப்த்யர்ச்சி மின்ம்னபாட்டம்
22. Declination angle - ்கபாந்த ஒதுக்ககம்கபாணம்
23. Dielectric strength - மின்்கபாப்பு ெலிலம
24. Drift velocity - இழுப்பு திலசமெ்கம்
25. Dielectric constant - மின்்கபாப்பு மபாறிலி
26. Eddy current - சுழல் மின்ம்னபாட்டம்
27. Electromagnetic damping - மின்்கபாந்தத ்தணிப்பு
28. Electronic devices - மின்்னணு சபா்த்னங்்கள்
29. Electrostatics - நிலை மின்னியல்
30. Electric charge - மின்னூட்டம்,மின்து்கள்
31. Electric field - மின்புைம்
32. Electric dipole - மின்னிருமுல்ன (மின் இருமுல்ன)
33. Equivalent capacitance - த்தபாகு்யன் மின்ம்தககுததி்றன்
அல்ைது இலண மின்ம்தககுததி்றன்
336
Glossary.indd 336 28-02-2019 00:24:37

34. Electrostatic induction - நிலைமின் தூண்டல்
35. Electrostatic potential energy - நிலை மின்னழுத்த ஆற்றல்
36. Electric flux - மின்பாயம்
37. Equi-potential surface - சமமின்னழுத்தப் பரப்பு
38. Electrostatic equilibrium - நிலை மின் சமநிலை
39. Electrostatic shielding - நிலை மின் தடுப்புறை
40. Energy density - ஆற்றல் அடர்த்தி
41. Electrostatic potential - நிலை மின்னழுத்தம்
42. Electric battery - மின்கலத் த�ொகுப்பு
43. Emission spectra - வெளியிடு நிறமாலை
44. Equivalent Resistance - த�ொகுபயன் மின்தடை
45. Flux leakage - பாயக்கசிவு
46. Figure of merit of a galvanometer - கால்வானா மீட்டரின் தர ஒப்பீட்டு எண்
47. Finite value - வரம்பிற்குட்பட்ட மதிப்பு
48. Free electrons - கட்டுறா எலக்ட்ரான்கள்
49. Horizontal component of - புவி காந்தப்புலத்தின்
the Earth’s magnetic field கிடைத்தளக்கூறு
50. Hysteresis - காந்தத் தயக்கம்
51. Helical path - சுருள்பாதை
52. superposition principle - மேற்பொருந்தல் தத்துவம்
53. Insulators - காப்பான்கள்
54. Inverter - மின் புரட்டி
55. Inductance - மின்தூண்டல் எண்
56. Inductor - மின்தூண்டி
57. Inclination angle - காந்தச் சரிவுக்கோணம்
58. Intensity of magnetization - காந்தமாக்கும் செறிவு
59. Impedance - மின்மறுப்பு
60. Linear charge density - மின்னூட்ட நீள் அடர்த்தி
61. Lighthing bolt - மின்னல் வெட்டு
62. Laminated Core - மென்தகட்டு உள்ளகம்
63. Lightning conductor - மின்னல் கடத்தி
64. Mutual-induction - பரிமாற்று மின்தூண்டல்
65. Metallic conductor - உல�ோகக் கடத்தி
66. Moving Coil galvanometer - இயங்குசுருள் கால்வானா மீட்டர்
67. Magnetic meridian - காந்த துருவத்தளம்
68. Magnetic domain - காந்தப் பெருங்கூறு, காந்தக் களம்
69. Magnetic induction - காந்தத்தூண்டல்
70. Magnetising field - காந்தமாக்கு புலம்
71. Magnetic Flux - காந்தப்பாயம்
72. Magnetic susceptibility - காந்த ஏற்புத்திறன்
73. Magnetic permeability - காந்த உட்புகுதிறன்
74. Magnetic flux - காந்தப்பாயம்
75. Magnetic dipole moment - காந்த இருமுனை திருப்புத்திறன்
76. Magnetic declination - காந்த ஒதுக்கம்
GLOSSARY 337
Glossary.indd 337 28-02-2019 00:24:37

77. Magnetic dip or inclination - காந்தச் சரிவு
78. Non ohmic conductor - ஓம் விதிக்கு உட்படாத கடத்தி
79. Propagation vector - பரவும் வெக்டர்
80. Phasor - கட்ட வெக்டர்
81. Power factor - திறன் காரணி
82. Potential difference - மின்னழுத்த வேறுபாடு
83. Permittivity - விடுதிறன்
84. Quantization - குவாண்டமாக்கல் அல்லது
துளிமமாக்கல்
85. Resonance - ஒத்ததிர்வு
86. Rotor - சுழலி
87. Relative permeability - ஒப்புமை உட்புகுதிறன்
89. Resistors in series - மின்தடைகள் த�ொடரிணைப்பு
90. Retentivity - காந்தப்பற்றுத்திறன்
91. Surface charge density - மின்னூட்டப் பரப்படர்த்தி
92. Slip rings - நழுவு வளையங்கள்
93. Series and parallel - த�ொடரிணைப்பு, பக்கவினைப்பு
94. Self-induction - தன்மின்தூண்டல்
95. Successive collisions - அடுத்தடுத்த ம�ோதல்கள்
96. Stator - நிலையான பகுதி
97. Superconductors - மீக்கடத்திகள்
98. Semiconductor - குறை கடத்தி
99. Solar spectrum - சூரிய நிறமாலை
100. Shunt resistance - இணை மின்தடை
101. Solenoid - வரிச்சுருள்
102. Temperature coefficient of Resistivity - வெப்பநிலை மின்தடை எண்
103. Toroid - வட்ட வரிச்சுருள்
104. Torsional constant - முறுக்குக் க�ோணம்
105. Transverse wave - குறுக்கலை
106. Torsion balance - முறுக்குத் தராசு
107. Transformer - மின்மாற்றி
108. Thermistor - வெப்பமாறு மின்தடை
109. Voltage sensitivity - மின்னழுத்த உணர்வுநுட்பம்
110. Volume element - பருமக் கூறு
111. Wave diagram - அலை வரைபடம்
112. Wattful current - முழுத்திறன் மின்னோட்டம்
113. Wattless current - சுழித்திறன் மின்னோட்டம்
114. Winding - கம்பிச் சுற்று
338 GLOSSARY
Glossary.indd 338 28-02-2019 00:24:37

State Council of Educational Research and Training, Chennai-6
Higher Secondary Physics
List of Subject Experts in Textbook Writing
Domain Expert & Mentor Tamil Translators SCERT Subject Coordinators

Prof. Rita John Mr.E.Elangovan Mrs. P.Nantha
Professor and Head Head Master, Senior Lecturer
Department of Theoretical physics, Government Hr Sec School SCERT, Chennai – 06.
University of madras, Chennai. Ramanayakanpettai,
Mrs.D.Shanmuga Sundari
Vellore District.
Reviewers Graduate Assistant
Dr. V. Mani Dr.K.Vasudevan P.U.M.School, Melathulukkankulam
Principal Scientist F, Head (C-MET) PGT, Government ADW.Hr.Sec.School Kariyapatti Union, Virudhunagar District
Department of Electronics & Information Kalangani
Mr.G.Arulraja
Technology, Hyderabad, Namakkal District.
Graduate Assistant
Government of India. Mr.V.Balamurugan MKV Government Boys Hr.Sec.School
Prof. P. Ravindran PG Assistant in Physics, Arani, Thiruvallur District.
Department of Physics, Government Hr.Sec.School,
Kadambattur, ICT Coordinator
School of Basic and Applied Sciences,
Mr.G.Bergin
Central University of Tamil Nadu, Thiruvarur. Tiruvallur District
PG Assistant (Physics)
Dr. Rajeev shesha Joshi Mr. S. Ravishankar GBHSS, Sayalkudi,
Assistant Professor, PG Assistant in Physics, Ramanathapuram District.
School of Physical Sciences, S.R.M. Hr. Sec. School,
Central University of Karnataka. Ambattur, QR CODE Management Team
Tiruvallur District R. Jaganathan
Content Writers
SGT, PUMS - Ganesapuram,
Mr. C. Joseph Prabagar Content Readers
Polur , Thiruvannamalai.
Assistant Professor, Dr.K.Rajarajan
Associate Professor of Physics, S. Albert Valavan Babu
PG and Research Department of Physics,
R.V.Government Arts College, B.T, G.H.S, Perumal Kovil,
Loyola College (Autonomous), Chennai – 34
Paramakudi, Ramanathapuram.
Chengalpattu
Dr. S. S. Naina Mohammed
A. Devi Jesintha
Assistant Professor, Dr.M.Jeyarani Malliga
B.T, G.H.S, N.M. Kovil, Vellore.
PG and Research Department of Physics, Associate Professor of Physics,
Government Arts College Bharathi Women’s College Typist
Udumalpet, Tiruppur District. Chennai.
Mrs. D. Kavitha
Dr. P.Balamurugan Dr.K.Rajakumari SCERT
Assistant Professor, Assistant Professor of Physics,
PG and Research Department of Physics, Queen Mary’s College,
Government Arts College for Men (Autonomous) Chennai.
Nandanam, Chennai. Mrs. Bhavani
Dr.C. Ramachandra raja Assistant Professor of Physics,
Associate Professor of Physics Ethiraj College for women,
Government Arts College, Chennai.
Kumbakonam.
This book has been printed on 80 G.S.M.

Elegant Maplitho paper.
Art and Design Team Printed by offset at:
Layout & QC
M. Asker Ali
Illustration
K. Sasi Kumar
S. Durga Devi
Cover Design
Kathir Arumugam
Co-ordination
Ramesh Munisamy
PH XII Std Acknowledgement.indd 344 04-03-2019 11:09:51

NOTE
Note.indd 336 28-02-2019 13:54:28

NOTE
Note.indd 337 28-02-2019 13:54:28

NOTE
Note.indd 338 28-02-2019 13:54:28

NOTE
Note.indd 339 28-02-2019 13:54:28

NOTE
Note.indd 340 28-02-2019 13:54:28

12 Physics EM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

12 Physics EM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

12 Physics EM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the different units covered in the textbook?

What are the different units covered in the textbook?

What is the scope of learning physics according to the textbook?

What is the scope of learning physics according to the textbook?

GOVERNMENT OF TAMIL NADU

HIGHER SECONDARY SECOND YEAR

A publication under Free Textbook Programme of Government of Tamil Nadu

Department of School Education

XII_Physics_First 8 pages Higher.indd 1 04-03-2019 11:04:38

First Edition - 2019

(Published Under New Syllabus)

NOT FOR SALE

State Council of Educational

Printing & Publishing

Tamil NaduTextbook and Educational

XII_Physics_First 8 pages Higher.indd 2 04-03-2019 11:04:38

UNIT II Current Electricity 82

UNIT III Magnetism and magnetic effects of electric current 128

UNIT IV Electromagnetic Induction And Alternating Current 206

UNIT V Electromagnetic waves 283

E-book Assessment DIGI links

Let’s use the QR code in the text books ! How ?

XII_Physics_First 8 pages Higher.indd 3 04-03-2019 11:04:39

• Additional facts related to the topics covered to facilitate

• To ensure understanding, problems/illustrations are given at every stage

• Visual representation of concepts with illustrations

Summary • Recap of salient points of the lesson

Concept Map • Schematic outline of salient learning of the unit

• Evaluate students’ understanding and get them acquainted with the

Books for Reference • List of relevant books for further reading

• Solutions to exercise problems are accessible here. In addition, a few solved

Glossary • Scientific terms frequently used with their Tamil equivalents

• Sequential understanding of the stationary charges, moving charges, electric

Back Wrapper: NIKOLA TESLA a Serbian-American Engineer

XII_Physics_First 8 pages Higher.indd 4 04-03-2019 11:04:39

XII_Physics_First 8 pages Higher.indd 5

Physics Olympiad Exam Education Career

CSIR - National Eligibility Test for JRF and Lectureship

XII_Physics_First 8 pages Higher.indd 6

XII_Physics_First 8 pages Higher.indd 7

Electricity is really just organized lightning

In this unit, student is exposed to

1.1 In standard XI, we studied about the

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 1 04-03-2019 10:24:32

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 2 04-03-2019 10:24:32

Following the pioneering work of is another intrinsic and fundamental

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 3 04-03-2019 10:24:33

Solution Important aspects of Coulomb’s law

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 4 04-03-2019 10:24:35

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 5 04-03-2019 10:24:37

(a) q1 = +2μC and q2 = +3μC r12 = 

(b) q1 = +2μC and q2 = -3μC  1 

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 6 04-03-2019 10:24:39

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 7 04-03-2019 10:24:42

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 8 04-03-2019 10:24:45

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 9 04-03-2019 10:24:48

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 10 04-03-2019 10:24:50

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 11 04-03-2019 10:24:54

UNIT-1(XII-Physics_Vol-1).indd 12 04-03-2019 10:24:56

(v) In the definition of electric field, it is

Physics Olympiad Exam Education Career

CSIR - National Eligibility Test for JRF and Lectureship

Along x-direction, applying Newton’s

Φ E = ∫ E dA since cos00 = 1 (1.59) Gauss’s law states that if a charge Q is